After 1694, when Quiroga became Governor, the inhabitants of all the Mariana Islands were moved to Guam or Saipan, except for a few natives who hid out on Rota to escape resettlement. Natives of Tinian Island were finally defeated on Agrigan and moved to Saipan in 1695. A final resettlement took place when Chamorros residing on Saipan were removed to Guam in 1698, leaving only Guam and Rota occupied at the beginning of the 18th century (Underwood, 1973:17, cites Safford, 1901, 1903; Corte, 1870, Fritz 1904).

"On Guam, a native population in the throes of resettlement, having suffered a series of damaging typhoons in 1670 (Ibanez 1886), in 1671 (Corte 1870; Thompson 1946, 1947; Reed 1952) and in 1693 (Thompson 1945; Reed 1952), and engaging in a series of rebellions, would expectably be peculiarly susceptible to disease, whether of introduced or native origins. That population decline began well before the date of the first Spanish census in 1710 seems evident, but the decrease had certainly not proceeded to the level of from 100 to 400 indicated by Dampier, after his visit in 1686, and recorded by Haswell (1917), Safford (1901), and Reed (1952)" (Underwood, 1973:18).

The data in Tables 1.1 and 1.2 show the change in composition of the population on Guam and Rota combined from 1710, the first Spanish census, through 1830. Rota could not be disaggregated from Guam in these tabulations; only a few hundred persons were living on Rota during this period. Immigrants, particularly Filipinos, continued to come to the Mariana Islands throughout the period, but since the censuses seem to classify persons in different ways, the population flows cannot be traced very well. The number of pure Chamorros decreased during the 1700s, and then started a very gradual increase during the early 1800s. While the Native population declined steadily, reaching its lowest point in 1786, the "mestizo" population (the progeny of matings between natives and Spanish, Filipino, and other foreigners) grew during the period.

Table 1.1 Ethnic Distribution: 1710 to 1830

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Spanish/ Fili‑ Offcls/

Date Total Natives Mixed Mestizo pinos Troops Others

1830 6,490 2,652 1,007 5 2,612 70 143

1829 6,480 2,697 1,006 5 2,557 79 136

1828 6,448 2,792 970 2 2,466 78 140

1825 5,901 2,683 3,218 0 0 0 0

1816 5,389 2,559 0 1,109 1,484 147 90

1802 4,149 2,151 0 676 1,156 139 27

1801 4,244 2,142 0 657 1,274 140 31

1800 4,060 2,108 0 542 1,234 139 37

1799 4,001 2,074 0 591 1,164 142 30

1795 3,500 1,894 0 537 898 147 24

1793 3,584 1,766 0 961 710 147 0

1710 3,614 3,143 0 471 0 0 0

_______________________________________________________________________

Notes: Mestizos excluded from Spanish category 1828 to 1830; for 1828

to 1830 census reports, "other" includes English, French,

Mulattos, Malayans, and Pacific Islanders.

Source: Karolle 1978:46‑47 (Karolle cites Underwood 1976: 206, Carano

1964: 199, 323‑324, Statistical Abstract: Guam 1975: 2.

The percent native also fluctuated quite a bit during the period, again, attributable to the classification systems used in the various censuses (Table 1.2). The proportion of Filipinos in the population increased between 1710 and 1801, then remained at about 30 percent for several years. These Filipinos were mainly workers brought from the Philippines to serve the Spanish.

Table 1.2 Percent Ethnic Distribution: 1710 to 1830

Spanish/ Fili‑ Offcls/

Date Total Natives Mixed Mestizo pinos Troops Others

1830 100.0 40.9 15.5 .1 40.2 1.1 2.2

1829 100.0 41.6 15.5 .1 39.5 1.2 2.1

1828 100.0 43.3 15.0 .0 38.2 1.2 2.2

1825 100.0 45.5 54.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

1816 100.0 47.5 0.0 20.6 27.5 2.7 1.7

1802 100.0 51.8 0.0 16.3 27.9 3.4 .7

1801 100.0 50.5 0.0 15.5 30.0 3.3 .7

1800 100.0 51.9 0.0 13.3 30.4 3.4 .9

1799 100.0 51.8 0.0 14.8 29.1 3.5 .8

1797 100.0 37.2 0.0 20.4 0.0 4.8 37.6

1795 100.0 54.1 0.0 15.3 25.7 4.2 .7

1793 100.0 49.3 0.0 26.8 19.8 4.1 0.0

1710 100.0 87.0 0.0 13.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

________________________________________________________________________

Notes: See Notes to Table 1.1

Source: Karolle 1978:46‑47 (Karolle cites Underwood 1976: 206, Carano

1964: 199, 323‑324, Statistical Abstract: Guam 1975: 2.

Between 1800 and about 1856, the population nearly tripled, reaching more than 8,000 before a devastating smallpox epidemic in 1856 reduced the number by about half (Table 1.3). For the rest of the century the population gradually recovered, although a large part of this latter increase was due to migration of Carolinians, brought as a part of a Spanish policy of repopulating the Marianas. Also, a number of people migrated from the Philippines.

The rate of natural growth must have been very high, because epidemics continued, and yet the population increased. Safford (1901) has noted that an epidemic killed 194 persons on Guam in January, 1849. An epidemic of whooping cough reportedly resulted in the deaths of at least 200 children in 1855 (Fritz 1904). And two epidemics swept through the survivors of the smallpox epidemic in 1856 ‑ a measles epidemic in which at least 50 died in 1861, while another epidemic of whooping cough caused the deaths of 100 children in Agana, alone, in 1898 (Fritz 1904 from Underwood, 1973:23).

"Prior to the time of the decimating smallpox epidemic in 1856, immigration to the Mariana Islands had been minimal, especially in contrast to the rate of population movement into the area which took place after that date. A small Carolinian colony was established on Guam in 1816... This nucleus of Carolinian settlement was augmented somewhat following the great earthquake and tidal wave which apparently hit many Carolinian islands, as well as Guam, in 1849, leading survivors of the calamity to flee their ravaged atoll homes and seek refuge elsewhere in Micronesia...the Mariana Islands were not used extensively as a penal colony prior to the 1870s" (Underwood 1973:23).

Table 1.3 Population by Village and Region: 1831 to 1897

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Village 1897 1891 1886 1872 1871 1849 1832 1831

Guam...................8,698 8,369 8,144 6,248 6,276 7,940 6,310 6,049

North.......................6,324 6,153 5,949 4,972 5,251 6,452 5,065 4,831

Agana.....................5,198 (NA) 4,959 (NA) (NA) 5,620 4,362 4,137

Other North...............1,126 (NA) 990 (NA) (NA) 832 703 694

Anigua.................. (NA) (NA) 169 (NA) (NA) 217 246 234

Asan.................... (NA) (NA) 252 (NA) (NA) 190 155 158

Tepungan................ (NA) (NA) 234 (NA) (NA) 73 57 56

Sinajana................ (NA) (NA) 142 (NA) (NA) 250 177 172

Maria Cristina.......... (NA) (NA) 193 (NA) (NA) (NA) (NA) (NA)

Mongmong................ (NA) (NA) (NA) (NA) (NA) 102 68 74

South.......................2,374 2,243 2,195 1,276 1,025 1,488 1,245 1,218

Agat‑Sumay................1,325 1,151 1,141 641 553 287 218 222

Umatac‑Merizo............. 788 679 664 379 316 582 539 501

Umatac.................. (NA) (NA) 225 (NA) 127 224 220 206

Merizo.................. (NA) (NA) 439 (NA) 189 358 319 295

Inarajan.................. 261 413 390 256 156 346 244 246

Pago...................... (NA) (NA) (NA) (NA) (NA) 273 244 249

__________ ________________________________________________________________

Source: Underwood 1973:27; 1831 and 1832 from Safford (1901); 1849 from Cox

(1917); 1871 from Corte (1875); 1872 from Ibanez (1886); 1886 from

Noticias (1886); 1891 from Resumen (1891), 1897 Census.

The number and the variety of the immigrants increased after 1856. As many as 63 Chinese laborers arrived from Manila aboard the Spanish vessel Denia in 1858 (Safford 1901); and an additional 39 Chinese may have arrived during the 1860s (Fritz 1904). About 35 Japanese agricultural laborers arrived in the Mariana Islands in 1867.

Between 1865 and 1869, over 1,000 Carolinians came to the Mariana Islands, in part to develop the copra industry in the area. An earlier complement of some 600 Carolinians were brought to Guam on labor contracts about 1861 (Beers, 1954), and by 1868, when an additional 95 Carolinians were brought to Guam, a total of 430 Carolinians were listed as resident in the community around what is now Tamuning (Ibanez 1886).

Table 1.3 and 1.4 show village distributions during the 1800s. Since the various sources did not collect data in comparable manners, Underwood (1973) made broad categories which are repeated here.

The population of Guam increased until the 1856 epidemic, and then decreased suddenly. There were also shifts between the North and the South, with increased percentages living in the North until 1871, and then a drifting away from the North to the Southern villages. Immigration could explain some of these differences, of course, particularly the movements of the large numbers of Carolinians. The Agana area continued to have the majority of the population throughout the period.

Table 1.4. Percent Population by Village and Region: 1831 to 1897

Village 1897 1891 1886 1872 1871 1849 1832 1831

Guam.................. 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

North...................... 72.7 73.3 73.0 79.6 83.7 81.3 80.3 79.9

Agana.................... 59.8 NA 60.9 NA NA 70.8 69.1 68.4

Other North.............. 12.9 NA 12.2 NA NA 10.5 11.1 11.5

Anigua................. NA NA 2.1 NA NA 2.7 3.9 3.9

Asan................... NA NA 3.1 NA NA 2.4 2.5 2.6

Tepungan............... NA NA 2.9 NA NA .9 .9 .9

Sinajana............... NA NA 1.7 NA NA 3.1 2.8 2.8

Maria Cristina......... NA NA 2.4 NA NA NA NA NA

Mongmong............... 1.2 1.1 1.3 NA NA 1.3 1.1 1.2

South...................... 27.3 26.7 27.0 20.4 16.3 18.7 19.7 20.1

Agat‑Sumay............... 15.2 13.7 14.0 10.3 8.8 3.6 3.5 3.7

Umatac‑Merizo............ 9.1 8.1 8.2 6.1 5.0 7.3 8.5 8.3

Umatac................. NA NA 2.8 NA 2.0 2.8 3.5 3.4

Merizo................. NA NA 5.4 NA 3.0 4.5 5.1 4.9

Inarajan................. 3.0 4.9 4.8 4.1 3.9 4.4 3.9 4.1

Pago..................... NA NA NA NA NA 3.4 3.9 4.1

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: Underwood 1973: 27; 1831 and 1832 from Safford (1901); 1849 from

Cox (1917); 1871 from Corte (1875); 1872 from Ibanez (1886);

1886 from Noticias (1886); 1891 from Resumen (1891), 1897 Census

The first full census which was tabulated by age and sex as well as some other characteristics was taken in 1897 (Table 1.5 and Figure 1.1). The results of the census show a slight surplus of females, and a generally youthful population; the median age for Chamorros on Guam was 21.0 years, with 19.9 for males and 21.9 for females. In her work, Underwood (1987) compared the census results with other data she collected, and adjusted the 1897 census counts to make them more accurate. Her adjusted census distributions are also shown in Table 1.5.

Table 1.5. Population by Age and Sex: 1897

Spanish Census Adjusted by Use of Vital Records

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age Group Total Males Females Total Males Females

Total.. 8,698 4,137 4,561 9,353 4,409 4,944

Perc. 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

0 to 4 14.8 15.6 14.0 15.2 15.9 14.5

5 to 9 12.8 14.2 11.5 12.8 14.1 11.6

10 to 14 10.3 10.6 10.0 10.3 10.6 10.1

15 to 19 10.0 9.8 10.1 9.8 9.6 10.1

20 to 24 10.8 10.3 11.2 10.8 10.5 11.0

25 to 29 9.6 9.2 10.0 9.6 9.3 9.9

30 to 34 7.6 7.4 7.8 7.5 7.3 7.6

35 to 39 4.9 5.2 4.6 5.0 4.9 5.0

40 to 44 3.4 3.2 3.5 3.4 3.2 3.5

45 to 49 3.6 3.0 4.0 3.7 3.1 4.1

50 to 54 3.6 2.9 4.3 3.6 3.1 4.1

55 to 59 3.0 2.5 3.4 3.0 2.7 3.3

60 to 64 2.8 2.8 2.7 2.7 2.6 2.7

65 to 69 1.6 1.7 1.4 1.6 1.8 1.4

70 to 74 .8 .9 .8 .9 1.0 .8

75 + .4 .5 .4 .4 .4 .4

Unknown .1 .1 .1 ... ... ...

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: Underwood, 1987: 14‑15

Figure 1.1 Age and Sex Distribution: 1897

The census results for 1897 by village show that the South was more youthful than the North (Table 1.6). The median ages of the Southern villages were anywhere from 1 to 2 years lower than those for the Northern villages: 18.6 for Merizo, 19.1 for Agat, and 19.9 for Inarajan, compared to 21.7 for Agana and 21.9 for Agana‑Adjacent.

Table 1.6. Population of Villages by Age: 1897

Age Group Total Agana Agana‑Adj Agat Merizo Inarajan

Total. 8,698 5,198 1,126 1,325 788 261

Perc. 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

0 to 4 14.8 13.7 13.5 17.4 18.3 18.4

5 to 9 12.8 12.7 11.9 14.5 11.2 13.8

10 to 14 10.3 10.0 10.9 10.3 11.8 8.8

15 to 19 10.0 9.9 9.6 9.4 11.9 9.2

20 to 24 10.8 10.8 10.9 9.8 12.1 11.1

25 to 29 9.6 9.0 10.1 11.4 9.5 10.3

30 to 34 7.6 7.8 7.5 7.8 6.5 6.5

35 to 39 4.9 5.0 5.3 4.5 4.6 4.2

40 to 44 3.4 3.8 3.1 2.5 2.8 3.1

45 to 49 3.6 4.0 4.3 2.4 1.3 3.8

50 to 54 3.6 3.9 5.0 2.8 2.4 1.5

55 to 59 3.0 3.2 2.0 2.7 2.7 5.0

60 to 64 2.8 2.9 2.8 2.0 3.8 1.1

65 to 69 1.6 1.6 2.2 1.3 .8 .8

70 to 74 .8 1.1 .4 .8 .3 .4

75 + .4 .5 .4 .4 .1 .8

Unknown .1 .1 .1 0.0 .1 1.1

Median 21.0 21.7 21.9 19.1 18.6 19.9

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: Underwood, 1973: 28

There were 91 males for every 100 females on Guam in 1897 (Table 1.7). Except for the youngest ages, and the 35 to 39 years olds, there tended to be more females than males at each of the age groups. The other important exception occurred for persons 65 years and over in which the males predominated, especially in the village of Merizo; it is unclear whether this is a case of age‑misreporting or real.

Table 1.7. Males per 100 Females by Age: 1897

Age Group Total Agana Agana‑Adj Agat Merizo Inarajan

Total 90.7 91.6 85.8 90.9 89.9 96.2

0 to 4 100.8 108.8 108.2 90.9 80.0 84.6

5 to 9 111.6 111.9 112.7 111.0 109.5 111.8

10 to 14 95.9 108.0 61.8 78.9 111.4 109.1

15 to 19 87.9 91.4 96.4 89.4 56.7 118.2

20 to 24 83.2 75.3 86.4 97.0 115.9 81.2

25 to 29 84.0 78.0 90.0 101.3 70.5 125.0

30 to 34 86.5 86.2 73.5 63.5 168.4 183.3

35 to 39 100.9 103.1 114.3 96.7 80.0 83.3

40 to 44 84.3 97.0 59.1 57.1 100.0 33.3

45 to 49 68.9 63.3 65.5 113.3 100.0 66.7

50 to 54 60.1 64.8 51.4 42.3 90.0 33.3

55 to 59 67.7 63.7 64.3 100.0 61.5 62.5

60 to 64 94.4 105.5 93.8 92.9 50.0 200.0

65 to 69 104.5 107.3 66.7 112.5 500.0 100.0

70 to 74 108.6 96.4 100.0 266.7 100.0 0.0

75 + 116.7 80.0 300.0 400.0 ... 100.0

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: Underwood, 1973: 28

AMERICAN PERIOD

At the end of the Spanish‑American War, Guam became a territory of the United States. Censuses were taken by the Naval governor in 1901 and 1910. Guam was not included in the decennial census until 1920.

In working with her reconstructed data set, Underwood produced an estimated census for 1918, just prior to the flu epidemic which killed many people on Guam (Table 1.8 and Figure 1.2). By 1918, according to her figures, there were still more females than males, but the population had grown considerably, partly because of increased medical attention provided by the U.S. Naval Administration. The population remained youthful, with the median age for the total being 18.5 years: 17.4 years for males and 19.4 years for females.

Table 1.8. Estimated Population by Age and Sex: 1918

Numbers Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age Group Total Males Females Total Males Females

Total........... 15,000 7,134 7,866 100.0 100.0 100.0

Under 5 years........ 2,216 1,112 1,104 14.8 15.6 14.0

5 to 9 years......... 1,915 1,010 905 12.8 14.2 11.5

10 to 14 years....... 1,547 757 790 10.3 10.6 10.0

15 to 19 years....... 1,494 699 795 10.0 9.8 10.1

20 to 24 years....... 1,618 735 883 10.8 10.3 11.2

25 to 29 years....... 1,444 659 785 9.6 9.2 10.0

30 to 34 years....... 1,141 529 612 7.6 7.4 7.8

35 to 39 years....... 735 369 366 4.9 5.2 4.7

40 to 44 years....... 506 231 275 3.4 3.2 3.5

45 to 49 years....... 533 218 315 3.6 3.1 4.0

50 to 54 years....... 546 205 341 3.6 2.9 4.3

55 to 59 years....... 448 181 267 3.0 2.5 3.4

60 to 64 years....... 416 202 214 2.8 2.8 2.7

65 to 69 years....... 233 119 114 1.6 1.7 1.4

70 to 74 years....... 127 66 61 .8 .9 .8

75 years and over.... 67 36 31 .4 .5 .4

Unknown.............. 14 6 8 .1 .1 .1

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: Underwood 1983: 3

Figure 1.2 Age and Sex Distribution: 1918

The population increased from under 10,000 when the U.S. Naval Administration began, to almost 15,000 in 1920. Guam has been included in each of the succeeding decennial censuses after 1920, although with a different questionnaire from that used Stateside, and with different processing.

The percentage of natives (meaning Chamorro) decreased from almost 100 percent to 91 percent in 1930, partly because of the varying numbers of naval personnel on island. There were very few other immigrants (unless these were included in the "native" totals). As we will see in later chapters, the proportions changed drastically after World War II when Guam suddenly became strategically important.

Table 1.9. Population by Ethnicity: 1901 to 1940

Ethnicity 1940 1935 1930 1925 1920 1915 1910 1901

Total......... 23,067 20,899 19,139 16,648 14,724 13,689 11,953 9,676

Percent..... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Natives............ 93.2 93.1 91.1 91.6 93.0 94.7 97.2 99.5

Non‑natives........ 6.8 6.9 8.9 8.4 7.0 5.3 2.8 0.5

Naval personnel.. 3.4 3.3 5.0 5.2 3.2 (NA) 1.0 0.0

Others........... 3.4 3.6 3.9 3.3 3.7 (NA) 1.8 0.5

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: Thompson 1941:32; Thompson cites Annual Reports of the Governor

of Guam.

THE DECENNIAL CENSUSES ‑ 1920 TO 1970

Beginning in 1920, Guam was included in the population part of the Decennial Census and in 1960 for the Housing census. In the later chapters we will include comparable data from those censuses whenever appropriate in an effort to show population and housing trends over time.

THE 1980 DECENNIAL CENSUS OF POPULATION AND HOUSING

The 1980 decennial census was conducted in conjunction with the 1980 census of the United States. The questionnaire was developed at the Census Bureau but was reviewed by participants from the Pacific Islands areas in May, 1979, at a Pacific‑areas conference in Honolulu.

The questionnaire was similar to that used in the States, and was modified to account for different conditions on Guam. Unlike in the States, all housing data was collected for all housing units, and all persons responded to all questions. Also, the census was collected through direct interview. Enumerators visited and listed every housing unit, asking the questions as worded in the questionnaire (or translating into the native language, if necessary), and recording the answers. A single questionnaire was used, which contained all the questions asked of every person and household.

Special questionnaires were used for the enumeration of persons in group quarters such as the hospital, the prison, dormitories at the University of Guam, etc. These forms contained the same population questions that appeared on the regular questionnaire but did not include any housing questions.

Responses were determined by the questionnaire and the instructions given to the enumerator; these instructions had been adapted from instructions used Stateside, but were modified to account for the differences on Guam from those found in the States. The definitions and explanations for each subject are included in the discussions of these subjects in the later chapters of this monograph, and are drawn largely from various technical materials and procedures used in the data collection.

Facsimiles of the questionnaire pages containing the population and housing questions used to produce this report are presented in Appendix A.

GENERAL ENUMERATION PROCEDURES

Usual Place of Residence. In accordance with census practice, each person enumerated in the 1980 census was counted as an inhabitant of his or her "usual place of residence", which was generally construed to mean the place where the person lived and slept most of the time. This place was not necessarily the same as the person's legal residence or voting residence. In the vast majority of cases, however, the use of these different bases of classification would produce substantially the same statistics, although there might be appreciable differences for a few areas.

The implementation of this practice resulted in the establishment of residence rules for certain categories of persons whose usual place of residence was not immediately apparent. Therefore, persons were not always counted as residents of the place where they happened to be staying on Census Day. Persons without a usual place of residence, or persons with no one at their usual place of residence to report them to a census taker, however, were counted where they happened to be staying.

U.S. Armed Forces. Members of the United States Armed Forces living on a military installation were counted, as in previous censuses, as residents of the area in which the installation was located; members of the U.S. Armed Forces not living on a military installation were counted as residents of the areas in which they were living. Persons in families with U.S. Armed Forces personnel were counted where they were living on Census Day (i.e., the military installation or "off base", as the case might be).

Each U.S. Navy ship was attributed to the geographic area that the Department of the Navy designated as its homeport.

Crews of Merchant Vessels were enumerated at the port where they were berthed (if they were berthed), excluding those not flying a U.S. flag.

Persons away at school, if college students, were counted as residents of the area in which they were living while attending college. However, children in boarding schools below the college level were counted at their parental home.

Persons at institutions were counted as residents of the area where the institution was located. Patients in short‑term wards of general hospitals were counted at their usual place of residence; if they had no usual place of residence or there was no one at their usual place of residence to report them, they were counted at the hospital.

Persons away from their residence on Census Day at hotels, motels, etc., on the night of March 31, 1980, having their usual home on Guam and who indicated that no one was at home to report them in the census would be enumerated as residents of the hotel, motel, etc. Information on persons away from their usual place of residence who indicated that someone was at home to report them was obtained from other members of their families, resident managers, neighbors, etc. If an entire household was away during the whole period of the enumeration, information on that household was obtained from neighbors.

Residents Abroad. Residents who were abroad for an extended period (in the U.S. Armed Forces, working at civilian jobs, studying at universities outside Guam, etc.) were not included in the population of Guam. On the other hand, residents who were temporarily abroad on vacations, business trips, and the like, were counted at their usual residence on Guam.

Persons from Other Areas having their usual residence (legally or illegally) on Guam on Census Day, including those working here and those attending school (but not living at a chancellery or consulate), were included in the enumeration, as were members of their families with them, regardless of citizenship. However, persons from other areas, temporarily visiting or traveling on Guam, were not enumerated in the 1980 census.

DATA COLLECTION PROCEDURES

The 1980 Census of Guam was conducted through direct interview. Beginning on Census Day, April 1, 1980, enumerators visited and listed every household asking the questions as worded on the questionnaire, and recording the answers. A single questionnaire was used, which contained all the questions asked of every person and household.

Special questionnaires were used for the enumeration of persons in group quarters such as colleges and universities, hospitals, and prisons. These forms contained the same population questions that appeared on the regular questionnaire but did not include any housing questions.

PROCESSING PROCEDURES

The 1980 census questionnaires were processed in a manner similar to that for the 1970 census. They were designed to be processed electronically by the Film Optical Sensing Device for Input into Computer (FOSDIC). For most items on the questionnaire, the information obtained by the enumerator was recorded by marking the answers in the predesignated positions that would be "read" by FOSDIC from a microfilm copy of the questionnaire and transferred onto computer tape with no intervening manual processing. The computer tape excluded information on individual names and addresses.

The tape containing the information from the questionnaires was processed on the Census Bureau's computers through a number of editing and tabulating steps. Among the products of this operation were computer tapes from which the tables in the reports were prepared on phototypesetting equipment at the Government Printing Office.

SOURCES OF ERROR

Since the 1980 population and housing data for Guam were tabulated from entries for all persons and housing units on all questionnaires, these data were not subject to sampling error. In any large‑scale statistical operation such as a decennial census, however, human and mechanical errors occur. These errors are commonly referred to as nonsampling errors. Such errors include failure to enumerate every housing unit or person in the population, not obtaining all required information from respondents, obtaining incorrect or inconsistent information, and recording information incorrectly. Errors can also occur during the field review of the enumerator's work, the clerical handling of the census questionnaires, or the electronic processing of the questionnaires. Quality control and review measures were used throughout the data collection and processing phases of the 1980 census to minimize undercoverage of the population and housing units and to keep errors at a minimum.

EDITING OF UNACCEPTABLE DATA

The objective of the processing operation was to produce a set of statistics that described the population and housing as accurately and clearly as possible.

In the field, questionnaires were reviewed for omissions and certain inconsistencies by a census clerk or an enumerator and, if necessary, a followup was made to obtain missing information. In addition, a similar review of questionnaires was done in the central processing office. As a rule, however, editing was performed by hand only when it could not be done effectively by machine.

There are two means by which incomplete or inconsistent data on the questionnaires were corrected during the editing process: allocation and substitution. Allocations or assignments of acceptable codes in place of unacceptable entries, were needed most often when there was no entry for a given item or when the information reported for a person on that item was inconsistent with other information for the person. As in previous censuses, the general procedure for changing unacceptable entries was to assign an entry for a person that was consistent with entries for other persons with similar characteristics. The assignment of acceptable codes in place of blanks or unacceptable entries enhanced the usefulness of the data. The allocation technique for unknown age illustrates the process:

1. The computer stored ages of persons by selected characteristics, including sex, relationship, marital status, and characteristics of other household members.

2. Each stored age was retained in the computer only until a succeeding person having the same set of characteristics and having age reported was processed through the computer during the electronic edit operation. Then the reported age entry of the succeeding person was stored in place of the one previously stored.

3. When the age of the person was not reported, or the entry was unacceptable, the age assigned to this person was that which was stored for the last person who otherwise had the same set of characteristics.

The 1980 census data on the economic questions such as industry, occupation, class of worker, work experience, and income were processed using an allocation system which assigned values to missing entries in these questions, as necessary, from a single respondent with similar socioeconomic characteristics.

Three population and two housing reports were published after the 1980 census. These were:

PC80‑1‑A54 Number of Inhabitants

PC80‑1‑B54 General Population Characteristics

PC80‑1‑C/D54 Detailed Social and Economic Characteristics

HC80‑1‑A54 General Housing Characteristics

HC80‑1‑B54 Detailed Housing Characteristics

In addition to the printed reports, results of the 1980 census also were provided on computer tape in the form of summary tape files (STFs). These data products were designed to provide statistics with greater subject and geographic detail than was feasible or desirable to provide in printed reports. The STF data were made available at nominal cost. Because of likelihood of incompatible computer systems, the STF data were also provided on microfiche. Recently, the data have also been provided on floppy diskettes which can be read on IBM‑PC compatible equipment.

STF 1 provides population and housing data summarized for Guam as a whole, for election districts, for census designated places (villages), and for enumeration districts. The data include those shown in PC80‑1‑A54, PC80‑1‑B54, and HC80‑1‑A54. STF 3 contains data on various population and housing subjects such as education, employment, and income. The areas covered are the same as STF 1.

GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION

The geographic distribution of Guam's inhabitants has been transformed since pre‑contact times, when the Chamorro population lived in small hamlets located both along the coast and in the interior. Early historical accounts relate that along the coast, these hamlets consisted of approximately 50 to 150 huts, while the interior hamlets were smaller, of from 6 to 20 huts (Carano and Sanchez, 1964). By 1681, the Spanish‑Chamorro wars had resulted in the destruction of the smaller villages and the forced relocation of the native people into a few large villages, where the Spanish could control the population.

The Spanish established the government in Agana because of its long history as the political and cultural center of Guam. In order to facilitate the affairs of government outside Agana, Spanish authorities divided Guam into municipalities. Each municipality consisted of several villages or pueblos and was under the charge of a native magistrate called a "gobernadorcillo" ("little governor"). This system of municipal government continued under the American authorities after 1898. The gobernadorcillo was renamed as commissioner, and a deputy commissioner position was instituted to assist the commissioner.

Municipalities thus became the primary divisions of Guam for census reporting. By the 1920 Census, Guam had 8 separate municipalities, as shown in Figure 1.3. These municipalities were Agana, Asan, Piti, Sumay, Yona, Agat, Inarajan and Merizo. U.S. naval station personnel were not counted as residents of Guam, but were included in the continental United States. The 1920 census report shows population data for each municipality and for rural sections outside of Agana City.

The reporting of 1930 census data was similar to that of 1920 except that, in 1930, persons on naval reservations, including U.S. ships stationed on Guam, were counted as residents of Guam. These results were not included in the population of any municipality, but were compiled separately. A greater portion of this naval population should, according to the 1930 census report, have been assigned to the city of Agana, but the exact location of these reservations could not be determined from the information given by the enumerators on the census schedules.

Substantial reorganization of the municipalities occurred in 1931 in preparation for Guam's first elected Congress and first elected commissioner system. Executive Order 53 set forth the divisions of the old municipality of Agana into the municipalities of Agana, Barrigada, Dededo, and Yigo, and further subdivided the municipality of Barrigada into Barrigada and Sinajana districts, and Dededo into Dededo and Machanao districts. In addition, Merizo was subdivided into Merizo and Umatac districts, and Inarajan was subdivided into Inarajan and Talofofo districts. Reorganization thus created 7 new municipalities and districts for a total of 15 (See Figure 1.4).

The Second Guam Congress was the first elected Congress in the Territory, with the population counts of the 1930 census used for apportionment.

The 1940 census presented total counts for all 15 municipalities and districts, as well as for over 100 towns, barrios and districts within the municipalities. Military personnel were included within the municipality, district, or town where the military facility was located, and U.S. naval ships were listed separately as a portion of Sumay. During World War II, most of the towns and cities (including Agana city) were totally destroyed or severely damaged. In the reconstruction process, many of the communities were relocated and the division of municipalities into barrios was abandoned. There was also some reorganization of the municipalities of Agana and Sinajana in 1947, as part of Agana was annexed to Sinajana (Figure 1.5).

The 1950 census reported data for the 15 municipalities existing in 1940 and for 20 villages or cities existing as minor subdivisions within the municipalities. For the first time, census reports made no mention of the presence of military quarters, even though Guam's population had more than doubled between 1940 and 1950, almost exclusively as the result of post‑war military activities.

One of the provisions of the Organic Act of 1950 caused the organization, authority, and responsibilities of the commissioner system to continue to follow the pattern outlined in Guam Congress Bill No. 16, passed in 1948. However, between 1950 and 1960, Guam's municipalities again underwent extensive reorganization. A local law was enacted to establish the election district boundaries for the purpose of electing the district commissioners, creating 6 new districts and eliminating 2.

Figure 1.3 Guam, 1920 and 1930

Figure 1.4 Guam 1940

Figure 1.5 Guam, 1950

Figure 1.6 Guam, 1960

Figure 1.7 Guam, 1970

Figure 1.8 Guam, 1980

The 1960 census results were for 19 election districts (Figure 1.6). These districts included the 6 newly created municipalities of Tamuning, Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite, Mangilao, Chalan Pago‑Ordot, Agana Heights, and Santa Rita. Because Sumay and Machanao were claimed by the military and ceased to require elected representation by commissioner, they were incorporated into the boundaries of other districts. Sumay was annexed into Santa Rita, and Machanao into Dededo and Yigo. 1970 and 1980 election district boundaries remained the same as the boundaries used in 1960, so census data for those three periods are comparable (Figures 1.7 and 1.8).

Beginning in 1960, the Census Bureau began using a new term, that of "Place", and later "Census Designated Place" to define generally closely settled centers of population without corporate limits. A Place with a population of 2,500 or more is considered urban, and the remaining areas are rural. Places in 1960, 1970, and 1980 are comparable; in 1980, new Places were added in addition to the ones used previously. Although the definition of Place remained the same, the interpretation and application of that definition allowed the addition of military housing areas in 1980 that were not allowed in 1970. Therefore, the expansion of urban areas between 1970 and 1980 was partially the result of including military housing in 1980.

POPULATION DISTRIBUTION BY BROAD GEOGRAPHIC AREA

Although election district boundaries have been altered considerably between 1920 to 1980, the broad areas of Northern, Central, and Southern Guam have remained intact (See Figures 1.3 through 1.8). For the purpose of data analysis, comparability by geographic area over time can be maintained between 1940 and 1980 within these three broad areas. The major disadvantage to this system is the inclusion in the South of the district of Santa Rita, which contains a single large government quarters area that distorts some of the data. Beginning with 1960, the North consisted of Dededo, Tamuning and Yigo. Central Guam consisted of Agana, Agana Heights, Asan, Barrigada, Chalan Pago/Ordot, Mangilao, Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite, Piti and Sinajana. The South was composed of Agat, Inarajan, Merizo, Santa Rita, Talofofo, Umatac and Yona.

Prior to World War II, 63 percent of the population was concentrated in Central Guam, primarily in the capital city of Agana; 29 percent lived in the South; and only 8 percent resided in the North. While population increases occurred in each of the three regions between 1940 and 1980, the vast majority of the growth took place in the Northern portion of the island (Table 1.10)

Table 1.10 Distribution by Region on Guam: 1940 to 1980

Numbers Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Region 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940

Total.. 105,979 84,996 67,044 59,498 22,290 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

North.... 47,583 32,540 18,752 16,147 1,795 44.9 38.3 28.0 27.1 8.1

Central.. 34,526 31,266 25,479 26,495 13,946 32.6 36.8 38.0 44.5 62.6

South.... 23,870 21,190 22,813 16,856 6,549 22.5 24.9 34.0 28.3 29.4

___________________________________________________________________________

Note: See text for inclusion of election districts in regions.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

The proportion of persons living in the North increased steadily from 8 percent in 1940 to 45 percent in 1980, with the Northern population growing by 45,788 persons over the 40 year period. Central Guam showed substantial and steady population growth during the same period, increasing by 20,580 persons; however, the proportion of the population living there declined from 63 percent to 33 percent. In contrast, Guam's Southern area did not show steady growth during the same period. The population of the South grew by 16,264 persons between 1940 and 1960, declined by 1,623 persons during the 1960s, and recovered 2,680 persons during the 1970s. By 1980, the proportion of persons residing in the South dropped to 23 percent.

One of the causes for these changes in population distribution was the occupation of the island by the Japanese armed forces during World War II and the continued presence of the United States military after Guam's recapture. World War II had a profound impact on the relocation of the civilian population out of established communities and into areas that were either more convenient to the occupying forces or that were safer for the inhabitants. War activities caused certain villages to cease to be inhabited by civilians, including most of Machanao in the North and Sumay in the South. The village of Agana in Central Guam became nearly deserted.

Another cause for the changes in population distribution was Guam's increased strategic value to the United States during and following World War II. In 1944, Guam became the only location in the Western Pacific large enough to hold major U.S. military bases and to be completely under American control when the Philippines gained independence from the United States. As a result, the Navy and Air Force built large military installations on Guam, seizing over one‑third of the island's land and water in the process.

Military personnel and their dependents were concentrated into densely settled areas on and near bases, which were primarily in the Northern and Central portions of the island, without regard to the location of established local communities. Because base areas and government quarters areas targeted by the military government for the development of infrastructure, and also because civil service jobs on bases were available to the civilian community, the Northern and Central portions of the island attracted migration by the resident population and new residents.

The location of military facilities was determined largely by Guam's geography. The flat limestone plateau of the North became the location of Andersen Air Force Base; Guam's natural deep water port became the center of regional Naval activities; and an airport site in Central Guam already under construction by the Japanese became the Naval Air Station and the civilian air terminal. Southern Guam, with its steep central spine of mountains, was unsuitable for most military activities other than a Naval magazine and watershed. These remain vast, but underdeveloped, holdings.

GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION BY ELECTION DISTRICT

There were considerable variations in population growth between the individual election districts of Guam within the regions. Although the total population of the island increased by almost 25 percent between 1970 and 1980, 3 districts more than doubled in population, while several others lost population. Table 1.11 shows growth of each election district from 1960 to 1980. As mentioned earlier, major changes in election district boundaries between 1930 and 1940 and between 1950 and 1960 make district analysis for those decades impossible.

Table 1.11 Population by Region and Election District: 1960 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Number Percent Percent Change

Region ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Election District 1980 1970 1960 1980 1970 1960 70‑80 60‑80

Total..........105,979 84,996 67,044 100.0 100.0 100.0 24.7 58.1

North............... 47,583 32,540 18,752 44.9 38.3 28.0 46.2 153.7

Dededo............ 23,644 10,780 5,126 22.3 12.7 7.6 119.3 361.3

Tamuning.......... 13,580 10,218 5,944 12.8 12.0 8.9 32.9 128.5

Yigo.............. 10,359 11,542 7,682 9.8 13.6 11.5 ‑10.2 34.8

Central............. 34,526 31,266 25,479 32.6 36.8 38.0 10.4 35.5

Agana............. 896 2,119 1,642 .8 2.5 2.4 ‑57.7 ‑45.4

Agana Heights..... 3,284 3,156 3,210 3.1 3.7 4.8 4.1 2.3

Asan.............. 2,034 2,629 3,053 1.9 3.1 4.6 ‑22.6 ‑33.4

Barrigada......... 7,756 6,356 5,430 7.3 7.5 8.1 22.0 42.8

Chalan Pago/Ordot. 3,120 2,931 1,835 2.9 3.4 2.7 6.4 70.0

Mangilao.......... 6,840 3,228 1,965 6.5 3.8 2.9 111.9 248.1

Mong‑Toto‑Maite... 5,245 6,057 3,015 4.9 7.1 4.5 ‑13.4 74.0

Piti.............. 2,866 1,284 1,467 2.7 1.5 2.2 123.2 95.4

Sinajana.......... 2,485 3,506 3,862 2.3 4.1 5.8 ‑29.1 ‑35.7

South............... 23,870 21,190 22,813 22.5 24.9 34.0 12.6 4.6

Agat.............. 3,999 4,308 3,107 3.8 5.1 4.6 ‑7.2 28.7

Inarajan.......... 2,059 1,897 1,730 1.9 2.2 2.6 8.5 19.0

Merizo............ 1,663 1,529 1,398 1.6 1.8 2.1 8.8 19.0

Santa Rita....... 9,183 8,109 12,126 8.7 9.5 18.1 13.2 ‑24.3

Talofofo.......... 2,006 1,935 1,352 1.9 2.3 2.0 3.7 48.4

Umatac............ 732 813 744 .7 1.0 1.1 ‑10.0 ‑1.6

Yona.............. 4,228 2,599 2,356 4.0 3.1 3.5 62.7 79.5

__________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

The villages with the greatest increases in population between 1970 and 1980 were Dededo, Piti, and Mangilao, and those showing decreases were Yigo, Agana, Asan, Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite, Sinajana, Agat, and Umatac. There were many factors influencing these variations in population growth, although war and post‑war activities were especially significant.

The village of Agana has traditionally been Guam's most important community, possessing a rich history dating back to the pre‑contact era (Sanchez, 1979:9). Its chiefs were the most respected in the Marianas in pre‑contact Guam. The Spanish recognized this and established the seat of government at Agana. The U.S. Navy continued to use Agana as its administrative center when it began its administration of the island.

At the beginning of American administration of Guam, Agana's boundaries actually encompassed all of the Northern and most of the Central portions of Guam. By 1930, Agana contained 11,042 persons. The population was so concentrated in one area that urban Agana contained 8,690 persons in 1930, nearly half the island's population. Agana city's population continued to grow until 1940, when it had a population of 10,004 (Table 1.12)

Table 1.12 Population of Agana City: 1920 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Percent

Number of Total

Year Number Change Population

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

1980..... 896 ‑1223 .8

1970..... 2119 477 2.5

1960..... 1642 842 2.5

1950..... 800 ‑9204 1.3

1940..... 10004 1314 44.9

1930..... 8690 1258 47.0

1920..... 7432 ... 56.0

________________________________________________________

Note: The boundaries of Agana City have remained

constant between 1920 and 1980.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

The Japanese occupied Guam from December 10, 1941 until July 1944. Agana was used as their seat of government and their military headquarters; however, forced relocation of the population left the city virtually deserted, with no more than 200 families. The recapture of the island in 1944 was preceded by American bombardment from shipboard artillery for 13 consecutive days prior to Guam's recapture, totally destroying the city.

After Guam's recapture, U.S. military and civilian authorities decided to reestablish the government in Agana. Because of the massive destruction of the city during Guam's recapture, the military government literally bulldozed the remains of the city into the sea, creating a new peninsula of land, and obliterating all remaining streets and property boundary markers.

A new system of streets was laid out in Agana, using a different method of surveying from the Spanish system previously used. Later, in the 1950's, the Government of Guam superimposed still another survey methodology on top of the other two. This resulted in a "fractional lot" problem in Agana that is still being resolved in the 1980's. The depopulation of the city during the war and unresolved property disputes after the war caused the number of persons living in Agana to decline from 10,004 persons in 1940 to just 800 persons in 1950. A portion of its pre‑war population was regained by 1970, but the population declined from 2,119 to 896 persons between 1970 and 1980.

The most dramatic growth occurred in the Northern district of Dededo, growth which began shortly after the liberation in 1944. From a total population of 5,126 in 1960, Dededo's population increased by more than 360 percent during the next 20 years, reaching 23,644 persons in 1980. This striking increase was fueled by in‑migration of Filipinos, Micronesians, Statesiders and other non‑indigenous people. Private residential and apartment construction, as well as business construction, flourished in the area, making it the largest and fastest growing district in the Territory.

The Central, coastal village of Piti experienced the largest percent population increase (123 percent) of any district between 1970 and 1980. However, growth in the civilian, non‑federal lands was 230 persons, or 18 percent between 1970 and 1980. Piti contains part of Apra Harbor, which has been under U.S. Navy control since Guam became a U.S. possession. It was the homeporting of a Navy ship in Apra Harbor between 1970 and 1980, housing 1,352 military personnel, that caused the population of the Piti to double between 1970 and 1980.

The Northern district of Yigo showed population growth during the 1960's, but declined by 10 percent between 1970 and 1980. After most of Machanao's land area became occupied by Andersen Air Force Base immediately after World War II, Machanao was annexed to Yigo. The fluctuations in Yigo's population between 1960 and 1980 have been partially the result of changes in the number of persons living on the base and in government quarters near the base. The beginning and ending of the Vietnam Conflict, a war in which Guam's Air Force personnel played a major role, contributed to the growth of the population in Yigo during the 1960's, and the decreased population during the 1970's. The civilian‑held portion of Yigo actually grew in population by 90 percent (2,506 persons) between 1970 and 1980, while the population on federal lands decreased by 42 percent.

The Central district of Asan was another area losing population between 1960 and 1980, declining by 33 percent during the period. In the late 1970s, continuing into the 1980s, Asan upgraded and modernized its infrastructure and public utilities under a federally‑supported community redevelopment program. Delays to the urban renewal project caused by archaeological findings and funding problems left the project incomplete prior to the 1980 census. In addition to this, part of Asan was designated as a U.S. War in the Pacific National Park. The limited land area left for redevelopment has contributed to the decline in population.

The district of Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite in Central Guam is comprised of three distinct communities. It was established as a single district in 1946. The number of persons living there shrank by 13 percent between 1970 and 1980 solely because of a decline of over 1,600 persons living on federal lands in the community of Mongmong, representing the closure of a Naval Air Station barracks. The civilian, residential portion of the district grew by slightly more than 800 persons, or almost 20 percent.

The population of the Central district of Sinajana decreased by 36 percent between 1960 and 1980. The municipality was first organized in 1930. Following World War II, the population of Sinajana grew tremendously with the construction of some 400 new homes. Population growth continued until the housing in the area became saturated, reaching 3,862 persons by 1960. Sinajana was the first district to be completely upgraded and modernized under a Federal renewal program in the mid 1970s. The urban renewal project resulted in the relocation of some residents to other areas of the island and the elimination of substandard housing lots. The decline in population between 1960 and 1980 is therefore not likely to continue into the future.

Among the Southern districts, Santa Rita contained the greatest number of persons in 1970 and in 1980. More than 63 percent of its population resided in Navy quarters in 1980, however. Most growth in the South between 1970 and 1980 occurred in Yona, where the majority of commercial and residential housing developments were constructed during the decade. The districts of Agat and Umatac decreased in population. Agat contained no military populations and no obvious development constraints; however, it may be that the district experienced out‑migration by the local resident population, while lacking major housing subdivision development to attract new residents. The situation in Umatac has been compounded by the lack of infrastructure development to support new housing subdivisions.

POPULATION ON FEDERALLY OWNED LANDS

The federal government owned and controlled one‑third of Guam's land area in 1980, which has not changed since the end of World War II. Military housing on those areas developed independently of the local economy. Defense requirements, the construction of government quarters in new areas, opening or closing of military barracks, and the decision to homeport U.S. Navy ships on Guam are factors that have determined the number and location of active duty military personnel and their dependents, rather than economic conditions and other factors influencing the number and distribution of the civilian population. Census data are available for the population on federal lands for 1970 and 1980, as shown in Table 1.13 The 1960 census gives data on persons living in housing units on federal lands; however, those living in group quarters are not reported for federal lands.

Table 1.13 Population Distribution by Non‑Federal/Federal Land Status

and by Urban Designation: 1970 and 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

1980 1970

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Persons Percent Persons Percent

in in in in

Region Total Federal Federal Total Federal Federal

Election District Persons Lands Lands Persons Lands Lands

Total............ 105979 19550 18.4 84996 20316 23.9

Urban....... 41875 14063 33.6 21671 0 0

Percent........ 39.5 71.9 ... 25.5 0 ...

North............ 47583 8699 44.5 32540 10688 52.6

Urban....... 23208 8430 43.1 8230 0 0

Dededo................ 23644 3554 18.2 10780 1697 8.4

Tamuning.............. 13580 69 .4 10218 235 1.2

Yigo.................. 10359 5076 26 11542 8756 43.1

Central.......... 34526 5065 25.9 31266 4085 20.1

Urban....... 10126 0 0 10829 0 0

Agana................. 896 0 0 2119 0 0

Agana Heights......... 3284 314 1.6 3156 419 2.1

Asan.................. 2034 417 2.1 2629 535 2.6

Barrigada............. 7756 1716 8.8 6356 1105 5.4

Chalan Pago‑Ordot..... 3120 0 0 2931 0 0

Mangilao.............. 6840 856 4.4 3228 0 0

Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite... 5245 410 2.1 6057 2026 10

Piti.................. 2866 1352 6.9 1284 0 0

Sinajana.............. 2485 0 0 3506 0 0

South............ 23870 5786 29.6 21190 5543 27.3

Urban....... 8541 5633 28.8 2612 0 0

Agat.................. 3999 0 0 4308 38 .2

Inarajan.............. 2059 0 0 1897 0 0

Merizo................ 1663 0 0 1529 0 0

Santa Rita............ 9183 5786 29.6 8109 5505 27.1

Talofofo.............. 2006 0 0 1935 0 0

Umatac................ 732 0 0 813 0 0

Yona.................. 4228 0 0 2599 0 0

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑B54 Table 4; PC(1)B54 Table 4

Table 1.13 shows that in 1970, 24 percent of the total population of Guam (20,316 persons) lived on federal land areas. Nearly 53 percent of these lived in the North, mostly on Andersen Air Force Base; 20 percent in the Central region, mostly at the Naval Air Station and Naval Regional Medical Center; and 27 percent lived in the South, in Apra Harbor housing. By 1980, the smaller number of persons on federal lands and growth in the civilian population caused the percent of persons living on federal lands to decrease to 18 percent. A larger share resided in Central Guam because of a naval vessel berthed in Piti.

Future military population living in federal land areas will be determined by the Defense Department. The 1990 census will probably see some shift in the geographic distribution of the population to Central Guam caused by the homeporting of additional ships in Apra Harbor since 1980. The local names of federal land areas are shown in Table 1.14.

Table 1.14 Population on Federal Lands: 1980

Region Percent Percent

Election District, Federal Land Area Persons Of Total Federal

Total persons........................... 105979 100 ...

Persons on federal land areas...... 19550 18.4 100

North...................................... 8699 8.2 44.5

Dededo, Naval Communication Station............. 3538 3.3 18.1

Dededo, Andersen Air Force Base Northwest Field. 16 0 .1

Tamuning, Harmon Annex.......................... 69 .1 .4

Yigo, Andersen Air Force Base................... 4892 4.6 25

Yigo, Marbo Annex............................... 184 .2 .9

Central.................................... 5065 4.8 25.9

Agana Heights, Naval Hospital................... 314 .3 1.6

Asan, U.S. Naval Hospital....................... 417 .4 2.1

Barrigada, Naval Air Station.................... 1650 1.6 8.4

Barrigada, Naval Communication Station.......... 66 .1 .3

Mangilao, Marbo Annex........................... 856 .8 4.4

Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite, Naval Air Station.......... 410 .4 2.1

Piti, Vessel.................................... 1352 1.3 6.9

South...................................... 5786 5.5 29.6

Santa Rita, Apra Harbor Naval Reservation....... 5633 5.3 28.8

Santa Rita, U.S. Naval Magazine................. 153 .1 .8

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 1A, Table 1; Bureau

of Planning, Government of Guam.

POPULATION DENSITY

Guam's islandwide population density increased over 368 percent between 1940 and 1980, from 107 persons per square mile in 1940 to 507 persons per square mile in 1980, as shown in Table 1.15. Increases in density were not uniform throughout the island. The Northern portion of the island was the most populated region by 1980, but it was still not the most densely settled. Its density increased from 25 persons per square mile in 1940 to 670 in 1980. The Central region was the area with the highest population density on the island, increasing from 324 to 803 persons per square mile by 1980. At one time, the Southern portion of the island was more densely settled than the North, but by 1980, it had the lowest population density, only 251 persons per square mile. Density in the South increased rapidly between 1940 and 1960, but remained fairly constant between 1960 and 1980, reflecting the slower rate of growth in the South during the period of rapid growth in the North.

Table 1.15 Population Distribution and Density by Region: 1940 to 1980

Year Pcnt

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ Change

Region 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940 1940‑80

Total population.... 105979 84996 67044 59498 22290 373.8

Area in square miles.. 209 209 209 209 209

Population density.... 507 407 321 285 107

North Population.. 47583 32540 18752 16147 1795 2580

Area in square miles.. 71 71 71 71 71

Population density.... 670 458 264 227 25

Central Population. 34526 31266 25479 26495 13946 147.8

Area in square miles.. 43 43 43 43 43

Population density.... 803 727 593 616 324

South Population... 23870 21190 22813 16856 6549 263.8

Area in square miles.. 95 95 95 95 95

Population density.... 251 223 240 177 69

________________________________________________________________________

Note: 1980 population in Central Guam includes 1352 persons living on

board military vessels.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑A54 1980 Table 4; PC(1)‑B54

1970 Table 5; P‑B54 1950 Table 34, Bureau of Planning, Government

of Guam.

URBAN‑RURAL DISTRIBUTION

In order to qualify as urban, an area must first meet the criteria of Census Designated Place (CDP). As discussed earlier, a CDP is a generally closely settled center of population without corporate limits. If the CDP has a population of at least 2,500 persons, it is urban. Rural areas are all areas that are not urban.

Although Places have been named by the Census Bureau since 1960, a comparison of urban‑rural distribution is not possible. Census definitions of CDP's have not been applied consistently on Guam for each census period. In 1960 and 1970, 16 CDP's were named. In 1980, an additional 16 CDP's were listed (Table 1.16). Many of those CDP's additionally named in 1980 were existing communities in 1970, and some were existing even in 1960. The inclusion of government quarters especially impacts on urban areas, as government quarters comprised over 34 percent of all urban areas in 1980.

Table 1.16 Population of Census Designated Places: 1960 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Census Designated Place 1980 1970 1960

Total................. 69106 35079 28567

North....................... 24248 10616 7627

Andersen Air Force Base... 4892 ... ...

Dededo Village............ 2524 2386 2247

Finegayan Station......... 3538 ... ...

Marbo Annex............... 1040 ... ...

Tamuning Village.......... 8862 8230 5380

Yigo Village.............. 3392 ... ...

Central..................... 27870 16257 13000

Agana Village............. 896 2119 1642

Agana Heights Village..... 2970 3156 3210

Agana Station............. 2060 ... ...

Asan Village.............. 726 755 543

Barrigada Village......... 3127 1549 1729

Barrigada Hts Subdivision. 1127 ... ...

Chalan Pago Village....... 1921 ... ...

Latte Heights Subdivision. 1056 ... ...

Maina Village............. 891 ... ...

Maite Village............. 419 ... ...

Mangilao Village.......... 4029 ... ...

Mongmong Village.......... 2058 5052 2285

Nimitz Hill Annex......... 417 ... ...

Ordot Village............. 1199 ... ...

Piti Village.............. 737 ... ...

Sinajana Village.......... 1879 2621 2861

Toto Village.............. 2358 1005 730

South....................... 16988 8206 7940

Agat Village.............. 2908 2612 2596

Apra Harbor............... 5633 ... ...

Inarajan Village.......... 918 614 761

Merizo Village............ 1500 731 508

Santa Rita Village........ 1264 1976 1630

Santa Rosa Subdivision.... 860 ... ...

Talofofo Village.......... 1470 844 947

Umatac Village............ 487 423 393

Yona Village.............. 1948 1006 1105

_____________________________________________________________________

Note: Symbol "..." indicates an area was not designated a CDP.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑A54 1980 Table 9.

Urban areas on Guam contained 40 percent of the population in 1980 or 41,875 persons (Table 1.17). The North was the most densely urban, with half of its population residing in urban areas. The population of the village of Tamuning was 65 percent urban. The federal land areas of Andersen Air Force Base in Yigo and Finegayan Station in Dededo contributed to the urban density. Nearly 36 percent of the population of Southern Guam resided in urban areas, exclusively in Agat (73 percent urban) and Santa Rita (61 percent urban). In contrast, only 29 percent of the population of Central Guam lived in urban areas, 90 percent in Agana Heights, 40 percent of Barrigada, and 59 percent of Mangilao. The larger percent urban in the South as opposed to Central Guam is the result of military housing in Santa Rita.

Table 1.17. Urban and Rural Residence by Election District: 1980

Number Percent

Region ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑Percent

Election District Total Urban Rural Total Urban Rural Urban

Total.......... 105,979 41,875 64,104 100.0 100.0 100.0 39.5

North............... 47,583 23,208 24,375 44.9 55.4 38.0 48.8

Dededo............ 23,644 6,062 17,582 22.3 14.5 27.4 25.6

Tamuning.......... 13,580 8,862 4,718 12.8 21.2 7.4 65.3

Yigo.............. 10,359 8,284 2,075 9.8 19.8 3.2 80.0

Central............. 34,526 10,126 24,400 32.6 24.2 38.1 29.3

Agana............. 896 0 896 .8 0.0 1.4 0.0

Agana Heights..... 3,284 2,970 314 3.1 7.1 .5 90.4

Asan.............. 2,034 0 2,034 1.9 0.0 3.2 0.0

Barrigada......... 7,756 3,127 4,629 7.3 7.5 7.2 40.3

Chalan Pago/Ordot. 3,120 0 3,120 2.9 0.0 4.9 0.0

Mangilao.......... 6,840 4,029 2,811 6.5 9.6 4.4 58.9

Mong‑Toto‑Maite... 5,245 0 5,245 4.9 0.0 8.2 0.0

Piti.............. 2,866 0 2,866 2.7 0.0 4.5 0.0

Sinajana.......... 2,485 0 2,485 2.3 0.0 3.9 0.0

South............... 23,870 8,541 15,329 22.5 20.4 23.9 35.8

Agat.............. 3,999 2,908 1,091 3.8 6.9 1.7 72.7

Inarajan.......... 2,059 0 2,059 1.9 0.0 3.2 0.0

Merizo............ 1,663 0 1,663 1.6 0.0 2.6 0.0

Santa Rita....... 9,183 5,633 3,550 8.7 13.5 5.5 61.3

Talofofo.......... 2,006 0 2,006 1.9 0.0 3.1 0.0

Umatac............ 732 0 732 .7 0.0 1.1 0.0

Yona.............. 4,228 0 4,228 4.0 0.0 6.6 0.0

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑A54 1980, Table 4.

SUMMARY

For the purpose of population analysis, Guam can be divided into Northern, Southern, and Central areas for census periods between 1940 and 1980. The smaller geographic units of election districts are comparable between 1960 and 1980, having undergone extensive reorganization on several occasions prior to 1960.

Prior to World War II, nearly half of Guam's population lived in the one square mile village of Agana, in Central Guam. Military occupation during and after the war dispersed the indigenous population into other areas of the island. Fractional lot problems in Agana contributed to the difficulty of repopulating the village after the war. In other parts of the island, families gave up their inherited lands to the U.S. government, which seized over one‑third of Guam's land for defense purposes.

The decades 1940 through 1980 thus became a period of rapid growth in the North. New inhabitants included both indigenous residents and new off‑island migrants from the United States and Asia. The population of the North increased a remarkable 45,788 persons, from 1,795 in 1940 to 47,583 in 1980. Growth in the other regions did not match the population increase of the North. The Central region, the most populated area in 1940, added 20,580 persons, while the South grew by 17,321 persons.

In the Southern region, the villages of Merizo, Umatac, and Inarajan have retained their rural character, with interior mountainous areas not suited for housing development. Some new development has occurred during the 1980's in the more gently sloping areas of Yona and Talofofo, as improved roads shorten travel time to the commercial further North, and generally improved infrastructure opens the area for development.

Of the individual election districts showing decreases and large increase in population between 1960 and 1970, the number of military personnel living on federal lands was often the source of the change. The population living on federal lands should be taken into account in analyzing the growth trends of election districts. Growth caused by the homeporting of military vessels and declines caused by the closure of military barracks are significant in that they do not affect future birth rates, education needs, or housing markets, nor do fluctuations in the number of military personnel necessarily mean that a trend has been established.

In 1980, 40 percent of the population lived in urban places. Of that 40 percent, one‑third lived on military reservations. It is probable that more and more places in the civilian portions of Northern and Central Guam will meet the 2,500 and over resident criterion for urban places in the future as the regions become more populated. The military will probably not contribute greatly to the development of additional urban areas until new government quarters are built.

É[1]„!B„!ÉË

Ë‚À

EÀÎÎÐB_ÐÀ

EEÀÀEGÀË

ËÀG?ÀÃ#‑ÃCHAPTER 2œƒ

Ã#Ã AGE AND SEX CHARACTERISTICSœƒ

Ë
ËÀ? UÀ

The age and sex composition of a population provides information

necessary to plan for community development and for determining changing

social and economic characteristics. Age is the crucial factor for

determining various potential populations for schooling, manpower, and

voting. Sex is important in understanding social perspective and trends in

a community and a population's potential economic activity.

The data on sex were derived from answers to question 3. At the time

of field review, most cases in which sex was not reported were resolved by

determining the appropriate entry from the person's given name and household

relationship. When sex remained blank, it was allocated according to the

relationship to the householder and the age and marital status of the

person.

The data on age were derived from answers to question 5. Only the

information in items 5b and 5c (on month and year of birth) was read into

the computer. Answers to questions 5a (on age at last birthday) were used

during field review to fill any blanks in question 5c. The age

classification was based on the age of the person in completed years as of

April 1, 1980. The data on age represent the difference between date of

birth and April 1, 1980.

In Chapter 1 we discussed historical statistics for Guam, including age and sex distributions, starting with information from the 1700s. In this, and subsequent chapters, we will be discussing recent statistics for Guam, with a view for the potential use of the data for planning purposes.

The population of Guam has been aging in recent years, partly because

of reduced fertility (which will be described in Chapter 5), partly as a

result of even more drastic decreases in mortality (as described in Chapter

6), and partly because of the unusual migration situation, with large

numbers of relatively "middle-aged" migrants (discussed in detail in Chapter 7).

AGE AND SEX CHARACTERISTICSœ

The median age of Guam's population in 1980 was 22.2 years, compared to 30.0 in the United States (Table 2.1 and Figure 2.1). The median age is

that age which is the exact mid-point of all ages, that is, half the people

were older and half the people were younger. The median had decreased

slightly from 18.1 in 1920 to 17.9 in 1940, partly due to the influenza

epidemic's remains in 1919 having affected fertility, and the whooping cough epidemic in the 1930s. The median increased by 5 years in 1950 because of relatively large numbers of military stationed on Guam. When many of these persons in the Armed Forces were gone in 1960, the median decreased again, and only increased for the 1980 census, probably as a result of decreased fertility and migration.

Ñÿÿ U [1]

ÿÑÇ"Ç

In most populations, the median for females is higher than for males,

but the military on Guam affects those figures as well. In the early

decades of the century, before the Armed Forces were on Guam in any

significant numbers, females generally were older than males (with the

exception of 1930). In 1950, the median for males was 3 years older than

for females because of the Armed Forces and contract workers sent to support

the military. Males were more than 6 years older than females in 1960, and

3 years older in 1970. Partly because of the reduction in the military and

a change in their age and sex structure, and because of the increase in the

local populations, by 1980 the median age for males and females was the

same.

À UUÀ

Table 2.1. Median Age: 1920 to 1980

---------------------------------------------------------

Census

Year Total Males Females

---------------------------------------------------------

1980 22.2 22.2 22.2

1970 20.4 21.6 18.2

1960 20.8 22.9 16.5

1950 22.8 23.3 20.3

1940 17.9 17.3 18.5

1930 18.8 19.1 18.6

1920 18.1 17.3 18.9

_________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

ÀU UÀ

ËÀ UGÀÃ'ÃFigure 2.1 Median Age: 1920 to 1980œƒ

ËÀG UÀÜÜ
The median age of the population by region varied over time (Table

2.2). In 1930, the Central region had the lowest median age (16.4 years),

followed by the North (17.7 years); by 1950, the Central region had the

highest median age (23.3 years), with the North second highest (23.2 years).

These fluctuations between regions could be a result of regional migration

and the presence of the military in certain regions.

À UUÀTable 2.2 Median Age by Region: 1930 to 1980

------------------------------------------------

Year

Region 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940 1930

------------------------------------------------

Guam... 22.2 20.4 20.8 22.8 17.9 18.8

North....... 22.9 22.1 21.6 23.2 18.3 17.7

Central..... 22.5 20.0 18.9 23.3 17.7 16.4

South....... 20.5 18.7 23.4 21.9 18.3 18.1

________________________________________________

Source: Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

ÀU UÀ

The effect of the Armed Forces on the sex distribution is more clearly

seen in Table 2.3 (and Figure 2.2). As noted previously, in most

populations there are more females than males. In fact, on Guam in 1920,

there were 295 more females than males, but that was the last census to show

a surplus of females. The sex distributions in 1930 and 1940 were not

abnormal, but by 1950, a change had occurred. In 1950 there were 21,472

more males than females, and the number of males per 100 females doubled,

from 103 in 1940 to 213 in 1950. In 1950, there were more than 2 males for

every female on the island. With decreased military activity, the number of

males per 100 females decreased, until it reached 109 in 1980, more than any

State except Alaska, which had a surplus of males for other reasons.

À U
UÀTable 2.3. Males per 100 Females: 1920 to 1980

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Census Surplus of Males per

Year Males Females Males 100 Females

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

1980 55,321 50,658 4,663 109.2

1970 47,362 37,634 9,728 125.8

1960 39,211 27,833 11,378 140.9

1950 40,485 19,013 21,472 212.9

1940 11,294 10,983 311 102.8

1930 9,630 8,879 751 108.5

1920 6,490 6,785 -295 95.7

_______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

À
U UÀÜÜ
Ë

ËÀ UGÀÃ'ÃFigure 2.2 Males per 100 Females: 1920 to 1980œƒ

ËÀG UÀ

The distribution by age has changed somewhat since 1940, the first

decennial census to display 5 years age groups for ages up to 75 years

(Table 2.4). Between 1940 and 1950, the percentages of persons under 5

decreased, probably partly because of residual reduced fertility following

the war, but primarily because of increased migration of Armed Service

personnel and contract workers. The change in the 5 to 14 year olds was

even greater, decreasing by 7 percentage points for the 5 to 9 years olds

and 6 percentage points for the 10 to 14 year olds. Much of this decrease

must be attributed to many women not having children during the war years.

This group which would normally have created an unusual effect in the

age distribution over time, much as the baby boomers has created a bulge

which is gradually working its way through the age distribution in the

United States, cannot be seen for later censuses because of the great

influx of military personnel and contract workers, starting in the 1940s.

Hence, although this decrease is seen for 5 to 14 year olds in 1950, by 1960

when this group was 15 to 24, the number of Armed Forces personnel in this

same age group was so great, that the Natives have to be disaggregated to

see the affects on that segment of the population. (We have disaggregated

the population by ethnicity in Chapter 8).

À U

UÀTable 2.4. Population by Age and Sex: 1940 to 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

Numbers Percent

------------------------------------ -----------------------------

Age Group 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

Total.105,979 84,996 67,044 59,498 22,290 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

0 to 4. 13,002 11,635 10,824 7,568 3,746 12.3 13.7 16.1 12.7 16.8

5 to 9. 12,632 11,762 9,164 4,453 3,261 11.9 13.8 13.7 7.5 14.6

10 to 14. 11,338 10,304 7,254 4,084 2,827 10.7 12.1 10.8 6.9 12.7

15 to 19. 10,993 8,049 4,994 7,162 2,228 10.4 9.5 7.4 12.0 10.0

20 to 24. 11,108 10,270 6,744 11,378 1,870 10.5 12.1 10.1 19.1 8.4

25 to 29. 10,324 6,406 5,572 7,275 1,719 9.7 7.5 8.3 12.2 7.7

30 to 34. 9,289 6,171 6,617 5,452 1,455 8.8 7.3 9.9 9.2 6.5

35 to 39. 6,246 5,474 5,151 4,044 1,203 5.9 6.4 7.7 6.8 5.4

40 to 44. 5,049 4,792 3,403 2,761 946 4.8 5.6 5.1 4.6 4.2

45 to 49. 4,189 3,530 2,631 2,014 812 4.0 4.2 3.9 3.4 3.6

50 to 54. 3,983 2,305 1,736 1,216 599 3.8 2.7 2.6 2.0 2.7

55 to 59. 2,914 1,748 1,171 810 501 2.7 2.1 1.7 1.4 2.2

60 to 64. 1,927 1,070 695 483 435 1.8 1.3 1.0 .8 2.0

65 to 69. 1,418 689 478 346 291 1.3 .8 .7 .6 1.3

70 to 74. 809 351 271 204 210 .8 .4 .4 .3 .9

75 + .... 758 440 339 248 174 .7 .5 .5 .4 .8

___________________________________________________________________________

Note: 1940 includes 13 persons of unknown age.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

U UÀ

The military influence is clearly seen in the 1950 census results,

since almost 1 in every 5 persons on Guam was between 20 and 24 in that

year, up from only 1 in 12 in 1940. The proportion decreased to about 1 in

10 in 1960 and subsequent years. About 1 in every 8 persons on Guam in 1950

was between 15 and 19, and about the same proportion were between 25 and 29.

Altogether about 43 percent of the population in 1950 was between 15 and 29.

About 16 percent of the 1960 population were under 5, and another 14

percent were 5 to 9, showing the effects of the baby boom on Guam. By 1970,

fertility had begun to decrease, with only 14 percent of the population less

than 5 years old, and by 1980 the decrease continued, to 12 percent of the

population.

The proportion of the population which was elderly remained low

throughout the period, partly because of the influence of the presence of

the military (which decreased the percentage of youth as well as elderly),

and partly because the birth rate was high, and continued to be fairly high

even in 1980 (although very low compared to the developing world). Just

over 3 percent of the population in 1940 was 65 years and over. The

proportion of elderly decreased to between 1 and 2 percent from 1950 to

1970, and increased to 3 percent again in 1980. As will be shown in Chapter

8 on ethnicity, most of the elderly were Chamorro, so that as the rest of

the population ages, the percentage of elderly will increase, as will the

need to provide housing and other services for these persons.

Traditionally, Chamorro culture has made provisions for its elderly, with

specific roles within the extended family context. As the society has

"Westernized" many of these roles have changed, resulting in the likelihood

of new mechanisms being needed to care for the elderly, particularly as

non-Chamorros become part of this group.

DEPENDENCY RATIOœ

The dependency ratio is derived by dividing the sum of persons under 15

(the pre-labor force youth) and the elderly (those over 64), by the persons

generally included in the potential labor force (those 15 to 64), and

multiplying by 100. A dependency ratio of 100 would mean that there is

exactly one dependent for each potential worker; a higher number would mean

that there are more dependents than workers, and a lower number means that

there are more workers than dependents.

In 1940, before the military "invasion", the population was closest to

a dependency ratio of 100, with a figure of 89 (89 dependents for every 100

potential workers) (Table 2.5). The dependency ratio in 1950 was only 40,

less than half of the ratio for 1940, showing both greatly reduced fertility

in the war years and the huge influx of military personnel in the late

1940s. This value is unlikely to occur in any "natural" environment, and is

due to the large numbers of young and middle-aged adults on island in

connection with the Armed Forces. This kind of figure makes analysis of the

dependency ratios fairly useless since some segments of the population were

still living at subsistence levels, and other segments were living off an

artificially constructed economy, including PXs and other imported goods and

materials.

The dependency ratios in 1960, 1970, and 1980, continued to show the

influence of the military. After a jump in 1960 because of proportionally

fewer military on island however, the ratio continued to decrease to 60 in

1980. The decrease in the 20 years before the 1980 census was due both to

increased immigration of aliens in the middle years (as well as

Statesiders), and decreased fertility (which was far greater than the slight

increase in the elderly population.)

À U
UÀTable 2.5. Dependency Ratios: 1940 to 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------

Age Group 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940

---------------------------------------------------------------------

Total..... 105,979 84,996 67,044 59,498 22,277¼1

0 to 14..... 36,972 33,701 27,242 16,105 9,834

15 to 64..... 66,022 49,815 38,714 42,595 11,768

65 +......... 2,985 1,480 1,088 798 675

Dependency

Ratio...... 60.5 70.6 73.2 39.7 89.3

____________________________________________________________________

1) Excludes 13 persons of unknown age.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

À
U UÀ

The male population has shown the fluctuations in the age distribution

more dramatically than the female population, because most of the early

military personnel were males (Table 2.6). Again, the age distribution for

1940 was fairly "normal" because most of the residents were Chamorros and

were living without military activity. In 1950, all of this had changed.

In 1950, almost 1 in every 4 males was between 20 and 24, another 14

percent were between 15 and 19, and another 13 percent were between 25 and

29. Hence, more than half the males were in this 15 year age range. Most

of these males were military personnel. The proportion of males in this age

range has remained large throughout the rest of the period because of

continued military activity on island.

À U

UÀTable 2.6. Males by Age and Sex: 1940 to 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

Numbers Percent

------------------------------------ -----------------------------

Age Group 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

Males. 55,321 47,362 39,211 40,485 11,300 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

0 to 4. 6,620 5,962 5,614 3,885 1,945 12.0 12.6 14.3 9.6 17.2

5 to 9. 6,458 6,054 4,593 2,286 1,734 11.7 12.8 11.7 5.6 15.4

10 to 14. 5,835 5,362 3,685 2,129 1,463 10.5 11.3 9.4 5.3 13.0

15 to 19. 5,849 4,148 3,053 5,583 1,092 10.6 8.8 7.8 13.8 9.7

20 to 24. 6,019 6,642 4,527 9,613 885 10.9 14.0 11.5 23.7 7.8

25 to 29. 5,194 3,569 3,386 5,231 897 9.4 7.5 8.6 12.9 7.9

30 to 34. 4,854 3,538 4,526 3,812 748 8.8 7.5 11.5 9.4 6.6

35 to 39. 3,386 3,267 3,440 2,850 621 6.1 6.9 8.8 7.0 5.5

40 to 44. 2,650 3,038 2,172 1,859 504 4.8 6.4 5.5 4.6 4.5

45 to 49. 2,171 2,192 1,684 1,380 402 3.9 4.6 4.3 3.4 3.6

50 to 54. 2,238 1,334 1,036 793 300 4.0 2.8 2.6 2.0 2.7

55 to 59. 1,634 1,015 642 482 231 3.0 2.1 1.6 1.2 2.0

60 to 64. 1,008 577 367 243 199 1.8 1.2 .9 .6 1.8

65 to 69. 729 324 223 157 119 1.3 .7 .6 .4 1.1

70 to 74. 392 160 117 84 83 .7 .3 .3 .2 .7

75 + .... 284 180 146 98 71 .5 .4 .4 .2 .6

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

U UÀ

The female population on Guam has not seen the tremendous fluctuations

the male age distribution experienced (Table 2.7). Some of this anomaly in

the 15 to 29 years old females in the 1950 census can be attributed to wives

who accompanied their husbands for military duty on island.

The increase in percentage of females in the 0 to 4 age group between

1940 and 1950 (from 16 to 19 percent) probably reflects real growth in this

age group, and, if the military were excluded from the male distribution,

males also would probably exhibit the same pattern. The late 1940s saw the

beginning of the baby boom on Guam as elsewhere, so that the high rates of 0

to 4 years olds in 1950 and 1960 reflect this higher fertility; almost 1 in

every 5 females in those two censuses were less than 5 years old. After the

1960 census, the percentage of these females decreased, partly as a result

of the baby bust, and partly because of increased migration of aliens and

persons from the States (including increased numbers of female military

personnel).

The proportion of female elderly has remained low, but, once again,

this may change as the general population ages.

À U

UÀTable 2.7. Females by Age and Sex: 1940 to 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

Numbers Percent

------------------------------------ -----------------------------

Age Group 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

Fmles. 50,658 37,634 27,833 19,013 10,990 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

0 to 4. 6,382 5,673 5,210 3,683 1,801 12.6 15.1 18.7 19.4 16.4

5 to 9. 6,174 5,708 4,571 2,167 1,527 12.2 15.2 16.4 11.4 13.9

10 to 14. 5,503 4,942 3,569 1,955 1,364 10.9 13.1 12.8 10.3 12.4

15 to 19. 5,144 3,901 1,941 1,579 1,136 10.2 10.4 7.0 8.3 10.3

20 to 24. 5,089 3,628 2,217 1,765 985 10.0 9.6 8.0 9.3 9.0

25 to 29. 5,130 2,837 2,186 2,044 822 10.1 7.5 7.9 10.8 7.5

30 to 34. 4,435 2,633 2,091 1,640 707 8.8 7.0 7.5 8.6 6.4

35 to 39. 2,860 2,207 1,711 1,194 582 5.6 5.9 6.1 6.3 5.3

40 to 44. 2,399 1,754 1,231 902 442 4.7 4.7 4.4 4.7 4.0

45 to 49. 2,018 1,338 947 634 410 4.0 3.6 3.4 3.3 3.7

50 to 54. 1,745 971 700 423 299 3.4 2.6 2.5 2.2 2.7

55 to 59. 1,280 733 529 328 270 2.5 1.9 1.9 1.7 2.5

60 to 64. 919 493 328 240 236 1.8 1.3 1.2 1.3 2.1

65 to 69. 689 365 255 189 172 1.4 1.0 .9 1.0 1.6

70 to 74. 417 191 154 120 127 .8 .5 .6 .6 1.2

75 + .... 474 260 193 150 103 .9 .7 .7 .8 .9

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

U UÀË

ËÀ UGÀÃ'ÃFigure 2.3 Age and Sex Distribution: 1940œƒ

ÜÜ

Ã'ÃFigure 2.4 Age and Sex Distribution: 1950œƒ

Ã'ÃFigure 2.5 Age and Sex Distribution: 1960œƒ

ÜÜ

Ã'ÃFigure 2.6 Age and Sex Distribution: 1970œƒ

Ã'ÃFigure 2.7 Age and Sex Distribution: 1980œƒ

ÜÜ
Ë

ËÀG UÀSEX RATIOœ

As noted earlier, the number of males per 100 females increased from

103 to 213 between 1940 and 1950 because of the influx of military

personnel, and then decreased first to 141 in 1960, then to 126 in 1970, and

109 in 1980 (Table 2.8 and Figure 2.8). As would be expected, the

proportions for young ages were closer to even numbers of males and females

(although we do not expect a figure of 100, because, world-wide, there are

about 106 males born for every 100 females).

The coming of the military to Guam also affected the proportion of

males and females in the military ages. In 1950, for example, there were

354 males for every 100 females aged 15 to 19, 545 males per 100 females

aged 20 to 24, 256 for those 25 to 29, with diminishing proportions after

that. As time has gone by, these proportions have decreased, but in some

ages have remained high, especially compared with similar populations in the

States and elsewhere. By 1960, only 20 to 24 and 30 to 39 year olds had

more than 2 males for each female, and none of the age groups in 1960 had

this disparity (although there were 183 males 20 to 24 years old for every

100 females in that age group).

There were more females than males 65 years and over (except for those

65 to 69 in 1980) for each of the censuses, showing increased male mortality

in the older age groups.

À U

UÀTable 2.8. Males per 100 Females by Age: 1940 to 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

Surplus of Males Males Per 100 Females

------------------------------------ -----------------------------

Age Group 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

Total. 4663 9728 11378 21472 310 109.2 125.8 140.9 212.9 102.8

0 to 4. 238 289 404 202 144 103.7 105.1 107.8 105.5 108.0

5 to 9. 284 346 22 119 207 104.6 106.1 100.5 105.5 113.6

10 to 14. 332 420 116 174 99 106.0 108.5 103.3 108.9 107.3

15 to 19. 705 247 1112 4004 -44 113.7 106.3 157.3 353.6 96.1

20 to 24. 930 3014 2310 7848 -100 118.3 183.1 204.2 544.6 89.8

25 to 29. 64 732 1200 3187 75 101.2 125.8 154.9 255.9 109.1

30 to 34. 419 905 2435 2172 41 109.4 134.4 216.5 232.4 105.8

35 to 39. 526 1060 1729 1656 39 118.4 148.0 201.1 238.7 106.7

40 to 44. 251 1284 941 957 62 110.5 173.2 176.4 206.1 114.0

45 to 49. 153 854 737 746 -8 107.6 163.8 177.8 217.7 98.0

50 to 54. 493 363 336 370 1 128.3 137.4 148.0 187.5 100.3

55 to 59. 354 282 113 154 -39 127.7 138.5 121.4 147.0 85.6

60 to 64. 89 84 39 3 -37 109.7 117.0 111.9 101.2 84.3

65 to 69. 40 -41 -32 -32 -53 105.8 88.8 87.5 83.1 69.2

70 to 74. -25 -31 -37 -36 -44 94.0 83.8 76.0 70.0 65.4

75 + .... -190 -80 -47 -52 -32 59.9 69.2 75.6 65.3 68.9

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

U UÀÜÜ

ËÀ UGÀÃ'ÃFigure 2.8 Male/Female Ratio by Age: 1980œƒ

ËÀG UÀ

AGE DISTRIBUTIONœ

Table 2.9 shows the distribution by age for the election districts on

Guam. The overall median age for Guam was 22.2 years, with the North and

Central regions having higher median ages, and the South being younger.

Umatac had the lowest median age at 17.4 years, followed by Inarajan

(17.9 years), and Talofofo (18.2). Other villages with low median ages were

Merizo (18.5), Yona (18.6), and Chalan Pago-Ordot (19.0); only the last

village was not in the Southern region. The percentage of persons less than

18 years old also reflects the relative youth in these villages. Overall,

41 percent of Guam's population was less than 18 years old. Central and

Northern regions had slightly smaller percentages of persons in this age

group (40 percent for each), compared to the 45 percent for South. Both

Umatac and Inarajan had more than half their populations under 18 years old,

the result of high fertility, and probably less migration of young adults to

these southern villages.

About 3 percent of the population was 65 years or older. More than 6

percent of those living in Agana were 65 years or older, as were more than 5

percent of those in Agana Heights. Sinajana, Agat, and Inarajan each had

slightly less than 5 percent of their populations being elderly.

These data seem to show that the South remains somewhat more

traditional than the Central and Northern regions, with higher fertility,

and less military and other in-migration. The villages in the extreme South

seem even more traditional in age structure than the others.

À U
UÀTable 2.9. Age by Region and Election District: 1980

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Number Percent

------------------- -------------------

Popula- Under 18 to 65 + Under 18 to 65 + Median

Election District tion 18 yrs 64 yrs years 18 yrs 64 yrs years Age

--------------------------------------------------------------------------

Total.......... 105979 43604 59390 2985 41.1 56.1 2.8 22.2

North............. 47583 19241 27156 1198 40.4 57.1 2.5 22.9

Dededo.............. 23644 10640 12437 567 45.0 52.6 2.4 20.9

Tamuning............ 13580 4549 8555 475 33.5 63.0 3.5 26.4

Yigo................ 10359 4040 6164 155 39.0 59.5 1.5 22.2

Central........... 34526 13633 19765 1128 39.5 57.2 3.3 22.5

Agana............... 896 275 566 55 30.7 63.2 6.1 27.4

Agana Heights....... 3284 1261 1855 167 38.4 56.5 5.1 23.7

Asan................ 2034 775 1170 92 38.1 57.5 4.5 23.3

Barrigada........... 7756 3017 4506 233 38.9 58.1 3.0 22.2

Chalan Pago-Ordot... 3120 1498 1507 115 48.0 48.3 3.7 19.0

Mangilao............ 6840 2859 3837 144 41.8 56.1 2.1 22.3

Mongmong-Toto-Maite. 5245 2229 2874 142 42.5 54.8 2.7 21.6

Piti................ 2866 616 2190 60 21.5 76.4 2.1 23.6

Sinajana............ 2485 1103 1260 122 44.4 50.7 4.9 20.6

South............. 23870 10728 12481 659 44.9 52.3 2.8 20.5

Agat................ 3999 1848 1964 188 46.2 49.1 4.7 20.2

Inarajan............ 2059 1038 924 97 50.4 44.9 4.7 17.9

Merizo.............. 1663 812 790 62 48.8 47.5 3.7 18.5

Santa Rita.......... 9183 3600 5446 138 39.2 59.3 1.5 22.3

Talofofo............ 2006 991 953 62 49.4 47.5 3.1 18.2

Umatac.............. 732 378 342 12 51.6 46.7 1.6 17.4

Yona................ 4228 2063 2063 101 48.8 48.8 2.4 18.6

__________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80-1-B54, Table 14.

À
U UÀ

MILITARY AND CIVILIAN POPULATIONSœ

The special tabulations developed to disaggregate military households

from civilian households provide data on age and sex of the civilian

population, as well as those households having one or more military

personnel. Persons on active-duty military status are called "military

persons", households with one or more military persons residing there are

"military households".

Altogether, there were 83,226 persons (78 percent) living in households

or group quarters which contained only civilians. Of these, 42,056 (51

percent) were males, compared to 58 percent of males in military households

or in group quarters (Table 2.10).

The median ages for the two populations did not differ significantly,

but the distributions were significantly different. Although the median for

the whole population was 22.3 years, the median for civilians was slightly

less (21.8 years) and the median for the military was slightly more (22.9

years). The median for males in the military was about a year older than

for females, while the median for female civilians was about a half year

older than for males.

Once the military are disaggregated from the rest of the population,

the civilian age and sex distribution looks much more "normal". Military

personnel seem to have higher fertility than civilians, since 14 percent

were children less than 5 years old in military households, compared to 12

percent in civilian households. On the other hand, because they are in the

military, more than 1 in 5 of all military persons were 20 to 24 compared to

only 8 percent of the civilians. The percentage of military in the 25 to 29

year age group was double that of the civilians. More than 12 percent of

the military population was 30 to 34 years old compared to only 8 percent of

the civilian population.

On the other hand, slightly larger proportions of persons in the 35 to

44 year old age group were civilian than were military, partially because of

large numbers of immigrants in this age group (see Chapters 7 and 8). And,

larger proportions of persons older than 44 were civilian than were

military. More than 9 percent of the civilian population was 45 to 54 years

old, compared to less than 2 percent of the military population. And only

about 1 percent of the military population was 55 years old and over,

compared to more than 9 percent of the civilian population.

À UUÀTable 2.10. Age and Sex by Military Household Status: 1980

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Total Civilians Military

------------------------------------------------------

Age Group Total Males Fmles Total Males Fmles Total Males Fmles

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Total....105979 55321 50658 83226 42056 41170 22753 13265 9488

Percent. 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

0 to 4.... 12.3 12.0 12.6 11.7 11.9 11.6 14.2 12.1 17.1

5 to 9.... 11.9 11.7 12.2 12.4 12.7 12.2 10.1 8.5 12.3

10 to 14.... 10.7 10.5 10.9 12.0 12.3 11.8 5.8 5.0 7.0

15 to 19.... 10.4 10.6 10.2 11.1 11.1 11.1 7.7 8.8 6.1

20 to 24.... 10.5 10.9 10.0 7.5 6.6 8.5 21.3 24.4 16.9

25 to 29.... 9.7 9.4 10.1 8.0 7.2 8.7 16.3 16.3 16.3

30 to 34.... 8.8 8.8 8.8 7.8 7.6 7.9 12.4 12.4 12.4

35 to 44.... 10.7 10.9 10.4 11.0 11.1 10.9 9.4 10.3 8.3

45 to 54.... 7.7 8.0 7.4 9.4 10.0 8.7 1.7 1.5 2.0

55 to 59.... 2.7 3.0 2.5 3.4 3.8 3.0 .4 .3 .5

60 to 64.... 1.8 1.8 1.8 2.3 2.3 2.2 .2 .2 .3

65 and over. 2.8 2.5 3.1 3.4 3.2 3.7 .5 .3 .8

Median.... 22.3 22.4 22.1 21.8 21.5 22.0 22.9 23.2 22.2

___________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80-1-C/D54, Table 19;

Unpublished tabulations.

ÀU UÀ

The percentage distribution by age group also shows differences (Table

2.11). Altogether females were 48 percent of the population on Guam in

1980; while females constituted almost half of the civilian population, they

were only about 4 in every 10 of the military population (and, of course,

many of these were dependents). Among the civilians, in the young ages

females were just slightly less than half of all persons and were more than

half of those 20 to 35 years old. For ages 35 to 64, however, there were

more males than females in the civilian population, probably because of the

selective nature of international migration, with larger numbers of male

immigrants than females. For the elderly, females were a larger percentage

of the civilian population than were males.

The military population showed a very different pattern. More than 2

of every 3 military persons between 15 and 24 were male, and while the

proportions decreased to below 6 in 10 for persons 25 to 34, more than 6 in

10 of those 35 to 44 were males. More than half of the persons 55 years and

over in military households, however, were female.

There is some evidence from these data that there is a discrepancy

between the military and civilian data for persons 20 to 29 which show

surpluses of civilian females. Military males who were on ships and left

their families behind would have been recorded as civilian since no one in

the household would have been identified as military; hence, this surplus of

civilian females in the age group was probably at least partially explained

by the fact that many of these women were married to military personnel who

were on ships and left their families behind. (Their children are less

easily disaggregated from all children.)

À UUÀTable 2.11. Percent Age and Sex by Military Household Status: 1980

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Total Civilians Military

------------------------------------------------------

Age Group Total Males Fmles Total Males Fmles Total Males Fmles

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Total.... 100.0 52.2 47.8 100.0 50.5 49.5 100.0 58.3 41.7

0 to 4.... 100.0 50.9 49.1 100.0 51.3 48.7 100.0 49.7 50.3

5 to 9.... 100.0 51.1 48.9 100.0 51.6 48.4 100.0 49.1 50.9

10 to 14.... 100.0 51.5 48.5 100.0 51.7 48.3 100.0 50.0 50.0

15 to 19.... 100.0 53.2 46.8 100.0 50.6 49.4 100.0 66.8 33.2

20 to 24.... 100.0 54.2 45.8 100.0 44.4 55.6 100.0 66.9 33.1

25 to 29.... 100.0 50.3 49.7 100.0 45.9 54.1 100.0 58.2 41.8

30 to 34.... 100.0 52.3 47.7 100.0 49.6 50.4 100.0 58.3 41.7

35 to 44.... 100.0 53.4 46.6 100.0 51.1 48.9 100.0 63.4 36.6

45 to 54.... 100.0 54.0 46.0 100.0 54.1 45.9 100.0 50.9 49.1

55 to 59.... 100.0 56.1 43.9 100.0 56.4 43.6 100.0 47.3 52.7

60 to 64.... 100.0 52.3 47.7 100.0 52.5 47.5 100.0 44.4 55.6

65 and over. 100.0 47.1 52.9 100.0 47.5 52.5 100.0 37.4 62.6

___________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80-1-C/D54, Table 19;

Unpublished tabulations.

ÀU UÀ

Table 2.12 further disaggregates the military data into persons who

were actually in the military in 1980 and those who were civilians but

living in military households. There were 10,125 persons (10 percent of

Guam's total population) on active-duty status in the military in 1980:

9,224 males and 901 females. The median age of these persons was 26.5

years, more than 4 years more than for the rest of the population in

military households (because so many of the other people in military

households were children), and about 4 years more than for the general

population of Guam.

Military persons constituted more than half of all persons 20 to 24

years old (67 percent of the males and 33 percent of the females in that age

group), and were 49 percent of the persons 25 to 29 years old. Of course,

for planning and other policy purposes, military households and families,

and not only the military persons must be considered, so the analysis in

this report for military-civilian differences focuses on the whole

household, and not merely the military person himself or herself.

À UUÀTable 2.12. Median Age by Sex and Military Status: 1980

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Military

------------------------------

Total Civilians Households Persons

------------------------------------------------------

Age Group Males Fmles Males Fmles Males Fmles Males Fmles Total

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Total.... 55321 50658 42056 41170 13265 9488 9224 901 10125

0 to 4.... 6620 6382 5017 4758 1603 1624 0 0 0

5 to 9.... 6458 6174 5333 5007 1125 1167 0 0 0

10 to 14.... 5835 5503 5176 4843 659 660 0 0 0

15 to 19.... 5849 5144 4685 4565 1164 579 843 119 962

20 to 24.... 6019 5089 2782 3485 3237 1604 3149 460 3609

25 to 29.... 5194 5130 3038 3583 2156 1547 2094 214 2308

30 to 34.... 4854 4435 3204 3256 1650 1179 1622 64 1686

35 to 44.... 6036 5259 4673 4472 1363 787 1336 26 1362

45 to 54.... 4409 3763 4212 3573 197 190 152 15 167

55 to 59.... 1634 1280 1590 1231 44 49 17 3 20

60 to 64.... 1008 919 984 889 24 30 7 0 7

65 and over. 1405 1580 1362 1508 43 72 4 0 4

Median.... 22.4 22.1 21.5 22.0 23.2 22.2 26.5 22.2 26.1

____________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80-1-C/D54, Tables 19 and 36

ÀU UÀ

There were more than 10 active-duty military males for every military

female in 1980 (Table 2.13). None of the age groups showed anything like

equal proportions. Although there were fewer than 10 males per female for

persons less than 29 and more than 55, there were 25 males for every female

30 to 34, and 51 for those 35 to 44 years old.

Table 2.13 also shows that for all military households, there were more

females than males under 15 and over 55, but that males predominated in the

middle years, with more than 2 males per female 15 to 24 years old. The

problem with the ratio of males to females 20 to 29 in the civilian

population is also seen here, since there is a great surplus of females

here, once again indicating that some of these females should more properly

have been placed in the military category.

À UUÀTable 2.13. Males per 100 Females by Age and Military Status: 1980

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Military Military

Age Group Total Civilians Households Persons

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Total.... 109.2 102.2 139.8 1023.8

0 to 4.... 103.7 105.4 98.7 ...

5 to 9.... 104.6 106.5 96.4 ...

10 to 14.... 106.0 106.9 99.8 ...

15 to 19.... 113.7 102.6 201.0 708.4

20 to 24.... 118.3 79.8 201.8 684.6

25 to 29.... 101.2 84.8 139.4 978.5

30 to 34.... 109.4 98.4 139.9 2534.4

35 to 44.... 114.8 104.5 173.2 5138.5

45 to 54.... 117.2 117.9 103.7 1013.3

55 to 59.... 127.7 129.2 89.8 566.7

60 to 64.... 109.7 110.7 80.0 ...

65 and over. 88.9 90.3 59.7 ...

______________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80-1-C/D54, Table 19 and

Table 36.

ÀU UÀ

SUMMARYœ

While the median age in 1980 was less than that of the U.S., Guam's

population is aging. Median age was higher for civilian females than for

civilian males; the opposite was true for the military, and the overall

median age for the military was higher than that of civilians. The

proportion of the total population less than 5 years old was 12 percent; the

proportion over 65 years was 3 percent. The dependency ratio in 1980 was

60.5.

From 1930 onward, the sex ratio of the population was greater than 103;

it was 109 in 1980. The sex ratio was higher for both military persons and

military households.

The military dominated in the age groups less than 5 years and 20 to 34

years; civilians did so in all other age groups. Due to definitions of

military households used in special retabulations of the 1980 census, some

military dependent spouses were put into the civilian category, causing

surpluses of female civilians in certain age groups.

We have briefly presented data on the age and sex distribution of the

population on Guam for 1940 through 1980. It is clear that because of the

military presence and the large amount of immigration, Guam will not show a

"normal" population distribution for the foreseeable future.

CHAPTER 3

HOUSEHOLD CHARACTERISTICS

class=Section3>

Characteristics of the households of Guam reflect many of the sociological and economic changes that have taken place over the years. For many years, extended family households, consisting of parents, children, grandparents, grandchildren, siblings, and other relatives were considered to be the norm. By 1980, extended families were the exception, as fertility and family size declined, and more people were employed in the cash than the subsistence economy. The decline of household size and changes in its composition can be seen in the Census data from 1940 to 1980.

The first question asked in the 1980 Census that was used in determining household status and relationships was Question 1: "What is the name of each person who was living here on Tuesday, April 1, 1980, or who was staying or visiting here and had no other home"?. The second was Item B: Type of unit or quarters, which was to be filled in by the enumerator or a Census office clerk. Question 2: "How is ___ related to ___(the person named in column one)?" was used to obtain the household relationships and helped to delineate family units. Possible responses fell into categories of being related to the person in column one (the householder), such as a spouse, child, sibling, parent, or other relative, and not being related to that person, such as boarder, roommate, paid employee, or other nonrelative. Several other questions in the household section of the questionnaire probed to determine if anyone was not listed, and whether they should be added to the list of household members.

The 1920 and 1930 Censuses did not have household or family questions. In the 1940 Census, the classification of household members was less detailed than in subsequent years. The term "private family" was used to designate everything from a person living alone to an extended family with others living in the home, such as employees and boarders, as long as they made up a single household. The only collection of persons residing together not considered a "private family" was a group of persons living in a hotel, a lodginghouse with five or more lodgers, a school dormitory, prison or jail, hospital or other institution where they were likely to remain for considerable periods of time, the personnel of a military post or a naval station, or the members of a camp or barracks of laborers. These persons were designated as "quasi-family groups". When tabulated, however, distinctions were made between heads of "private families", wives and children, other relatives, other members of private families, and members of "quasi-family groups".

The definitions used for households in the 1950 Census were similar to those used in the 1940 Census, with a change in terminology from "private families" to household. A household (in 1950) included all persons who occupied a house, an apartment, or other group of rooms, or a room that constituted a dwelling unit. In general, a group of rooms occupied a separate living quarters was a dwelling unit if it had separate cooking equipment or if it constituted the only living quarters in the structure. A household included both related family members and unrelated persons, such as lodgers and employees, as it did in 1940. A person living alone in a dwelling unit, or a group of unrelated persons sharing a dwelling unit as partners, was counted as a household. The number of "private families" in 1940 may be regarded as comparable to the number of households in 1950. Quasi-households were not counted as households in 1950.

In 1960, a household was defined as all persons who occupied a housing unit. A

The percentage of married males showed the same fluctuations as the never married, but in the opposite direction. Between 1960 and 1980 about 6 in every 10 males were married. The percentage divorced remained small, but has been increasing with each census. On the other hand, the percentage of widowers, which was about 5 percent in 1930 and 1940, decreased to about 1 percent in 1960, and has remained there.

Table 4.1. Marital Status for Males: 1930 to 1980

Marital Status 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940 1930

Males, 15 yrs & over.. 36,408 30,978 25,319 32,572 6,158 5,673

Percent............. 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Never married........... 33.3 34.1 34.4 55.1 42.4 46.9

Now married............. 62.2 61.7 61.9 39.7 51.6 47.8

Consensually married.. 1.6 .8 ... ... ... ...

Separated............... .9 .6 .6 (NA) (NA) (NA)

Divorced................ 2.3 2.2 1.5 (NA) .4 .4

Widowed................. 1.4 1.3 1.4 (NA) 5.6 4.8

___________________________________________________________________________

Note: 1970 and 1950 data for persons 14 years and over; for 1930 to

1950 "separated" included in "now married"; for 1950, 1698

widowed/divorced males included in total.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Census Reports

The percentage of never married females has not seen the dramatic changes the males experienced because few of the females were in the military (Table 4.2). For all censuses through the years, the percentage of never married females has been less than comparable males, partly because of the large number of single males in the military. There has been a general downward trend in the percentage of never married females, with glitches in 1940 and again in 1970.

The "now married" segment shows the inverse trend, as with the males. The percentage of divorced females remained at 1 percent or less until 1980 when it jumped to more than 3 percent; the percentage of widows also decreased from more than 10 percent in 1930 and 1940 to about 5 percent in 1970 and 1980.

Table 4.2. Marital Status for Females: 1930 to 1980

Marital Status 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940 1930

Females, 15 yrs & over 32,599 22,241 14,483 11,561 6,298 5,065

Percent............. 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Never married........... 26.2 29.6 23.1 31.5 39.0 35.7

Now married............. 63.4 63.4 67.7 59.0 50.3 53.0

Consensually married.. 1.6 .7 ... ... ... ...

Separated............... 1.3 .9 1.1 (NA) (NA) (NA)

Divorced................ 3.5 1.1 1.1 (NA) .3 .4

Widowed................. 5.5 4.9 6.8 (NA) 10.3 10.8

___________________________________________________________________________

Note: 1970 and 1950 data for persons 14 years and over; for 1930 to

1950 "separated" included in "now married"; for 1950, 1091

widowed/divorced females included in total.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports.

Tables 4.3 and 4.4 show more the recent trends by sex. For males, the percent change for separated and consensually married persons has been much greater than the change for all males. Some of the change may be due to different interpretations for these categories, and the definitions for separated and consensually married may be ambiguous to some respondents.

Table 4.3. Marital Status for Males: 1970 and 1980

Percent

Number Change Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ 1970 to‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Marital Status 1980 1970 1980 1980 1970

Males, 15 yrs & over.. 36,408 30,978 17.5 100.0 100.0

Never married........... 12,122 10,559 14.8 33.3 34.1

Now married............. 22,637 19,120 18.4 62.2 61.7

Consensually married.. 581 252 130.6 1.6 .8

Separated............... 320 190 68.4 .9 .6

Divorced................ 825 697 18.4 2.3 2.2

Widowed................. 504 412 22.3 1.4 1.3

________________________________________________________________________

Note: 1970 data are for persons 14 years and over.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑B54 1980, Table 15, PC(1)‑B54,

Table 6

The percentage changes for females were larger than for males between 1970 and 1980. Although the number of females 15 years and over increased by about one‑third between 1970 and 1980, the percent divorced jumped by 78 percent, and consensually married females increased by more than 70 percent. Also, separated females increased by about 50 percent.

Table 4.4. Marital Status for Females: 1970 and 1980

Percent

Number Change Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ 1970 to‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Marital Status 1980 1970 1980 1980 1970

Females, 15 yrs & over 32,599 22,241 46.6 100.0 100.0

Never married........... 8,553 6,593 29.7 26.2 29.6

Now married............. 20,670 14,093 46.7 63.4 63.4

Consensually married.. 529 151 250.3 1.6 .7

Separated............... 414 208 99.0 1.3 .9

Divorced................ 1,155 252 358.3 3.5 1.1

Widowed................. 1,807 1,095 65.0 5.5 4.9

________________________________________________________________________

Note: 1970 data are for persons 14 years and over.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑B54 1980, Table 15,

PC(1)‑B54, Table 6

There was very little difference in the distribution of civilian and military persons (defined on the basis of a military person in the household) in 1980. The percentage of never married military males was insignificantly higher than for civilians. A higher percentage of civilians than military males were consensually married, and a larger percentage were widowed. Although 73 percent of the adult male population was civilian, 93 percent of the consensually married males were civilian, as were 94 percent of the widowers.

Table 4.5. Marital Status of Males by Civilian/Military Dependent Status:

1980

Numbers Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ Percent

Civi‑ Mili‑ Civi‑ Mili‑ Civi‑

Marital Status Total lian tary lian tary lian

Males, 15 yrs & over.. 36,408 26,530 9,878 100.0 100.0 72.9

Never married........... 12,122 8,746 3,376 33.0 34.2 72.1

Now married............. 22,637 16,483 6,154 62.1 62.3 72.8

Consensually married.. 581 538 43 2.0 .4 92.6

Separated............... 320 221 99 .8 1.0 69.1

Divorced................ 825 605 220 2.3 2.2 73.3

Widowed................. 504 475 29 1.8 .3 94.2

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 19.

The marital distribution by civilian and military status for females differed somewhat from the males (Table 4.6). Military females were more likely to be married than civilian females, probably because females in military households are more likely to be the wives of military men than males are to be the husbands of military females. For all other categories, civilian females were present in larger percentages than for the whole population (with more than 90 percent).

Table 4.6. Marital Status of Females by Civilian/Military Dependent Status:

1980

Numbers Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ Percent

Civi‑ Mili‑ Civi‑ Mili‑ Civi‑

Marital Status Total lian tary lian tary lian

Females, 15 yrs & over 32,599 26,562 6,037 100.0 100.0 81.5

Never married........... 8,553 7,806 747 29.4 12.4 91.3

Now married............. 20,670 15,581 5,089 58.7 84.3 75.4

Consensually married.. 529 488 41 1.8 .7 92.2

Separated............... 414 396 18 1.5 .3 95.7

Divorced................ 1,155 1,068 87 4.0 1.4 92.5

Widowed................. 1,807 1,711 96 6.4 1.6 94.7

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 19.

Data on marital status by age were not tabulated in 1970. When compared to the 1960 data, the 1980 data show that males tended to get married at slightly younger ages than in the earlier census (Table 4.7). The Singulate Mean Age at Marriage (SMAM) (Hajnal 1954) is derived by an indirect technique to obtain the average age at first marriage for a population or group. The average age at first marriage for males on Guam in 1980 was 24.5 years (about the same as the 24.9 years reported for the 1960 census).

The number of single males between 30 and 49 years old decreased between 1960 and 1980, while the number of younger and older males increased. Much of this decrease can probably be attributed to military males leaving the island, and not being replaced.

Table 4.7. Percent Never Married by Age for Males: 1960 and 1980

Percent Percent of all

Number Change Persons this Age

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ 1960 to‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age Group 1980 1960 1980 1980 1960

Males, 15 yrs & over.. 12,122 8,715 39.1 33.3 34.4

15 to 19 years.......... 5,667 2,920 94.1 96.9 95.6

20 to 24 years.......... 3,774 3,036 24.3 62.7 67.1

25 to 29 years.......... 1,319 989 33.4 25.4 29.2

30 to 34 years.......... 554 876 ‑36.8 11.4 19.4

35 to 39 years.......... 251 381 ‑34.1 7.4 11.1

40 to 44 years.......... 156 172 ‑9.3 5.9 7.9

45 to 49 years.......... 110 113 ‑2.6 5.1 6.7

50 to 54 years.......... 106 93 14.0 4.7 9.0

55 to 59 years.......... 80 50 60.0 4.9 7.8

60 years and over....... 105 85 23.5 4.4 10.0

SMAM.................... ... ... ... 24.5 24.9

________________________________________________________________________

Source: 1980 Unpublished data and 1960 Census, Table 13.

The Singulate Mean Age at Marriage for females in 1960 was 20.5 years, which increased to 22.1 years in 1980 (Table 4.8). Unlike the males, the percentage of never married females increased for all ages. As the singulate mean age of first marriage indicates, it is likely that females are delaying first marriage to finish schooling or to enter the labor force because the proportions never married have changed considerably. While only 32 percent of the 20 to 24 year old females in 1960 had never married, this percentage had increased to 40 percent in 1980.

Table 4.8. Percent Never Married by Age for Females: 1960 to 1980

Percent Percent of all

Number Change Persons this Age

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ 1960 to‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age Group 1980 1960 1980 1980 1960

Females, 15 yrs & over 8,553 3,351 155.2 26.2 23.1

15 to 19 years.......... 4,635 1,690 174.3 90.1 87.1

20 to 24 years.......... 2,039 713 186.0 40.1 32.2

25 to 29 years.......... 780 266 193.2 15.2 12.2

30 to 34 years.......... 344 175 96.6 7.8 8.4

35 to 39 years.......... 169 123 37.4 5.9 7.2

40 to 44 years.......... 159 112 42.0 6.6 9.1

45 to 49 years.......... 94 80 17.5 4.7 8.4

50 to 54 years.......... 98 69 42.0 5.6 9.9

55 to 59 years.......... 66 41 61.0 5.2 7.8

60 years and over....... 169 82 106.1 6.8 8.8

SMAM.................... ... ... ... 22.1 20.5

________________________________________________________________________

Source: 1980 Unpublished data and 1960 Census Report, Table 13.

Using vital statistics data to compute mean age at first marriage for the years 1981 through 1985 yields slightly higher results (Table 4.9). The mean age at first marriage for females was 24.1 years in 1981, decreased to 23.9 years in 1982, then increased and decreased again in 1983 and 1984. In 1986, it was 24.3 years. The mean age at first marriage for males was 26.3 years in 1981, decreased to 25.7 years in 1982, rose to 26.7 years in 1983, then steadily decreased to 25.9 years in 1985.

Table 4.9. Mean Age at First Marriage by Sex: Guam, 1981 to 1985

1981‑

Sex 1985 1981 1982 1983 1984 1985

Male 26.4 26.3 25.7 26.7 26.4 25.9

Female 24.4 24.1 23.9 24.6 24.3 24.3

______________________________________________________________________

Source: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics, DPHSS.

CONSENSUAL MARRIAGE

Use of "consensually" married on the questionnaire is somewhat problematic because there is no generally agreed upon definition of what constitutes a consensual union. As noted previously, for 1980, the Census Bureau defined a consensual marriage as a couple who were "living in a marital union without a civil or religious matrimonial contract". It is likely, however, that respondents and enumerators did not always use this definition to decide on marital status of individuals in the census.

In traditional Micronesian societies, marriage was not necessarily formalized by a religious ceremony, and persons sometimes moved into and out of unions over the years. Although many marriages among Chamorros were formalized after Hispanization by the Catholic Church, not all marriages were then or are now formalized. Nonetheless, it is not clear that the Census is the best instrument for collecting data on this subject.

Altogether 581 of the 22,637 (3 percent) of the married males in 1980 were in consensual unions (Table 4.10). Although more than 11 percent of the married males 15 to 19 years old and 5 percent of those 20 to 24 were married consensually, the percentages dropped off after that. Males in consensual unions, then, tended to be younger than those who were in regular unions, that is, the younger the male, the more likely he was to be consensually married.

These data indicate that there may be problems in interpreting "consensual" marriage. Since these unions do not seem to persist into middle age, consensual union might be better classified as "trial" marriage. If "consensual" marriage is fully categorized by the Census Bureau definition, then it is very different from non‑consensual unions, at least in terms of age. If the government of Guam is to use the data on consensual marriage for planning and policy use, a re‑definition may be necessary, or at least a more thorough evaluation by a survey may be required.

Table 4.10. Consensually Married Males by Age: 1980

Number Percent Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ Consen‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

All Consen‑ sually All Consen‑

Age Group Married sually Married Married sually

Males, 15 yrs & over.. 22,637 581 2.6 100.0 100.0

15 to 19 years.......... 176 20 11.4 .8 3.4

20 to 24 years.......... 2,142 113 5.3 9.5 19.4

25 to 29 years.......... 3,653 118 3.2 16.1 20.3

30 to 34 years.......... 4,087 93 2.3 18.1 16.0

35 to 44 years.......... 5,302 122 2.3 23.4 21.0

45 to 54 years.......... 3,921 65 1.7 17.3 11.2

55 to 59 years.......... 1,453 24 1.7 6.4 4.1

60 to 64 years.......... 856 19 2.2 3.8 3.3

65 years and over....... 1,047 7 .7 4.6 1.2

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 19.

The data for females in consensual unions were similar to the data for males (Table 4.11). Again, about 3 percent of the marriages were consensual, and the trend by age was similar to that found among the men.

Table 4.11. Consensually Married Females by Age: 1980

Number Percent Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ Consen‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

All Consen‑ sually All Consen‑

Age Group Married sually Married Married sually

Females, 15 + years... 20,670 529 2.6 100.0 100.0

15 to 19 years.......... 490 56 11.4 2.4 10.6

20 to 24 years.......... 2,866 168 5.9 13.9 31.8

25 to 29 years.......... 4,034 100 2.5 19.5 18.9

30 to 34 years.......... 3,740 77 2.1 18.1 14.6

35 to 44 years.......... 4,405 70 1.6 21.3 13.2

45 to 54 years.......... 3,003 35 1.2 14.5 6.6

55 to 59 years.......... 935 12 1.3 4.5 2.3

60 to 64 years.......... 608 5 .8 2.9 .9

65 years and over....... 589 6 1.0 2.8 1.1

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 19.

More than half of the consensual unions for males were of males born on Guam, compared to only 3 in 10 of all marriages, although these were only 4 percent of all the marriages for males born on Guam (Table 4.12). Micronesians were more likely to be in consensual unions than Asians or persons born in other places, with Palauans and Other Micronesians having more than 5 percent of their marriages being consensual. On the other hand, males born in the United States and Philippines had very low rates of consensual unions; in fact, although marriages to males born in the U.S. were 30 percent of all marriages, they were only 16 percent of the consensual unions.

Table 4.12. Consensually Married Males by Birthplace: 1980

Number Percent Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ Consen‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

All Consen‑ sually All Consen‑

Birthplace Married sually Married Married sually

Males, 15 yrs & over.. 22,637 581 2.6 100.0 100.0

Guam.................... 6,738 306 4.5 29.8 52.7

Northern Mariana Is..... 409 19 4.6 1.8 3.3

Palau................... 206 11 5.3 .9 1.9

Other Micronesia........ 99 5 5.1 .4 .9

Asia.................... 7,237 134 1.9 32.0 23.1

Japan and Okinawa..... 296 4 1.4 1.3 .7

Philippines........... 6,104 66 1.1 27.0 11.4

United States........... 6,725 91 1.4 29.7 15.7

Elsewhere and N.S....... 1,223 15 1.2 5.4 2.6

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 24.

Finally, 61 percent of all of the female consensual marriages were of females born on Guam, compared to 37 percent of all marriages for females born on Guam (Table 4.13). Once again, Palau (8 percent) and Other Micronesia (6 percent) had the highest percentage of consensual unions, while United States and Asia had the lowest percentages. Although Asians made up 32 percent of all marriages, they were only 12 percent of the consensual unions.

Table 4.13. Consensually Married Females by Birthplace: 1980

Number Percent Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ Consen‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

All Consen‑ sually All Consen‑

Birthplace Married sually Married Married sually

Females, 15 + yrs..... 20,670 529 2.6 100.0 100.0

Guam.................... 7,658 325 4.2 37.0 61.4

Northern Mariana Is..... 463 25 5.4 2.2 4.7

Palau................... 275 23 8.4 1.3 4.3

Other Micronesia........ 107 7 6.5 .5 1.3

Asia.................... 6,725 62 .9 32.5 11.7

Japan and Okinawa..... 707 6 .8 3.4 1.1

Philippines........... 4,882 22 .5 23.6 4.2

United States........... 4,759 69 1.4 23.0 13.0

Elsewhere and N.S....... 683 18 2.6 3.3 3.4

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 24.

MARITAL STATUS BY REGION

For 1980, the Northern and Southern regions had basically similar percentages of single persons, 27.3 and 29.4 percent, respectively (Table 4.14). Piti, with 40.8 percent, and Umatac, with 38.0 percent, had the highest percentages of single persons in relation to their respective election district populations. These election districts had relatively small populations: Piti had a total population of 2,368 and Umatac had the island's lowest population with 405.

Similar population composition is seen in the "now married" category with the Northern region showing 66.6 percent and the Southern area with 65.1 percent of their respective total populations currently married. The election district of Santa Rita in the South had the highest percentage of married persons with 73.4 percent of its total. Sinajana, a moderately populated village in the Central region, had the lowest with 52.7 percent.

Table 4.14. Marital Status of Persons 15+ Years by Election District

Guam: 1980

Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Now

Election District Total Total Single Marrd Widwd Divrcd

Guam................. 69007 100.0 30.0 63.8 3.3 2.9

North................. 31166 100.0 27.3 66.6 3.0 3.1

Dededo................... 14591 100.0 27.8 66.6 3.2 2.4

Tamuning................. 9768 100.0 26.8 65.2 3.3 4.6

Yigo..................... 6807 100.0 27.0 68.8 1.9 2.2

Central.............. 23167 100.0 33.8 59.2 3.7 3.2

Agana.................... 673 100.0 33.9 57.2 4.0 4.9

Agana Heights............ 2244 100.0 34.8 56.0 5.1 4.1

Asan..................... 1389 100.0 28.9 63.6 4.4 3.1

Barrigada................ 5176 100.0 34.2 60.1 3.4 2.3

Chalan Pago‑Ordot........ 1878 100.0 32.6 60.8 4.4 2.2

Mangilao................. 4412 100.0 30.1 63.7 2.7 3.4

Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite...... 3450 100.0 33.9 58.1 3.6 4.4

Piti..................... 2368 100.0 40.8 54.8 1.9 2.6

Sinajana................. 1577 100.0 36.8 52.7 7.1 3.4

South................ 14674 100.0 29.4 65.1 3.6 2.0

Agat..................... 2477 100.0 33.2 59.3 5.0 2.5

Inarajan................. 1206 100.0 36.3 57.5 5.1 1.1

Merizo................... 998 100.0 33.4 58.4 5.7 2.5

Santa Rita............... 5934 100.0 23.5 73.4 1.8 1.4

Talofofo................. 1183 100.0 34.4 59.6 3.8 2.2

Umatac................... 405 100.0 38.0 53.1 7.4 1.5

Yona..................... 2461 100.0 31.2 62.1 4.0 2.6

_____________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A 1980 Table 26.

All three regions had about the same percentages for those widowed: North had 3.0 percent, Central 3.7 percent and South 3.6 percent. The village of Umatac had the highest percentage with 7.4 percent of its total being widowed.

Divorces were low in 1980 with an overall of 3 percent for all districts. The village of Agana with the second lowest population of 673 showed the highest rate of divorced persons at 5 percent, followed by Tamuning, the second highest in population at 9,768, with 5 percent divorced.

So far, in this chapter, we have given a brief overview of marriage patterns from recent decennial censuses. These data will now be analyzed with reference to vital statistics.

VITAL STATISTICS

Data obtained from vital statistics are shown for the six year period 1980 through 1985 for the following section of this chapter. In the later portion, a five year period, 1978 through 1982, is discussed.

Chamorro grooms comprised between 19 percent and 25 percent of the cohort totals for the years 1980 to 1985 (Table 4.15). Their numbers rose slightly between 1980 and 1982 (a total of 32), and then increased dramatically in 1983 by 48. However, the following year there was a sharp decrease from 390 to 313. In 1985, their numbers increased again considerably, from 313 to 359, a gain of 46 grooms.

Table 4.15. Marriage by Race of Groom: 1980 to 1985

Race 1985 1984 1983 1982 1981 1980

Total........ 1498 1382 1653 1393 1480 1636

Chamorro.......... 359 313 390 342 308 310

Caucasian......... 401 293 287 274 264 284

Filipino.......... 221 229 152 147 204 216

Micronesian....... 36 36 28 30 30 26

Negro............. 79 70 66 55 56 40

Japanese.......... 279 320 598 429 492 670

Chinese........... 10 11 8 4 8 10

Other Asian....... 20 17 13 15 15 4

All Others........ 93 93 111 97 103 76

________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: Annual Statistical Reports,Office of Vital Statistics, DPH&SS.

Table 4.16. Percent Marriage by Race of Groom: 1980 to 1985

Race 1985 1984 1983 1982 1981 1980

Total........ 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Chamorro.......... 24.0 22.6 23.6 24.6 20.8 18.9

Caucasian......... 26.8 21.2 17.4 19.7 17.8 17.4

Filipino.......... 14.8 16.6 9.2 10.6 13.8 13.2

Micronesian....... 2.4 2.6 1.7 2.2 2.0 1.6

Negro............. 5.3 5.1 4.0 3.9 3.8 2.4

Japanese.......... 18.6 23.2 36.2 30.8 33.2 41.0

Chinese........... .7 .8 .5 .3 .5 .6

Other Asian....... 1.3 1.2 .8 1.1 1.0 .2

All Others........ 6.2 6.7 6.7 7.0 7.0 4.6

________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: Annual Statistical Reports,Office of Vital Statistics, DPH&SS.

The percentage of Chamorro brides, as compared to Chamorro grooms, showed even greater stability over the six‑year period (Table 4.17). There was a gain of 4 percentage points, from 26 in 1980 to 30 in 1981. There was a slight increase of 2 percentage points the following year. In 1983, the percentage dipped slightly to 28, only to rise again in 1984 to 29 and then to 30 in 1985. Chamorro brides appeared to follow a trend similar to that of Chamorro grooms. With the exception of 1981, where the number of grooms was less than that of 1980, brides showed a steady increase to a peak in 1982 and 1983. Both showed their highest count in 1983: 462 Chamorro brides and 390 Chamorro grooms.

Table 4.17. Marriage by Race of Bride: 1980 to 1985

Race 1985 1984 1983 1982 1981 1980

Total........ 1498 1382 1653 1393 1480 1636

Chamorro.......... 442 406 462 444 436 418

Caucasian......... 206 161 180 193 184 181

Filipino.......... 332 284 208 153 195 198

Micronesian....... 63 46 62 46 41 47

Negro............. 34 34 26 29 19 14

Japanese.......... 300 349 605 442 496 683

Chinese........... 9 7 8 2 10 7

Other Asian....... 12 8 5 9 9 0

All Others........ 100 87 97 75 90 88

________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics, DPH&SS.

Table 4.18. Percent Marriage by Race of Bride: 1980 to 1985

Race 1985 1984 1983 1982 1981 1980

Total........ 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Chamorro.......... 29.5 29.4 27.9 31.9 29.5 25.6

Caucasian......... 13.8 11.6 10.9 13.9 12.4 11.1

Filipino.......... 22.2 20.5 12.6 11.0 13.2 12.1

Micronesian....... 4.2 3.3 3.8 3.3 2.8 2.9

Negro............. 2.3 2.5 1.6 2.1 1.3 .9

Japanese.......... 20.0 25.3 36.6 31.7 33.5 41.7

Chinese........... .6 .5 .5 .1 .7 .4

Other Asian....... .8 .6 .3 .6 .6 0.0

All Others........ 6.5 6.1 5.7 5.4 6.1 5.1

________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics, DPH&SS.

Caucasian grooms outnumbered any other race in 1985 with a total of 401. However, prior years showed considerably lower totals; the next greatest total was 293 in 1984, and the lowest was 264 in 1981 for this racial group. Caucasian brides also showed their highest total in 1985 with 206, although they were the fourth highest ethnic group reported.

The Office of Vital Statistics does not report military marriages specifically, although some tables in the Annual Statistical Report indicate marriages that took place in a military area. One explanation for the large increase in Caucasian marriages might be that Guam became a homeport for a few Naval vessels and, conceivably, marriages occurred to military personnel while they were homeported here. The effect of the military ‑ including reservists ‑ on marriage cannot be ascertained without more specific data. Perhaps the inclusion of specified tables on military marriages in the Annual Statistical Report will help.

There was a greater number of Filipino brides than Filipino grooms in 1985. In 1980, the situation was reversed, with Filipino grooms slightly exceeding the number of Filipino brides: 216 grooms in 1980 as compared to 198 brides, whereas in 1985 there were 332 Filipino brides compared to 221 grooms. A plausible explanation for the relatively low number of marriages in these groups is that there is probably a high degree of selective female migration to Hawaii and the U.S. mainland, where migrants acquire jobs as nurses, domestic laborers, farm helpers, etc.

The other racial groups had fewer brides and grooms, except for Japanese, who showed consistently higher figures than most ethnic groups in the six‑year period. The Japanese, however, have very little impact on the population of Guam, since they come here to marry, honeymoon, and then return to Japan.

For both sexes, all of the large racial groups (Chamorro, Filipino, and Caucasian) showed tremendous increases in the number of divorces in 1985 as compared to 1984 (Tables 4.19 through 4.22), or any previous year.

Table 4.19. Divorces by Race of Husband: 1980 to 1985

Race 1985 1984 1983 1982 1981 1980

Total........ 899 622 617 508 382 521

Chamorro.......... 202 133 125 103 100 103

Micronesian....... 20 14 15 11 7 14

Caucasian......... 305 170 184 191 132 180

Filipino.......... 203 125 121 112 98 165

Negro............. 53 29 17 16 8 18

Japanese.......... 10 6 4 3 3 2

Chinese........... 4 2 8 2 1 6

Other Asian....... 32 26 42 42 18 25

All Others........ 48 49 32 13 11 6

Not Reported...... 22 68 69 15 4 2

________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics, DPH&SS.

Caucasian husbands had the highest divorce totals ‑ both in numbers and percents ‑ consistently throughout the five year period. However, Caucasian wives ranked second to Chamorro wives for the same period.

Table 4.20. Divorces by Race of Wife: 1980 to 1985

Race 1985 1984 1983 1982 1981 1980

Total........ 899 622 617 508 382 521

Chamorro.......... 232 180 178 138 122 132

Micronesian....... 22 16 17 15 10 16

Caucasian......... 227 140 122 147 94 133

Filipino.......... 212 108 108 96 87 152

Negro............. 36 18 13 14 4 7

Japanese.......... 20 10 14 3 5 5

Chinese........... 4 3 4 1 1 7

Other Asian....... 41 33 56 66 47 60

All Others........ 81 50 38 10 8 7

Not Reported...... 24 64 67 18 4 2

________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics, DPH&SS.

Filipino husbands and wives tended to parallel each other over the five year period. Both sexes showed a drop in divorces between 1980 and 1981, and then a gradual increase afterward.

Table 4.21. Percent Divorces by Race of Husband: 1980 to 1985

Race 1985 1984 1983 1982 1981 1980

Total........ 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Chamorro.......... 22.5 21.4 20.3 20.3 26.2 19.8

Micronesian....... 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.2 1.8 2.7

Caucasian......... 33.9 27.3 29.8 37.6 34.6 34.5

Filipino.......... 22.6 20.1 19.6 22.0 25.7 31.7

Negro............. 5.9 4.7 2.8 3.1 2.1 3.5

Japanese.......... 1.1 1.0 .6 .6 .8 .4

Chinese........... .4 .3 1.3 .4 .3 1.2

Other Asian....... 3.6 4.2 6.8 8.3 4.7 4.8

All Others........ 5.3 7.9 5.2 2.6 2.9 1.2

Not Reported...... 2.4 10.9 11.2 3.0 1.0 .4

________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics, DPH&SS.

Again, due to the transitory nature of the Japanese ‑ that is, they merely marry on Guam and then go elsewhere ‑ their divorce rate remained quite low, as was the case with the other Asians, particularly Chinese.

Table 4.22. Percent Divorces by Race of Wife: 1980 to 1985

Race 1985 1984 1983 1982 1981 1980

Total........ 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Chamorro.......... 25.8 28.9 28.8 27.2 31.9 25.3

Micronesian....... 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 2.6 3.1

Caucasian......... 25.3 22.5 19.8 28.9 24.6 25.5

Filipino.......... 23.6 17.4 17.5 18.9 22.8 29.2

Negro............. 4.0 2.9 2.1 2.8 1.0 1.3

Japanese.......... 2.2 1.6 2.3 .6 1.3 1.0

Chinese........... .4 .5 .6 .2 .3 1.3

Other Asian....... 4.6 5.3 9.1 13.0 12.3 11.5

All Others........ 9.0 8.0 6.2 2.0 2.1 1.3

Not Reported...... 2.7 10.3 10.9 3.5 1.0 .4

________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics, DPH&SS.

In this segment of the discussion on marriage, data obtained from the Office of Vital Statistics will cover the five year period between 1978 and 1982.

From 1978 to 1980 (Table 4.23), more Caucasian grooms chose brides of other races. In the following two years, 1981 and 1982, the "Other" racial grooms exceeded Caucasians by a discernably small percentage: 16.0 percent in 1981 and 7.2 percent in 1982.

Table 4.23. Marriages by Race of Bride and Race of Groom : 1978 to 1982

Groom's Race

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Bride Same Bride Not Same

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Year Total Total Cham Fil Cauc Other Total Cham Fil Cauc Other

1982... 1393 999 277 84 146 492 394 65 63 128 138

1981... 1480 1054 249 115 137 553 426 59 89 127 151

1980... 1634 1221 248 118 136 719 413 62 98 148 105

1979... 1766 1319 258 148 147 766 447 67 112 142 126

1978... 1767 1423 284 150 153 836 344 47 74 140 83

Percent

1982... 100.0 27.7 8.4 14.6 49.2 100.0 16.5 16.0 32.5 35.0

1981... 100.0 23.6 10.9 13.0 52.5 100.0 13.8 20.9 29.8 35.4

1980... 100.0 20.3 9.7 11.1 58.9 100.0 15.0 23.7 35.8 25.4

1979... 100.0 19.6 11.2 11.1 58.1 100.0 15.0 25.1 31.8 28.2

1978... 100.0 20.0 10.5 10.8 58.7 100.0 13.7 21.5 40.7 24.1

__________________________________________________________________________

Source: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics,

Department of Public Health and Social Services, Guam.

The number of Caucasian grooms taking brides of another race was greater than the number of same‑race marriages in 1980 (Table 4.24). This did not occur in any other racial group for the five year period.

Table 4.24. Marriages of Caucasian Grooms by Race of Bride,

Guam: 1978 to 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Caucasian Grooms Race of Bride

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Year Number Percent Chamorro Filipino Caucasian Other

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

1982..... 274 100.0 16.8 11.3 53.3 18.6

1981..... 264 100.0 13.6 15.9 51.9 18.6

1980..... 284 100.0 18.0 13.0 47.9 21.1

1979..... 289 100.0 16.6 12.1 50.9 20.4

1978..... 293 100.0 17.7 11.9 52.2 18.1

_______________________________________________________________

Source: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics,

Department of Public Health and Social Services, Guam.

There was a slight decrease in the number of same‑race marriages for Chamorros which occurred between 1978 and 1981, but the number rose again in 1982 to 277 (Table 4.25).

Table 4.25. Marriages of Chamorro Grooms by Race of Bride,

Guam: 1978 to 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Chamorro Grooms Race of Bride

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Year Number Percent Chamorro Filipino Caucasian Other

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

1982..... 342 100.0 81.0 6.4 4.4 8.2

1981..... 308 100.0 80.8 8.8 3.9 6.5

1980..... 310 100.0 80.0 7.4 5.8 6.8

1979..... 325 100.0 79.4 5.5 6.5 8.6

1978..... 331 100.0 85.8 4.5 2.4 7.3

_______________________________________________________________

Source: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics,

Department of Public Health and Social Services, Guam.

There was a marked (39 percent) decrease of Filipino grooms from 204 in 1981 to 147 in 1982. This group experienced a slight increase from 1978 to 1979, but then the figure dropped significantly in 1980: from 260 in 1979 to 216 in 1980, a decrease of 20.4 percent.

Table 4.26. Marriages of Filipino Grooms by Race of Bride,

Guam: 1978 to 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Filipino Grooms Race of Bride

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Year Number Percent Chamorro Filipino Caucasian Other

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

1982..... 147 100.0 29.9 57.1 3.4 9.5

1981..... 204 100.0 34.3 56.4 4.9 4.4

1980..... 216 100.0 32.4 54.6 6.0 6.9

1979..... 260 100.0 32.7 56.9 5.0 5.4

1978..... 224 100.0 21.0 67.0 5.8 6.2

_______________________________________________________________

Source: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics,

Department of Public Health and Social Services, Guam.

Grooms of "Other" races showed a marked downward trend between 1978 and 1982, from 919 grooms to 630 (Table 4.27).

Table 4.27. Marriages of Other Race Grooms by Race of Bride,

Guam: 1978 to 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Other Grooms Race of Bride

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Year Number Percent Chamorro Filipino Caucasian Other

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

1982..... 630 100.0 12.2 2.5 4.3 81.0

1981..... 704 100.0 11.5 1.6 3.6 83.4

1980..... 824 100.0 5.9 2.4 1.7 89.9

1979..... 892 100.0 5.9 3.0 2.1 88.9

1978..... 919 100.0 4.9 1.1 1.5 92.5

_______________________________________________________________

Source: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics,

Department of Public Health and Social Services, Guam.

SUMMARY

From looking at both census and vital statistics data, it is apparent that both marriage and divorce are on the rise. It has been estimated in the U.S. that the divorce rate is approaching 50 percent, that one out of every two marriages will end in divorce. On Guam, at least from 1978 to 1985, the rate of divorce was not that high, though it was rising. Between the 1970 and 1980 censuses, the number of divorced males rose 16 percent, while divorced females increased by 78 percent. There was also an increase in the number of separated males (41 percent) and females (50 percent).

Between 1960 and 1980, age at first marriage increased by 8 percent for females, showing that females were delaying their first marriage, probably to finish schooling or enter the labor force.

By region, Central had the highest percentages of single, widowed, and divorced persons; North had the most married. By village, Piti had the most single persons, Santa Rita the greatest married, Umatac the most widowed, and Agana the most divorced.

From 1980 to 1984, Japanese men comprised the greatest percentage of grooms, but this was true of Japanese brides for only 1980 and 1981. Chamorros were the second most likely group to get married between 1980 and 1985, followed closely by Caucasians.

Between 1980 and 1985, Caucasian males were the group most likely to get divorced; Chinese males the least likely. For females, Chamorros had the highest rate of divorce (except for 1980 when it was the Filipinos), for all years, Chinese women were least likely.

Same‑race marriages from 1978 to 1982 seemed to be more common for those belonging to "Other" races than for the 3 largest groups (Chamorro, Filipino, Caucasian). However, when "Others" are removed from consideration, Chamorros were more likely to marry others of their own race. Caucasians generally had the highest rates of mixed race marriages, but this could often backfire: they also had the highest rates of mixed race divorces. Same race divorces, however, outnumbered mixed race divorces in all years.

Since marriage and divorce are events that can happen more than once to a person, and are not as limited by age as fertility is, they are not as easy to work with as other demographic events are. The snapshots provided by census and vital register data can only scratch the surface of what is a fascinating area of human behavior.

CHAPTER 5

FERTILITY

Fertility is of vital interest in the field of demography, in light of the role it plays in giving shape to age‑sex structure and in producing the alteration in the size of a population. The age distribution of a population is more sensitive to changes in fertility behavior than to changes in mortality. The proportion of a population that is young or old depends mainly on the birth rate and not on the death rate, because as people live longer, the population structure, as a whole, becomes older rather than younger. A population has an increasing proportion of older people when the birth rates have fallen and not because the death rates have fallen. Any decline in mortality makes the age distribution younger as more children survive. The decline of mortality has very little effect at middle ages. On the other hand, any decline in fertility necessarily makes the population older since it reduces the proportion of children.

Measures of fertility quantify the birth performance of a population over a period of time. These measures can be used to compare the fertility levels of a number of populations during a particular time interval to exhibit a time trend in fertility in a population.

Fertility measures include crude birth rate, gross fertility rate, general fertility rate, and rate of reproduction.

Analysis of fertility trends in the Pacific is not abundant, and Guam is no exception. Although Guam has had regular censuses, and a great deal of information has been collected, there has been no systematic look at the fertility trends until recently (Levin and Retherford 1986).

The data for children ever born in 1980 were derived from the answers to question 21a (How many babies has ___ ever had, not including stillbirths?), which was asked of women 15 years old and over, regardless of marital status. Still‑births, stepchildren, and adopted children were excluded. Ever‑married women were instructed to include all children born to them before and during their most recent marriage, children no longer living, and children away from home, as well as children who were still at home. Never‑married women were instructed to include all children born to them. Data on children ever born reported by never‑married women should be viewed with caution because of the very high rates of nonresponse to the question and the anticipated underreporting of live births to these women.

In the 1980 census, a terminal category of "15 or more" was used for recording the number of children ever born. For purposes of computing the total number of children ever born, the terminal category was given a mean value of 15.

The data on the number of children still living were derived from answers to question 21b (How many of these children are still living?), which was asked of all women 15 years old and over who reported having had at least one child ever born in question 21a. For the purposes of computing the total number of children still living, the terminal category "15 and over" was given a mean value of 15. In addition, all women 15 years old and over who reported having had a child were also asked in question 21c if any children were born since April 1, 1979. Although the data were collected for women past age 50, subsequent editing procedures only accepted a "Yes" response for women 15 to 50 years old. Neither of these two questions had been asked in prior decennial censuses.

FERTILITY CHARACTERISTICS

In 1980, there were 2,517 children ever born per 1,000 women 15 years and over in Guam, and 2,391 children still living per 1,000 women (Table 5.1). Another way of stating this is that the average woman had had 2.5 children ever born, and 2.4 still alive. Until the 55 to 59 year age group, there was a direct correlation between age and number of children ever born, that is, the older the age group of women, the higher the fertility. Of course, many of the young women had not finished their fertility and, in the case of the 15 to 19 year old women, many had not even started to have children.

Table 5.1. Children Ever Born, Still Alive, and Children Born in the

Last Year: 1980

Numbers Per 1000 Women

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Children Children Births Children Children Births

Ever Still Previous Ever Still Previous

Age Group Females Born Alive Year Born Alive Year

Total..... 32,599 82,040 77,935 ... 2,517 2,391 ...

15 to 19 yrs. 5,144 613 600 247 119 117 48

20 to 24 yrs. 5,089 4,144 4,079 885 814 802 174

25 to 29 yrs. 5,130 8,394 8,224 897 1,636 1,603 175

30 to 34 yrs. 4,435 10,865 10,645 505 2,450 2,400 114

35 to 44 yrs. 5,259 18,875 18,325 275 3,589 3,485 52

45 to 54 yrs. 3,763 18,437 17,657 ... 4,900 4,692 ...

55 to 59 yrs. 1,280 6,644 6,251 ... 5,191 4,884 ...

60 to 64 yrs. 919 4,925 4,524 ... 5,359 4,923 ...

65 + yrs..... 1,580 9,143 7,630 ... 5,787 4,829 ...

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54, 1980 Table 19.

For those women who had probably completed their fertility, there is evidence of a fertility decline. Women in the 35 to 44 year old age group had 3,589 children per 1,000 women, compared to 4,900 for women 45 to 54 and 5,191 for women 55 to 59. Women who were 55 to 59 years old had had an average of about 5.2 children ever born, while those 45 to 54 had 4.9, and the 35 to 44 aged women had 3.6. While a slight decline of 0.3 children per woman is evident between the 55 to 59 year old women and the 45 to 54 year old women, a larger decline of 1.3 children per woman between the 45 to 54 year olds and the 35 to 44 year olds can be seen. Older women, those aged 60 to 64 and 65 and over, had still larger numbers of children ever born: an average of 5.4 and 5.8 per woman, respectively.

Tables 5.2 and 5.3 show the differences between the civilian and military female populations in numbers of children ever born, numbers still alive, and births in the previous year. Civilian women had more children ever born per 1,000 women in all age groups except the 15 to 19 and 60 to 64 year olds, and also had more children still alive per 1,000 women. For births in the previous year, however, military women had higher rates in the 2 youngest age groups than did civilian women.

Table 5.2. Children Ever Born, Still Alive, and Children Born in the

Last Year: 1980 Civilians

Numbers Per 1000 Women

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

CIVILIAN Children Children Births Children Children Births

Ever Still Previous Ever Still Previous

Age Group Females Born Alive Year Born Alive Year

Total..... 26,562 72,734 68,947 ... 2,738 2,596 ...

15 to 19 yrs. 4,565 502 491 200 110 108 44

20 to 24 yrs. 3,485 2,951 2,913 595 847 836 171

25 to 29 yrs. 3,583 6,160 6,055 657 1,719 1,690 183

30 to 34 yrs. 3,256 8,626 8,451 394 2,649 2,596 121

35 to 44 yrs. 4,472 16,866 16,386 245 3,771 3,664 55

45 to 54 yrs. 3,573 17,691 16,954 ... 4,951 4,745 ...

55 to 59 yrs. 1,231 6,408 6,027 ... 5,206 4,896 ...

60 to 64 yrs. 889 4,735 4,345 ... 5,326 4,888 ...

65 + yrs..... 1,508 8,795 7,325 ... 5,832 4,857 ...

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: Unpublished tabulations, U.S. Bureau of the Census.

Table 5.3. Children Ever Born, Still Alive, and Children Born in the

Last Year: 1980 Military

Numbers Per 1000 Women

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

MILITARY Children Children Births Children Children Births

Ever Still Previous Ever Still Previous

Age Group Females Born Alive Year Born Alive Year

Total..... 6,037 9,306 8,988 ... 1,541 1,489 ...

15 to 19 yrs. 579 111 109 47 192 188 81

20 to 24 yrs. 1,604 1,193 1,166 290 744 727 181

25 to 29 yrs. 1,547 2,234 2,169 240 1,444 1,402 155

30 to 34 yrs. 1,179 2,239 2,194 111 1,899 1,861 94

35 to 44 yrs. 787 2,009 1,939 30 2,553 2,464 38

45 to 54 yrs. 190 746 703 ... 3,926 3,700 ...

55 to 59 yrs. 49 236 224 ... 4,816 4,571 ...

60 to 64 yrs. 30 190 179 ... 6,333 5,967 ...

65 + yrs..... 72 348 305 ... 4,833 4,236 ...

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54, Table 19 and Unpublished Data

The fertility of women born on Guam was higher than for women born elsewhere (Table 5.4). Although all women had 1,712 children ever born per 1,000 women in 1980, those born on Guam had 2,037 children per 1,000 women compared to 1,476 for women born outside Guam. The data for children still alive and children born in the year preceding the census followed the same trend.

Table 5.4. Children Ever Born, Still Alive and Births in the Last Year by

Birthplace of Mother: 1980

Numbers Per 1000 Women

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Born Not Born Not

on Born on Born

Fertility Total Guam Guam Total Guam Guam

Females, 15 to 44......... 25057 10523 14534 ... ... ...

Children ever born............. 42891 21435 21456 1712 2037 1476

Children still alive........... 41873 20842 21031 1671 1981 1447

Birth in year preceding census. 2809 1224 1585 112 116 109

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54, Table 24.

Women who were not in the labor force in 1980 had higher fertility than women who were in the labor force (Table 5.5). Of course, some of the women who were not in the labor force may not have been in the labor force because they were caring for young children. For females 16 years and over, there were 1,791 children ever born per 1,000 women. Women in the labor force had 1,671 children ever born per 1,000 women, compared to 1,930 per 1,000 women not in the labor force, and 1,628 per 1,000 women who were unemployed. Of those women employed in the civilian labor force, those who had worked 35 or more weeks in 1979 had rates of children ever born and still alive per 1,000 women that were 25 percent higher than those who had only worked 1 to 34 weeks, and a rate of children born in the last year that was 34 percent higher than those working fewer weeks. Women in the Armed Forces had the lowest number of children ever born: 468 per 1,000 women.

Table 5.5. Children Ever Born, Still Alive and Births in the Last Year by

Labor Force Participation: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Numbers Per 1000 Women

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Chldrn Chldrn Born Chldrn Chldrn Born

Fe‑ Ever Still Last Ever Still Last

Labor Force Participation males Born Alive Year Born Alive Year

Females 16‑44 years. 23938 42874 41856 2800 1791 1749 117

In Labor Force........... 12828 21433 20999 1147 1671 1637 89

Armed Forces........... 883 413 401 67 468 454 76

Civilian Labor Force... 11945 21020 20598 1080 1760 1724 90

Employed............. 11130 19693 19317 963 1769 1736 87

Worked 35+ weeks... 8471 15550 15249 737 1836 1800 87

Worked 1‑34 weeks.. 2276 3350 3288 149 1472 1445 65

Unemployed........... 815 1327 1281 117 1628 1572 144

Not in Labor Force....... 11110 21441 20857 1653 1930 1877 149

__________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54, Table 36

Table 5.6 shows ratios of children ever born to children still alive per female by age. The oldest age group of 65 and over produced the highest numbers of children ever born per woman; those age groups who can be assumed to have completed their fertility had an average of over 5 children per woman. They had the lowest percentages of children still alive, but this should not be considered unusual. Some of the deaths to these children would have happened at early ages, causing mothers to have additional children to replace those who had died, but the majority would have occurred to them as adults, and not occasioned replacement childbearing. The highest ratio of children still alive per female was in the 20 to 24 age group, at 98.4 percent. Since the total number of children ever born per woman has apparently been decreasing for those women who have completed their fertility, from 5.8 per woman for those 65 and older to 4.6 for those 45 to 49, it may be assumed that women in the younger age groups will follow the same trend and will have fewer children ever born at the end of their childbearing years.

Table 5.6 Children Ever Born and Surviving By Age: 1980

Children Children Percent

Children Children Ever Born Still Child.

Ever Still Per Alive Per Still

Age Group Females Born Alive Female Female Alive

15 to 19 yrs. 5,144 613 600 .1 .1 97.9

20 to 24 yrs. 5,089 4,144 4,079 .8 .8 98.4

25 to 29 yrs. 5,130 8,394 8,224 1.6 1.6 98.0

30 to 34 yrs. 4,435 10,865 10,645 2.4 2.4 98.0

35 to 39 yrs. 2,860 9,192 8,959 3.2 3.1 97.5

40 to 44 yrs. 2,399 9,687 9,370 4.0 3.9 96.7

45 to 49 yrs. 2,018 9,259 8,901 4.6 4.4 96.1

50 to 54 yrs. 1,745 9,178 8,756 5.3 5.0 95.4

55 to 59 yrs. 1,280 6,644 6,251 5.2 4.9 94.1

60 to 64 yrs. 919 4,925 4,524 5.4 4.9 91.9

65 yrs & over 1,580 9,143 7,630 5.8 4.8 83.5

__________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑B54, Table 15, PC80‑1‑C/D54,

Table 19, and STF3, Table 31

OWN CHILDREN FERTILITY ESTIMATION

Because census data for Guam are collected by household, and the own children method of fertility has been readily available in the Pacific, this method has been used to investigate changing fertility trends on Guam. Other demographic techniques are included where appropriate.

The own children method has been described in earlier publications and needs only to be recapitulated briefly here. (For more detailed accounts, see, for example, Cho 1973, Retherford and Cho 1978, and Cho, Retherford, and Choe 1987; the current version of the own children computer programs uses formulas given in these sources.) The method is a census‑ or survey‑based reverse survival technique for estimating age‑specific birth rates for years previous to a census or household survey. Matching of children and mothers was based on a special question on mother's line number or person number on the household schedule, if the mother was present.

The matched (i.e. own) children, classified by child's age and mother's age, are reverse‑survived to estimate numbers of births by age of mother in previous years. Reverse survival is also used to estimate numbers of women in previous years. Since there are no post‑enumeration surveys in the American Pacific and no independent estimates of the population exist, no adjustments are made for underenumeration. After adjustments are made for unmatched (non‑own) children, age‑specific birth rates are calculated by dividing the number of births by the number of women. Estimates are computed for each previous year or group of years back to 15 years before the census. Estimates are not computed further back than 15 years because births must then be based on children at ages 15 or older at enumeration, a large proportion of whom do not reside in the same household as their mother and hence cannot be matched. All calculations are done initially by single years of age and time (years before the census). Estimates for groups of ages or groups of calendar years are obtained by appropriately aggregating numerators and denominators of single‑year rates and then dividing the aggregated numerator by the aggregated denominator. For reasons of economy, the method is usually applied to survey samples rather than complete counts, but because the population of Guam is so small, the complete counts were used.

Non‑own (unmatched) children are allocated to mothers by multiplying each age‑specific category of own (matched) children, specified by mother's age, by the corresponding age‑specific ratio of all children to own children. Thus, the number of own children at a given age is adjusted upward by the same factor regardless of mother's age, thereby introducing some error in the fertility estimates since the proportionate distribution of non‑own children by age of mother generally differs somewhat from the proportionate distribution of own children by age of mother. It is, of course, impossible to specify non‑own adjustment factors by mother's age since the mother of an unmatched child is by definition not in the household. Since older women are usually in more stable household situations than younger women, the nature of the error from not specifying non‑own adjustment factors by mother's age is usually to reallocate erroneously a certain proportion of non‑own children of a given age from younger mothers to older mothers. This error, if present here, should have little effect on the total fertility rate, but it produces an age pattern of fertility that is too low at the younger ages and too high at the older ages. The error is minor if the adjustment factors for non‑own children are low, but sometimes these factors can be quite high. For Guam, in 1980, the factors are indeed low, as can be seen in Table 5.7.

Table 5.7. Percentage Of All Children Who Are Non‑own, By Age:1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age of Child

Census ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Year 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

1980..... 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 6 5 5 6 7 7 8 8

___________________________________________________________________

Source: Levin and Retherford, 1986.

Reverse‑survival requires life tables. For the 1980 census, the life table was obtained through the use of census questions on number of children ever born and number of children still alive. By means of a method developed by Brass (1975), this child survivorship information was used to obtain estimates of child mortality that were in turn matched to the appropriate level of the Coale‑Demeny Model West life table family (Coale and Demeny 1966). (The procedure for obtaining the usual Brass estimates and matching them to Coale‑Demeny model life tables is built into the own‑children computing package and was used here; see Midkiff and Choe 1978.) The level obtained in this way specified life tables that were then used to derive reverse‑survival ratios. For Guam, Coale‑Demeny West Table 23.1 was obtained, which indicated a life expectancy at birth for females of 75.3, the highest in the Pacific Islands (Levin and Retherford 1986:10). Constant mortality was assumed for the entire 15 year period. Although sometimes mortality estimates are too low (and life expectancy too high) because of a tendency for respondents to selectively omit mention of dead children when responding to the child survivorship questions, here the reverse‑survival factors are already close to one and are quite insensitive to errors of even several years of life expectancy. Also, it is quite unlikely that women have neglected to mention children who have died.

Own‑children estimates of age‑specific marital birth rates were obtained in the following way: First, age‑specific proportions currently married in five‑year age groups were obtained from the 1960, 1970, and 1980 censuses of Guam and linearly interpolated between censuses to get age‑specific proportions currently married in five‑year age groups in each intercensal year. In this way an array of age‑specific proportions currently married, with age in five‑year age groups along one dimension, and time in calendar years (or midpoints of time periods) along the other dimension was obtained. The original own‑children analysis provided a corresponding array of age‑specific birth rates for all women. From these two matrices a third array of age‑specific marital birth rates was arrived at by dividing, term by term, the array of age‑specific birth rates by the array of age‑specific proportions currently married. This calculation assumes that all births occur within marriage.

Marital total fertility rates (but not total fertility rates for all women) pertain only to ages 20 to 49. The MTFR including ages 15 to 19 is not a good measure because it weights the birth rates at age 15 to 19, which is based on relatively few married women on Guam because of moderately late marriage, to the same extent that it weights birth rates at older ages.

Age‑specific proportions never married were obtained in the same way as age‑specific proportions currently married. First, age‑specific proportions never married in five‑year age groups were taken from the 1960, 1970 and 1980 censuses of Guam, and then linearly interpolated between censuses to get age‑specific proportions never married in five‑year age groups at midpoints of intercensal time periods or subperiods. Each set of age‑specific proportions never married so derived provided the basis for calculating a value of the singulate mean age at marriage (SMAM), which is used as a summary measure of nuptiality.

The Coale‑Trussell m index of marital fertility control was computed (Coale and Trussell 1974, 1975, 1978; a computer program developed by James Trussell at Princeton University's Office of Population Research was used for this purpose). This index measures the deviation from the typical age pattern of natural fertility, defined as fertility in the absence of deliberate family limitation, that results from deliberate family limitation. The m index depends on the shape of the age‑specific marital fertility schedule, not on the level of marital fertility. In the natural fertility situation, the shape of the schedule is convex throughout the reproductive ages, whereas in the family limitation situation it is concave at the older reproductive ages. For purposes of constructing the m index, the standard age schedule of natural fertility is obtained as the arithmetic average of 10 of the age‑specific natural marital fertility schedules designated by Henry (1961). If the observed age‑specific fertility schedule has the same shape as that of the standard age‑specific natural fertility schedule, m = 0. If the observed schedule deviates from the standard schedule by an amount that is the average deviation on 43 reasonably reliable marital fertility schedules in the early 1960s, representing a range of differences in the extent of fertility control, then m = 1. Values of m higher than 1 are also possible.

It should be noted that the own‑children fertility estimates are biased by migration, a considerable problem for fertility estimates for Guam. If, before moving, out‑migrants have about the same age‑specific birth rates as nonmigrants, and if out‑migrants take their children with them, then the own‑children estimates of age‑specific fertility for earlier years, based on nonmigrants present at the time of the census, should be about the same as if the migrants had actually been present. If women who migrate leave their children behind in the temporary care of relatives, however, the own‑children fertility estimates will be biased upward, even if out‑migrants and nonmigrants have identical age‑specific fertility. In this case, the children of migrants are treated as non‑own and allocated to reverse‑survived nonmigrant women. It is not clear how much of this type of child‑leaving was occurring in Guam in 1980.

Results. The total fertility rate for Guam decreased from 4.2 to 3.0 during the 15 year period before the 1980 census (Table 5.8 and Figure 5.1). These rates were the lowest in the Pacific for areas which applied the own‑children method (Levin and Retherford 1986). The marital fertility rates showed a similar decrease, from 5.0 to 3.7 during the period, indicating low marital fertility rates, and that most of the fertility was taking place within marriage. Part of the decline can be attributed to a slight increase in the singulate mean age at marriage (SMAM) from 21.1 years to 21.9 years during the period, but a large part of the decline was due to acceptance of family planning, especially prior to 1980. The m index increased from .30 from 1966 to 1970, to .63 between 1971 and 1975, to .92 between 1976 and 1980 (Figure 5.2). Almost all of the decline during the final period is attributable to conscious child limitation (i.e. the closer to 1 that m is, the greater the amount of deliberate child limitation.). By 1979, family planning services were provided not only by the government and voluntary organizations, but also by the military.

Figure 5.3 shows the age‑specific fertility rates for the 1966 to 1970 period and the 1976 to 1980 period. The figure shows that although there has not been noticeable fertility decline for the youngest women, there was noticeable decrease with age for women in the 25 to 29 year age groups and older.

Table 5.8. Total Fertility Rates and Age‑Specific Rates, and Marital

Total Fertility and Age‑Specific Rates, Derived by

the Own‑Children Method: 1980

Total Fertility Rates Marital Fertility Rates

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

1976‑ 1971‑ 1966‑ 1976‑ 1971‑ 1966‑

Age Group 1980 1975 1970 1980 1975 1970

TFR....... 4.24 3.55 3.02 5.02 4.24 3.71

15 to 19 yrs. 57 69 66 494 638 661

20 to 24 yrs. 190 181 171 301 299 296

25 to 29 yrs. 222 188 164 266 231 206

30 to 34 yrs. 177 137 110 203 159 130

35 to 39 yrs. 128 86 64 146 99 75

40 to 44 yrs. 61 39 24 74 47 29

45 to 49 yrs. 11 10 6 14 13 7

_________________________________________________________________________

Source: Levin and Retherford, 1986, Appendix Tables 1 and 2.

Figure 5.1 Total and Marital Total Fertility Rates:1966 to 1980

The decrease is consistent with increased participation in the labor force, and a general decline in fertility for the Territory as a whole. Data for age‑specific marital fertility rates are consistent with this finding.

Vital statistics for Guam from 1980 allow for comparisons with the own‑children estimates (Table 5.9). The total fertility rate derived from vital registration, using the 1980 census for denominators, was 3.24, compared to 3.16 for the own‑children estimated fertility. The age‑specific rates also were very close, although the own‑children estimates were very slightly lower. The difference may be attributed to the mortality estimates which could have been influenced by non‑reporting of some deaths to children. Ratios greater than 1 can be seen in 2 age groups, 35 to 39 and 45 to 49. In the 35 to 39 year old group, this ratio was most probably caused by age slippage: incorrect reporting of age of women in the two age groups bracketing this one caused children to be "packed" into the 35 to 39 year old group, while the very high ratio at ages 45 to 49 years was caused by the overallocation of non‑own children to women at these ages.

Figure 5.2 m‑Index of Marital Fertility Control: 1966 to 1980

Figure 5.3 Age‑Specific Fertility Rates: 1969‑73 and 1974‑78

Table 5.9 Ratios of Fertility Estimates Derived by the Own‑Children (OC)

Method to Fertility Estimates based on Alternative Source(AS)

OC/AS ratios

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Year ASFRs

of ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Esti‑ TFR TFR 15‑ 20‑ 25‑ 30‑ 35‑ 40‑ 45‑

mate (OC) (AS) TFR 19 24 29 34 39 44 49

1980 3.16 3.24 .98 .91 .96 .98 .92 1.11 .96 4.00

___________________________________________________________________________

Note: Births are from Guam, Department of Public Health and Social Services

(1980); numbers of women from the census.

Source: Levin and Retherford, 1986, Table 5

We have presented some preliminary data on fertility estimates using the own‑children method of fertility estimation. After the 1990 census it will be possible to look at the overlap between the two censuses to attempt to measure the ability of the census to obtain indirectly estimated measures of fertility.

VITAL STATISTICS

In addition to measures derived from census data, fertility indicators are also computed from vital statistics records. On Guam, unlike many developing countries, vital registration coverage is complete. The measures described in the following section are from the years 1980 through 1985, and are based on populations estimated from the 1980 census base population. While births and deaths are recorded yearly, Guam has no accurate record of migration; the denominators used may be lower than the actual populations.

Table 5.10 shows the number and percent of births by age of mother from 1980 to 1985. As can be expected, females aged 20 to 24 had the highest number and proportion of births in every year, followed by those 25 to 29 years old. The total number of births grew between 1980 and 1981, dropped in 1982, then repeated the increase‑decrease cycle between 1983 and 1985. The numbers and percentages of increase/decrease are not large enough to be significant, even for a small population such as Guam's.

Table 5.10. Live Births by Age of Mother: 1980 to 1985

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age 1985 1984 1983 1982 1981 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Total........... 3197 3067 3184 2992 3008 3003

Percent....... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

15 to 19.......... 13.6 15.2 13.4 13.8 14.3 12.8

20 to 24.......... 34.4 33.2 34.0 34.7 33.4 32.9

25 to 29.......... 27.5 27.0 27.7 27.0 28.6 29.8

30 to 34.......... 16.3 16.8 17.0 17.5 17.1 17.2

35 to 39.......... 6.8 6.8 6.7 5.7 5.2 5.1

40 to 44.......... 1.3 .8 1.1 1.2 1.3 2.0

45 to 49.......... .0 .1 .1 .1 .1 .2

Unknown........... .1 .3 0.0 .1 .0 0.0

_______________________________________________________________

Source: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics,

Department of Public Health and Social Services, Guam

Births by race of child are shown in Table 5.11. The number of births by race each year does not vary greatly, though the proportion of mixed Chamorro births seems to be growing a little each year. Because of the unreliability of ethnicity statistics from the 1980 Census, it was not advisable to attempt to compute birth rates by race of child.

Table 5.11. Live Births by Race of Child: 1980 to 1985

Race 1985 1984 1983 1982 1981 1980

Total.......... 3197 3067 3184 2992 3008 3003

Percent....... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Chamorro.......... 50.1 49.9 49.6 48.6 47.3 44.3

Chamorro Only... 21.6 23.3 22.3 21.6 21.8 22.9

Chamorro‑Other.. 10.5 9.9 10.6 9.8 10.2 10.8

Chamorro‑Unknown 18.0 16.6 16.6 17.1 15.3 13.4

Filipino.......... 14.6 14.0 13.3 15.6 15.4 16.3

Caucasian......... 13.4 14.3 15.5 14.8 16.3 15.4

Micronesian....... 1.8 2.2 1.9 2.2 1.6 2.4

Asian............. 1.0 0.9 1.2 1.1 1.4 1.5

Negro............. 2.4 1.7 2.2 2.0 1.7 1.6

All Other......... 16.7 16.9 16.3 15.6 16.2 15.7

Not Reported...... 0.0 0.2 0.0 0.0 0.1 0.0

________________________________________________________________________

Source: Annual Statistical Reports, Office of Vital Statistics,

Department of Public Health and Social Services, Guam.

Table 5.12 summarizes fertility indicators for the births from 1980 to 1985. The first fertility indicator is the Crude Birth Rate (CBR); defined as the total number of births per year per 1,000 midyear population in an area. The CBR for Guam ranged from 26.3 births per 1,000 population in 1984 to 28.3 in 1980.

Table 5.12. Fertility Rates Derived From Vital Statistics Data

Guam: 1980 to 1985

Rate 1985 1984 1983 1982 1981 1980

Crude Birth Rate 26.8 26.3 27.9 26.8 27.6 28.3

General Fertility Rate 113.3 111.4 118.4 113.8 116.9 119.2

Total Fertility Rate 3.2 3.0 3.2 3.1 3.1 3.2

Marital Total Fert. Rate 3.8 3.6 3.9 3.2 3.7 3.8

Gen. Marital Fert. Rate 178.8 176.5 188.4 181.9 187.7 193.1

Gen.Legitimate Fert. Rate 124.5 126.8 140.2 137.7 146.3 153.2

Illegitimacy Ratio 260.6 281.7 255.6 206.6 177.2 165.8

Illegitimacy Rate 96.1 100.9 96.3 74.0 64.6 61.1

Gross Reproduction Rate 1550.7 1529.9 1472.3 1497.4 1518.6 1525.4

Net Reproduction Rate 1486.3 1479.7 1580.4 1434.7 1490.5 1509.0

Mean Age of Mother 26.5 26.4 26.7 26.6 25.6 26.5

Mean Length of Generation 26.4 26.4 26.8 26.2 26.6 27.2

_________________________________________________________________________

Source: Annual Statistical Report, Office of Vital Statistics,

Department of Public Health and Social Services, Guam.

The major drawback of the CBR is that it does not take into account the age structure of the population for which it is computed, nor does it confine itself to the population "at risk" of giving birth. One measure that does take age and gender into account is the General Fertility Rate (GFR), which is computed using only the female population 15 to 44 (or 49) as its denominator, while leaving total number of births as the numerator. These values ranged from 111.4 in 1984 to 119.2 in 1980. The GFR ranges from the low 60s to the high 200s in developing countries (Palmore and Gardner, 1983:69); Guam falls into the middle range.

The GFR limits the population more than the CBR does, but can still be affected by the age structure of the female population. The Total Fertility Rate (TFR), a summary measure that uses age‑specific birth rates, attempts to eliminate age‑structure differences. The TFR estimates the total number of live births 1,000 women would have if they lived through their reproductive years and were subject to a given set of age‑specific birth rates. The TFRs shown in Table 5.11 is the average number of live births Guam women would have if they followed Guam's age‑specific birth rate schedule, 3.2 in 1983 and 3.1 in 1984. TFRs in the Pacific region computed from census data range from 8.7 for Western Samoa in 1966 to 2.8 for Tuvalu in 1979 (Levin and Retherford, 1986:18).

As most births take place within marriages, rates are available to measure fertility while limiting the population at risk to married women. These are the General Marital Fertility Rate (GMFR), the Marital Total Fertility Rate (MTFR) and the General Legitimate Fertility Rate (GLFR). If compared to the General Fertility Rate and Total Fertility Rate, the "married" rates are higher, but not excessively so, indicating that, on Guam, most of the births do occur within marriages. There are some, however, that do not, as shown by the Illegitimacy Ratio and Illegitimacy Rate. The ratio expresses the proportion of illegitimate births per 1,000 live births; this ranged from a low of 166 in 1980 to a high of 282 in 1984. Other countries have had rates as low as 12 for Greece in 1961 and as high as 640 for El Salvador in 1961 (Shryock and Siegel, 1976:283). The illegitimacy rate represents illegitimacy in relation to the population at risk of having illegitimate births, and is the number of illegitimate births per year per 1,000 unmarried women. Rates ranged from 61 in 1980 to 101 in 1984.

Reproduction rates tell us whether a population will grow, just replace itself, or decline. The Gross Reproduction Rate (GRR) is the number of female live births 1,000 women are expected to have over their reproductive lifetime, if none of them were subjected to dying. GRRs of 1,000 would mean exact replacement of these women; values higher or lower would mean growth or decline, respectively. The Net Reproduction Rate is similar, but it takes the mortality risk of women in their reproductive years into account. Both rates for females on Guam for all the years covered are at or above 1400, showing that the population is expected to continue growing. The mean length of a generation, computed from data collected for the NRR, tells how many years after birth a woman replaces herself with a female birth. On Guam, this ranged from 26.2 years to 27.2 years.

The mean age of mother is computed to distinguish populations who have their children relatively early in life from those who have them relatively later. It can also show whether women are delaying childbearing. On Guam, it would appear that women are delaying childbearing slightly, but these rates may be affected by the small number of women involved. In 1980, the mean age was 26.5 years; after dipping to 25.6 in 1981, it rose to 26.7 in 1983, then dipped and rose again.

SUMMARY

Fertility on Guam is declining. The number of children ever born for women who have completed their childbearing decreased from 5.8 to 3.6 children per woman in 1980. Except for those age 15 to 19 and 60 to 64 years, civilian women had more children ever born and still alive than did military women. The fertility for women born on Guam was higher than for women born elsewhere; women not in the labor force had higher fertility than those who were in the labor force.

Census methods of measuring fertility showed that fertility on Guam declined between 1965 and 1980, both overall and for married women. Most fertility took place within marriage. There was a slight increase in mean age at marriage, contributing to the decline in fertility. Another contributing factor was the use of family planning. Many women probably delayed childbearing due to labor force participation.

Vital statistics indicators for the past 6 years showed that the fertility decline was continuing, though reproduction rates were still high enough to keep the population growing. While some illegitimacy occurred, most births continued to take place within marriage. The proportion of mixed Chamorro births increased every year; the proportions of births of children of all other races fluctuated from year to year.

We have seen in this chapter two methods of measuring fertility, using census and vital registration data. Both have confirmed that Guam's population will continue to grow through reproductive measures, regardless of other factors, such as migration.

CHAPTER 6

MORTALITY

Mortality describes the risk of dying. Measures of mortality quantify the risks of dying for a population exposed over a period of time. Mortality on Guam has been, for the most part, decreasing since the inception of the U.S. Naval Administration. After Spain ceded Guam to the United States, considerable changes to the islands infrastructure took place. The enhanced quality of life dramatically affected the demographic picture of Guam's population.

More than any other single factor, a healthier environment probably had the most effect on the downward trend of mortality. Despite the recent phenomenal growth in the population from immigration, the quality of life is still conducive to longevity and natural increase. Post‑war Guam saw dramatic changes in social and economic structures. Chamorros experienced dramatic transitions that were also occurring on the U.S. mainland.

The 1980 census data did not include questions designed to obtain information on mortality of Guam's population.

MORTALITY CHARACTERISTICS

The system of vital registration, with respect to the recording of deaths, was started by the Spanish government prior to the turn of the century, and was adequate enough to be continued by the then newly‑established U.S. Naval Government. With the conversion from the Spanish language to English on the forms, this system continued until mid‑1955, after which a standard U.S. registration form was instituted that allowed pre‑coded automated tabulation. At any rate, mortality trends for the early part of this century are largely derived from the reporting of deaths by village commissioners to the ministry of civilian affairs, which was responsible for vital registration.

The mortality trend at the beginning of the century can best be described as extreme at certain points, when compared to later periods. Significant events such as the catastrophic typhoon in 1905, and a series of epidemics in 1918 (influenza), 1924 (bacillary dysentery), 1932 and 1934 (measles), and 1938 (whooping cough) contributed to high mortality (Haddock 1973:38). These epidemics resulted in just over 1,000 deaths over a 30 year period.

Despite these events, Guam's Crude Death Rate (CDR) showed a gradual decline beginning in 1910 when sanitary conditions, such as the introduction of piped water to the city of Agana, were improved by the Naval government. In fact, the epidemics had the net effect on the CDR (as it pertained to Guam's aggregate population) of a decline from about 25 to approximately 20 deaths per 1000 persons (Jongstra 1985:82).

Place of birth was not allocated for Guam. Persons not reporting place of birth are shown separately in the tables under "Place of birth not reported".

CITIZENSHIP AND YEAR OF IMMIGRATION

Data on citizenship and year of immigration were derived from answers to questions 11 and 12. Persons who were born in Puerto Rico, American Samoa, or the Virgin Islands of the United States, or born abroad or at sea and who had at least one parent who was a U.S. citizen were to report themselves as a U.S. Citizen.

Citizenship. Information on citizenship was used to classify the population of Guam born outside Guam or the United States into four major categories: naturalized citizens of the United States, permanent U.S. aliens (visa), temporary U.S. aliens (work permit), and other U.S. citizens. A similar question on citizenship was asked in 1970.

If citizenship was not reported, a response was assigned by computer using the responses of other persons based on year of immigration and country of birth.

Year of immigration. Persons born outside Guam were to indicate in question 12 the period which includes the year they came to stay permanently on Guam. A question on year of immigration was asked in 1970. If year of immigration was not reported, a response was assigned using responses of other persons based on age and place of birth.

PLACE OF BIRTH OF PARENTS

The data on place of birth of parents were derived from the answers to questions 13 and 14. These questions were asked for the first time in the 1980 census. Information on place of birth of parents was used to classify the population of Guam according to the place where the person's parents were born.

Persons with one or both parents born elsewhere were asked to report the country of birth according to international boundaries as recognized by the United States government on April 1, 1980. Place of birth of parents was not allocated for nonresponse. Selected areas of birth are shown here.

RESIDENCE IN 1975

The data on residence in 1975 were derived from answers to questions 15a, 15b, and 15c. Persons living on Guam or one of the areas listed in question 15b in 1975 were asked to report the village or major island or atoll, or U. S. state. Persons living elsewhere were asked to report the foreign country in which they were living. Residence in 1975 is used in conjunction with current residence to determine the extent of residential mobility of the population. When no information on residence in 1975 was collected for a person, information for other members was used, if available. All cases of no response, or incomplete response not assigned based on information from other family members, were shown separately as "Residence in 1975 not reported."

The number of persons who were living in a different house in 1975 was somewhat less than the total number of moves during the 5 year period. Some persons in the same house at the two dates had moved during the 5 year period but by the time of enumeration had returned to their 1975 residence. Other persons who were living in a different house had made one or more intermediate moves. For similar reasons, the number of persons living in a different Election District may be underestimated.

Similarly, questions on mobility were asked in the 1970 census; however, in the 1970 census the questions did not ask for residence in the specific village on Guam as did question 15c in the 1980 census. Data by village were not tabulated.

PLACE OF BIRTH CHARACTERISTICS

Almost half of the 105,979 persons living on Guam in 1980 were born on Guam. After the Guam‑born, the next largest part of the population were born on the U.S. (about 1 in 5), followed by persons born in Asia (also 1 in 5). Most (about 3 in every 4) of the Asia‑born were born in the Philippines; in fact, about 1 in every 6 persons living on Guam in 1980 were born in the Philippines. While about 2 percent of Guam's 1980 population was born in the Northern Mariana Islands, less than 1 percent was born in Palau, and even smaller numbers had been born in the other areas of the Trust Territory.

The largest number of persons of each sex were born on Guam, but greater proportions of females were born here (52 percent) than males (46 percent). The United States was the second most popular male birthplace (24 percent), while Asia was third (21 percent); this order was reversed for females. In fact, while about 1 in every 4 males were born in the United Staes, less than 1 in 5 of the females were born there.

Table 7.1. Birthplace by Sex: 1980

Numbers Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Birthplace Total Males Females Total Males Females

Total...................... 105979 55321 50658 100.0 100.0 100.0

Guam............................ 52113 25594 26519 49.2 46.3 52.3

Northern Mariana Islands........ 2124 999 1125 2.0 1.8 2.2

Asia............................ 22648 11491 11157 21.4 20.8 22.0

Philippines................... 16998 8985 8013 16.0 16.2 15.8

United States................... 22950 13451 9499 21.7 24.3 18.8

Palau........................... 921 391 530 .9 .7 1.0

Marshall Islands................ 39 19 20 .0 .0 .0

Federated States of Micronesia.. 436 237 199 .4 .4 .4

Kosrae........................ 65 48 17 .1 .1 .0

Pohnpei....................... 111 51 60 .1 .1 .1

Truk.......................... 121 68 53 .1 .1 .1

Yap........................... 139 70 69 .1 .1 .1

Elsewhere....................... 1477 693 784 1.4 1.3 1.5

Place of Birth Not Reported..... 3271 2446 825 3.1 4.4 1.6

__________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 24

When persons born in Guam are excluded, a clearer picture of the immigrants emerges (Table 7.2). As noted above, more than half of the population of Guam was born outside Guam. Most were born in the U.S. (43 percent) or Asia (42 percent). Males followed the pattern of the total population, but the distribution of birthplaces for females differed: Asia was the most common non‑Guam birthplace (46 percent), with the U.S. second (39 percent). Over 2 percent of females were born in Palau, but only 1 percent of males had been; a higher percentage of females had been born in the CNMI (5 percent) than had males (3 percent).

Table 7.2. Birthplace by Sex for the Non‑Guam Born: 1980

Numbers Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Birthplace Total Males Females Total Males Females

Total...................... 105979 55321 50658 100.0 100.0 100.0

Guam............................ 52113 25594 26519 ... ... ...

Northern Mariana Islands........ 2124 999 1125 3.9 3.4 4.7

Asia............................ 22648 11491 11157 42.0 38.7 46.2

Philippines................... 16998 8985 8013 31.6 30.2 33.2

United States................... 22950 13451 9499 42.6 45.2 39.4

Palau........................... 921 391 530 1.7 1.3 2.2

Marshall Islands................ 39 19 20 .1 .1 .1

Federated States of Micronesia.. 436 237 199 .8 .8 .8

Elsewhere....................... 1477 693 784 2.7 2.3 3.2

Place of Birth Not Reported..... 3271 2446 825 6.1 8.2 3.4

__________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 24

Birthplace by military status and sex is shown in Table 7.3 and Figure 7.1. Nearly 60 percent of the civilian population was born on Guam, followed by Asia (24 percent). Just over 10 percent of the military population had been born on Guam. Almost 65 percent of the military population was born in the U.S. compared to 10 percent of the civilian population. Although almost 1 in 4 of the civilians were born in Asia, this was true for only 1 in 8 of the military. Similarly, percentage of Philippines born civilians (18 percent) was twice 9 percent for the military. Also, although CNMI born made up 2.5 percent of the civilians, they were only .3 percent of the military, perhaps not surprising since they were not yet American citizens and thus had difficulty enlisting in the military.

The were differences for birthplace by sex in 1980. Although 58 percent of the civilian males were born on Guam, more than 61 percent of the females were in this category. On the other hand, 19 percent of the civilian males were Philippines born compared to 17 percent of the civilian females; the civilian United States percentages were 11 and 9, respectively. For the military, 8 percent of the males and 13 percent of the females were born on Guam, compared to 67 percent of the males and 62 percent of the females being United States born. Also, while 18 percent of the military females were born in Asia, this was true for only 9 percent of the males.

Many military personnel did not report a place of birth. The percentage was higher for males (13 percent) than for females (3 percent). These high proportions affect the proportions of the population distributed to each birthplace.

Table 7.3. Birthplace by Military Status and Sex: 1980

Total Civilian Military

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Birthplace Total Males Fmles Total Males Fmles Total Males Fmles

Total........105979 55321 50658 83226 42056 41170 22753 13265 9488

Percent.... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Guam.............. 49.2 46.3 52.3 59.8 58.2 61.4 10.3 8.5 12.9

Northern Marianas. 2.0 1.8 2.2 2.5 2.3 2.6 .3 .2 .5

Asia.............. 21.4 20.8 22.0 23.8 24.6 23.0 12.4 8.6 17.7

Philippines..... 16.0 16.2 15.8 18.0 19.2 16.7 8.9 6.8 11.8

United States..... 21.7 24.3 18.8 9.8 10.9 8.7 64.9 66.8 62.2

Palau............. .9 .7 1.0 1.0 .9 1.2 .3 .2 .4

Marshall Islands.. .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0

FSMicronesia...... .4 .4 .4 .5 .5 .5 .1 .1 .1

Elsewhere......... 1.4 1.3 1.5 .9 .8 1.0 3.2 2.7 3.8

Not Reported...... 3.1 4.4 1.6 1.6 1.7 1.4 8.6 13.0 2.5

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 24

When only the migrant population is considered, as noted earlier, the most frequent place of birth reported shifts from Guam to the U.S. (43 percent) and Asia (42 percent) (Table 7.4). Civilian migrants of both sexes came from Asia (60 percent of females and 59 percent of males), the U.S. (23 percent of females and 26 percent of males), and the Northern Marianas Islands (7 percent of females and 6 percent of males). Higher percentages of the military were born in the U.S. (73 percent for males and 71 percent for females) than any other place of birth reported, with Asia second (9 percent of the males and 20 percent of the females).

The military again had a large proportion of 'not reported' birthplaces, but the increase in the proportions for the migrant military population was only slightly over 1 percent from that of the total military population. However, the proportion of 'not reported' in the overall migrant population was nearly double that of the total population.

Table 7.4. Birthplace by Military Status and Sex for the Non‑Guam Born:

1980

Total Civilian Military

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Birthplace Total Males Fmles Total Males Fmles Total Males Fmles

Total........ 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Northern Marianas. 3.9 3.4 4.7 6.1 5.5 6.8 .3 .2 .5

Asia.............. 42.0 38.7 46.2 59.3 58.9 59.7 13.8 9.4 20.3

Philippines..... 31.6 30.2 33.2 44.8 46.0 43.4 9.9 7.4 13.5

United States..... 42.6 45.2 39.4 24.5 26.1 22.7 72.3 72.9 71.4

Palau............. 1.7 1.3 2.2 2.6 2.1 3.1 .3 .2 .4

Marshall Islands.. .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .1 .0 .0 .0

FSMicronesia...... .8 .8 .8 1.2 1.3 1.2 .1 .1 .1

Elsewhere......... 2.7 2.3 3.2 2.3 1.9 2.6 3.5 2.9 4.4

Not Reported...... 6.1 8.2 3.4 3.9 4.1 3.7 9.6 14.2 2.9

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 24

Age. Most of the Guam‑born were young: over 60 percent were below the age of 19, while this was true of 45 percent of the total population, but only 22 percent of those born in the Philippines (Table 7.5). Nearly 56 percent of those born in the U.S. were between 20 and 44 years of age; those 20 to 24 years were the largest single age group of U.S. born. As was seen in Table 7.3, 65 percent of the military on Guam in 1980 were U.S. born; the most common ages for entry into military service are 18 to 24.

The largest percentages of Philippine‑born immigrants were between 35 to 44 years (17 percent) and 45 to 54 (16 percent), followed by 30 to 34 (12 percent) and 25 to 29 (11 percent). These persons almost certainly migrated for work. The Philippines born had greater proportions of elderly than those born in any other place. These elderly may have migrated in the late 1960's, after immigration laws were changed, with these people being in their mid‑40's, or they may be older relatives of other migrants who had them brought over to live here.

Table 7.5. Birthplace by Age: 1980

Phili‑ United All

Age Group Total Guam CNMI ppines States Palau FSM Others

All persons... 105979 52113 2124 16998 22950 921 475 10398

Percent..... 100.0 100.0100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Less than 5 years. 12.3 18.4 8.5 2.2 9.9 3.3 4.0 5.4

5 to 9 years...... 11.9 15.9 10.0 4.5 10.2 2.9 5.1 9.4

10 to 14 years.... 10.7 13.9 12.2 6.8 7.4 6.4 6.7 8.4

15 to 19 years.... 10.4 12.1 13.2 8.1 8.5 10.1 10.7 9.2

20 to 24 years.... 10.5 7.2 10.8 7.2 17.9 14.3 25.1 14.8

25 to 29 years.... 9.7 6.6 10.6 11.2 14.2 15.7 16.0 12.4

30 to 34 years.... 8.8 5.4 9.5 12.2 11.9 10.7 9.7 12.5

35 to 44 years.... 10.7 7.2 11.1 16.5 11.6 16.6 11.8 15.7

45 to 54 years.... 7.7 6.2 8.5 15.7 4.8 13.5 4.6 8.0

55 to 59 years.... 2.7 2.2 1.6 6.7 1.6 2.6 1.5 1.9

60 to 64 years.... 1.8 1.7 1.8 3.8 1.0 1.8 2.5 1.0

65 years and over. 2.8 3.3 2.2 5.0 .9 2.0 2.3 1.3

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 20

While the Guam‑born made up just over 49 percent of the total population in 1980, they were 74 percent of those less than 5 years of age, and 66 percent of those 5 to 9 years. In fact, they were the majority of all ages up to 19 years, and from age 25 to 54, stressing the youthfulness of the Guam‑born population. In the age group 20 to 24 years, the prime military years, the U.S. born were in the majority; for those 55 to 59 years, those born in the Philippines accounted for about the same proportion as the Guam‑born.

The elderly (60 years and over) were heavily Guam‑born, followed by the Philippines born. Those born in the CNMI, Palau, and the Federated States of Micronesia (FSM) were concentrated in the college and working ages (15 to 54 years); those born in "All Others" places of birth had 20 percent of their population less than 15 years of age.

Table 7.6. Percent Birthplace by Age: 1980

Phili‑ United All

Age Group Total Guam CNMI ppines States Palau FSM Others

All persons... 100.0 49.2 2.0 16.0 21.7 .9 .4 9.8

Less than 5 years. 100.0 73.6 1.4 2.9 17.5 .2 .1 4.3

5 to 9 years...... 100.0 65.6 1.7 6.0 18.5 .2 .2 7.7

10 to 14 years.... 100.0 64.1 2.3 10.2 15.0 .5 .3 7.7

15 to 19 years.... 100.0 57.1 2.5 12.5 17.8 .8 .5 8.7

20 to 24 years.... 100.0 33.7 2.1 11.1 37.1 1.2 1.1 13.8

25 to 29 years.... 100.0 33.2 2.2 18.5 31.5 1.4 .7 12.5

30 to 34 years.... 100.0 30.5 2.2 22.3 29.5 1.1 .5 14.0

35 to 44 years.... 100.0 33.3 2.1 24.8 23.5 1.4 .5 14.4

45 to 54 years.... 100.0 39.7 2.2 32.7 13.4 1.5 .3 10.2

55 to 59 years.... 100.0 39.0 1.2 39.3 12.7 .8 .2 6.7

60 to 64 years.... 100.0 44.9 2.0 33.8 12.3 .9 .6 5.4

65 years and over. 100.0 57.2 1.6 28.7 7.0 .6 .4 4.6

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 20

YEAR OF IMMIGRATION

Just over 54 percent of all immigrants came to Guam after 1977, with more coming in 1979 or 1980 than in any other period, and the 1977‑78 period being second. The decade 1960 to 1969 was the third most frequent period of immigration. Those born in the CNMI came most often in 1979 or 1980 (29 percent), followed by 1960 to 1969; the Philippines born were more likely to have immigrated in the earlier period than the latter. Nearly 74 percent of the U.S. born had come to Guam between 1977 and 1980; as many U.S. born were military, and subject to short‑term stays, this is not an unusual finding. Those from Palau and the FSM had patterns of immigration similar to those from the Philippines: the period when the majority migrated was the decade 1960‑69, followed by 1979 or 1980.

Table 7.7. Year of Immigration by Birthplace: 1980

Asia

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Phili‑ United All

Age Group Total CNMI Total ppines States Palau FSM Others

Born elsewhere.. 50595 2124 22648 16998 22950 921 436 1516

Percent...... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

1979 or 1980...... 30.3 29.3 18.1 16.8 42.6 14.9 28.9 36.2

1977 or 1978...... 24.1 14.3 18.2 16.4 31.0 12.4 21.8 29.4

1975 or 1976...... 9.2 6.9 12.1 9.6 6.7 7.5 13.1 7.3

1973 or 1974...... 7.5 5.1 11.0 9.8 4.3 7.5 7.6 6.9

1971 or 1972...... 6.6 4.8 9.8 9.3 3.9 6.2 5.5 4.4

1970.............. 3.2 2.5 4.5 5.1 2.0 4.6 2.5 3.1

1960 to 1969...... 12.5 20.8 17.7 22.0 6.4 27.9 7.6 8.6

1950 to 1959...... 3.8 7.7 4.8 6.0 2.1 13.4 4.1 2.6

Before 1950....... 2.8 8.6 3.9 5.0 1.0 5.8 8.9 1.6

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 27

As can be seen in Table 7.8, in any the broad year spans, the majority of immigrants were born in the Philippines, except for the years 1975 to 1980, when over 57 percent of immigrants were from the U.S. This large proportion undoubtedly is related to movements of military personnel who move on to and off of the island at fairly frequent intervals ‑ while the relative number of military on island may fluctuate somewhat over time, the absolute numbers of military and their dependents is much larger and influences period of "migration" to Guam.

The proportion of the population who migrated from the Northern Marianas was greatest in the period before 1950 (13 percent of the population which migrated during that period) which was probably partly due to family unification, particularly after World War II. Migration from CNMI decreased considerably as a proportion of the total immigrant population by period, but began to increase slightly in the last period before the 1980 census. Migration from the other areas of Micronesia was limited, but the implementation of the compacts may have an impact on the amount of migration from these areas.

Table 7.8. Period of Immigration by Birthplace: 1980

Asia

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Phili‑ United All

Age Group Total CNMI Total ppines States Palau FSM Others

Born elsewhere.. 100.0 4.2 44.8 33.6 45.4 1.8 .9 3.0

1975 to 1980...... 100.0 3.3 34.1 22.6 57.3 1.0 .9 3.4

1970 to 1974...... 100.0 3.0 65.1 46.8 26.7 1.9 .8 2.5

1960 to 1969...... 100.0 7.0 63.2 59.1 23.2 4.1 .5 2.0

1950 to 1959...... 100.0 8.6 56.6 53.9 25.3 6.4 .9 2.1

Before 1950....... 100.0 13.0 62.4 60.5 16.3 3.8 2.8 1.7

__________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 27

Table 7.9 shows the total immigrant population (non‑Guam born) and the Guam born by age group and year of immigration for the non‑Guam born. The Guam born were just over half of the total population and dominated the age groups less than 19 years and 65 years and over, which comprise most of the non‑working ages. Migrants made up anywhere from 68 percent (those 30 to 34 years) to 54 percent (60 to 64 years) of the working age population.

The period 1975 to 1980 was the most active period of immigration for all age groups of migrants; the second most active period was 1970 to 1974. Those who were 25 years and over in 1980 migrated to Guam during their working ages, with very few coming at the time they were less than 10 years old. Those who were 25 to 29 in 1980 came most often in 1975 to 1980, when they were 20 to 25 years old (78 percent), followed by 1970 to 1974, when they were 15 to 19 years old (14 percent). Those 65 and older in 1980 had the most evenly distributed periods of immigration: 33 percent had come between 1975 to 1980 (when they were age 60 and older), 21 percent before 1950 (when they were age 35 and over), and 20 percent came between 1970 to 1974 (when they were 55 years and over).

Table 7.9. Year of Immigration by Age: 1980

Year of Immigration for non‑Guam born

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Guam 1975‑ 1970‑ 1960‑ 1950‑ Before

Age Group Total Born Total 1980 1974 1969 1959 1950

All persons...102,708 50.7 100.0 63.6 17.4 12.5 3.8 2.8

Less than 5 years. 12,797 74.7 100.0 97.8 1.9 0.0 0.0 0.0

5 to 9 years...... 12,453 66.6 100.0 84.2 15.4 0.0 0.0 0.0

10 to 14 years.... 11,168 65.1 100.0 63.0 25.5 11.5 0.0 0.0

15 to 19 years.... 10,605 59.2 100.0 59.1 21.1 19.7 0.0 0.0

20 to 24 years.... 10,194 36.7 100.0 81.2 10.0 7.2 1.5 0.0

25 to 29 years.... 9,910 34.5 100.0 77.8 13.8 6.5 2.0 0.0

30 to 34 years.... 8,941 31.6 100.0 66.2 19.9 11.7 1.7 0.6

35 to 44 years.... 10,919 34.5 100.0 49.6 23.0 22.5 3.3 1.7

45 to 54 years.... 8,025 40.5 100.0 30.1 21.0 24.1 14.8 9.9

55 to 59 years.... 2,866 39.7 100.0 25.7 19.7 18.5 16.6 19.4

60 to 64 years.... 1,899 45.6 100.0 30.7 18.2 16.4 16.9 17.8

65 years and over. 2,931 58.2 100.0 32.5 20.1 12.9 13.6 20.8

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 22

Note: Excludes Persons not Reporting Place of Birth

Nearly 73 percent of the non‑Guam born 16 years and older were in the labor force, compared to only 55 percent of the Guam born (Table 7.10). Most of the Guam born labor force was civilian (98 percent) and employed (95 percent), while 71 percent of the migrant labor force were civilian and 96 percent were employed.

Fully 73 percent of those migrating to Guam between 1975 and 1980 were in the labor force; over 47 percent were in the Armed Forces. Labor force participation rates for migrants from all periods were 72 percent or higher, with the highest rates among those who had migrated to Guam between 1950 to 1959.

Table 7.10. Year of Immigration by Labor Force Participation: 1980

Year of Immigration for non‑Guam born

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Guam 1975‑ 1970‑ 1960‑ 1950‑ Before

Labor Force Total Born Total 1980 1974 1969 1959 1950

Persons........ 66773 25577 38508 22619 6885 5692 1907 1405

Labor Force....... 44484 14019 28076 16501 4984 4081 1494 1016

Percent....... 66.6 54.8 72.9 73.0 72.4 71.7 78.3 72.3

Armed Forces.... 10125 264 8165 7765 220 118 43 19

Percent....... 22.8 1.9 29.1 47.1 4.4 2.9 2.9 1.9

Civilian L.F.... 34359 13755 19911 8736 4764 3963 1451 997

Employed...... 32692 13001 19027 8181 4606 3840 1422 978

Unemployed.... 1667 754 884 555 158 123 29 19

Percent..... 4.9 5.5 4.4 6.4 3.3 3.1 2.0 1.9

Not in Labor Force 22289 11558 10432 6118 1901 1611 413 389

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 39

Note: Excludes Persons Not Reporting Place of Birth

PLACE OF BIRTH OF PARENTS

Unlike the 1980 census in the United States, the 1980 census on Guam collected information about father's and mother's birthplace. These data help assess generational migration; that is, parental birthplace information allows analysis of movement over one generation ‑ how many people had a father or mother born elsewhere and who were themselves born on Guam, compared to those who were themselves migrants, or native or native parents.

Once again, in 1980, 49 percent of Guam's population was born on Guam (Table 7.11). Although 52,113 persons had been born on Guam (Table 7.1), only 40,799 persons in 1980 had fathers who had been born on Guam, and, of these, 38,686 (95 percent) were born on Guam themselves. The other 5 percent were persons whose fathers were born on Guam but they were born elsewhere.

More than 4 in 10 persons whose fathers were born in the CNMI were born on Guam. About 94 percent of the rest of that population (1615 persons) were born in the CNMI, while the rest (102 persons) were born elsewhere. Of the largest groups, persons whose fathers had been born in the United States but who were themselves born on Guam constituted the smallest proportion ‑ only 13 percent. Of the 21,270 persons who were not born on Guam and with fathers who were born int he United States, 19,604 (92 percent) were born in the United States as well.

About 1 in every 4 persons with Asia‑born fathers were born on Guam; of those not born on Guam themselves, 95 percent were born in Asia. Although a higher proportion of Pilippines born fathers had respondents born on Guam (30 percent), and the same proportion (94 percent) of the non‑Guam born were born in the Philippines.

The Marshall Islands figures are discounted since they are so small. Many Palauans have been on island long enough to see the second generational effect. More than 38 percent of persons with fathers born on Palau were born on Guam (although it is likely that most of these perosns are young children); of those with fathers born on Guam but who were not born on Guam themselves, 91 percent were born on Palau. The results for the Federated States of Micronesia showed a smaller proportion born on Guam, and less correspondance with parental birthplace.

Table 7.11. Father's Birthplace by Own Birthplace: 1980

Not Born on Guam

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Same as Not Same

Father's Father's

Birth‑ Birth‑

Father's Birthplace Total Guam Total Place place

Total...................... 105979 49.2 100.0 (NA) (NA)

Guam............................ 40799 94.8 100.0 0.0 100.0

Northern Mariana Islands........ 2949 41.8 100.0 94.1 5.9

Asia............................ 30246 26.6 100.0 94.7 5.3

Japan and Okinawa............. 1669 15.8 100.0 83.6 16.4

Philippines................... 24781 30.2 100.0 93.3 6.7

United States................... 24333 12.6 100.0 92.2 7.8

Palau........................... 1411 38.1 100.0 90.7 9.3

Marshall Islands................ 63 28.6 100.0 53.3 46.7

Federated States of Micronesia.. 518 27.4 100.0 76.9 23.1

Kosrae........................ 86 22.1 100.0 85.1 14.9

Pohnpei....................... 95 13.7 100.0 74.4 25.6

Truk.......................... 131 10.7 100.0 89.7 10.3

Yap........................... 206 46.6 100.0 60.0 40.0

Elsewhere....................... 2121 14.6 100.0 (NA) (NA)

Place of Birth Not Reported..... 3539 2.0 100.0 (NA) (NA)

__________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 25

Also, while 49 percent of Guam's population was born on Guam, while 40,799 persons in 1980 had fathers who had been born on Guam, 44,708 had mothers born on Guam. About the same proportion as for fathers ‑ 95 percent ‑ had mothers bron on Guam and were born on Guam themselves. The other 5 percent were persons whose mothers were born on Guam but they were born elsewhere.

As with the fathers, more than 4 in 10 persons whose mothers were born in the CNMI were born on Guam. About 92 percent of the rest of that population were born in the CNMI, while the rest were born elsewhere. The percentage of persons whose mothers had been born in the United States but who were themselves born on Guam constituted the smallest proportion for mothers than fathers ‑ only 8 percent. Of the persons who were not born on Guam and with mothers who were born in the United States, only 84 percent were born in the United States as well (compared to 92 percent of the fathers).

Only about 18 percent of those persons with Asia‑born mothers were born on Guam, probably showing the relatively earlier immigration of Asian males who subsequently married and had children (who, themselves, showed up in the 1980 census); of those not born on Guam themselves, 94 percent were born in Asia. Although a higher proportion of Philippines born mothers had respondents born on Guam (20 percent) compared to 30 percent for the males, and 95 percent of the non‑Guam born were born in the Philippines.

Table 7.12. Mother's Birthplace by Own Birthplace: 1980

Not Born in the Guam

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Same as Not Same

Mother's Mother's

Birth‑ Birth‑

Mother's Birthplace Total Guam Total Place place

Total...................... 105979 49.2 100.0 (NA) (NA)

Guam............................ 44708 95.4 100.0 0.0 100.0

Northern Mariana Islands........ 3190 40.7 100.0 92.5 7.5

Asia............................ 28630 18.5 100.0 93.5 6.5

Japan and Okinawa............. 2217 14.1 100.0 81.3 18.7

Philippines................... 22000 20.5 100.0 94.9 5.1

United States................... 21223 8.0 100.0 84.4 15.6

Palau........................... 1655 41.4 100.0 89.8 10.2

Marshall Islands................ 63 25.4 100.0 55.3 44.7

Federated States of Micronesia.. 574 28.2 100.0 78.4 21.6

Kosrae........................ 84 20.2 100.0 88.1 11.9

Pohnpei....................... 134 20.1 100.0 80.4 19.6

Truk.......................... 140 16.4 100.0 89.7 10.3

Yap........................... 216 44.0 100.0 60.3 39.7

Elsewhere....................... 2449 10.5 100.0 (NA) (NA)

Place of Birth Not Reported..... 3487 1.4 100.0 (NA) (NA)

Source: PC80‑1‑C/D54, Table 25

These data on parental birthplace show that there is a strong likelihood that persons with parents born on Guam are also born on Guam themselves. Persons with parents born in most of the other areas were also likely to have been born in those areas themselves. On the other hand, there is some evidence that migrant groups who have been immigrating for some time are settling on Guam, and having children, and that we are seeing the development of an increasing second‑generation migrant population, particularly among the CNMI born and Palauans; the data are less clear for Asians because of the continuing strong migration. And migration from the other Micronesian areas is only beginning.

There were differences by sex of parent, with some evidence that there has been selective migration for males, particularly in the earlier periods; these data have been seen in other tables in this chapter as well.

RESIDENCE IN 1975

The question on residence in 1975 (5 years before the census) shows the extent of recent mobility of the population (Table 7.13). (While the distribution of persons who were living in a different house in 1975 than 1980 shows mobility, the total number of moves during the 5‑year period cannot be obtained because some persons had moved after 1975, but, by the time of enumeration, had returned to their 1975 residence).

Almost 4 out of every 10 persons 5 years and over and living on Guam in 1980 had lived in the same house in 1980. About 1 in every 4 lived on Guam, but in a different house, and about 3 in every 10 lived elsewhere. About 2 in 5 persons had lived int he United States in 1975and Guam in 1980, and somewhat less than 1 in 10 had been in Asia (and 1 in 20 in the Philippines) in 1975.

Only 4 percent of the 42,550 persons 5 years and over who had been born on Guam had lived outside of Guam in 1975; most (3 percent) had lived in the U.S. In direct contrast to this were those who had been born in the U.S., over 75 percent of whom had lived outside of Guam in 1975, mostly in the U.S. (68 percent) or Asia (4 percent). Slightly over 68 percent of those born in Palau had lived on Guam in 1975, as had 65 percent of the Philippines born and 57 percent of the CNMI born.

It is important to note that 4 percent of the respondents 5 years and over gave no residence in 1975. Although these responses, like those of the migration variables ‑ own birthplace and parental birthplace ‑ were allocated for the U.S. questionnaires, they were not allocated for the Guam census since there were so few persons who did not report (3,747 for this item). All of the figures discussed here are affected by the persons not reporting since (1) the category is treated as if it were a separate birthplace, and (2) there is an assumption that these unallocated values had the same distribution as the known values.

Table 7.13. Birthplace by Residence in 1975: 1980

Asia

Total ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ All

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ United Phil‑ Pa‑ Ot‑

Residence in 1975 Numbr Percnt Guam Sttes Total ppnes lau CNMI hers

Persons 5 yrs & over. 92977 ... 42550 20677 22019 16626 891 1944 4896

Percent.......... ... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0100.0100.0 100.0

Same house............. 35997 38.7 59.7 11.0 30.9 35.2 31.8 28.6 13.5

Different house in Guam 25050 26.9 34.6 13.0 29.0 29.6 36.4 28.3 7.4

Same Election dist... 13109 14.1 18.8 6.6 14.6 14.7 12.8 12.1 3.9

Different Elect dist. 11941 12.8 15.8 6.5 14.4 14.9 23.6 16.2 3.4

Outside Guam........... 28183 30.3 3.9 75.2 39.4 34.6 28.4 42.5 24.6

Asia................. 7742 8.3 .2 3.8 30.7 27.0 .1 .3 1.6

Japan and Okinawa.. 1006 1.1 .1 1.5 2.9 .5 .1 .2 .4

Korea.............. 848 .9 .0 .2 3.6 .0 0.0 .1 .1

Philippines........ 4706 5.1 .1 1.0 20.1 26.3 0.0 .1 .5

United States........ 17742 19.1 3.2 67.7 7.5 6.5 3.5 2.7 12.9

Northern Marianas.... 959 1.0 .2 .2 .2 .3 3.6 39.1 .2

Trust Territory...... 482 .5 .1 .2 .1 .0 21.1 .3 4.2

Palau.............. 255 .3 .0 .1 .0 .0 20.0 .2 .8

Marshall Is........ 21 .0 .0 .0 .0 .0 0.0 0.0 .2

FSM................ 206 .2 .0 .1 .0 .0 1.1 .1 3.2

Elsewhere............ 1258 1.4 .2 3.3 .9 .8 .1 .2 5.7

Residence Not Reported. 3747 4.0 1.7 .8 .7 .7 3.5 .6 54.6

Source: PC80‑1‑C/D54, Table 26

When the military population is removed (Table 7.14), the distribution of birthplace by residence in 1975 is affected. In this case, almost 48 percent (almost half) of the population 5 years and over rather than 39 percent lived in the same house in 1975 and 1980; similarly, 33 percent lived in a different house on Guam (compared to 27 percent for the whole population). On the other hand, only 17 percent of the civilian persons 5 years and over lived outside Guam in 1975, compared to 30 percent for the whole population. The biggest change by area outside Guam was for the United States, which decreased from 19 percent for all persons to only 6 percent when only the civilian population was considered.

The proportion of U.S. born civilians 5 years and over who lived on Guam in 1975 was 56 percent, over twice the percentage of all U.S. born who resided here in 1975. The U.S. born civilians who lived in the U.S. in 1975 was almost half of all U.S. born civilians who did so. The data for 'All Others' is similar to the U.S. born data, which is not surprising, as 53 percent of 'All Other' born were military. These data emphasize the mobility of the military population.

Table 7.14. Birthplace by Residence in 1975: 1980 Civilians

Asia

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ All

United Phili‑ Pa‑ Ot‑

Residence in 1975 Total Guam States Total ppines CNMI lau hers

Persons 5 yrs. & over. 73451 41252 7733 19423 14734 1885 836 2322

Percent........... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Same house............. 47.8 60.5 27.0 34.4 38.9 29.4 33.1 25.6

Different house/Guam... 32.6 34.6 29.5 32.0 32.5 28.4 37.2 14.6

Same Election dist... 16.9 18.8 13.5 16.1 16.2 12.3 13.4 7.5

Different Elect. dis. 15.7 15.8 16.0 15.9 16.3 16.2 23.8 7.1

Outside Guam........... 17.2 3.3 42.7 33.0 27.9 41.6 26.6 24.4

Asia................. 8.3 .2 3.3 29.5 25.5 .2 .1 2.4

Japan.............. .9 .1 1.3 2.6 .1 .1 .1 .5

Korea.............. 1.1 .0 .2 3.9 .0 0.0 0.0 .1

Philippines........ 5.3 .1 .9 19.4 25.3 .1 0.0 .8

United States........ 6.4 2.7 36.6 2.5 1.5 1.9 2.6 7.6

CNMI................. 1.3 .2 .3 .2 .3 39.2 3.6 .5

TTPI................. .6 .1 .5 .1 .1 .3 20.1 8.0

Palau.............. .3 .0 .2 .0 .0 .2 19.0 .4

Other Pacific Is..... .1 0.0 .2 .0 .0 .1 0.0 .9

Elsewhere............ .6 .2 1.9 .6 .5 .1 .1 5.0

Residence Not Reported. 2.3 1.6 .8 .6 .6 .5 3.1 35.5

____________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 26

RESIDENCE IN THE UNITED STATES BETWEEN 1970 AND 1980

One series of questions which appeared on the 1980 Census questionnaire for Guam but which did not appear on the questionnaire for the United States concerned residence in the United States (including Hawaii) in the 10 years preceding the 1980 census. This question had four parts:

a. During the last 10 years did...live in the United States (including Hawaii) at any time for 6 or more consecutive months?

b. When did...come or return to this territory the last time?

c. How long did...live in the United States the last time?

d. For the last 6 months that...lived in the United States was...‑

1. Working at a job or business (Full time or part time)?

2. In the U.S. armed forces?

3. Attending school or college?

These questions were intended to elicit information about the "circulatory" migration patterns of Guam's population. Many Pacific Islanders move back and forth between their home islands and larger nation‑states, primarily New Zealand and the United States (see, for example, Levin, Hayes, and Filiga, 1988, and *** additional reference for New Zealand ***). Planning and policy considerations require differing counts of the expected populations in Guam, so the amount of migration and the characteristics of the migrants are very important to the Territorial and Federal governments.

For the 1980 census of Guam, over 28,000 persons were recorded as having lived away from Guam between 1970 and 1980, returning most often in 1979 or 1980 (40 percent) or 1977 or 1978 (32 percent) (Table 7.15). There were no differences between year of return by sex. Those born on Guam returned most often between 1972 to 1974 or 1977 or 1978 (24 percent), while those born elsewhere returned during 1979 or 1980 (45 percent) or 1977 or 1978 (35 percent).

Table 7.15. Year of Return for Persons Living Away Between 1970 and

1980: 1980

Year of Total Born in Guam Born Elsewhere

Arrival or ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Return Total Males Fmles Total Males Fmles Total Males Fmles

Total....... 28138 15489 12649 5795 2997 2798 22343 12492 9851

Percent.... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

1979 or 1980.... 40.1 41.0 39.0 22.6 21.3 24.1 44.6 45.7 43.2

1977 or 1978.... 32.4 31.0 34.0 23.6 21.2 26.2 34.6 33.3 36.2

1975 or 1976.... 10.3 10.0 10.7 17.1 17.6 16.6 8.6 8.2 9.0

1972 to 1974.... 10.6 10.2 11.1 23.9 25.5 22.2 7.2 6.6 7.9

1970 or 1971.... 4.5 4.7 4.1 10.8 12.5 9.1 2.8 2.9 2.7

Yr not reported. 2.1 3.0 1.1 1.9 2.0 1.8 2.2 3.2 .9

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A 1980, Table 152

Table 7.16 presents data on persons 5 years and over who lived in the U.S. for 6 or more consecutive months. The largest age group who lived in the U.S. were those 25 to 34 years old with 9,003 persons (32 percent). Of that total, 53 percent lived there 6 or more years, 26 percent lived there 6 months to 2 years, and 21 percent lived there 3 to 5 years. The second largest group were persons 15 to 24 years old with 7,712 persons (27 percent). Most of those living away did so for 6 or more years, with the exception of those less than 15 years old: their distribution was almost evenly split among the three time periods.

Table 7.16. Persons 5 Years and Over Who Lived in the United States

for 6 or more Consecutive Months Between 1970 and 1980

by Sex and Length of Last Stay in the U.S. by Age: 1980

Under 15 to 25 to 35 to 45

15 24 34 44 Years

Length of Stay Years Years Years Years Old and

in the U.S. Total Old Old Old Old Over

Total........ 28167 5534 7712 9003 3638 2280

Percent..... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

6 months to 2 yrs. 26.6 31.9 23.2 25.5 21.9 38.3

3 to 5 years...... 20.1 33.8 10.4 21.4 22.5 14.5

6 or more years... 53.3 34.3 66.3 53.2 55.7 47.2

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A 1980, Table 158

Of the 28,167 persons who lived in the U.S. for 6 or more consecutive months between 1970 and 1980, 15,517 (55 percent) were males (Table 7.17). Most were in the school and working ages of 15 to 34 years (60 percent). Except for the youngest group, most (55 percent) had lived away for 6 or more years.

Table 7.17. Males 5 Years and Over Who Lived in the United States

for 6 or more Consecutive Months Between 1970 and 1980

by Sex and Length of Last Stay in the U.S. by Age: 1980

Under 15 to 25 to 35 to 45

15 24 34 44 Years

Length of Stay Years Years Years Years Old and

in the U.S. Total Old Old Old Old Over

Males......... 15517 2793 4410 4973 2107 1234

Percent...... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

6 months to 2 yrs. 25.3 32.2 20.5 25.6 21.9 33.9

3 to 5 years...... 20.0 33.5 9.4 22.3 23.0 15.3

6 or more years... 54.7 34.3 70.2 52.1 55.0 50.8

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A 1980, Table 158

The characteristics of females who lived away for 6 or more months were similar to those of the males who did the same (Table 7.18). Fully 58 percent were between 15 to 34 years; 52 percent had lived away 6 or more years.

Table 7.18. Females 5 Years and Over Who Lived in the United States

for 6 or more Consecutive Months Between 1970 and 1980

by Sex and Length of Last Stay in the U.S. by Age: 1980

Under 15 to 25 to 35 to 45

15 24 34 44 Years

Length of Stay Years Years Years Years Old and

in the U.S. Total Old Old Old Old Over

Females........ 12650 2741 3302 4030 1531 1046

Percent....... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

6 months to 2 yrs. 28.1 31.6 26.9 25.4 21.8 43.3

3 to 5 years...... 20.3 34.2 11.8 20.2 21.7 13.6

6 or more years... 51.6 34.2 61.3 54.4 56.5 43.2

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A 1980, Table 158

Table 7.19 shows the activity of persons who lived in the U.S. for those 5 years old and over, and persons 16 years old and over. Of the 24,835 persons 5 years and over who reported their activity, 11,804 (48 percent) were females and 13,031 were males. Of those reporting an activity, 36 percent attended school or college (37 percent of males and 34 percent of females). Of the total persons 16 years old and over who reported their activity **** SOME PEOPLE ARE BOTH SEXES ***** (19, 599 or 88 percent), 10,454 (53 percent) were males and 12,108 were females. Slightly over 40 percent of males that reported an activity were working at a job or business and 68 percent were in the Armed Forces. For the females who reported an activity, 39 percent were in school and nearly 10 percent were in the Armed Forces.

Table 7.19. Activity for Last 6 Months of Residence for Persons Who

Lived in the U.S. between 1970 and 1980: 1980

Activity Total Males Females

Persons 5 years and over.. 28167 15517 12650

Attending school or college.... 8889 4839 4050

Not attending.................. 15946 8192 7754

Not reported................... 3332 2486 846

Percent of reported.......... 35.8 37.1 34.3

Persons 16 years and over. 22199 12512 9687

Working at a job or business... 7822 4220 3602

Not working.................... 11777 6234 5543

Not reported................... 2600 2058 542

Percent of reported.......... 39.9 40.4 39.4

In the armed forces............ 8728 7868 860

Not in armed forces............ 11740 3669 8071

Not reported................... 1731 975 756

Percent of reported.......... 42.6 68.2 9.6

_________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A 1980,

Tables 154 and 156

SUMMARY

Slightly over 49 percent of the total population of the island in 1980 had been born on Guam; the remainder were migrants. When the military are discounted, however, nearly 60 percent of Guam's population were born on the island. The majority of the migrants came from the United States (45 percent) or Asia (also 45 percent). The most common period of immigration was 1979 to 1980 (30 percent), followed by 1977 to 1978 (24 percent), except for immigrants from the Philippines, who came most often between 1960 to 1969.

Immigrants were most likely to be between 20 and 64 years of age (67 percent), in the labor force (73 percent), and to have been born in the same place that their father had been born (80 percent) rather than their mother's birthplace (77 percent).

Persons who had lived away from Guam between 1970 and 1980 returned most often in the period between 1979 to 1980 (40 percent) or 1977 to 1978 (32 percent). For those who were 5 years or over, most had lived away from Guam for 6 or more years (53 percent). Many who had lived away from Guam were in the Armed Forces (43 percent), or school (36 percent).

When considering the age of immigrants, (20 to 64), their labor force participation (73 percent), and their birthplace (United States or Asia), the majority were military personnel or laborers who were on Guam to work, then return home. They had a short‑term, but vital, impact on the island, in the form of income earned, taxes paid, and money spent here, as well as participation in services and programs available on island. One issue that repeatedly arises, however, is whether or not migrants fill jobs that local personnel could fill. Only 55 percent of those who are 16 years and over and born on Guam were in the labor force. This aspect of migration will be explored in more depth in Chapter 10: Labor Force.

With the approval of the Commonwealth Act by Guam voters, including the provision to control local immigration, the migration picture is expected to change considerably. It is not foreseen, however, that this change will occur before the 1990 census. Any impact that a change in immigration policy will cause will have to wait until the census in 2000.

CHAPTER 8

ETHNICITY

"...Being a Guamanian can't be a blood thing, although I guess it would help to have some Chamorro blood in you. The only problem is that the Spanish wiped out most of the male Chamorros, so it is difficult to find any pure Chamorro blood...Maybe if we can't use blood, or birth as a standard for just what does constitute a Guamanian...maybe to be a Guamanian he has to like chicken and red rice. Or has to vote in a local election. Or maybe to be a real Guamanian a guy has to know the language. That's not bad, except that some people know it better than others, and language is a hard thing to measure...

Land ownership would have been a nice criterion to use some years ago, but unfortunately many Guamanians never have owned land, and other Guamanians have sold their land ‑ of their own free will ‑ to Japanese, Chinese, Koreans, or statesiders...

I have my own personal recommendation. I say that if a guy is sitting around with a bunch of unhappy sailors, discussing the island, if that guy stands up and says only nice things about Guam as a place to live, as his home, then he should be allowed to pass. If he talks about the fiestas, the balmy trade winds blowing off the sea, the coconut palms floating gently in the green hills between Agat and Umatac ‑ and pronounces Umatac correctly, then I would say that here we have a Guamanian." (Joe Murphy, Pipedreams, The Sunday News, March 24, 1974).

In Chapter 1 we traced the history of Chamorros, Filipinos, and others on Guam from Spanish times and into the 20th century. In this chapter we will be looking at the current social and economic situation of the various ethnic groups on Guam, but will be spending most of the time looking at the major groups ‑ Chamorros, Filipinos, and others (including Whites).

The data on ethnicity were derived from the answers to question 4. The 1980 census marked the first time that a general question on ethnicity was asked in a decennial census. The question was based on self‑identification and was open‑ended (respondents were required to provide the answer).

Ethnicity refers to a person's nationality group, lineage, or the country in which the person or the person's parents or ancestors were born before their arrival on Guam. Thus, persons reported their ethnic group regardless of the number of generations removed from their country of origin. Furthermore, responses to the ethnicity question reflected the ethnic group(s) with which persons identified and not necessarily the degree of attachment or association the persons had with the particular group(s).

Ethnicity is different from other population characteristics that are sometimes regarded as indicators of ethnicity, namely country of birth and language spoken at home.

A large number of persons reported their ethnicity by specifying a single ethnic group, but some reported two, three, or more ethnic groups. All responses were coded manually by a procedure that allowed for identification of all single ethnic groups reported. In addition, selected two‑ and three‑part combinations of ethnicity were identified by unique codes (these categories were selected since they were reported frequently in Census Bureau surveys taken prior to the 1980 census). All other multiple responses were coded according to the first ethnic category reported.

In published tabulations, multiple groups are designated in open‑ended categories such as "Chamorro and other groups," rather than in specific multiple ethnic groups such as "Chamorro‑Carolinian." A person who reported "Chamorro‑Carolinian" ethnicity, for example, is included in the "Chamorro and other groups" and in the category "Carolinian and other groups." A few responses consisting of two terms (e.g. French Canadian) were considered as a single group and were coded and tabulated as a single ethnicity. In addition, persons reporting combinations of ethnic groups such as "German‑Bavarian" were tabulated as a single group (i.e., German). Responses such as "Polish‑American" or "Italian‑American" were coded and tabulated as a single entry (i.e., "Polish" or "Italian"). A sole entry of "American" was tabulated in the category "Ethnicity not specified." Entries of religious groups were not coded separately and were tabulated in the category "Ethnic group not specified."

ETHNICITY CHARACTERISTICS

In 1980 Chamorros continued to be the largest ethnic group on Guam, although their proportion of the total population was the smallest of any of the decennial censuses in this century (Table 8.1 and Figure 8.1). From 92 percent in the 1920 census, the proportion of Chamorros remained high until the outbreak of World War II (89 percent in 1930 and 90 percent in 1940); subsequently, the percentage of the population that was Chamorro decreased drastically as large numbers of military persons immigrated in the 1940s, and many Filipinos immigrated in the 1960s and 1970s, particularly after the change in the immigration laws in 1965.

Table 8.1. Ethnicity: 1920 to 1980

Ethnicity and

Birthplace 1980 1960 1950 1940 1930 1920

Total..... 105,979 67,044 59,498 22,290 18,509 13,275

Chamorros...... 47,825 34,762 27,124 20,177 16,402 12,216

Filipinos...... 22,447 8,580 7,258 569 365 396

Whites......... 26,901 20,724 22,920 785 1,205 280

Others......... 8,806 2,978 2,196 759 537 383

Total..... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Chamorros...... 45.1 51.8 45.6 90.5 88.6 92.0

Filipinos...... 21.2 12.8 12.2 2.6 2.0 3.0

Whites......... 25.4 30.9 38.5 3.5 6.5 2.1

Others......... 8.3 4.4 3.7 3.4 2.9 2.9

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports.

In 1950, Chamorros constituted only 46 percent of the population (half the percentage of only 10 years earlier ‑ although numbers increased by about 7,000). On the other hand, Whites increased from 4 percent of the population in 1940 to 39 percent in 1950 and Filipinos increased from 3 percent to 12 percent during the period. The percentage of persons of other ethnicities remained low throughout the period.

By 1960, more than half the population was again Chamorro, but this gain was as much due to departing military personnel before the 1960 census as to gains in the Chamorro population itself. Although the Chamorro population increased by 6 percentage points, this was more than offset by the 8 percentage point decreases for Whites.

No ethnic data were tabulated in 1970, breaking the string of census data on ethnicity. Unfortunately, the 1980 Census data are also rather ambiguous. As noted in the definitions section, respondents could give any number of ethnicities, with the first two being coded. Therefore, some persons responded with a single ancestry response and others with more than one response. Since many people gave two or more responses, the sum of the responses was greater than the number of persons, which complicated the analysis of the data. Also, although the Census Bureau provided coded for Chamorro, Guamanian, Filipino, and other Asian and Pacific Islander groups, there was no acceptable code for "White" which has made analysis very difficult, and all of the analysis here should be treated as little more than tentative.

In the analysis here, we have used a convention for Whites: all persons who reported as European (or one of the European groups) either alone or in combination with other groups were included, as were persons who gave other single ancestry responses not coded in one of the Asian or Pacific Islander groups, and persons who did not respond. This convention assumes that Asian and Pacific Islander persons would respond to the question and would respond with an appropriate Asian or Pacific Islander response. Hence, their responses should not appear in either the "other single" response category

since they would have been coded into the proper Asian or Pacific Islander category, and they would not appear in the categories "Not Reported" and "Not Specified" since normally they would have responded. This definition of "White", therefore, includes all "Blacks" and any "Hispanics" who did not choose one of the European categories for ethnic response. It is also important to note that persons of Chamorro and "White" ancestry (941 altogether) are included in both groups. By this definition, "White" became the second largest group in 1980 at 25 percent.

In 1980, Filipinos remained the third ranking group with 22,447 persons identified by single ethnicity (21 percent of the total population). Filipinos increased by 8 percentage points during the 20 year period since the last time ethnic data were collected in a decennial census on Guam. This increase was mostly at the expense of Whites (who decreased by 5 percent during the period and Chamorros (who decreased by 6 percent). On the other hand, the percentage of "Other races" almost doubled during the period, growing from 4 percent to more than 8 percent; most of these persons were other Asian immigrants and Micronesians from the other islands in the areas (including some Carolinians from the Northern Mariana Islands.)

Figure 8.1 Ethnicity: 1920 to 1980

(Percent)

Table 8.2 shows the percentage change for the largest ethnic groups between adjacent censuses. Only Chamorros have shown fairly consistent increases in population during the period (although the last period was 20 years compared to 10 years for the other periods.) Chamorros increased by between 23 and 28 percent between adjacent censuses during the century.

Whites increased by more than 300 percent between 1920 and 1930, but the absolute numbers were rather small. Between 1930 and 1940 the percentage of Whites decreased by about one‑third, and then leaped by more than 2000 percent during the next decade because of the military occupation and building of armed forces establishments on the island in the latter part of the 1940s. As the military build‑up wound down in the late 1960s, Whites left the island, so that the 1960 census showed about a 10 percent decrease from 1950. During the 20 years preceding the 1980 census, the population began to increase again.

Filipinos also showed huge increases and decreases. Although the number of Filipinos decreased somewhat between 1920 and 1930, there was more than a 50 percent increase during the next decade. Between 1940 and 1950 the Filipino population increased by more than 1000 percent, partly as a result of Filipinos in the military, and partly, probably due to persons leaving the Philippines about the time of Philippine independence in 1944.

Filipinos continued to increase modestly between 1950 and 1960, but after 1960, Filipino growth was the largest of any of the major groups, growing more than 100 percent during the 20 year period, partly because of the change in the U.S. immigration laws allowing more Filipinos to come to the U.S., and, therefore, to Guam as well.

Table 8.2. Change in Ethnicity: 1920 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

1960 to 1950 to 1940 to 1930 to 1920 to

Ethnicity 1980 1960 1950 1940 1930

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Total...... 58.1 12.7 166.9 20.4 39.4

Chamorros...... 37.6 28.2 34.4 23.0 34.3

Filipinos...... 161.6 18.2 1175.6 55.9 ‑7.8

Whites......... 29.8 ‑9.6 2819.7 ‑34.9 330.4

_________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports.

PLACE OF BIRTH

By 1980, almost 3 out of every 10 persons on Guam were foreign born (see also Chapter 7 on migration.) The proportion of foreign born (those not born in the United States, Guam, or one of the U.S. territories) almost doubled between 1970 and 1980, although it had remained pretty constant between 1950 and 1950 and 1970. Data for Filipinos and for Guam's population as a whole before 1950 are not comparable with the later data because persons born in the Philippines were considered native from 1898 at the end of the Spanish‑American war until Philippines independence in 1944. So, for the earlier censuses it is not possible to tell what percentage of

the "natives" were born in the Philippines; these persons are listed as foreign born in 1950 and after (Table 8.3 and Figure 8.2).

The proportion of foreign born Chamorros has remained small, but has been increasing in recent years, and, in fact, almost doubled between 1960 and 1980, increasing from about 3 percent of the Chamorro population in 1960 to more than 5 percent in 1980. It is not clear what proportion of these Chamorros are part‑Chamorro, and how that would affect reporting for ethnicity and birthplace.

The foreign‑born White population increased significantly between 1960 and 1980, the percentage being more than 4 times as large in 1980 as in 1960, but much of this increase is probably due to the redefinition of "White" in 1980. It will be necessary to look at the 1990 census results which will allow for self‑identification of "Whites" to see whether this is a real trend.

The proportion of foreign‑born Filipinos has been decreasing since 1950, the first decennial census to include Philippines as foreign born. The percentage of foreign‑born Filipinos decreased from 94 percent in 1950 to 83 percent in 1960 and 77 percent in 1980. As Filipinos have children on Guam and their children have children, the proportion of native born should increase (unless there is further massive immigration of Filipinos from the Philippines.)

Figure 8.2 Percent Foreign Born: 1920 to 1980

Table 8.3. Ethnicity by Birthplace: 1920 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Ethnicity and

Birthplace 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940 1930 1920

Total.....105,979 84,996 67,044 59,498 22,290 18,509 13,275

Native....... 75,063 71,512 57,345 51,459 22,114 18,300 13,113

Foreign born. 30,916 13,484 9,699 8,039 176 209 162

Percent.... 29.2 15.9 14.5 13.5 .8 1.1 1.2

Chamorros...... 47,825 (NA) 34,762 27,124 20,177 16,402 12,216

Native....... 45,173 (NA) 33,769 26,521 20,089 16,319 12,187

Foreign born. 2,652 (NA) 993 603 88 83 29

Percent... 5.5 (NA) 2.9 2.2 .4 .5 .2

Filipinos...... 22,447 (NA) 8,580 7,258 569 365 396

Native....... 5,249 (NA) 1,489 403 568 364 394

Foreign born. 17,198 (NA) 7,091 6,855 1 1 2

Percent.... 76.6 (NA) 82.6 94.4 .2 .3 .5

Whites......... 26,901 (NA) 20,724 22,920 785 1,205 280

Native....... 22,204 (NA) 19,856 22,560 740 1,139 236

Foreign born. 4,697 (NA) 868 360 45 66 44

Percent.... 17.5 (NA) 4.2 1.6 5.7 5.5 15.7

______________________________________________________________________

Notes: People Born in Philippines considered native until 1944; Whites

in 1980 were combinations of ethnic groups not comparable.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

The changes between adjacent censuses highlight the affects of the foreign born population on Guam. During the early decades of the century, between 1920 and 1940, the increase in the native population was faster than the foreign born sector (with the foreign‑born actually showing a decrease between 1930 and 1940.)

The data for foreign‑born Chamorros are probably suspect, and the numbers are rather small in any case. Foreign‑born whites showed the same rollercoaster pattern of Whites in general, with native born Whites increasing more rapidly between 1920 and 1930, then both experienced about a one‑third decline during the next decade, native born whites in the military increasing more rapidly than foreign born during the big migration. (Although the foreign born increase of 700 percent is impressive, the relative numbers were small). Between 1950 and 1960 the native born White population actually decreased by more than 10 percent while the foreign‑born Whites continued to increase, more than doubling during the decade. And again, although the numbers for 1980 are suspect, the increase of foreign‑born between 1960 and 1980 was considerable.

Table 8.4. Change in Ethnicity by Birthplace: 1920 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Ethnicity and 1970 to 1960 to 1950 to 1940 to 1930 to 1920 to

Birthplace 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940 1930

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Total..... 24.7 26.8 12.7 166.9 20.4 39.4

Native....... 5.0 24.7 11.4 132.7 20.8 39.6

Foreign born. 129.3 39.0 20.6 4467.6 ‑15.8 29.0

Chamorros...... 37.6 NA 28.2 34.4 23.0 34.3

Native....... 33.8 NA 27.3 32.0 23.1 33.9

Foreign born. 167.1 NA 64.7 585.2 6.0 186.2

Filipinos...... 161.6 NA 18.2 1175.6 56.0 ‑7.8

Native....... 252.5 NA 269.5 ... ... ...

Foreign born. 142.5 NA 3.4 ... ... ...

Whites......... 29.8 NA ‑9.6 2819.7 ‑34.9 330.4

Native....... 11.8 NA ‑12.0 2948.6 ‑35.0 382.6

Foreign born. 441.1 NA 141.1 700.0 ‑31.8 50.0

_______________________________________________________________

Note: The figures in the 1970‑1980 column for the ethnic groups represent

the change between 1960 and 1980 since ethnic data were not collected

in the 1970 census.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

In 1980, Chamorros still maintained the dominance experienced since the beginning of the century. Of the 105,979 persons, 44,299 or 42 percent reported single Chamorro ethnicity, that is Chamorro and no other ethnicity (Table 8.5). Another 3,546 (3 percent) reported Chamorro in combination with other ethnicity responses. A final 1 percent reported "Guamanian", a difficult group to deal with since it is not known whether these are latter‑day Chamorros who feel a kind of separation from older Chamorros or these are persons of other races or ethnic groups who have chosen Guamanian ethnicity because of birthplace or affiliation.

Once again, the second largest ethnic group was Filipino (21 percent). No other major group had as much as 10 percent of the population. There were almost 2,000 Japanese and about an equal number of Koreans, defined by single ancestry. About 1,300 Palauans identified themselves on the basis of ethnicity.

More than 3 of every 4 persons born on Guam in 1980 were Chamorro single ancestry, and another 6 percent were part‑Chamorro. Almost 9 percent of all persons born on Guam and living on the island in 1980 were Filipino. On the other hand, more than 4 in every 10 persons born off island were Asian, with 1 in 3 of all off‑islanders being Filipino. That is, one‑third of all the persons living on Guam in 1980 but not born on the island were Filipinos. About 1 in 7 were "European".

The final column in Table 8.5 shows the percentage of persons in each of the ethnic groups who were born on Guam. Only 49 percent of Guam's population was born on island. As would be expected, more than 9 of every

10 Chamorros were born on Guam, with most of the rest presumably born in the Northern Mariana Islands. More than 8 in 10 of the Guamanians were born on island as were more than 3 out of every 4 persons claiming multiple ethnic responses.

On the other hand, only 18 percent of the Asians were born on Guam, 1 in 5 of the Filipinos, 1 of every 10 Japanese, and 1 of every 14 Koreans. Europeans constituted 8 percent of those born on Guam.

Table 8.5. Ethnicity by Birthplace: 1980

Numbers Percent Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ Guam

Guam Not Guam Not of

Ethnicity Total Born Guam Total Born Guam Total

Total persons.........105,979 52,113 53,866 100.0 100.0 100.0 49.2

Single Ethnic group...... 94,839 48,332 46,507 89.5 92.7 86.3 51.0

Chamorro............... 44,299 40,461 3,838 41.8 77.6 7.1 91.3

Guamanian.............. 830 694 136 .8 1.3 .3 83.6

Palauan................ 1,335 480 855 1.3 .9 1.6 36.0

Other Pacific Islander. 891 210 681 .8 .4 1.3 23.6

Asian.................. 28,647 5,099 23,548 27.0 9.8 43.7 17.8

Filipino............. 22,447 4,519 17,928 21.2 8.7 33.3 20.1

Japanese............. 1,855 197 1,658 1.8 .4 3.1 10.6

Korean............... 1,873 126 1,747 1.8 .2 3.2 6.7

European............... 8,442 629 7,813 8.0 1.2 14.5 7.5

Other single group..... 10,395 759 9,636 9.8 1.5 17.9 7.3

Multiple ethnic group.... 3,990 3,105 885 3.8 6.0 1.6 77.8

Chamorro and other..... 3,546 3,036 510 3.3 5.8 .9 85.6

Asian and other........ 2,963 2,643 320 2.8 5.1 .6 89.2

European and other..... 914 392 522 .9 .8 1.0 42.9

Not spec./Not reported... 7,150 676 6,474 6.7 1.3 12.0 9.5

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54, Table 26.

MEDIAN AGE

Again, because of migration, the median age of the various population components has not shown the kinds of general trends expected in modernizing populations. The median age of the population increased between 1930 and 1950, then decreased to 1960, and then increased again to 1980, partly as a result of the influx of relatively older Filipino migrants and reduced fertility of Chamorro women (Table 8.6 and Figure 8.3).

The Chamorro population, as it has in many areas, shows a fairly typical pattern of an economically developing population. The median age decreased fairly steadily from 1930 to 1960, and then suddenly increased between 1960 and 1980. As was discussed in the fertility chapter, the decrease in median age was almost certainly due to decreasing mortality, and the subsequent increase in fertility, followed in the 1960s and 1970s by delay of marriage and child bearing.

Because of the large numbers of immigrants, neither the Filipinos nor the Whites show this pattern. Among the Filipinos, for example, the median age started out lower than for Chamorros in 1930 and 1940, but as immigration increased, so did the median age, rising to 33.3 in 1960 (but still being offset by the very low median age of Chamorros, in what might be called a Renaissance of Chamorro fertility.) The median age of the White population has fluctuated quite a bit, depending on military activity.

Table 8.6. Median Age of Ethnic Groups: 1930 to 1980

Age Group 1980 1960 1950 1940 1930

Total........ 22.3 20.8 22.8 17.9 18.8

Chamorro........ 18.2 14.4 16.6 17.5 18.1

Filipino........ 27.9 33.6 27.2 15.0 17.8

White........... 23.5 22.7 24.1 27.4 24.6

_________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports.

Figure 8.3 Median Age by Ethnic Group: 1940 to 1980

The young age of the Chamorro is seen in the distribution by age group (Table 8.7). The percentage of the population under 5 increased from 18 percent in 1930 to 21 percent in 1950 before decreasing to only 13 percent in 1980, a decrease of one‑third during the 30 years. The very low median age for 1960 is seen in the young ages for that census, and the gradual aging of the population in 1980. The percentage of aged remains low.

Table 8.7. Chamorros by Age: 1930 to 1980

Age Group 1980 1960 1950 1940 1930

Total......... 47,845 34,762 27,124 20,177 16,402

Percent..... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Less than 5 yrs. 13.2 18.9 20.6 17.0 18.0

5 to 9 yrs...... 14.3 17.4 12.6 14.9 13.7

10 to 14 yrs.... 14.1 15.4 13.3 12.9 12.1

15 to 19 yrs.... 13.2 8.9 11.0 10.2 10.2

20 to 24 yrs.... 8.3 6.8 8.6 7.8 8.6

25 to 29 yrs.... 7.4 5.6 6.5 7.4 7.5

30 to 34 yrs.... 6.2 5.6 5.6 6.2 6.1

35 to 44 yrs.... 8.3 8.3 9.3 9.5 9.7

45 to 54 yrs.... 7.1 6.3 6.0 6.5 6.5

55 to 64 yrs.... 4.3 3.9 3.7 4.3 4.9

65 yrs or more.. 3.6 2.8 2.7 3.1 2.7

_________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports.

The change between adjacent censuses is also revealing (Table 8.8). The number of persons 0 to 4 years old decreased by more than 4 percent between 1960 and 1980, the only age group for Chamorros to decrease during the half century. On the other hand, the population 15 to 19 more than doubled, probably because of the double affects of the baby boom, and the smaller than average group of 15 to 19 year olds in 1960. The persons who would have been 15 to 19 in 1960 would have been born between 1941 and 1945, during the period of the Japanese occupation when fertility was unnaturally low because of the conditions on the island. This phenomenon is seen in the very small increase in the 15 to 19 year olds between 1950 and 1960, and the even smaller increase for persons 20 to 24 in between 1950 and 1960.

Table 8.8. Change in Chamorro Population by Age: 1930 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

1960 to 1950 to 1940 to 1930 to

Age Group 1980 1960 1950 1940

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Total......... 37.6 28.2 34.4 23.0

Less than 5 yrs. ‑4.1 17.6 62.8 16.6

5 to 9 yrs...... 12.6 77.6 13.6 33.4

10 to 14 yrs.... 26.7 47.7 38.5 31.6

15 to 19 yrs.... 103.4 4.0 44.9 23.6

20 to 24 yrs.... 68.1 1.1 47.5 12.3

25 to 29 yrs.... 80.6 10.5 18.7 20.1

30 to 34 yrs.... 53.4 27.2 21.4 25.4

35 to 44 yrs.... 36.9 14.6 31.3 21.1

45 to 54 yrs.... 54.7 34.6 24.5 22.2

55 to 64 yrs.... 51.8 36.2 15.7 7.1

65 yrs or more.. 78.8 32.1 16.7 43.5

______________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports.

The change in the distribution of the Filipino population shows the affects of migration (Table 8.9). Although the Filipino populations in 1930 and 1940 were very small, they showed fairly regular distributions. By 1950, more than half of the Filipino population was between 20 and 29 years old, and this bulge continued through the 1960 and 1980 censuses, although other immigrants came during the later periods as well.

Table 8.9. Filipinos by Age: 1930 to 1980

Age Group 1980 1960 1950 1940 1930

Total......... 22,447 8,580 7,258 569 365

Percent..... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Less than 5 yrs. 11.0 8.7 2.6 19.2 17.5

5 to 9 yrs...... 10.4 6.2 .7 15.3 16.4

10 to 14 yrs.... 9.0 2.5 .5 15.6 10.7

15 to 19 yrs.... 7.8 .9 1.8 10.0 9.6

20 to 24 yrs.... 6.4 1.4 33.2 6.9 9.9

25 to 29 yrs.... 9.3 10.5 25.5 4.9 8.5

30 to 34 yrs.... 9.4 27.3 12.8 5.4 6.3

35 to 44 yrs.... 12.8 28.4 17.2 9.8 9.6

45 to 54 yrs.... 12.1 12.3 4.9 5.4 4.1

55 to 64 yrs.... 8.1 1.4 .6 4.4 3.0

65 yrs or more.. 3.8 .3 .1 3.0 4.4

_________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports.

Between 1930 and 1940, Filipinos increased by 56 percent, and then by 1176 percent during the next decade because of the relatively large immigration after the war (and Philippines' independence.) The median age for Filipinos decreased between 1930 and 1940, mostly due to fertility, although there may also have been some emigration during the decade. The

largest increase was in the 20 to 44 year age groups. However, in 1950 a clear indication of the heavy immigration was seen in the 20 to 54 year old ages. Most of this increase was due to alien laborers imported for construction work with the military where massive construction activities took place, and the rebuilding of Guam's civilian infrastructure from the destruction caused by World War II.

Between 1950 and 1960, the number of Filipinos increased by 18 percent. While the proportion of children increased, the working age group 20 to 29 years old decreased by 126 percent. On the other hand, the age group 30 to 34 increased by 442 percent, again because of selective immigration. Because of the labor shortage hampering Guam's growth, the Filipinos moved into the labor force as the need for more construction workers developed. In late 1962, another disaster struck Guam in the form of Typhoon Karen, devastating about 90 percent of its homes; more Filipinos came then in order to build houses and other structures.

The Filipino population, the third ranking group in 1980, more than doubled between 1960 and 1980, and comprising 21 percent of the population in 1980. Another typhoon, this time named Pamela, hit the island in 1976, eliminating almost every wooden structure on the island, and causing renewed immigration of Filipinos.

Table 8.10. Change in the Filipino Population by Age: 1930 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

1960 to 1950 to 1940 to 1930 to

Age Group 1980 1960 1950 1940

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Total......... 161.6 18.2 1175.6 55.9

Less than 5 yrs. 231.9 290.6 75.2 70.3

5 to 9 yrs...... 339.7 983.7 ‑43.7 45.0

10 to 14 yrs.... 832.7 456.4 ‑56.2 128.2

15 to 19 yrs.... 2077.5 ‑39.4 131.6 62.9

20 to 24 yrs.... 1050.0 ‑94.8 6071.8 8.3

25 to 29 yrs.... 131.0 ‑51.2 6514.3 ‑9.7

30 to 34 yrs.... ‑10.2 151.7 2900.0 34.8

35 to 44 yrs.... 17.6 95.0 2132.1 60.0

45 to 54 yrs.... 157.4 195.0 1054.8 106.7

55 to 64 yrs.... 1426.9 197.5 60.0 127.3

65 yrs or more.. 3316.0 150.0 ‑41.2 6.2

______________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports.

The second largest ethnic group was the Whites (Table 8.11). In 1940, Whites (785 persons) had decreased 35 percent from the 1,205 persons in 1930. After the Liberation of Guam on July 21, 1944, an influx of military personnel with their dependents greatly increased the count of Whites; in 1950 where this group comprised almost 38 percent of the total population, an increase of 3820 percent since 1940.

Table 8.11. Whites by Age: 1930 to 1980

Age Group 1980 1960 1950 1940 1930

Total......... 26,901 20,724 22,920 785 1,205

Percent..... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Less than 5 yrs. 12.3 14.6 7.3 7.4 4.7

5 to 9 yrs...... 9.6 10.8 4.0 5.2 4.5

10 to 14 yrs.... 6.7 7.3 1.6 2.5 1.9

15 to 19 yrs.... 8.3 7.7 15.9 4.2 13.3

20 to 24 yrs.... 18.5 18.3 26.0 21.4 28.0

25 to 29 yrs.... 13.7 11.2 14.3 19.0 17.9

30 to 34 yrs.... 11.7 9.7 11.9 15.9 11.8

35 to 44 yrs.... 11.3 13.6 12.4 15.8 11.4

45 to 54 yrs.... 4.4 4.8 5.3 4.7 4.6

55 to 64 yrs.... 2.4 1.7 1.1 2.7 1.4

65 yrs or more.. 1.0 .4 .2 1.1 .5

_________________________________________________________________________

Note: Whites in 1980 derived by adding European single and multiple

ethnicity, other single ethnicity, and not reported.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports.

The most significant change was in the age group 15‑19 years which increased 10,970 percent (Table 8.12) from 1940 to 1950. By 1960, the same age group (15‑19) decreased by 57 percent. While uniformed personnel declined by 10 percent, an increase of the younger ages occurred, an indication that immigration of military dependents took place. By 1980, this category increased 30 percent (26,901 persons) making up 25 percent of the total population (105,979).

Table 8.12. Change in the White Population by Age: 1930 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

1960 to 1950 to 1940 to 1930 to

Age Group 1980 1960 1950 1940

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Total......... 29.8 ‑9.6 2819.7 ‑34.9

Less than 5 yrs. 9.7 80.0 2793.1 1.8

5 to 9 yrs...... 15.9 145.8 2122.0 ‑24.1

10 to 14 yrs.... 20.3 309.5 1735.0 ‑13.0

15 to 19 yrs.... 40.9 ‑56.5 10969.7 ‑79.4

20 to 24 yrs.... 31.1 ‑36.3 3444.0 ‑50.1

25 to 29 yrs.... 59.1 ‑29.5 2106.7 ‑31.0

30 to 34 yrs.... 56.0 ‑26.2 2076.8 ‑12.0

35 to 44 yrs.... 7.3 ‑.7 2196.8 ‑9.5

45 to 54 yrs.... 20.5 ‑18.8 3191.9 ‑33.9

55 to 64 yrs.... 77.6 47.2 1071.4 23.5

65 yrs or more.. 284.9 102.8 300.0 50.0

______________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

CHARACTERISTICS OF ETHNIC GROUPS

Although ethnicity was not one of the major variables used in the cross‑tabulations for the 1980 census (in PC80‑1‑C/D54), most of the major variables were cross‑tabulated with ethnicity, so a picture of the ethnic make‑up of the population in 1980 can be determined.

The major ethnic group, Chamorro, was divided into full‑ and part‑Chamorro for the census tabulations, with full‑Chamorro being persons who stated that they were only of Chamorro ancestry and part‑Chamorros declaring Chamorro and other ancestries. Almost 48,000 persons claimed either full‑ or part‑Chamorro ancestry. The single and multiple designations were not considered for Filipino since the multiple could not be disaggregated from all Asian multiples; only Filipinos with single ancestry reports were used. The procedures described previously for defining Whites were used in the cross‑tabs presented here.

As noted in Table 8.8, the median age for the population on Guam in 1980 was 22.3 years. The Chamorro median age was 18.2, Filipino median age was 27.9, and the median for Whites was 23.5. The median age for full‑Chamorros of 18.9 years was somewhat higher than the 12.5 years for part‑Chamorros. This phenomenon of younger aged multiples has been discussed for United States populations previously (Levin and Farley, 1982), and is caused by the fact that multiples can occur either as the offspring of two singles or from a single and a multiple, or from two multiples, whereas a single ancestry response should normally come only as the offspring of identical single reports. Since the universe for singles is more restricted, they tend to be older.

Almost 60 percent of the part‑Chamorros were under 15 years old compared to only 40 percent of the full‑Chamorros (Table 8.13). In this table Whites were defined as those of single and multiple European ancestry and "other" single ancestry. The largest percentages of Whites were between 20 and 44 years old, while Chamorros were focussed in the younger ages, and Filipinos were older with 1 in 4 being between 35 and 54 years old.

Table 8.13. Ethnicity by Age: 1980

Chamorro Not

All‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ Fili‑ Specif. All

Age Group Persons Total Full Part pino White or NR Others

Total......... 105,979 47,845 44,299 3,546 22,447 19,751 7,150 8,786

Percent..... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Less than 5 yrs. 12.3 13.2 12.7 19.8 11.0 12.9 10.8 10.3

5 to 9 yrs...... 11.9 14.3 13.8 19.8 10.4 9.7 9.4 10.0

10 to 14 yrs.... 10.7 14.1 13.6 20.5 9.0 6.5 7.2 8.4

15 to 19 yrs.... 10.4 13.2 12.7 19.8 7.8 7.9 9.4 8.0

20 to 24 yrs.... 10.5 8.3 8.2 8.7 6.4 18.4 18.7 8.5

25 to 29 yrs.... 9.7 7.4 7.5 5.6 9.3 14.2 12.4 11.6

30 to 34 yrs.... 8.8 6.2 6.6 1.7 9.4 11.8 11.1 12.2

35 to 44 yrs.... 10.7 8.3 8.8 1.3 12.8 11.2 11.6 16.4

45 to 54 yrs.... 7.7 7.1 7.6 1.2 12.1 4.2 5.1 9.8

55 to 59 yrs.... 2.7 2.4 2.6 .6 5.2 1.4 1.5 2.3

60 to 64 yrs.... 1.8 1.9 2.0 .6 2.9 .8 1.2 1.4

65 yrs or more.. 2.8 3.6 3.9 .5 3.8 .9 1.6 1.2

Median 22.3 18.2 18.9 12.5 27.9 23.5 21.5 27.9

_________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 21.

Table 8.14 shows the distribution for each of the 5 year age groups. Although Chamorros made up 45 percent of Guam's total population in 1980, they were 60 percent of the 10 to 14 year olds and 57 percent of the 15 to 19 year olds. Their numbers generally decreased for the older ages, but they were 58 percent of the persons 65 years and over.

Chamorros were less than 1 in every 3 of the persons 30 to 34 years old. In this age group, more than 1 in 5 were Filipino, and 1 in 4 were "White". More than 1 in 3 of all persons on Guam between 35 and 64 years old were Filipino in 1980.

Table 8.14. Percent Ethnicity by Age: 1980

Chamorro Not

All‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ Fili‑ Specif. All

Age Group Persons Total Full Part pino White or NR Others

Total......... 100.0 45.1 41.8 3.3 21.2 18.6 6.7 8.3

Less than 5 yrs. 100.0 48.5 43.1 5.4 19.0 19.6 5.9 7.0

5 to 9 yrs...... 100.0 54.0 48.5 5.6 18.5 15.2 5.3 6.9

10 to 14 yrs.... 100.0 59.7 53.3 6.4 17.9 11.4 4.6 6.5

15 to 19 yrs.... 100.0 57.4 51.0 6.4 15.8 14.3 6.1 6.4

20 to 24 yrs.... 100.0 35.6 32.8 2.8 12.8 32.8 12.0 6.8

25 to 29 yrs.... 100.0 34.1 32.2 1.9 20.2 27.1 8.6 9.9

30 to 34 yrs.... 100.0 32.1 31.4 .7 22.6 25.2 8.6 11.5

35 to 44 yrs.... 100.0 35.1 34.7 .4 25.4 19.5 7.3 12.7

45 to 54 yrs.... 100.0 41.7 41.1 .5 33.3 10.1 4.5 10.5

55 to 59 yrs.... 100.0 39.9 39.2 .7 39.9 9.5 3.8 6.9

60 to 64 yrs.... 100.0 46.6 45.6 1.0 33.9 8.7 4.6 6.3

65 yrs or more.. 100.0 58.5 57.9 .5 28.6 5.7 3.7 3.5

_________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 21.

Table 8.15 summarizes information from several of the previous tables. Again, while Chamorros displayed the characteristics of a fairly normal age distribution, with a gradual tapering off with age, because of the immigrant nature of the Filipinos and Whites, their age structures differed considerably from a "normal" distribution.

Table 8.15. Ethnicity by Age for Major Ethnic Groups: 1980

All All

Age Group Persons Chamorro Filipino White Others

Total......... 105,979 47,845 22,447 26,901 8,786

Percent..... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Less than 5 yrs. 12.3 13.2 11.0 12.3 10.3

5 to 9 yrs...... 11.9 14.3 10.4 9.6 10.0

10 to 14 yrs.... 10.7 14.1 9.0 6.7 8.4

15 to 19 yrs.... 10.4 13.2 7.8 8.3 8.0

20 to 24 yrs.... 10.5 8.3 6.4 18.5 8.5

25 to 29 yrs.... 9.7 7.4 9.3 13.7 11.6

30 to 34 yrs.... 8.8 6.2 9.4 11.7 12.2

35 to 44 yrs.... 10.7 8.3 12.8 11.3 16.4

45 to 54 yrs.... 7.7 7.1 12.1 4.4 9.8

55 to 59 yrs.... 2.7 2.4 5.2 1.4 2.3

60 to 64 yrs.... 1.8 1.9 2.9 .9 1.4

65 yrs or more.. 2.8 3.6 3.8 1.0 1.2

_________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 21.

Also, when focussing on the distribution of the three large ethnic groups, the impact of migration is clearly seen. Whites made up 45 percent

of the persons 20 to 24 in 1980, mostly because of the large number of persons of that age in the military (Table 8.16).

Table 8.16. Percent Ethnicity by Age for Major Ethnic Groups: 1980

All All

Age Group Persons Chamorro Filipino White Others

Total......... 100.0 45.1 21.2 25.4 8.3

Less than 5 yrs. 100.0 48.5 19.0 25.5 7.0

5 to 9 yrs...... 100.0 54.0 18.5 20.5 6.9

10 to 14 yrs.... 100.0 59.7 17.9 15.9 6.5

15 to 19 yrs.... 100.0 57.4 15.8 20.3 6.4

20 to 24 yrs.... 100.0 35.6 12.8 44.8 6.8

25 to 29 yrs.... 100.0 34.1 20.2 35.7 9.9

30 to 34 yrs.... 100.0 32.1 22.6 33.7 11.5

35 to 44 yrs.... 100.0 35.1 25.4 26.9 12.7

45 to 54 yrs.... 100.0 41.7 33.3 14.6 10.5

55 to 59 yrs.... 100.0 39.9 39.9 13.3 6.9

60 to 64 yrs.... 100.0 46.6 33.9 13.2 6.3

65 yrs or more.. 100.0 58.5 28.6 9.4 3.5

_________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 21

LABOR FORCE PARTICIPATION

Because we will not be discussing labor force participation until Chapter 10, a few conventions are presented here. The economically active population comprised all persons 16 years and over of both sexes who furnished the supply of labor available for the production of economic goods and services, and included both persons employed and unemployed during the reference period. The employed comprised all persons, including family workers who were at work or who had jobs during the specified period, whether they were full‑time or part‑time workers. The unemployed consisted of all persons 16 years and over who were not working and were not seeking work for pay or profit during the reference period, including those who never worked before. The total economically active population was the sum of the civilian economically active population and the armed forces. However, members of the Armed Forces were separated from the economically active population. Secondly, the group not economically active population comprised home‑workers, students, persons in institutions, income‑recipients, and all other persons not included in the economically active population.

While almost 2 out of every 3 adults 16 years and over on Guam were in the labor force (including military personnel), only 55 percent of the Chamorros were in this category (with about the same proportions of full‑ and part‑Chamorros.) On the other hand, more than 7 in every 10 Filipinos were in the labor force, as were more than 8 in 10 of the Whites (again, as defined earlier in the broadest sense) (Table 8.17).

Part of the smaller proportions of Chamorros in the labor force can be attributed to fewer of them being in the Armed Forces. Since many Whites

and Filipinos came to Guam specifically to be in the Armed Forces, they appear in both the numerator and the denominator compared to many Chamorros who were here, and did not choose the join the military. Only 247 (2 percent) Chamorros were in the labor force and were in the military compared to 8 percent for Filipinos and 59 percent for Whites. [Still, the proportion of Chamorros in the labor force is somewhat below that of the other named groups.]

Also, Chamorros were somewhat less likely to work part‑time than Whites, but slightly more likely than Filipinos to be in this category. About 14 percent of the employed population on Guam worked part‑time; about 13 percent of the Chamorros were in this category, compared to 12 percent of the Filipinos, and almost 18 percent of the Whites.

All other ethnic groups, comprised of Koreans, Japanese, Chinese, Palauans, and other Asian and Pacific Islanders, constituted 9 percent of the total population 16 years and over. About 63 percent of these groups were in the labor force, and about 2 percent were in the Armed Forces. These groups made up about 11 percent of those employed in 1980, and about 8 percent of the unemployed.

As noted in Chapter 10 on labor force participation, using census data to analyze unemployment is rather problematic since the data are only at one particular point in time and are very susceptible to variabilities in economic conditions at the time of the census. Labor force surveys are more appropriate mechanisms for obtaining unemployment information, partly because they are more timely, and partly because unemployment entails use of a number of concepts, not all of which are readily used in census enumeration procedures.

Nevertheless, altogether about 5 percent of the civilian labor force on Guam in 1980 was unemployed. Less than 6 percent of Chamorros were unemployed, while 4 percent of the Filipinos and 5 percent of the Whites were in this category.

Table 8.17. Ethnicity by Labor Force Participation: 1980

Chamorro Not All

All‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ Fili‑ Specif Ot‑

Labor Force Participation Person Total Full Part pino White or NR hers

Total 16 yrs and over. 66773 26542 25292 1250 15230 13780 5111 6110

In the labor force......... 44484 14541 13851 690 10741 11170 4206 3826

Percent.............. 66.6 54.8 54.8 55.2 70.5 81.1 82.3 62.6

Armed Forces........... 10125 247 231 16 801 6610 2310 157

Percent............. 22.8 1.7 1.7 2.3 7.5 59.2 54.9 4.1

Civilian Labor Force... 34359 14294 13620 674 9940 4560 1896 3669

Employed.............. 32692 13498 12878 620 9506 4316 1835 3537

At work 35+ hrs...... 27346 11410 10934 476 8098 3438 1537 2863

At work part‑time.... 4415 1715 1593 122 1117 752 261 570

Percent............ 13.9 13.1 12.7 20.4 12.1 17.9 14.5 16.6

Unemployed............ 1667 796 742 54 434 244 61 132

Percent............ 4.9 5.6 5.4 8.0 4.4 5.4 3.2 3.6

Not in Labor Force......... 22289 12001 11441 560 4489 2610 905 2284

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D57A 1980, Table 38.

Of the 32,692 employed persons in the civilian labor force on Guam in 1980, 13,498 (41 percent) were Chamorro. Another 9,505 (29 percent) were Filipino, about 19 percent were either a White ethnic group or not reported (and assumed to be White), and about 11 percent were other ethnic groups.

Industry. Besides "subsistence" with only 14 persons, there were 11 major industry categories in the 1980 census (Table 8.18 and Figure 8.4). For the whole population of Guam, retail trade was the largest category with about 1 in 5 persons in that industry. Almost the same number worked in professional and related activities (such as doctors and nurses, teachers and teacher's aides). Slightly fewer worked in public administration.

The distribution for the ethnic groups differed significantly depending on the group. For example, more than 1 in every 4 Chamorros was in public administration (compared to less than 1 in 5 for the general population.) Also, Chamorros were in professional and related activities in slightly greater proportions than the general population, but it is important to remember here that this category included persons of all different occupations and skill levels; that is, persons who were teachers' aides at schools or nurses' aides at a hospital or clinic were included here with doctors, teachers, and lawyers. Although 20 percent of Guam's population worked in retail trade, this was true for only 13 percent of the Chamorros (although 22 percent of the part‑Chamorros were in retail trade compared to only 13 percent of the full‑Chamorros). Also, although only 1 in 10 of Guam's employed workers were in transportation, communication, and other utilities, 1 in 7 of the Chamorros were doing these activities. The percentage of Chamorros in construction was slightly more than half of the total population, and only 3 percent of Chamorros were in entertainment and personal industry activities compared to more than 6 percent of the total population.

The characteristics for Filipinos were very different. More than 1 in every 4 Filipinos was involved in some aspect of retail trade in 1980. The second largest industry category for Filipinos was construction, with almost 1 in every 6 Filipinos involved in this category (compared to about 1 in 20 for Chamorros). Also, more than 1 in 10 employed Filipinos were in entertainment and personal activities. Much smaller proportions of Filipinos than either Chamorros or the general population were in professional and related activities, and public administration.

Figure 8.4 Ethnicity by Industry: 1980

The activities of Whites as defined by single or multiple European ancestry and other single ethnic responses were much more restricted by category. Almost exactly 1 in every 3 Whites was in professional or related activities; another 1 in 6 were in retail trade, and about an equal number were in public administration. Hence, about 2 out of every 3 White workers were in one of these three industry categories. Consequently, few Whites worked in other industries. Only 4 percent of Whites worked in construction compared to 9 percent of Guam's population, and 8 percent worked in transportation, communication, and other utilities.

Table 8.18. Ethnicity by Industry: 1980

Chamorro Not All

All‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ Fili‑ Specif Ot‑

Industry Person Total Full Part pino White or NR hers

Employed persons....... 32692 13498 12878 620 9506 4316 1835 3537

Percent.............. 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Agricul., forest., fishing. .9 .7 .8 .3 1.1 .6 .9 1.0

Construction, mining....... 9.3 5.4 5.4 5.0 16.1 3.7 5.8 14.8

Manufacturing.............. 4.9 4.1 4.1 4.2 6.7 4.4 5.6 3.3

Transport, commun, utility. 10.2 14.5 14.7 11.0 6.1 7.6 10.2 7.7

Wholesale trade............ 2.3 1.8 1.7 3.4 2.5 2.7 2.5 3.4

Retail trade............... 20.0 13.4 12.9 22.1 26.4 16.9 17.5 33.6

Finance, insurance......... 4.8 4.8 4.7 7.1 4.7 5.9 4.4 3.7

Business and repair serv... 3.6 3.1 3.1 4.2 3.8 3.4 3.7 5.3

Entertainment, personal.... 6.4 2.9 2.8 6.1 10.5 5.3 5.7 10.5

Professional and related... 19.6 21.8 22.1 16.3 11.9 33.3 28.9 10.3

Public administration...... 17.9 27.3 27.6 20.3 10.3 16.2 14.8 6.3

Primarily subsistence...... .0 .1 .1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 .1

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D57A 1980, Table 43

In Table 8.19 we have disaggregated the ethnic data a little more to show the distribution for Japanese, Koreans, and Palauans. Of the 377 Palauans employed in 1980, 27 percent were in retail trade, 18 percent were doing entertainment and other personal activities, 13 percent were in transportation, communications and other utilities, and 11 percent were doing professional and related activities. Only 8 percent were in public administration.

The 855 Koreans had a very different distribution. More than 1 in every 3 Koreans were in construction in 1980, the largest percentage of any of the selected ethnic groups, and more than twice the percentage of the Filipinos. Another 31 percent of the Koreans were in retail trade, a percentage second only to the Japanese (at 37 percent). With 2 out of every 3 Koreans in either construction or retail trade, only small numbers were doing other types of industrial activities. About 9 percent of the Koreans were in business and repair services (also more than any other group). If Koreans are representative of Asian immigrants, we can expect the make up of their part of the labor force to be somewhat different from the other groups.

As noted previously, 37 percent of employed Japanese were working in retail trade in 1980. Another 17 percent were in entertainment and personal services, and 14 percent were in transportation, communication, and other utilities. As with Koreans and Palauans, the numbers of Japanese in the labor force were still comparatively small, and further immigration may produce a different distribution of activities.

Table 8.19. Ethnicity by Percent Industry: 1980

Asian

All Cham‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ Palau‑

Industry Person orro Total Japan Korea Flpno White an

Employed persons....... 32692 13498 12754 927 855 9506 4316 377

Percent............. 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Agricul., forest., fishing. .9 .7 1.0 .4 1.1 1.1 .6 .5

Construction, mining....... 9.3 5.4 15.9 6.5 36.1 16.1 3.7 7.4

Manufacturing.............. 4.9 4.1 5.8 1.6 1.9 6.7 4.4 4.0

Transport, commun, utility. 10.2 14.5 6.5 14.1 2.7 6.1 7.6 13.3

Wholesale trade............ 2.3 1.8 2.7 3.7 1.8 2.5 2.7 4.5

Retail trade............... 20.0 13.4 28.5 37.0 31.0 26.4 16.9 27.1

Finance, insurance......... 4.8 4.8 4.6 4.1 2.0 4.7 5.9 2.4

Business and repair serv... 3.6 3.1 4.2 4.9 9.0 3.8 3.4 4.5

Entertainment, personal.... 6.4 2.9 10.3 16.6 7.7 10.5 5.3 17.8

Professional and related... 19.6 21.8 11.3 7.2 4.7 11.9 33.3 10.6

Public administration...... 17.9 27.3 9.1 3.8 2.1 10.3 16.2 8.0

Primarily subsistence...... .0 .1 .0 .1 0.0 .0 0.0 0.0

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D57A 1980, Table 43.

Once again, 41 percent of employed persons were Chamorro, 39 percent were Asian, and about 13 percent were "White". There was considerable variation from this pattern for individual industries. For example, Chamorros constituted 59 percent of all persons in transportation, communication, and utilities, but only 19 percent of those in entertainment and personal services, 24 percent of those in construction, and 28 percent of persons in retail trade. On the other hand, Asians were 67 percent of all persons in construction, 62 percent of those in entertainment and personal services, and 56 percent of those in retail trade. (Filipinos were more than half of all persons in construction and almost half of those in entertainment and personal services.) Whites had proportionally more than their average in professional and related activities (22 percent), finance, insurance and real estate (16 percent), and wholesale trade (also 16 percent). Koreans constituted 10 percent of all persons in construction, and 6 percent of those in business and repair services; Japanese were 7 percent of all persons in entertainment and personal services and 5 percent of those in retail trade, while Palauans were 3 percent of the entertainment and personal services industry.

There were more Filipinos employed in manufacturing than any other ethnic group, with 40 percent. The second largest group in this industry was Chamorro, making up 35 percent, followed by Whites with 12 percent, while all others contributed smaller amounts. In the wholesale trade industry, Chamorros and Filipinos were present in about equal amounts ( 31 percent each), while Whites were 16 percent. The retail trade industry was dominated by Filipinos (38 percent), Chamorros (28 percent), and Whites (11 percent).

Table 8.20. Percent Ethnicity by Industry: 1980

Asian

All Cham‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ Palau‑

Industry Person orro Total Japan Korea Flpno White an

Employed persons....... 100.0 41.3 39.0 2.8 2.6 29.1 13.2 1.2

Agricul., forest., fishing. 100.0 35.2 47.0 1.4 3.2 37.4 9.6 .7

Construction, mining....... 100.0 23.8 66.7 2.0 10.1 50.3 5.2 .9

Manufacturing.............. 100.0 34.7 46.1 .9 1.0 39.8 11.8 .9

Transport, commun, utility. 100.0 58.9 24.8 3.9 .7 17.4 9.9 1.5

Wholesale trade............ 100.0 31.4 45.1 4.5 2.0 30.9 15.5 2.3

Retail trade............... 100.0 27.5 55.6 5.2 4.0 38.3 11.1 1.6

Finance, insurance......... 100.0 41.8 37.4 2.4 1.1 28.4 16.3 .6

Business and repair serv... 100.0 35.9 45.3 3.8 6.5 30.3 12.4 1.4

Entertainment, personal.... 100.0 18.9 62.3 7.3 3.1 47.6 10.9 3.2

Professional and related... 100.0 46.0 22.5 1.0 .6 17.6 22.4 .6

Public administration...... 100.0 62.9 19.9 .6 .3 16.7 11.9 .5

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D57A 1980, Table 43.

We have briefly described characteristics for the three major groups on Guam in 1980. Since 1980 was the first time that a decennial census collected ethnicity data for Guam, these data are only a first step in analyzing the characteristics of the population.

LANGUAGE SPOKEN AT HOME AND ABILITY TO SPEAK ENGLISH

About 36 percent of the population 5 years and over on Guam in 1980 spoke only English at home (Table 8.21). Except for Whites, of course, none of the other large ethnic groups spoke English in more than half of their homes. Only 23 percent of Chamorros spoke English at home, compared to 19 percent of the Filipinos, 23 percent of the Japanese, 15 percent of the Palauans, and 7 percent of the Koreans. Slightly more than half of the part‑Chamorros spoke English at home, probably due to the interracial make‑up of these marriages, while only 1 in 5 of the full‑Chamorros spoke English at home.

Of the 64 percent of the population 5 years and over who did not speak English at home, about 4 in 10 spoke another language more frequently than English. The published 1980 census tabulations did not specify which language was spoken if English was not spoken, so it is not possible to tell whether Chamorros were speaking Chamorro, Filipinos speaking a language from the Philippines, etc., but certain assumptions can be made.

Less than 1 percent of Guam's population did not speak English at all, but more than 1 percent of the Filipinos spoke no English, and more than 3 percent of the Japanese and 4 percent of the Koreans fell into this category.

Although 28 percent of the population spoke English more frequently than the other language, more Chamorros were in this category (especially part‑Chamorros at 53 percent), while fewer Japanese (23 percent), Palauans

(20 percent), Filipinos (18 percent), and Koreans (12 percent) were in this category. On the other hand, more than half of the Koreans, and almost half of the Filipinos, Japanese, and Palauans spoke another language at home more often than English.

Table 8.21. Ethnicity by Language and Ability to Speak English: 1980

Chamorro

All‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

per‑ Sin‑ Mult‑ Fili‑ Japan Kor‑ Pa‑

Language and Ability sons Total gle ple pino ‑ese ean lauan

Total 5 yrs and over.. 92977 41538 38694 2844 19971 1667 1694 1172

Percent............ 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Speaks only English........ 35.7 23.1 21.1 50.5 19.4 23.3 7.3 15.3

Speaks other language...... 59795 31925 30516 1409 16103 1278 1571 993

Percent............ 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

English more frequently.. 27.9 33.0 32.1 52.7 17.7 23.2 12.2 20.0

Both equally often....... 31.3 35.2 35.4 29.8 32.9 25.3 21.1 30.8

Other language more often 40.1 31.5 32.1 17.5 48.9 48.4 62.8 48.6

Doesn't speak English.... .7 .4 .4 0.0 1.5 3.1 3.8 .5

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 31.

There was an inverse relationship between English language speaking at home and age; that is, the older the person, the less likely he or she was to speak English at home (Table 8.22, Figures 8.5 and 8.6). While persons over 65 constituted 3 percent of the population, for example, they were less than 1 percent of persons speaking English. On the other hand, 23 percent of the children 5 to 9 spoke English at home, compared to their 14 percent of the population.

The 1980 census did show that the Chamorro language was still strong. Altogether 32,034 persons 5 years and over were recorded as speaking Chamorro at home compared to the 33,182 speaking English ‑ about equal numbers. Although smaller proportions than their 5 to 9 year olds spoke Chamorro (10 percent of all Chamorro speakers compared to 14 percent of the population of that age), there was a slightly larger proportion of 10 to 14 year Chamorro speakers than in the total population. These numbers are only inferential, but do give the impression that Chamorro is still spoken in most Chamorro homes.

The distribution of Philippines language speakers was much more concentrated at older ages, because of the immigration of these persons at older ages.

Figure 8.5 Speak Only English at Home by Age: 1980

(Percent)

Figure 8.6 Speak Only Chamorro at Home by Age: 1980

(Percent)

Table 8.22. Language Spoken at Home by Age: 1980

Non‑English Language

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

All English Cham‑ Phlppn All

Age Group Persons Only Total orro langs Others

Total......... 92,977 33,182 59,795 32,034 15,487 12,274

Percent..... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

5 to 9 yrs...... 13.6 22.8 8.5 10.4 4.9 8.0

10 to 14 yrs.... 12.2 16.3 9.9 12.8 6.0 7.5

15 to 19 yrs.... 11.8 12.3 11.5 14.0 7.6 10.1

20 to 24 yrs.... 11.9 14.0 10.8 10.4 7.7 15.8

25 to 29 yrs.... 11.1 10.5 11.4 10.0 12.1 14.2

30 to 34 yrs.... 10.0 8.8 10.7 8.7 12.7 13.2

35 to 44 yrs.... 12.1 8.8 14.0 11.7 17.1 16.1

45 to 54 yrs.... 8.8 3.9 11.5 10.3 16.0 9.1

55 to 59 yrs.... 3.1 1.2 4.2 3.6 6.9 2.5

60 to 64 yrs.... 2.1 .7 2.8 2.8 4.0 1.5

65 yrs or more.. 3.2 .7 4.6 5.3 5.2 2.0

_______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 21.

Table 8.23 shows the percentages of speakers of languages at home by age. Once again, while 36 percent of the population 5 years and over spoke only English at home, 64 percent spoke another language; Chamorro was spoken by 34 percent of the total, Philippines languages by 17 percent, and 13 percent spoke other languages. Although 60 percent of the 5 to 9 year olds spoke English at home, this was not true for any of the other age groups. In fact, as was seen in Table 8.22, the older the age group, the less likely they were to speak English at home.

Although about 1 in 3 persons on Guam spoke Chamorro in 1980 (Figure 8.7), more than 4 in 10 of the 15 to 19 year olds were in this category, as were about 4 in 10 of persons 45 to 64 and more than half of those over 65 years old.

Table 8.23. Percent Language Spoken at Home by Age: 1980

Non‑English Language

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

All English Cham‑ Phlppn All

Age Group Persons Only Total orro langs Others

Total......... 100.0 35.7 64.3 34.5 16.7 13.2

5 to 9 yrs...... 100.0 59.9 40.1 26.4 6.0 7.7

10 to 14 yrs.... 100.0 47.6 52.4 36.0 8.2 8.2

15 to 19 yrs.... 100.0 37.3 62.7 40.8 10.7 11.2

20 to 24 yrs.... 100.0 41.9 58.1 29.9 10.7 17.5

25 to 29 yrs.... 100.0 33.8 66.2 31.2 18.2 16.9

30 to 34 yrs.... 100.0 31.3 68.7 30.1 21.2 17.4

35 to 44 yrs.... 100.0 25.8 74.2 33.3 23.4 17.5

45 to 54 yrs.... 100.0 15.7 84.3 40.3 30.3 13.6

55 to 59 yrs.... 100.0 13.7 86.3 39.4 36.4 10.4

60 to 64 yrs.... 100.0 12.3 87.7 46.0 31.9 9.8

65 yrs or more.. 100.0 8.1 91.9 56.6 26.9 8.4

_______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 21.

Figure 8.7 Chamorro Spoken at Home by Age: 1980

(Percent)

SUMMARY

Chamorros continued to be the largest single ethnic group on Guam in 1980 (45.1 percent of the total population), though at the lowest levels recorded in any census this century. Whites were second in numbers here (25.4 percent), Filipinos third (21.2 percent). The proportions of Whites and Filipinos here is increasing, that of Chamorros is decreasing. Fully 78 percent of full Chamorros were born on Guam, as were 61 percent of part Chamorros. The median age of Chamorros (18.2 years) was the lowest of any ethnic group; that of the Filipinos (27.9 years) was highest. Almost 60 percent of part Chamorros were less than 15 years of age, as were 40 percent of full Chamorros. Whites were primarily 20 to 44 years of age, Filipinos were 35 to 44 years.

About 2 out of 3 of those 16 years and older were in the labor force; however, only 55 percent of Chamorros were in the labor force, compared to 70 percent of Filipinos and 81 percent of Whites. This was partly due to small numbers of Chamorros in the Armed Forces or working only part time. Those in the "Other" ethnic groups represented only 9 percent of the population but 63 percent were in the labor force. By industry, Chamorros were mostly in the fields of public administration or professional and related services, Filipinos in retail trade or construction and mining, Whites were in professional and related services or retail trade, and others were in retail trade or construction and mining.

Of the population 5 years and older, 36 percent spoke only English at home; except for Whites, no other group spoke only English in more than half of the homes. Less than 1 percent spoke no English at all. Older persons were less likely than younger ones to speak English at home.

Guam is becoming increasingly multi‑ethnic and there is some evidence that multi‑lingualism will continue for some time based on the current age structure of the population and the likelihood for continued immigration from Asia, the Pacific Islands, and the United States. The Census data give some general information about the ethnic distribution of the population in 1980; unfortunately since 1970 data were not available, many comparison were not possible. After the 1990 census, a better set of trends will be developed to help planners and policy makers determine the best programs for Guam's future.

CHAPTER 9

EDUCATION

Guam has been an unincorporated Territory of the United States since 1898. Therefore, its population has had a long term exposure to the United States system of education. In fact, when the island schools were first set up, both curriculum content and sequence, and the patterns of organization common to the state of California were used as models. The public schools, Guam Community College, and University of Guam are all accredited by the Western Association of Schools and Colleges (WASC), which also accredits schools in California, Hawaii, and other Western states.

Educational statistics from decennial censuses give snapshots of the school enrollment and educational attainment. The census collects two sets of characteristics for assessing the educational status of a population: level of school enrollment and level of educational attainment for adults no longer in school. These data can be used in conjunction with data from the Department of Education and other sources to obtain information about the size and characteristics about the educated and uneducated populations. Although statistical data are collected annually by the Department of Education in order to obtain adequate information about school enrollment and to assess needs for special programs in bilingual education and special education, the census allows more in‑depth analysis of various characteristics of the school population, such as ethnicity, birthplace, and language spoken at home.

Also, the census collects data on educational attainment. These data can be used to assess the relationship between educational attainment and participation in the labor force, occupation and industry, income and poverty, and other characteristics.

Three questions, numbers 7, 8 and 9, on the 1980 census collected information on school enrollment and educational attainment. Data were also collected on literacy in question 17, and vocational training in questions 20a and 20b.

SCHOOL ENROLLMENT

The data on school enrollment were derived from answers to questions 7 and 8. Persons were classified as enrolled in school if they reported attending a "regular" school or college at any time between February 1, 1980 and the time of enumeration. Regular schooling was defined as pre‑kindergarten, kindergarten, elementary school, and schooling which led to a high school diploma or college degree. Schooling in trade or business schools, company training, or schooling obtained through a tutor was to be reported only if the course credits obtained were regarded as transferable to a regular elementary school, high school, or college. Children were included as enrolled in pre‑kindergarten only if the school included instruction as an important and integral phase of its program. Children enrolled in "Head Start" programs, or similar programs sponsored by local agencies to provide pre‑primary education to young children, were included as enrolled in school. Persons who had been enrolled in a regular school since February 1, 1980, but who had not actually attended, for example, because of illness, were counted as enrolled in school. Schooling which was generally regarded as not "regular" included that given in a pre‑kindergarten which simply provided custodial day care; in specialized vocational, trade, or, business schools; in on‑the‑job training; and through correspondence courses.

Public, Church‑Related, or Other Private School. Persons who were enrolled in school were also classified as attending a public, church‑related, or other private school. In general, a "public school" was defined as any school which was controlled and supported primarily by a government agency. A "church‑related" school was defined as a private school which was controlled or supported primarily by a religious organization. An "other private" school was defined as a school controlled primarily by private groups other than religious organizations.

Level and Year of School in Which Enrolled. Persons who were enrolled in school were classified according to the level and year of school in which they were enrolled, as reported in question 8. The levels separately identified in this report are pre‑kindergarten, kindergarten, elementary school, high school, and college. Children in "Head Start" or similar programs were counted under "Pre‑kindergarten" or "Kindergarten" as appropriate. Elementary school, as defined here, includes grades 1 to 8, and high school includes grades 9 to 12. Persons attending junior high school were reported in elementary school or high school according to their grade. The term "college" included junior or community college, 4‑year colleges, universities, and graduate or professional schools.

Comparability with Earlier Census Data. School enrollment questions in some form have been included in the census since 1930; grade attended was added in 1950. The wording of the type of school question was changed from parochial in 1970 to church‑related in 1980 in an attempt to make the affiliation with a religious group clearer to respondents. The intention was to include all schools controlled by religious groups rather than only particular denominations or religions.

In 1940, the question on schooling referred to the period since the preceding March 1. In 1950, the reference period was changed to that between February 1 and the time of enumeration. The same reference period was used in 1960, 1970, and 1980.

The age range for which enrollment data have been obtained varied for the several censuses. Information on enrollment was recorded for persons 5 to 24 years old in 1940 and 1950, for those 5 to 34 years old in 1960, and for those 3 years old and over in 1970 and 1980. Most of the published enrollment figures related to ages 5 to 24 in 1940 and in 1950, 5 to 34 in 1960, 3 to 34 in 1970, and 3 years and over in 1980. The extended coverage for the published enrollment data in the recent censuses reflects increased interest in the number of persons who were attending regular colleges and universities at older ages.

In the 1950 census, grade of enrollment was available for the first time; grade or year could be identified for elementary school through college. In 1960, kindergarten was separately identified and included with the regular enrollment figures. In 1970, nursery school enrollment was added to the levels of school separately identified. In 1980, "nursery school" was replaced by "pre‑kindergarten."

YEARS OF SCHOOL COMPLETED

The data on years of school completed were derived from answers to questions 8 and 9. These questions on educational attainment applied only to progress in "regular" schools as defined under the definition for school enrollment. The first question called for the highest grade attended, regardless of "skipped" or "repeated" grades. Persons whose education was received in foreign school systems or an ungraded school were expected to report the approximate grade in the regular school system. An instruction printed on the form, "If high school was finished by equivalency test (GED), mark '12'" (meaning grade 12), was to ensure that persons who dropped out of school before high school graduation but later earned a diploma with an equivalency test would be counted as high school graduates. Those diploma recipients who also attended college would be credited with college attendance as reported.

The second question on educational attainment asked whether or not the highest grade attended had been finished. It was to be answered "Finished," if the person had successfully completed the entire grade or year indicated in question 8. If the person had completed only part of the year, had dropped out, or failed to pass the last grade attended, the question was to be answered "Did not finish." If the person was still attending school in that grade, he or she answered "Now attending." The number in each category of highest grade of school completed represented the combination of (a) persons who reported the indicated grade as the highest grade attended and that they had finished it, (b) those who had attended the next higher grade but had not finished it, and (c) those still attending the next higher grade. Persons who had not completed the first year of elementary school were classified as having no years of school completed.

"Percent high school graduates" included persons who completed four years of high school by graduation or an equivalency test and persons who reported that they had attended some level of college.

Comparability with Earlier Census Data. Educational attainment questions in terms of years of school completed have been included on the census of Guam since 1950. In 1950, a single question was asked on highest grade of school completed. Since 1960 two questions have been used.

The 1980 instruction for persons who received a high school diploma by virtue of passing an equivalency test was not included on past census questionnaires. Persons who took equivalency tests may or may not have been reported as high school graduates in earlier censuses; however, completing high school by such means was not as common in earlier decades as it was in the decade prior to the 1980 census.

ABILITY TO READ AND WRITE

The data on ability to read and write were derived from answers to question 17. This question was asked of persons 5 years old and over. Ability to read and write was not limited to any particular language. Consequently, the category "Able to read and write," included persons who were able to read and write in English, Spanish, Chamorro, various languages used in the Philippines, etc. Persons who could only read and those who could write only their own names were classified as "Unable to read and write."

VOCATIONAL TRAINING

The data on vocational training were derived from answers to questions 20a and 20b, which were asked for the first time in the 1980 census. Persons were included in the tabulations only if they had completed the requirements for a vocational program at a trade school, business school, hospital or some other kind of school for occupational training. Vocational training was defined as a school program designed to prepare a person for work in an occupational field. Thus, training which leads to certification to practice carpentry, electronics, nursing, or accounting was vocational, provided a baccalaureate degree was not granted for that training. Included as "vocational training" were formal vocational training programs received in high school, through an apprenticeship program, in a school of business, in a nursing school or trade school, in a technical institute, in the U.S. Armed Forces, in the Job Corps, and in a correspondence school. Excluded from "vocational training programs" were single courses which were not part of an organized program of study, on‑the‑job training, and basic training in the U.S. Armed Forces. Persons who had completed a vocational training program were asked to designate the kind of school where the training was received (e.g., business school, trade school, 2‑year college, high school, training program at place of work, etc.).

SCHOOL ENROLLMENT CHARACTERISTICS

During this century, generally larger and larger proportions of the school‑age population have been in school at each decennial census (Table 9.1).

Table 9.1 Percent of Persons Age 5 to 24 Years Enrolled

in School: 1940 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

1980 1970 1960 1940

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Total age 5 to 24. 71.4 64.8 61.9 47.9

5 to 13............ 96.9 88.4 82.7 68.5

14 to 17........... 95.2 91.2 89.2 47.4

18 to 24........... 21.9 16.2 17.6 5.6

_________________________________________________________

Note: Data not available for 1950.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

The post‑war years in Guam have witnessed a substantial increase in the percentage of young people enrolled in school. Although only 48 percent of the population aged 5 to 24 in 1940 were enrolled at the time of the census, the percentage increased to 62 percent in 1960, 65 percent in 1970, and 71 percent in 1980.

In 1960, 83 percent of those in the appropriate age category were enrolled in elementary school, 89 percent in high school, and nearly 18 percent in college or university.

By 1970, the enrollment levels increased considerably for elementary school ages, increased to a lesser degree for the high school ages, and declined somewhat for the college ages. One explanation for the decline at the college level may be the high level of enlistment and participation in the Vietnam conflict in all segments of the population, both civilian and military personnel.

School enrollment at all levels increased further by 1980. Children were going to school in greater proportions than ever before, with 97 percent of elementary age children and 95 percent of high school aged children in school. The enrollment rate for persons aged 18 to 24 increased to 22 percent.

Kindergarten level (5 to 6 years) showed an increase in enrollment of 28 percent from 1970 to 1980. Enrollment rates for those in the compulsory attendance ages (6 to 16 years) also increased, from 6 percent in 1970 to 9 percent in 1980.

Table 9.2. Percent School Enrollment by Age: 1930 to 1980

Age Group 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940 1930

5 and 6....... 89.2 62.2 42.8 12.5 1.3 7.1

7 to 13....... 99.2 96.5 96.1 98.0 91.8 96.3

14 and 15..... 98.8 94.9 95.5 95.4 60.3 63.6

16 and 17..... 91.5 86.9 81.4 69.8 32.4 24.2

18 and 19..... 43.7 44.6 35.3 0.0 11.5 4.4

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

The changing pattern of school enrollment has been affected by the varying proportion of young adults in the military. Data for 1980 showed a marked difference in enrollment rates between the civilian and military populations (Table 9.3). The civilian enrollment rate for persons aged 5 to 24 years was nearly 80 percent compared to 71 percent island‑wide, while it was only 43 percent for military persons. Males were enrolled at a slightly higher rate than females in the civilian population, but at a lower rate in the military population. Although data are not available, it is probable that enrollment rates for persons 5 to 19 years of age were very similar in both the military and civilian populations and that the determining factor in the overall lower enrollment rates for the military in 1980 was the 18 to 24 year age group. That age group contained many active duty personnel employed full‑time with the military, plus their spouses, who may not have pursued a higher education.

Table 9.3 Percent of Persons 5 to 24 Years Enrolled

in School by Sex and Civilian‑Military/

Dependent Status: 1980 ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Status Total Male Female

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Total 5 to 24 yrs..... 46071 24161 21910

Total enrolled in school 32885 16939 15946

Percent enrolled........ 71.4 70.1 72.8

Civilian 5 to 24 yrs.. 35876 17976 17900

Total enrolled in school 28518 14695 13823

Percent enrolled........ 79.5 81.7 77.2

Military 5 to 24 yrs.. 10195 6185 4010

Total enrolled in school 4367 2244 2123

Percent enrolled........ 42.8 36.3 52.9

___________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980

Tables 19 and 34; PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980

Civilian Tables 19 and 34.

School enrollment and labor force status in 1980 for persons 16 to 19 years of age is shown in Table 9.4. About 9 percent of all young adult persons in the civilian population had not yet completed high school. In the military population, the rate was less than 1 percent. Almost 60 percent of the non‑completers in the civilian population considered themselves not in the labor force, and less than one‑third of these individuals were employed. Without data by sex, it is impossible to know whether the employment rate for dropouts was significantly different between males and females. It is possible that a large proportion of non‑completers were females who were not part of the labor force because of family responsibilities.

Table 9.4 School Enrollment and Labor Force Status for Persons

16 to 19 Years by Civilian‑Military/Dependent Status: 1980

Number Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Total Civ Mil Total Civ Mil

Persons 16 to 19........ 8759 7202 1557 100.0 82.2 17.8

Armed Forces Active Duty... 962 (X) 962 11.0 (X) 11.0

Civilian (not Armed Forces) 7797 7202 595 89.0 82.2 6.8

Enrolled in school........ 5862 5515 347 66.9 63.0 4.0

Not enrolled in school.... 1935 1687 248 22.1 19.3 2.8

High school graduate.... 1050 881 169 12.0 10.1 1.9

Employed.............. 602 532 70 6.9 6.1 .8

Unemployed............ 67 50 17 .8 .6 .2

Not in labor force.... 381 299 82 4.3 3.4 .9

Not high school graduate 885 806 79 10.1 9.2 .9

Employed.............. 281 259 22 3.2 3.0 .3

Unemployed............ 82 71 11 .9 .8 .1

Not in labor force.... 522 476 46 6.0 5.4 .5

_____________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980 Table 39;

PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980 Civilian Table 39.

Most of the non‑completers in the civilian population (72 percent) were born on Guam, and had a dropout rate of 12 percent (Table 9.5). Persons born in the Philippines had a dropout rate of 9 percent, and persons born in the Commonwealth of the Northern Marianas had a dropout rate of 21 percent.

Table 9.5 School Enrollment and Labor Force Status by Place of Birth

of Persons in the Civilian Community: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Place of Birth

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

School Enrollment and Trust Philip Other Else‑

Labor Force Status Total Guam CNMI Terr. Japan pines Asia U.S. Where

Persons 16 to 19.... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Enrolled in school.... 76.6 75.5 67.1 89.5 79.5 78.7 87.1 78.1 75.2

Not enrolled in school 23.4 24.5 32.9 10.5 20.5 21.3 12.9 21.9 24.8

High school graduate 12.2 12.1 11.9 6.1 16.1 11.8 7.5 15.0 15.6

Employed......... 7.4 7.2 7.1 3.5 11.6 7.8 4.3 8.7 8.5

Unemployed....... .7 .6 0.0 0.0 .9 1.0 0.0 1.4 0.0

Not in labr force 4.2 4.3 4.8 2.6 3.6 3.0 3.2 4.9 7.1

Not high school grad 11.2 12.3 21.0 4.4 4.5 9.4 5.4 6.9 9.2

Employed......... 3.6 3.6 4.3 .9 .9 5.2 2.2 2.5 2.1

Unemployed....... 1.0 1.2 1.9 0.0 0.0 .5 0.0 .6 0.0

Not in labr force 6.6 7.5 14.8 3.5 3.6 3.8 3.2 3.8 7.1

____________________________________________________________________________

Note: Else includes unknown place of birth.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980 Civilian Table 27.

English language ability may have some effect on the high school completion rate (Table 9.6). The non‑completer rate was 6 percent for those who spoke only English at home, 13 percent if another language was also spoken in the home, and 18 percent when English was spoken less frequently.

Table 9.6. School Enrollment and Labor Force Status by Frequency

of Speaking English in the Home in the Civilian

Community For Persons 16 to 19: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Speak Another Language

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Speak Speak Speak Speak

School Enrollment and Only More Same Less

Labor Force Status Total Eng. Total Freq. Freq. Freq.

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Persons 16 to 19...... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Enrolled in school...... 76.6 83.1 73.8 78.7 73.9 67.4

Not enrolled in school.. 23.4 16.9 26.2 21.3 26.1 32.6

High school graduate 12.2 10.6 12.9 11.8 12.3 15.1

Employed............ 7.4 6.3 7.9 7.3 7.0 9.7

Unemployed.......... .7 .8 .7 .7 .7 .6

Not in labor force.. 4.2 3.6 4.4 3.7 4.7 4.9

Not high school grad. 11.2 6.3 13.3 9.5 13.8 17.4

Employed............ 3.6 1.9 4.3 2.9 4.2 6.2

Unemployed.......... 1.0 .7 1.1 .9 1.1 1.4

Not in labor force.. 6.6 3.7 7.8 5.6 8.4 9.8

_______________________________________________________________

Note: "Less Freq." includes those who do not speak English.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980 Civilian Table 32.

School enrollment for persons 5 to 6 years old increased by 27 percentage points at the kindergarten level between 1970 and 1980; this was 8 percentage points more than the 1960 to 1970 change in school enrollment for children of the same ages (Table 9.7). In the 18 and 19 year old category, there was a 9 percentage point decrease in school enrollment between 1970 to 1980 for those continuing their school to a higher level.

Table 9.7. School Enrollment for Persons 5 to 19 Years: 1960 to 1980

Total Population In School Percent in School

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age Group 1980 1970 1960 1980 1970 1960 1980 1970 1960

Total............... 34963 30115 21412 31402 25424 16701 89.8 84.4 78.0

5 and 6 years.......... 4986 4749 3826 4447 2955 1639 89.2 62.2 42.8

7 to 13 years.......... 16735 15392 11368 16596 14851 10927 99.2 96.5 96.1

14 and 15 years........ 4483 3672 1996 4429 3485 1907 98.8 94.9 95.5

16 and 17 years........ 4398 3126 1601 4024 2717 1303 91.5 86.9 81.4

18 and 19 years........ 4361 3176 2621 1906 1416 925 43.7 44.6 35.3

____________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980 Table 34; PC80‑1‑B54

1980 Table 16; PC(1)‑B54 1970 Tables 5 and 10; General Population

Characteristics 1960 Table 7.

About 59 percent of civilian‑military/dependent males 25 to 29 years old were enrolled in an institute of higher education (Table 9.8). This high enrollment indicates that the civilians at these ages were attending school under the G.I. Bill, or seeking higher level positions in the job market, or, for the military, to be earning credits that could be used to move to a higher rank.

Fully 57 percent of the 46 enrollees 55 to 64 years of age were female. Females also dominated in the age groups 40 to 54 and 65 and older. There could be several contributing factors to why there were more women in those age groups enrolled in school than there were men: these women could have been mothers that have reared their children and then decided to go to college, and some, perhaps, were divorced women who decided to start a career.

Table 9.8. Percent School Enrollment for Persons 3 Years Old and Over

by Age, Sex, and Civilian‑Military/Dependent Status: 1980

Total Civilian Military

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age Total Percent Males Fmles Males Fmles Males Fmles

Total in school. 36002 100.0 18598 17404 15815 14962 2783 2442

Percent........100.0 100.0 51.7 48.3 43.9 41.6 7.7 6.8

3 Years............... 208 100.0 52.4 47.6 33.7 27.9 18.8 19.7

4 Years............... 685 100.0 50.1 49.9 36.1 37.2 14.0 12.7

5 Years...............2042 100.0 52.1 47.9 40.9 36.8 11.1 11.2

6 Years...............2405 100.0 50.4 49.6 41.7 39.6 8.7 10.1

7 Years...............2626 100.0 50.3 49.7 42.1 40.0 8.1 9.7

8 Years...............2480 100.0 51.6 48.4 43.0 41.0 8.6 7.5

9 Years...............2462 100.0 52.0 48.0 43.8 39.8 8.2 8.2

10 Years..............2357 100.0 51.4 48.6 43.7 41.1 7.7 7.5

11 years..............2183 100.0 51.9 48.1 45.9 41.9 6.0 6.2

12 Years..............2286 100.0 51.0 49.0 45.5 42.8 5.6 6.1

13 Years..............2202 100.0 52.2 47.8 47.1 42.9 5.1 4.9

14 Years..............2229 100.0 51.0 49.0 46.4 44.6 4.6 4.4

15 years..............2200 100.0 50.0 50.0 45.6 46.0 4.5 4.0

16 Years..............2111 100.0 52.1 47.9 48.4 44.9 3.7 3.0

17 Years..............1913 100.0 52.4 47.6 48.9 44.5 3.5 3.1

18 Years..............1242 100.0 55.2 44.8 50.3 41.0 4.9 2.9

19 Years.............. 664 100.0 52.3 47.7 47.1 45.5 5.1 2.3

20 Years.............. 420 100.0 45.0 55.0 38.1 52.4 6.9 2.6

21 years.............. 328 100.0 46.6 53.4 35.4 49.1 11.3 4.3

22 Years.............. 273 100.0 54.2 45.8 38.5 37.7 15.8 8.1

23 Years.............. 246 100.0 57.7 42.3 39.8 35.4 17.9 6.9

24 Years.............. 216 100.0 55.1 44.9 39.4 31.9 15.7 13.0

25 to 29 Years........ 856 100.0 58.8 41.2 38.6 31.8 20.2 9.5

30 to 34 Years........ 601 100.0 54.4 45.6 32.3 34.6 22.1 11.0

35 to 39 Years........ 318 100.0 50.3 49.7 28.9 41.2 21.4 8.5

40 to 44 Years........ 199 100.0 49.7 50.3 38.2 44.7 11.6 5.5

45 to 54 Years........ 190 100.0 48.4 51.6 44.7 48.4 3.7 3.2

55 to 64 Years........ 46 100.0 43.5 56.5 43.5 56.5 0.0 0.0

65 Years and Over..... 14 100.0 42.9 57.1 42.9 57.1 0.0 0.0

_____________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980, Table 34;

PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980 Civilian, Table 34.

YEARS OF SCHOOL COMPLETED

The population of Guam underwent a marked increase in the level of educational attainment in the years since 1940, as shown in Table 9.9. The proportion of adults who finished high school rose from 5 percent in 1940 to 66 percent in 1980. At the same time, the proportion of persons completing less than 5 years of elementary education fell from 56 percent in 1940 to 8 percent in 1980. This dramatic increase in educational attainment was no doubt caused by compulsory education for all persons up to 16 years, which began on Guam in 1950. The proportion completing college increased from 1 percent in 1940 to 18 percent in 1980, probably the result of the opening of the Guam college in 1961 (which later became the University of Guam), which made a higher education available locally.

Table 9.9. Educational Attainment for Persons Age 25 and Over:

1940 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Educational Attainment 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Total....................... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Less than 5 years of

elementary school........... 8.2 14.2 20.4 29.7 55.6

Between 5 and 11 years........ 26.2 36.3 41.9 38.4 39.6

High school (12 or more years) 65.6 49.5 37.7 31.9 4.8

College (16 or more years).. 17.5 10.6 6.3 4.7 1.0

Median years completed........ 12.5 11.9 9.7 8.4 4.7

__________________________________________________________________

Note: For 1960, persons whose years of school completed was not

reported are excluded.

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports.

The increase in the proportion of adults with high school diplomas was partially influenced by a significantly higher level of educational attainment in the military community. High school diplomas or GED certificates are now required for enlistment in the new, all volunteer armed service (Table 9.10). This was reflected in the 94 percent of military males and 80 percent of military females aged 25 and over who had high school diplomas. Approximately 80 percent of all adults had a high school diploma in 1980; this figure was slightly higher for males and slightly lower for females.

Table 9.10. Educational Attainment for Persons Age 25 and Over by

Sex and Civilian‑Military/Dependent Status: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Number Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Educational Attainment Total Male Fmle Total Male Fmle

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Total, 25 yrs. and over... 46906 24540 22366 100.0 100.0 100.0

Less than 5 yrs............... 3831 1493 2338 8.2 6.1 10.5

Between 5 and 11 yrs.......... 12299 6046 6253 26.2 24.6 28.0

High school (12 yrs.+)........ 30776 17001 13775 65.6 69.3 61.6

College (16 yrs. +)......... 8232 4510 3722 17.5 18.4 16.6

Civilian 25 yrs and over.. 37575 19063 18512 100.0 100.0 100.0

Less than 5 yrs............... 3627 1446 2181 9.7 7.6 11.8

Between 5 and 11 yrs.......... 11398 5754 5644 30.3 30.2 30.5

High school (12 yrs.+)........ 22550 11863 10687 60.0 62.2 57.7

College (16 yrs. +)......... 6600 3552 3048 17.6 18.6 16.5

Military 25 yrs and over.. 9331 5477 3854 100.0 100.0 100.0

Less than 5 yrs............... 204 47 157 2.2 .9 4.1

Between 5 and 11 yrs.......... 901 292 609 9.7 5.3 15.8

High school (12 yrs.+)........ 8226 5138 3088 88.2 93.8 80.1

College (16 yrs. +) ........ 1632 958 674 17.5 17.5 17.5

__________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980 Table 22;

PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980 Civilian Table 22.

There was a decrease of 2.3 percentage points in the proportion of the population finishing 4 years of college between 1970 and 1980 (Table 9.11). This does not necessarily represent a significant decrease in attainment; a contributing factor in this case could be that most college students who began their education on Guam transferred and attended other universities or colleges off‑island. A "High School and Beyond" survey conducted in school year 1986‑87 by the Division of Research, Planning and Evaluation of the Guam Department of Education indicated that 60 percent of high school seniors graduating that year planned to enroll and attend college off‑island.

Table 9.11. Educational Attainment: 1940 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

School Attainment 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Persons 25 yrs & over. 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

No school.................. 1.5 .5 .0 .6 .8

Elementary: 1 to 6 years.. 13.6 7.7 .5 9.2 9.3

7 and 8 years. 6.1 4.7 .3 5.5 5.7

High school: 1 to 3 years.. 13.1 11.8 3.6 13.2 20.7

4 years....... 31.2 34.0 46.5 31.4 34.6

College: 1 to 3 years.. 16.8 19.6 31.1 17.3 15.6

4 years....... 11.2 13.5 9.9 14.4 10.4

5 or more year 6.4 8.2 8.1 8.5 2.9

_____________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports.

The proportion of males completing 4 years of high school ranged between 30 percent in 1950 to 48 percent in 1960 (Table 9.12). Only 3 percent of males had completed 5 or more years of college in 1940; this proportion increased to 8 percent in 1960, then slowly decreased to 7 percent in 1980.

Table 9.12. Educational Attainment: Males, 1940 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Educational Attainment 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Males 25 yrs & over... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

No school.................. 1.0 .4 .0 .6 .5

Elementary: 1 to 6 years.. 11.0 7.6 .5 9.9 12.1

7 and 8 years. 5.9 5.0 .3 6.5 5.8

High school: 1 to 3 years.. 12.8 12.6 3.6 15.3 21.6

4 years....... 31.7 33.8 46.7 29.5 33.1

College: 1 to 3 years.. 19.2 20.4 31.1 17.0 15.5

4 years....... 11.0 12.0 9.4 13.0 8.4

5 or more year 7.4 8.0 8.2 8.1 3.1

_____________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports.

In general, women's level of attainment was lower than that of men (Table 9.13). More males continued their education at the secondary level through high school, and males generally also had a higher level of attainment toward a degree in college. High school, college, and post‑secondary completion rates for females also decreased between 1970 and 1980.

Table 9.13. Educational Attainment: Females, 1940 to 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Educational Attainment 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Females 25 yrs & over.. 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

No school.................. 2.1 .6 0.0 .6 1.0

Elementary: 1 to 6 years.. 16.5 7.7 0.6 7.9 7.0

7 and 8 years. 6.4 4.0 0.0 4.1 5.6

High school: 1 to 3 years.. 13.4 10.4 2.1 10.2 20.1

4 years....... 30.8 34.5 43.2 34.2 35.8

College: 1 to 3 years.. 14.2 17.9 30.4 17.6 15.7

4 years....... 11.4 16.3 17.4 16.5 11.9

5 or more year 5.3 8.6 6.2 9.0 2.8

_____________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

In 1980, 66 percent of the population 25 years and over had completed 4 years of high school, as had 69 percent of males 25 and over and 62 percent of females. Of those born on Guam, 50 percent had finished 4 years of high school (52 percent of males and 48 percent of females), while this was true of 61 percent of those born in the Philippines (60 percent of males and 62 percent of females). Only 6 percent of the adult population had completed more than 5 years of college (7 percent of males and 5 percent of females), compared to 2 percent of those born on Guam and 14 percent of those born in the U.S.

Table 9.14. Educational Attainment by Birthplace: 1980

Asia

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ Else‑

School Attainment Total Guam USA Total Phil. CNMI Palau where

Persons 25 yrs & over. 46906 16972 10562 15488 12111 963 580 2349

No school.................. 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Elementary: 1 to 6 years.. 98.5 97.5 99.9 98.6 98.9 96.8 97.8 99.1

7 and 8 years. 84.9 77.4 99.1 83.3 81.8 74.5 75.9 92.0

High school: 1 to 3 years.. 78.7 68.6 98.2 76.4 74.3 63.7 70.5 88.2

4 years....... 65.6 49.6 93.7 63.6 61.3 45.0 51.2 80.3

College: 1 to 3 years.. 34.4 16.2 54.2 40.5 42.3 16.1 21.9 46.7

4 years....... 17.5 6.7 28.1 23.3 24.1 4.4 4.8 19.4

5 or more yrs. 6.3 2.4 14.1 5.6 6.0 1.9 1.0 8.0

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54, 1980 Table 27.

Males born in the United States had higher proportions who had completed 5 or more years of college, followed by those born Elsewhere (Table 9.15). Males born in Palau had the lowest proportions of their population who had completed 5 or more years of college.

Table 9.15. Educational Attainment by Birthplace: Males, 1980

Asia

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ Else‑

School Attainment Total Guam USA Total Phil. CNMI Palau where

Males 25 years and ove 24803 7762 6584 8045 6703 434 247 1468

No school.................. 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.1

Elementary: 1 to 6 years.. 99.0 98.1 99.9 99.0 99.1 97.9 99.2 99.5

7 and 8 years. 88.1 81.0 99.2 85.1 83.6 79.0 82.2 95.0

High school: 1 to 3 years.. 82.3 72.0 98.3 77.8 75.4 68.9 77.3 91.7

4 years....... 69.6 51.8 94.9 63.6 60.3 49.3 61.1 84.8

College: 1 to 3 years.. 38.3 18.0 55.1 40.6 38.9 21.4 29.1 52.4

4 years....... 19.2 6.9 28.7 21.8 19.2 6.0 4.9 20.2

5 or more year 8.3 2.6 15.3 5.5 5.1 2.3 1.2 9.4

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54, 1980 Table 27.

While 6 percent overall and 7 percent of males had completed 5 or more years of college, only 5 percent of females had done so (Table 9.16). Females had higher proportions who had no school (2 percent) than did males (1 percent). Females born in the CNMI had the highest percentages with no school (over 4 percent), while those born in the U.S. had the lowest (0 percent).

Table 9.16. Educational Attainment by Birthplace: Females 1980

Asia

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ Else‑

School Attainment Total Guam USA Total Phil. CNMI Palau where

Females 25 yrs and over 22103 9210 3978 7435 5408 529 333 881

No school.................. 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 99.8

Elementary: 1 to 6 years.. 97.9 96.9 100.0 98.2 98.6 95.8 96.7 98.4

7 and 8 yrs... 81.2 74.3 99.1 81.4 79.5 70.7 71.2 87.1

High school: 1 to 3 yrs.... 74.7 65.7 98.0 75.0 72.9 59.4 65.5 82.3

4 years....... 61.1 47.8 91.7 63.5 62.6 41.4 43.8 72.9

College: 1 to 3 years.. 30.0 14.7 52.7 40.4 46.5 11.7 16.5 37.2

4 years....... 15.6 6.5 27.2 24.9 30.3 3.0 4.8 18.0

5 or more yrs. 4.1 2.2 12.2 5.8 7.2 1.5 .9 5.7

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54, 1980 Table 27.

While 66 percent of the population 25 years and older were high school graduates, over 75 percent of those in the labor force and 96 percent of those in the military had completed high school (Table 9.17). Females generally had higher proportions of their population who had finished high school; the exceptions were those in the civilian labor force, both employed and unemployed. The employed females in the civilian labor force had a higher proportion of college graduates (77 percent) than had the employed males (18 percent).

Table 9.17 Labor Force Participation by Educational Attainment: 1980

Civilian LF

In ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑Not In

Labor Mili‑ Empl‑ Unem‑ Labor

Educational Attainment Total Force tary ploy ploy Force

Persons 25 yrs. and over... 46906 32779 5554 26347 878 14127

Percent High School Graduates. 65.5 75.3 95.5 71.5 63.6 43.0

Percent College Graduates..... 17.5 21.7 18.0 22.9 13.4 7.7

Males 25 yrs. and over... 24540 21448 5232 15835 381 3092

Percent High School Graduates. 69.2 74.2 95.4 95.4 67.6 7.1

Percent College Graduates..... 18.3 20.0 17.6 17.6 21.1 2.4

Females 25 yrs. and over... 22366 11331 322 10512 497 11035

Percent High School Graduates. 61.6 77.4 97.2 77.3 66.2 45.4

Percent College Graduates..... 16.6 24.9 23.6 25.5 14.7 8.0

____________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54, 1980 Table 39.

Table 9.18 shows median and mean income by educational attainment. There was a direct correlation between education and income, that is, the more educated the person was in 1980, the more income he or she obtained. Of the college graduates (4 year degree), 21 percent made more than $25,000 per year, although 9 percent made $7,000 or less. Of those with 1 to 3 years of college, 20 percent earned more than $25,000, and 18 percent had income between $15,000 and $25,000.

Table 9.18 Educational Attainment by Income: 1980

Total Persons with income (Dollars)

(incl.‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

w/o 7K‑ 10K‑ 15K‑ Med‑

School Attainment income Tot <7K 10K 15K 25K 25K+ ian Mean

Persons 25 yrs & over 46906 37618 11097 7350 9352 7379 2440 10149 11700

Percent............ 100.0 100.0 100.0 100. 100. 100. 100. ... ...

No school................. 1.5 1.2 3.2 .6 .5 .2 .1 2712 4491

Elementary: 1 to 6 years. 13.6 11.4 21.0 10.4 7.3 6.1 2.6 6279 8024

7 and 8 yrs.. 6.2 5.5 7.0 5.6 4.8 4.5 2.7 8770 10223

High school: 1 to 3 yrs... 13.1 12.1 15.2 12.5 12.1 9.1 5.4 8910 10130

4 years...... 31.2 31.9 26.7 39.1 37.3 28.3 23.3 10124 11283

College: 1 to 3 years. 16.8 18.3 15.0 20.7 20.6 17.6 19.8 10417 12772

4 years...... 11.2 12.3 8.7 8.5 12.8 17.7 21.4 12441 14330

5 or more yrs 6.4 7.5 3.3 2.6 4.6 16.2 24.8 18392 19144

____________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54, Table 49.

ABILITY TO READ AND WRITE

Fully 99 percent of those 10 to 17 years old in the South could read and write in 1980, as could 95 percent of those in the North and 93 percent in the Central region (Table 9.19). Of those 18 years and older in 1980, 97 percent of those in the North could read and write, 97 percent of those in the South, and 96 percent of those in the Central region.

Table 9.19. Persons 10 years and Over by Ability to

Read and Write By Region: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Region

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age Group Total North Central South

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Persons 10 yrs +... 80345 36111 26799 17435

Prcnt Able read/write.. 96.2 96.5 94.6 97.1

10 to 17 years....... 17970 7769 5908 4293

Prcnt Able read/write.. 95.0 94.6 93.1 98.6

18 yrs. and over..... 62375 28342 20891 13142

Prcnt Able read/write.. 96.6 97.0 95.0 96.6

_______________________________________________________

SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census STF 3A Table 161.

VOCATIONAL TRAINING

While 69 percent of those 16 to 64 years were in the labor force, the proportion was higher (87 percent) for those who had completed the requirements of a vocational training program (Table 9.20). The highest labor force participation rate was for those who were in a training program at their place of work (92 percent), followed by those whose school was not reported (90 percent).

Table 9.20. Vocational Training by Labor Force Participation: 1980

In Civilian LF

Labor Force ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑Perc.

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑Mili‑ Empl‑ Unem‑ Unem‑

Vocational Training Total Nmbr Perc. tary ploy ploy ploy

Persons 16 to 64 yrs........ 63788 43951 68.9 10121 32175 1655 4.9

Completed Requirements........ 16657 14444 86.7 5587 8448 409 4.6

Type of School:

Business, trade, 2‑yr coll.. 4863 3885 79.9 452 3264 169 4.9

High School Voc. Prgm....... 1721 1375 79.9 340 967 68 6.6

Training prgm at place of wk 6107 5637 92.3 2673 2856 108 3.6

Other school................ 2082 1846 88.7 1101 707 38 5.1

School not reported......... 1884 1701 90.3 1021 654 26 3.8

_________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 Table 39.

Over 55 percent of those 16 to 64 years old who were in the military in 1980 had completed the requirements of a vocational training program (Table 9.21). Only about 25 percent of those who were in the civilian labor force and unemployed in 1980 had finished a training program. The most common type of program completed was a training program at a place of work, except for those in the civilian labor force: both those employed (39 percent) and unemployed (41 percent) in 1980 had attended a business, trade, or 2‑year college for their training.

Table 9.21. Type of Vocational Training by Labor Force

Participation: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Civilian LF

In ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Type of Labor Mili‑ Empl‑ Unem‑

Vocational Training Total Force tary ploy ploy

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Persons 16 to 64 yrs........ 63788 43951 10121 32175 1655

Completed Requirements........ 26.1 32.9 55.2 26.3 24.7

Type of School........... 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00 100.00

Business, trade, 2‑yr coll.. 29.19 26.90 8.09 38.64 41.32

High School Voc. Prgm....... 10.33 9.52 6.09 11.45 16.63

Training prgm at place of wk 36.66 39.03 47.84 33.81 26.41

Other school................ 12.50 12.78 19.71 8.37 9.29

School not reported......... 11.31 11.78 18.27 7.74 6.36

__________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 Table 39.

In 1980, among males 16 to 64 years of age, 34 percent had had vocational training (Table 9.22). In the North, 33 percent of males had had such training, as had 32 percent in the Central region, and 40 percent of males 16 to 64 years of age in the South.

Table 9.22. Persons 16 to 64 Years by Age by Vocational Training

By Region: 1980

Number Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Persons Total North Cntrl South Total North Cntrl South

Males 16 to 64 years.. 11527 4943 3718 2866 34.0 32.6 31.9 40.5

16 to 17 years....... 119 38 34 47 5.2 3.9 4.3 8.9

18 to 24 years....... 3377 1344 1194 839 39.9 40.5 36.2 45.4

25 to 64 years........ 8031 3561 2490 1980 34.7 32.8 33.0 42.0

Females 16 to 64 years 5130 2343 1545 1242 17.2 16.9 16.0 19.4

16 to 17 years....... 87 40 17 30 4.1 4.4 2.3 6.5

18 to 24 years....... 1463 650 472 341 20.9 20.4 19.9 23.5

25 to 64 years....... 3580 1653 1056 871 17.2 16.9 16.2 19.5

__________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A 1980 Table 161.

Table 9.22 also shows females 16 to 64 years of age who reported having had vocational training. Only 17 percent of females overall had such training, with those residing in the South having the highest proportion at 19 percent, the North region second at 17 percent, and the Central region having the lowest proportion at 16 percent. Women 18 to 24 years generally had higher proportions of their populations reporting having had vocational training than women of any other age.

SUMMARY

The 1980 census shows that both school enrollment and educational attainment have increased dramatically since 1940 for the Guam population. Increases have been somewhat moderated due to the relatively large military population on Guam. The military population contains active duty personnel as well as spouses who may not have a desire to pursue further education. Differential high school completion was also noted between the civilian and military 16 to 19 year old population. Some evidence was presented that the child's home language affected high school completion rates. Those speaking only English at home had a lower dropout rate than those speaking English and other languages.

In this chapter we have seen the increase in the number of women obtaining college educations, which correlated with professional levels of employment. As could be anticipated, those having more academic education were those more likely to be employed, and obtaining a higher income.

CHAPTER 10

LABOR FORCE PARTICIPATION

As Guam has developed economically, labor force participation has provided a measure of how well the government and the private sector have done in providing jobs for the population. Although some data on labor force participation are obtained from periodic surveys on Guam, data for the whole population can only be obtained from a census. Since the decennial census is, by definition, collected only once each decade, it provides a measure every ten years of labor force participation at the particular point in time. By the same token, the census does not provide temporal data; we cannot see change in the labor force characteristics except at the chosen points in time, and the data themselves are extremely affected by temporary ups and downs in the economic situation on Guam, as well as in the United States. In fact, as is sometimes noted, when the United States sneezes economically, Guam often gets a severe case of pneumonia.

REFERENCE WEEK

The data on labor force status relate to the calendar week preceding the date on which respondents were interviewed by enumerators. This week was not the same week for all respondents since the enumeration was not completed in one week. However, for the majority of persons the reference week for the 1980 census was the last week in March 1980. Good Friday occurred in the following week (the first week of April 1980). Many workers presumably took time off from work to observe the holiday, so the holiday could have affected the data on hours worked for some areas if the first week of April was the reference week for a significant number of persons. The holidays probably did not affect the overall measurement of labor force status since labor force data were based on work activity during the entire reference week.

LABOR FORCE STATUS

The data on labor force status were derived from answers to questions 22, 23, and 24.

The series of questions on labor force status was asked of all persons 15 years old and over and was designed to identify, in this sequence: (a) persons who worked at a job or business any time during the reference week; (b) persons who did not work at a job or business during the reference week but who had jobs or businesses from which they were temporarily absent (excluding layoff); (c) persons on layoff; and (d) persons who did not work at a job or business during the reference week, but who were looking for work to earn money during the four weeks and were available for work during the reference week.

Most of the labor force status data shown in this report relate to persons 16 years old and over. In 1950 and 1960, labor force status data were presented for persons 14 years old and over. The change in the universe was made in 1970 to agree with the official measurement of the labor force as revised in January 1967. Selected labor force status data were shown in 1970 for persons 14 and 15 years old, but were not presented in 1980.

Employed. Employed persons included all civilians 16 years and over who were either (a) "at work," at a job or business ‑ those who did any work at all during the reference week as paid employees or in their own business or profession, or on their own farm, or who worked 15 hours or more as unpaid workers on a family farm or in a family business, or (b) were "with a job but not at work," those who did not work during the reference week but had jobs or businesses from which they were temporarily absent due to illness, bad weather, industrial dispute, vacation, or other personal reasons. Excluded from the employed were persons whose only activity consisted of work around the house, subsistence activity, or volunteer work for religious, charitable, and similar organizations.

Unemployed. Persons were classified as unemployed if they were civilians 16 years and over and (a) were neither "at work" at a job or business, nor "with a job but not at work" during the reference week, (b) were looking for work to earn money during the last 4 weeks, and (c) were available to accept a job. Examples of jobseeking activities included: (1) registering at a public or private employment office, (2) meeting with prospective employers, (3) investigating possibilities for starting a professional practice or opening a business, (4) placing or answering advertisements, (5) writing letters of application, and (6) being on a union or professional register.

Also included as unemployed were persons who did not work at all at a job or business during the reference week and were waiting to be called back to a job from which they had been laid off.

Civilian Labor Force. The civilian labor force consisted of persons classified as employed or unemployed in accordance with the criteria described above.

Experienced unemployed. Unemployed persons who had worked at any time in the past excluding subsistence activity were classified as the "Experienced unemployed."

Experienced Civilian Labor Force. The "experienced civilian labor force" comprised the employed and the experienced unemployed.

Labor Force. The labor force included all persons classified in the civilian labor force plus members of the armed forces (persons on active duty with the United States Army, Air Force, Navy, Marine Corps, or Coast Guard).

Not in Labor Force. All persons 16 years old and over who were not classified as members of the labor force were defined as "not in labor force." This category consisted mainly of students, housewives, retired workers, seasonal workers enumerated in an "off" season who were not looking for work, inmates of institutions, disabled persons, persons doing subsistence activity only, and persons doing only incidental unpaid family work (less than 15 hours during the reference week).

Subsistence Activity. A person engaged in subsistence activities if he or she produced goods for his or her own or family's use and needs, such as growing/gathering food, fishing, cutting copra for home use, raising livestock, making handicrafts for home use, and other productive activities not for commercial purposes. When subsistence activity are shown in conjunction with the "employed" and the "Not in Labor Force" categories of the Labor Force Status concept, they related to activities engaged in during the census reference week.

Worker. The term "Worker" appeared in connection with several subjects in this report: class of worker, weeks worked in 1979, and the number of workers in family in 1979. Its meaning varied and, therefore, should be determined in each case by referring to the definition of the subject in which it appears.

Comparability with Earlier Census Data. The questionnaire items and labor force status concepts for the 1980 census were similar to those used in the 1970 census except that in 1980 a distinction was made between regular work and subsistence activity. However, these concepts differed in many respects from those associated with the 1950 and 1960 censuses.

Comparability with Data from Other Sources. Because employment data from the census are obtained from respondents in households, they differ from statistics based on reports from individual business establishments, farm enterprises, and certain government programs. Persons employed at more than one job were counted only once in the census and were classified according to the job at which they worked the greatest number of hours during the reference week. In statistics based on reports from business and farm establishments, persons who worked for more than one establishment may be counted more than once. Moreover, other series, unlike those presented here, may exclude private household workers, unpaid family workers, and self‑employed persons, but may include workers less than 16 years of age.

An additional difference in the data arises from the fact that persons who had a job but were not at work are included with the employed in the statistics shown here whereas many of these persons are likely to be excluded from employment figures based on establishment payroll reports. Furthermore, the labor force status data in this report include persons on the basis of place of residence regardless of where they work, whereas establishment data report persons at their place of work regardless of where they live. This latter consideration is particularly significant when comparing data from workers who commute between areas.

Actual Hours Worked. All persons who reported working at a job or business during the reference week were asked to report in item 22b the number of hours that they worked (excluding any hours spent doing subsistence activity). The number of persons who worked only a small number of hours is probably understated since such persons sometimes consider themselves as not working.

LABOR FORCE STATUS IN 1979

The data on labor force status in 1979 were derived from answers to question 29. Persons 16 years old and over were classified as "in labor force in 1979" if (a) in 1979 they worked one or more weeks for pay or profit (including weeks on paid vacation or on paid sick leave) or worked without pay on a family farm or in a family business or were on active duty in the U.S. Armed Forces; or (b) had any weeks of unemployment in 1979. The categories "Worked in 1979" and "With unemployment in 1979" were not mutually exclusive.

Worked in 1979 (Work Status in 1979). Persons 16 years old and over who worked one or more weeks according to the criteria described below were classified as "worked in 1979"; all other persons 16 years old and over "did not work in 1979". Some tables showing work status in 1979 include 15 year olds; those persons were classified as "Did not work in 1979", by definition.

Weeks worked in 1979. The data on weeks worked in 1979 were derived from answers to questions 29a and 29d. Question 29d (Weeks worked in 1979) was asked of persons 16 years old and over who indicated in question 29a that they worked in 1979.

The data pertained to the number of weeks during 1979 in which a person did any work for pay or profit (including paid vacation and sick leave) or worked without pay on a family farm or in a family business. Weeks of active service in the U.S. Armed Forces were also included. Persons who did only subsistence activity in 1979 were tabulated in the category "did not work in 1979". It is probable that the number of persons who worked in 1979 and the number of weeks worked were understated since there was some tendency for respondents to forget intermittent or short periods of employment or to exclude weeks worked without pay.

Usual Hours Worked in 1979. The data on usual hours worked per week in 1979 were derived from answers to question 29e. This question was for persons 16 years old and over who indicated that they worked in 1979.

The data pertain to the number of hours a person usually worked during the weeks worked in 1979. The respondent was to report the number of hours worked per week in the majority of the weeks he or she worked in 1979. If the hours worked per week varied considerably during 1979, the respondent was to report an approximate average of hours worked per week. The statistics on usual hours worked per week in 1979 were not necessarily related to the data on actual hours worked during the census reference week (question 22b).

Persons 16 years old and over who reported that they usually worked 35 or more hours per week during the weeks they worked were classified as "usually worked full‑time"; persons who reported that they usually worked 1 to 34 hours were classified as "usually worked part‑time".

Year‑Round Full‑Time Workers. Persons 16 years old and over who usually worked 35 or more hours per week for 50 to 52 weeks in 1979 were classified as "year‑round full‑time workers".

With Unemployment in 1979. Persons 16 years old and over who had one or more weeks of unemployment in 1979 according to the criteria described below were classified as "with unemployment in 1979".

The data on weeks of unemployment in 1979 pertained to the number of weeks during 1979 in which a person 16 years old and over did not work or did subsistence activity only, but spent looking for work to earn money (that is, trying to get a job or start a business or professional practice) or on layoff from a job. Examples of looking for work to earn money are presented in the definition of unemployed. Excluded from weeks of unemployment are any weeks in which the person worked for pay or profit even for one hour; or any weeks in which the person received any wages or salaries; or which the person was on active duty in the U.S. Armed Forces, on paid vacation or on paid leave. The question on weeks of unemployment did not inquire whether persons who recorded looking for work were available to accept a job. The number of weeks of unemployment is the total number of weeks accumulated during the entire calendar year 1979, regardless of whether the periods of unemployment were continuous.

Mean Weeks of Unemployment. The mean is based on the distribution of persons with unemployment by individual weeks of unemployment from 1 to 52 weeks.

Number of Workers in Family in 1979. The term "Worker" as used for these data is defined according to the criteria described in the section on "Work in 1979".

Comparability With Earlier Census Data. The data on weeks worked collected in the 1980 census are comparable with data from the 1970 census but may not be entirely comparable with data from the 1960 census of Guam. On the two most recent census questionnaires, two separate questions were used to obtain this information. The first identified persons with any work experience during the year and thus, indicated those persons from whom the questions on number of weeks worked was applicable. In 1960, however, the questionnaires contain only a single question on number of weeks worked.

In 1970, persons responded to the weeks worked question by indicating one of six weeks‑worked intervals; in 1980 persons were asked to enter the specific number of weeks they worked.

The data on weeks spent looking for work in previous year (1979), on usual hours worked, and on subsistence activity in 1979 were collected in 1980 for the first time.

LABOR FORCE CHARACTERISTICS

Labor force participation for all persons 16 years and over has fluctuated over the years since 1950 (Table 10.1). In that year, 72 percent of those 16 and over were in the labor force; the percent in the labor force decreased to 64 percent, its lowest level, in 1960. The proportion of eligible persons who were in the labor force then increased with each census, until it was at 67 percent in 1980. The proportion of the labor force who were in the Armed Forces decreased every year, from 42 percent in 1950 to 23 percent in 1980. The proportion of unemployed stayed at about 2 percent until 1980, when it jumped to nearly 5 percent.

Table 10.1. Labor Force Participation: 1950 to 1980

Labor Force Participation 1980 1970 1960 1950

Persons 16 yrs & over... 66,773 49,548 41,026 44,133

Labor force.................. 44,484 32,493 26,304 31,965

Percent................ 66.6 65.6 64.1 72.4

U.S. Armed Forces.......... 10,125 9,997 8,705 13,294

Percent................ 22.8 30.8 33.1 41.6

Civilian Labor Force....... 34,359 22,496 17,599 18,671

Employed................. 32,692 22,112 17,208 (NA)

Unemployed............... 1,667 384 391 (NA)

Percent................ 4.9 1.7 2.2 (NA)

Not in the labor force....... 22,289 17,055 14,722 12,168

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

Tables 10.2 and 10.3 show that the increase in the labor force participation of males from 1960 to 1970 was 12 percent, and that the male participation rate increased another 15 percent between 1970 and 1980; but the increase in the labor force participation rate of females between 1960 and 1970 was 92 percent compared to 114 percent between 1970 and 1980, clearly showing that large numbers of women entered the labor force in the 1960s and 1970s.

Table 10.2. Male Labor Force Participation: 1950 to 1980

Labor Force Participation 1980 1970 1960 1950

Males 16 years and over. 35,293 29,085 25,952 32,572

Labor force.................. 29,000 25,274 22,551 28,792

Percent................ 82.2 86.9 86.9 88.4

U.S. Armed Forces.......... 9,224 9,878 8,660 13,208

Percent................ 31.8 39.1 38.4 45.9

Civilian Labor Force....... 19,776 15,396 13,891 15,584

Employed................. 18,994 15,245 13,680 (NA)

Unemployed............... 782 151 211 (NA)

Percent................ 4.0 1.0 1.5 (NA)

Not in the labor force....... 6,293 3,811 3,401 3,780

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

Table 10.3. Female Labor Force Participation: 1950 to 1980

Labor Force Participation 1980 1970 1960 1950

Females 16 yrs and over.. 31,480 20,463 15,074 11,561

Labor force.................. 15,484 7,219 3,753 3,173

Percent................ 49.2 35.3 24.9 27.4

U.S. Armed Forces.......... 901 119 45 86

Percent................ 5.8 1.6 1.2 2.7

Civilian Labor Force....... 14,583 7,100 3,708 3,087

Employed................. 13,698 6,867 3,528 (NA)

Unemployed............... 885 233 180 (NA)

Percent................ 6.1 3.3 4.9 (NA)

Not in the labor force....... 15,996 13,244 11,321 8,388

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

MILITARY

Because Guam was obtained by the United States primarily to function as a strategic outpost, the presence of active duty military has been an especially strong influence in the overall number of employed persons since 1930, the first census to recognize them separately (Table 10.4).

Table 10.4. Armed Forces, Civilian, and Non‑Civilian Employment: 1930

to 1980

Labor Force Participation 1980 1970 1960 1950 1940 1930

In the Labor Force... 44,484 32,493 26,304 31,965 6,885 6,175

Armed Forces............. 10,125 9,997 8,705 13,294 640 1,019

Percent............ 22.8 30.8 33.1 41.6 9.3 16.5

Males.................. 9,224 9,878 8,660 13,208 640 1,019

Females................ 901 119 45 86 0 0

Percent Female..... 8.9 1.2 .5 .6 0.0 0.0

Civilian................. 34,359 22,496 17,599 18,671 6,245 5,156

Percent change........ 52.7 27.8 ‑5.7 199.0 21.1 ...

__________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

Active duty military personnel accounted for 1,039 persons (16 percent) of the total labor force in 1930, and 640 (9 percent) in 1940. On July 23, 1944, during the liberation of Guam by the U.S. Marines, Navy personnel came ashore at Orote peninsula. They constructed the Naval Operating Base, and many other installations. The total number of armed services personnel for all branches was 37,735 in 1947 when the largest part of the construction was taking place, but decreased to 13,294 by 1950.

Although the number of military personnel was greatly reduced in peacetime Guam, they represented 42 percent of the employed labor force in 1950. Military activities continued to decrease through the 1950's, so active military employment was only 34 percent of all employed on the island in 1960. Some build‑up in the number of military personnel occurred by 1970 to support the Vietnam War effort, but their percent of employed continued to decrease, to 31 percent in 1970. Between 1970 and 1980, although active duty armed forces again increased, their percentage continued to decrease to 23 percent.

Military women did not appear separately in a Guam census until 1950, when they represented less than 1 percent of the total active duty personnel. Their numbers remained small until 1980 when the participation of women jumped to nearly 9 percent of all military personnel, or 901 women out of 10,125 persons. While the number of women increased substantially, the number of males decreased between 1970 and 1980.

CIVILIAN EMPLOYMENT

A summary of the change of civilian employment between 1930 and 1980 is also shown in Table 10.4. The changes in civilian employment followed the same pattern as changes in total employment during the 50 year period. The labor needs of the military affected civilian employment drastically during the 1940's, contributing to the increase of over 12,000 workers between 1940 and 1950.

The temporary nature of the military's labor needs brought about a decrease in the number of civilian workers as a slowdown in military construction activities occurred between 1950 and 1960. Permanent in‑migration and immigration beginning in 1962 contributed to the large increase in civilian employment by 1970, growth that continued to accelerate during the following decade. Civilian employment increased by 28 percent between 1960 and 1970, and by 48 percent between 1970 and 1980.

Males made up most of the increase in civilian employment during the 1940's, and almost all of the decrease between 1950 and 1960. The number of males increased by 11 percent between 1960 and 1970, however, and by 25 percent over the following decade. On the other hand, the number of female workers nearly doubled during the 1940's. While civilian male employment decreased during the 1950's, females continued to enter the civilian labor force. After 1960 women began to enter the work place in much larger numbers. Between 1960 and 1970, female civilian workers increased in strength by 95 percent, and by 100 percent the following decade. During the 1960 to 1980 period, there were 10,170 additional female workers, far greater than the 5,314 increase in male workers.

Females were 19 percent of civilian employment in 1930. As ever increasing numbers of females sought employment, the percent of female participation increased to 31 percent of all civilian workers in 1970 and to 42 percent of civilian workers in 1980.

CHAMORRO AND NON‑CHAMORRO EMPLOYMENT

Chamorro employment. While Chamorros were 80 percent of all employed persons in 1930, their percentage increased to 87 percent in 1940, corresponding with a reduction of military personnel shown during that year. Despite an increase in the number of employed Chamorros of 14 percent between 1940 and 1950, the greatly increased number of workers on the island by 1950 left Chamorro workers at only 21 percent of the work force. Their percentage increased to 28 percent in 1960 with the decreased level of imported workers and active duty military. Chamorro workers did not show large gains, however, increasing by only 8 percent over 1950. It was the 1960 to 1980 period that showed the most gains in the number of Chamorros employed. Chamorro workers increased by 6,385 persons in 20 years, or 87 percent.

Because employment for persons other than Chamorros also grew rapidly during the same period, the percentage of Chamorros among the employed rose only slightly, to 32 percent by 1980.

When active duty military are excluded, Chamorros constituted 92 percent of the civilian labor force in 1930 and 1940. Their percentage decreased to 35 percent in 1950, and increased to 41 percent in 1960 and 1980, in spite of an increase in the number of workers of 89 percent between 1960 and 1980.

The history of the growth of Chamorro employment has been related to the transformation of the Guam economy from a subsistence agrarian life style prior to World War II to a wage‑based economy beginning in 1944. In 1930, 53 percent of all civilian employment was in agriculture; the percentage decreased to 45 percent in 1940, and then suddenly to 6 percent in 1950, less than 1 percent in 1970, and 2 percent in 1980. Chamorros were more heavily involved in agriculture than the general population; for Chamorro males, for example, while almost two‑thirds were in agriculture in 1930, and 6 in 10 in 1940, the proportions dropped to 1 in 5 in 1950 and less than 1 in 16 in 1960. Although no data by sex were available for 1980, since only 99 full‑ and part‑Chamorros were in agriculture, the proportions for males had to be very small.

Non‑Chamorro Employment. In 1930, there were only 387 non‑Chamorro workers on Guam who were not active duty military. These persons represented less than 8 percent of all civilian employment. By 1940, non‑Chamorros had increased by 30 percent, but increases in Chamorro employment caused non‑Chamorro employment to rise only slightly, to 8 percent. During the 1940's, the number of non‑Chamorros in civilian employment increased by 11,635, to 65 percent of all employed. With a decline in military construction between 1950 and 1960, the number of immigrant workers temporarily decreased. But cancellation of the Naval security requirement for entrance to and exit from the island in 1962, and changes in the immigration law in 1965, allowed the number of non‑Chamorro workers in the civilian labor force to increase to over 19,000 workers by 1980. At that point, non‑Chamorros in the civilian labor force represented well over half of all civilian employment.

After World War II, the military was unsuccessful in recruiting sufficient numbers of U.S. construction workers to Guam, and also found the local labor supply too small and unskilled to meet needs. The Navy therefore entered into an exchange of notes with the Philippine government in 1947, an arrangement not complying with immigration laws, but being expedient in fulfilling the military's pressing temporary labor problems. In a non‑resident census in 1947, 6,964 ( percent) of the 12,566 non‑resident contract workers were American, and another 5,143 ( percent) were Filipino.

In more recent censuses, the proportion of non‑Chamorros in the labor force has steadily increased because of in‑migration of Americans and immigration of Filipinos, Micronesians, and others.

Agricultural employment. The decrease of agricultural employment for Chamorros from 1930 is entwined with changes in Guam's economic status. Because historic events between 1930 and 1980, especially in the 1940s, were so important to the development of Guam;s Chamorro labor force, a brief recapitulation is appropriate here:

The worst typhoon since 1918 hit Guam on November 3, 1940. Winds of 130 knots destroyed crops and left thousands homeless. Governor McMillan reported that copra production, Guam's largest industry, would not be normal for 5 years due to the destruction of coconut trees. Swine herds and poultry flocks were reduced due to the lack of locally produced feed, and tree crops such as breadfruit, avocados and bananas would not produce normal crops for at least 18 months.

Just 6 months later, as the island struggled to recover from the typhoon, the Japanese attacked and occupied the island on December 8, 1941. Economic development and employment expansion stopped completely for the 2 1/2 year occupation period. During the first part of the occupation, people who wished to remain on their farms were permitted to do so, although they were also able to find some employment. During the last 6 or 7 months, however, conditions degenerated. The Japanese forced all able‑bodied persons over the age of 12 to work in the fields, with only a limited amount of food for payment.

Widespread war damage and the possibility of sniper attacks for some months afterward, prevented most Chamorros from engaging in agriculture; many Chamorros, however, joined the non‑agricultural work force in the reconstruction efforts.

It was during this time that the decline in agriculture by Chamorros was first mentioned by the military government as a concern. A September 4, 1944 Summary Report of Military Government states that, "Agriculture has made good progress, but is handicapped by uncertainty as to what land will be left by base development. There is also a strong possibility that much agricultural labor will be diverted by naval enlistment and the great demand for Guamanian labor and clerical help by all units."

Much of the best agricultural land was being taken by the military. The combined pressures of agricultural land takings and the high demand for Chamorro labor within the military government contributed to the neglect of the land and the change of Guam from an agricultural to a money‑based economy. From that point on, fewer Chamorros were engaged in agriculture.

LABOR FORCE PARTICIPATION

Labor force participation at all age groups for females increased during the 1970s while rates for most age groups of males decreased (Table 10.5). For the youngest group, aged 16 to 19, females in the labor force increased from 23 to 29 percent, while males increased from 42 to 45 percent. The age group from 20 to 24 years could not be compared directly because different age breaks were used in the two censuses, but there was a downward trend for males, and a more dramatic upward trend for females in this age group. For the oldest group, those 65 years and over, females increased from 5 to 8 percent, while males increased from 26 to 29 percent in the labor force. Throughout all age groups the percentage of males in the labor force was always greater than the percentage of females, and for almost all age groups, the differences were significant. For example, in 1970 only 29 percent of the females 45 to 64 were in the labor force compared to 88 percent of the males.

There is some evidence that women are working longer than they used to, while men seem to be retiring a little earlier than before. The proportion of males 45 to 64 in the labor force decreased from 88 to 82 percent during the decade, while the female labor force participation jumped from 29 to 42 percent. Some of the change for males could be attributed to military personnel departing during the decade and not being replaced; since military persons are in the labor force, by definition, they appear in both the numerator and the denominator when determining labor force participation.

Table 10.5. Labor Force Participation by Age and Sex: 1970 and 1980

Males Females

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age Group 1980 1970 1980 1970

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

16 to 19 years.... 44.9 42.4 29.3 23.1

20 to 24 years.... 90.1 (NA) 58.5 (NA)

20 and 21 years. (NA) 92.8 (NA) 52.3

22 to 24 years.. (NA) 94.4 (NA) 48.9

25 to 34 years.... 94.4 96.8 58.3 38.5

35 to 44 years.... 95.6 97.1 58.9 38.7

45 to 64 years.... 82.0 87.9 42.5 28.7

65 years and over. 29.2 26.2 7.8 4.8

__________________________________________________________________

Source: PC80‑1‑C/D54, Table 36, and PC(1)‑B54, Tables 5 and 12

The trend for labor force participation by age is seen more clearly in the smaller age ranges of Table 10.6. By 20 to 24 years old, 3 out of every 4 persons on Guam were in the labor force in 1980, including 9 out of every 10 males and about 6 of every 10 females. The proportions increased for every age group to the 35 to 44 year olds, and then dropped off progressively. These trends are very clear for males, but for females, the proportions remained somewhat the same throughout the ages of 20 to 44 years old, and then dropped off more quickly than those for the males, perhaps because women were dropping out of the labor force to take care of their growing children. It is also possible, however, that for the older women, their children had grown, and that these women never entered the work force, and so appeared in the denominator, but not in the numerator.

Women entered the labor force in great numbers during the 1970s, a time when the absolute growth in the labor force was only slightly greater than the gains in the working age population. Indeed, women accounted for most of the growth of Guam's labor force between 1970 and 1980. While the male component of the labor force remained larger than the female component, it failed to keep pace with the increase of the male working age population. Female participation in the labor force increased by a dramatic 114 percent between 1970 and 1980, accompanied by an increase in the female working age population of only 54 percent.

The profile of growth has not been limited to younger women. The 1980 profile showed a substantial growth for every age classification compared to 1970, although the smallest change over time was among women 16 to 24 years old. Marriage, early childbearing, and higher education probably retarded more dramatic growth among young women.

Table 10.6. Age and Sex by Labor Force Participation: 1980

Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age Group Total Males Females

Total................. 66.6 82.2 49.2

16 to 19 years............. 37.7 44.9 29.3

20 to 24 years............. 75.6 90.1 58.5

25 to 29 years............. 76.0 93.2 58.5

30 to 34 years............. 77.7 95.6 58.1

35 to 44 years............. 78.5 95.6 58.9

45 to 54 years............. 70.6 87.8 50.4

55 to 59 years............. 59.8 78.9 35.3

60 to 64 years............. 42.0 61.9 20.1

65 years and over.......... 17.9 29.2 7.8

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54, Table 36

Not only did women enter the labor force in record numbers between 1970 and 1980, but these women were increasingly likely to be married and have children Table 10.7). In 1960, only 21 percent of women in the labor force were married, but during the ensuing 20 years, there was a 415 percent increase in the number of married women in the labor force, the number increasing from 1,003 in 1960 to 10,318 in 1980. Married women comprised almost half of all women in the labor force in 1980.

By 1980, working mothers had become the "rule" rather than the exception. Of the 15,484 women in the labor force on Guam in 1980, 41 percent had children under 6 years old, and another 32 percent had children between 6 and 17 years old. In contrast, in 1970 31 percent of the 7,219 women in the labor force had children under 6 and 20 percent had children of school age (between 6 and 17 years old). Therefore, there were more women in the labor force in 1980 and they had more children at home to support. In fact, the presence of children appears to be a factor which is strongly correlated with women in the work force. The number of women in the labor force with children living at home more than tripled (increasing by 212 percent) between 1970 and 1980, while the number of women in the labor force with no children under 18 years old increased by only 18 percent. The most dramatic increase was among those mothers with school age children, an increase of 257 percent.

Labor force participation of females used to be somewhat dependent on whether they had young children. The traditional communal society found in Guam might have freed women to work because of having elderly people as built‑in babysitters, but many women would be unlikely to join the labor force because they were taking care of their young children. Part‑time paid employment also is a recent development in the Pacific, so females would probably not have been able to avail themselves of many work opportunities in the past.

The percentage of females 16 years and over with own children less than 18 years old almost doubled, but the percentage of these women in the labor force more than tripled from 3,600 to 11,210 between 1970 and 1980.

Table 10.7. Females with Own Children by Labor Force: 1970 and 1980

Percent Percent Percent of

Number Change of Total Category

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ 1970 to‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Labor Force 1980 1970 1980 1980 1970 1980 1970

Females, 16 + yrs..31,480 20,463 53.8 100.0 100.0 ... ...

With own child < 18 yrs.22,188 11,159 98.8 70.5 54.5 100.0 100.0

In the labor force....11,210 3,592 212.1 35.6 17.6 50.5 32.2

Not in labor force....10,978 7,567 45.1 34.9 37.0 49.5 67.8

With own child < 6 yrs..13,054 7,285 79.2 41.5 35.6 100.0 100.0

In the labor force.... 6,282 2,213 183.9 20.0 10.8 48.1 30.4

Not in labor force.... 6,772 5,072 33.5 21.5 24.8 51.9 69.6

With own child 6‑17 only 9,134 3,874 135.8 29.0 18.9 100.0 100.0

In the labor force.... 4,928 1,379 257.4 15.7 6.7 54.0 35.6

Not in labor force.... 4,206 2,495 68.6 13.4 12.2 46.0 64.4

__________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A, Table 57;

PC(1)‑B54, 1970, Table 12

The percentage of adult females with own children under 6 and in the labor force increased from 30 percent in 1970 to 48 percent in 1980, and the absolute number almost tripled during the period. Women with children 6 to 17 years old and in the labor force had similar increases.

About 55 percent of the adults born on Guam were in the labor force in 1980, including 68 percent of the males and 44 percent of the females (Table 10.8). The highest labor force participation rates in 1980 were for persons born in the United States (94 percent for males and 59 percent for females). The rates for persons born in Asia were also high. In‑migration by women from the U.S. and immigration from Asian countries contributed in large measure to the growth of the female labor force during the 1970s. By 1980, only 39 percent of the female labor force was composed of women born on Guam, 24 percent were immigrants from the U.S. and 31 percent were born in Asia.

Table 10.8. Birthplace by Labor Force Participation: 1980

Percent in the Labor Force

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Birthplace Total Males Females

Total................. 66.6 82.2 49.2

Guam....................... 54.8 67.5 43.8

Northern Mariana Islands... 49.7 69.0 33.4

TTPI....................... 53.1 71.5 37.2

Palau.................... 52.8 72.8 38.2

Marshall Islands......... 45.2 68.8 20.0

Fed. States Micronesia... 54.5 69.5 35.8

United States.............. 80.6 94.1 58.7

Asia....................... 69.4 86.0 52.1

Japan and Okinawa........ 68.4 88.7 55.8

Korea.................... 64.3 87.1 45.6

Philippines.............. 70.8 85.8 53.4

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D57A, Table 37

As might be expected, there was a direct correlation between educational attainment and labor force participation (albeit with a very slight drop for persons with exactly 8 years of elementary school)(Table 10.9). About 7 in every 10 persons 25 years and over were in the labor force, with about 7 out of every 8 males and about half the females. For every level of educational attainment male labor force participation was greater than for females, although the gap narrowed considerably with increasing educational attainment. More than 9 out of every 10 males and 6 of every 10 females with some college education were in the labor force in 1980.

Education and labor force participation were strongly related in 1980. The more highly educated a woman was, the more likely she was to seek work. In 1980, the labor force participation rate for women with 4 or more years of college was 79 percent, compared to 57 percent for those with a high school education, and 30 percent for those with less than a high school education.

Table 10.9. Years of Schooling Completed by Labor Force Status: 1980

Percent in the Labor Force

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Years of Schooling Total Males Females

Persons, 25 + years... 69.9 87.4 50.7

None....................... 22.2 37.6 13.9

Elementary: 1 to 4 years... 31.6 52.5 17.8

5 and 6 years.. 47.2 68.9 29.9

7 years........ 53.1 73.3 31.4

8 years........ 53.0 75.0 32.0

High School: 1 year........ 59.1 82.7 35.7

2 years....... 64.0 86.5 39.9

3 years....... 65.6 87.9 41.2

4 years....... 76.1 93.2 56.9

College: 1 to 3 years.. 81.2 92.9 63.8

4 years....... 84.3 95.3 72.6

5 and 6 years. 90.3 95.6 83.8

7 or more yrs. 92.1 95.6 82.9

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D57A, Table 39

About 22,300 persons 16 years and over were not in the labor force in the week before the census (Table 10.10). Of these, 49 percent had never worked. About 45 percent of those who did report a year last worked had worked last in either 1979 or 1980. About 48 percent of the non‑workers from the south last worked in one of those two years, with about 44 percent of those who worked before having done so in 1980.

Table 10.10. Year Last Worked for Persons Not in Labor Force: 1980

Numbers | Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑|‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Cen‑ | Cen‑

Year Last Worked Total North tral South | Total North tral South

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑|‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Prsns 16+, Not LF.22,289 9,417 7,591 5,281 | 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Never worked........10,960 4,693 3,770 2,497 | 49.2 49.2 49.8 49.7

Worked..............11,329 4,724 3,821 2,784 | 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

1980.............. 1,614 617 522 475 | 14.2 13.1 13.7 17.1

1979.............. 3,470 1,473 1,149 848 | 30.6 31.2 30.1 30.5

1978.............. 1,251 551 411 289 | 11.0 11.7 10.8 10.4

1975 to 1977...... 1,646 742 529 375 | 14.5 15.7 13.8 13.5

1970 to 1974...... 1,943 783 681 479 | 17.2 16.6 17.8 17.2

1969 or earlier... 1,405 558 529 318 | 12.4 11.8 13.8 11.4

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A, Table 167

Also, in looking at female labor force participation, it is important to note that jobs for women on Guam have evolved from more than half of all employed women working in private household occupations in 1940, to a high proportion of professional, managerial, clerical, sales, and service occupations in 1980. Dependence on household employment dwindled after 1950, as women applied for jobs created by the federal and territorial governments. Unprecedented growth in Guam's economy between 1970 and 1980 further affected the private sector job market, producing more jobs for women in the private sector than in the public sector for the first time. By 1980, employment for women had become heavily oriented toward occupations which were performed equally well by both sexes and where male workers faced increasing competition from women. (These concepts are explored in Chapter 11).

LABOR FORCE PARTICIPATION IN 1979

In addition to information on labor force participation in the week before the census, the 1980 census also collected information on labor force participation in all of 1979 (the year before the census). Labor force participation in the week before the census allows us to obtain data about the labor force once every decade, as a snapshot for that week, but the week may not be representative of labor force participation over a year, so another series of questions is used to obtain that type of information.

The data on labor force status in 1979 were derived from answers to question 29 on the 1980 census form. Persons 16 years old and over were classified as "in labor force in 1979 if (a) in 1979 they worked 1 or more weeks for pay or profit (including weeks on paid vacation or on paid sick leave, or in a family business), or were on active duty in the U.S. Armed Forces; or (b) had any weeks of unemployment in 1979. The categories "Worked in 1979" and "With unemployment in 1979" were not mutually exclusive.

About 72 percent of the population 16 years and over were in the labor force in 1979 (Table 10.11). The northern region had the highest percentage in the labor force in 1979 (74 percent), followed by the central region (71 percent) and the south (70 percent).

Table 10.11. Labor Force Participation in 1979: 1980

Numbers | Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑|‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Cen‑ | Cen‑

Labor Force Total North tral South | Total North tral South

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑|‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Persons, 16 + yrs.... 66773 30232 22410 14131 | 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

In Labor Force in 1979.. 48033 22233 15978 9822 | 71.9 73.5 71.3 69.5

Worked in 1979........ 46253 21344 15450 9459 | 69.3 70.6 68.9 66.9

With unemployment... 2854 1280 884 690 | 4.3 4.2 3.9 4.9

No unemployment..... 43399 20064 14566 8769 | 65.0 66.4 65.0 62.1

No work in 1979, with |

unemploymt in 1979... 1780 889 528 363 | 2.7 2.9 2.4 2.6

Not in labor force...... 18740 7999 6432 4309 | 28.1 26.5 28.7 30.5

__________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A, Table 58

Of the 48,033 persons in the labor force on Guam in 1979, 46,253 worked in 1979 (96 percent). Of these, only 2,854 (6 percent) experienced some unemployment. There were also 1,780 additional persons (3 percent of those 16 years and older) who, by definition, did not work in 1979.

As was true for labor force participation in the week before the census, male labor force participation in 1979 was greater than female labor force participation (Tables 10.12 and 10.13). About 86 percent of all adult males were in the labor force in 1979, as were about 57 percent of all adult females. The rates by region were comparable to those seen for the total population. Unemployment rates were low for both males and females.

Table 10.12. Male Labor Force Participation in 1979: 1980

Numbers | Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑|‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Cen‑ | Cen‑

Labor Force Total North tral South | Total North tral South

Males, 16 + yrs.... 35293 15774 12141 7378 | 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

In Labor Force in 1979.. 30158 13594 10260 6304 | 85.5 86.2 84.5 85.4

Worked in 1979........ 29469 13268 10020 6181 | 83.5 84.1 82.5 83.8

With unemployment... 1344 564 431 349 | 3.8 3.6 3.5 4.7

No unemployment..... 28125 12704 9589 5832 | 79.7 80.5 79.0 79.0

No work in 1979, with |

unemploymt in 1979... 689 326 240 123 | 2.0 2.1 2.0 1.7

Not in labor force...... 5135 2180 1881 1074 | 14.5 13.8 15.5 14.6

__________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A, Table 58

Although women were working in larger numbers than ever before, only one‑half of those who worked in 1979 had full time jobs and worked year‑round. Working women past peak childbearing years were more likely to hold full‑time, year‑round jobs than 16 to 29 year olds. Sufficient data to analyze which women chose to work part‑time and why are not available; however, home responsibilities and the presence of children probably played a major role in the number of hours women worked.

Table 10.13. Female Labor Force Participation in 1979: 1980

Numbers | Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑|‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Cen‑ | Cen‑

Labor Force Total North tral South | Total North tral South

Females, 16 + yrs.. 31480 14458 10269 6753 | 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

In Labor Force in 1979.. 17875 8639 5718 3518 | 56.8 59.8 55.7 52.1

Worked in 1979........ 16784 8076 5430 3278 | 53.3 55.9 52.9 48.5

With unemployment... 1510 716 453 341 | 4.8 5.0 4.4 5.0

No unemployment..... 15274 7360 4977 2937 | 48.5 50.9 48.5 43.5

No work in 1979, with |

unemploymt in 1979... 1091 563 288 240 | 3.5 3.9 2.8 3.6

Not in labor force...... 13605 5819 4551 3235 | 43.2 40.2 44.3 47.9

__________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A, Table 58

Respondents were also asked to give the number of hours they usually worked each week in 1979. These data pertained to the number of hours a person usually worked during the weeks worked in 1979. The respondent was to report the number of hours worked per week in the majority of the weeks he or she worked in 1979. If hours worked per week varied considerably in 1979, the respondent was to report an approximate average of the hours worked per week.

About 79 percent of the males who worked in 1979 worked between 50 and 52 weeks (Table 10.14). On the other hand, about 10 percent worked less than half of the year (1 to 26 weeks).

Fully 93 percent of the males worked full‑time (35 or more hours per week) during 1979. Of these, most worked the whole year, so were considered year‑round full‑time workers. Very few males on Guam worked only part‑time in 1979. Fewer of the females (57 percent) worked for the whole year.

Table 10.14. Persons Who Worked in 1979 by Usual Hours Worked in 1979

and Weeks Worked: 1980

Hours and Numbers Percent

Weeks ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Worked Total Males Females Total Males Females

Persons, 16+ yrs 46253 29469 16784 100.0 100.0 100.0

50 to 52 weeks.... 32759 23261 9498 70.8 78.9 56.6

40 to 49 weeks.... 4000 2302 1698 8.6 7.8 10.1

27 to 39 weeks.... 2591 1114 1477 5.6 3.8 8.8

1 to 26 weeks..... 6903 2792 4111 14.9 9.5 24.5

Usually worked

35+ hrs/week.... 41026 27415 13611 88.7 93.0 81.1

50 to 52 weeks.... 31040 22431 8609 67.1 76.1 51.3

40 to 49 weeks.... 3504 2105 1399 7.6 7.1 8.3

27 to 39 weeks.... 2009 920 1089 4.3 3.1 6.5

1 to 26 weeks..... 4473 1959 2514 9.7 6.6 15.0

Usually worked

1‑34 hrs/week... 5227 2054 3173 11.3 7.0 18.9

50 to 52 weeks.... 1719 830 889 3.7 2.8 5.3

40 to 49 weeks.... 496 197 299 1.1 0.7 1.8

27 to 39 weeks.... 582 194 388 1.3 0.7 2.3

1 to 26 weeks..... 2430 833 1597 5.3 2.8 9.5

________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A 1980 Table 59.

DATA FROM CURRENT LABOR FORCE SURVEY

Because of the limitations of census data in providing timely pictures of the employment situation on Guam, the Department of Labor's Bureau of Labor Statistics conducts quarterly Current Labor Force Surveys (CLFS) throughout the island. The universe covered by the CLFS is the civilian non‑institutional population on Guam, excluding members of the U.S. Armed Forces and their families living on military reservations. Permanent resident aliens (immigrants) are included in the survey whereas non‑resident aliens (non‑immigrants) are excluded. The over 20,000 housing units excluding the units inside the military reservations and alien construction workers barracks form the sampling frame for the CLFS.

The estimates presented here are based on data obtained in the March 1980 CLFS. Approximately 1,800 housing units were randomly selected for interview during the reference period of March 1980. Of that number, about 200 occupied units were visited but interviews were not obtained because the occupants were not found at home after repeated calls, or were unavailable for some other reason. There were also about 350 sample units which were visited but were found to be vacant or otherwise ineligible for interview.

Table 10.15 presents data from the CLFS from March 1980 to March 1987; Table 10.17 compares the CLFS data with 1980 Census data. For this table, the Civilian labor force included those 16 years of age and over excluding non‑immigrant aliens, members of the U.S. Armed Forces and their dependents living in military installations.

According to the Current Labor Force Survey, the proportion of the civilian labor force who were employed rose from 91 percent in 1980 to 94 percent in 1987. The majority of employed in each year were full‑time workers.

Table 10.15. Current Labor Force Survey Data: March 1980 to March 1987

Categories 1987 1986 1985 1984 1983 1982 1981 1980

Civilian Labor Force.. 36250 35590 33440 33490 33860 33000 34460 33800

Total Employed............ 34270 33460 31270 30670 30830 30120 32230 30390

Percent............. 94.5 94.0 93.5 91.6 91.1 91.3 93.5 91.4

Full‑time Workers....... 31460 30660 28370 27820 26840 25890 28840 27730

Part‑time Workers....... 2810 2800 2900 2850 3980 42230 3380 3060

U.S. Citizens........... 28850 29010 26990 25490 25520 23660 25840 25560

Immigrant Aliens........ 5420 4460 4280 5180 5310 6460 6390 5320

__________________________________________________________________________

Note: Civilian labor force includes those 16 years old and over excluding

non‑immigrant aliens, members of the U.S. Armed Forces and their

dependents living in military installations.

Source: Bureau of Labor Statistics, Department of Labor, Government of Guam

Based on the 1980 Census, the total labor force was 44,484 persons (Table 10.16). The CLFS, due to the way it is conducted, has the civilian labor force as its total labor force; the CLFS labor force is correspondingly smaller than the Census figure.

Table 10.16 Comparison of Current Labor Force Survey

(CLFS) and Census: 1980

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Item Census CLFS

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Total labor force. 44484 33800

Total unemployed.. 1667 2910

Unemployment rate. 3.7 8.6

_________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Census Bureau PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980 Table 36;

Bureau of Labor Statistics, Department of Labor,

Government of Guam.

The difference in the unemployment count between the 1980 Census and the March 1980 Current Labor Force Survey was probably due to different definitions of unemployment. The difference in the unemployment rates was mainly due to the fact that the CLFS excluded the Armed Forces. Since there are no unemployed persons in the Armed Forces, their presence in the denominator increases the labor force population without adding to the unemployed in the numerator, thus reducing the unemployment rate.

SUMMARY

This chapter has shown the increase in the labor force over the years, especially in the number of females entering the labor force. In the last 10 years, the number of women in the labor force more than doubled, especially those with children under the age of 18.

Labor force participation rates by place of birth showed that those born in the U.S. and Asia were more likely to be employed than those from the Trust Territory or the CNMI. Educational attainment was correlated with employment status, as could be expected, with those having more education being more likely to be employed.

For those not currently employed in 1980, most had worked in the year before the census (1979), with proportions almost evenly distributed among the island's three regions.

CHAPTER 11

INDUSTRY, OCCUPATION, AND CLASS OF WORKER

The data on industry, occupation, and class of worker were derived from answers to questions 26, 27, and 28.

This series of questions was used to obtain industry, occupation, and class of worker information for the employed, the experienced unemployed, and experienced workers not currently in the labor force. The last two categories applied to persons who had worked at some time during the past 5 years. All three items related to one specific job that the person held. For an employed person, the information referred to the job held during the reference week. Those who were employed at two or more jobs reported the job at which they worked the greatest number of hours during the reference week. For experienced unemployed persons and for those not in the labor force, the information referred to the last job they held.

Clerical staff in the Census Bureau’s processing office in California converted the written industry and occupation descriptions from the questionnaire to identifying codes by relating these descriptions to an entry in the Alphabetical Index of Industries and Occupations (PHC80-R3), 1982, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. For the industrial code, these coders first referred to a Company Name List. This list, prepared from the Standard Statistical Establishment List developed by the Bureau of the Census for use in the economic censuses and surveys, contained the names of establishments and their Standard Industrial Classification code converted to population census equivalents. This listing facilitated coding and helped maintain industrial classification comparability.

There was an important addition to the Industry and Occupation coding for Guam. Some people living on Guam did not have regular jobs, but did work-like activities to support themselves. These are called “subsistence activities” and included activities such a cutting and selling copra, making or selling handicrafts, fishing for one’s own food, and growing food for one’s own use. Persons who reported a subsistence activities receive special industry and occupation codes that were not found in the Alphabetical index.

Occupation Classification System

The system developed for the 1980 census consisted of 503 specific occupation categories arranged into 6 summary and 13 major occupation groups. The Classified Index of Industries and Occupations (PHC80-R4), 1982, U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C., provided information on the composition of the detailed categories in the census system.

This classification was developed to be consistent with the 1980 Standard Occupational Classification Manual (SOC), published by the U.S. Department of Commerce, Office of Federal Statistical Policy Standards, and was the first time a United States standard was used in developing the census occupational classification.

The conversion of the census classification to the SOC caused the 1980 census classification to be less comparable with the classifications used in earlier censuses (See the section on “Comparability”.)

Industry Classification System

The industry classification system developed for the 1980 Census of Population consisted of 231 categories classified into 13 major industry groups. Since 1940 the industrial classification has been based on the Standard Industrial Classification Manual (SIC). The 1980 Census classification was developed from the 1972 SIC published by the Executive Office of the President, Office of Management and Budget, and the 1977 supplement to that manual.

Relation to Standard Industrial Classification. The Standard Industrial Classification (SIC) was developed under the sponsorship of the Office of Management and Budget and was designed for the classification of establishments by type of industrial activity in which they were engaged. One of the major purposes of the SIC is to promote uniformity and comparability in the presentation of statistical data collected by various agencies. Accordingly, in the Census of Population the industry categories were defined in these terms. However, population census reports, which are collected from households, differ in nature and detail from those obtained from establishment reports. Therefore, the population census classification system, though defined in SIC terms, cannot reflect the full detail of the SIC system.

In addition, population census data may differ from other industrial data because the dates to which the data refer may not be the same: workers who lived in one geographic area and work in another may have been reported at their place of residence by the population census but at their place of work in surveys; and dual jobholders may be counted in the reports of two establishments but counted in the census for only their major job.

Relation of Some Industry Groups to Similar Classes of Worker. The industry category “Public Administration” was limited to regular government functions such as legislative, judicial, administrative, and regulatory activities of governments. Other government organizations such as schools, hospitals, liquor stores, and bus lines were classified by industry according to the activity in which they were engaged. On the other hand, the class of worker government categories included all government workers.

CLASS OF WORKER

The class of worker item on the questionnaire consisted of seven categories which were defined as follows:

Private wage and salary workers were persons who worked for a private employer for wages, salary, commission, tips, pay-in-kind, or at piece rates. Private employers included churches and other non-profit organizations.
Government workers were persons who worked for any governmental unit, regardless of the activity of the particular agency. This category was subdivided by the level of government: (a) United States and (b) local (territorial and its subdivision).
Self-employed workers had their own businesses, where incorporated or not. (a) Self-employed workers in won business not incorporated were persons who worked for profit or fees in their own unincorporated business, profession, or trade, or who operated a farm. Included here were the owner-operators of large stores and manufacturing establishments as well as small merchants, independent craftpersons and professionals, farmers, peddlers, and other persons who conducted enterprises of their own. (b) Self-employed workers in own business incorporated were persons who considered themselves self-employed but worked for corporations. In most cases the respondents owned or were part of a group that owned controlling interest in the corporation. Since all workers of a corporation were defined as wage and salary workers, this category was tabulated with “private wage and salary workers,” and shown as a subcategory of that group.
Unpaid family workers were persons who worked without pay on a farm or in a business operated by a person to whom they were related by blood or marriage. These were usually the children or the wife of the owner of a business or farm.
Subsistence activity workers were those who worked without pay, mainly to produce goods for his or her own family’s use or needs.

Edit and Allocation Procedures

Occasionally respondents supplied industry, occupation, or class of worker descriptions which were not sufficiently specific for precise classification or did not report on these items. Some of these cases were corrected through the field editing process and during the coding and tabulation operations. In the coding operation certain types of incomplete entries were corrected using the Alphabetical Index of Industries and Occupations. For example, it was possible in certain situations to assign an industry code based on the occupation reported.

Following the coding operation, there was a computer edit and allocation process. The edit first determined whether a respondent was in the universe which required an industry and occupation code. The codes for the three items (industry, occupation, and class of worker) were checked to makes sure that they were valid and were edited for their relation to each other. Invalid and inconsistent codes were either blanked or changed to a consistent code.

If one or more of the three codes were blank after the edit, a code was allocated from a “similar” person based on other items such as age, sex, education, farm or nonfarm residence, and weeks worked. This was the first census that allocated industry and occupation to detailed categories.

Comparability with Earlier Censuses

In 1950 information on occupation was obtained from the last job of persons who worked as civilians in 1949. Comparability of industry and occupation data is affected by a number of factors, a major one being the systems used to classify the questionnaire responses. For both the industry and occupation classification systems, the basic structures were generally the same from 1940 to 1970, but changes in the individual categories limited comparability of the data from one census to another. These changes resulted from the need to recognize the “birth” of new industries and occupations, the “death” of others, and growth and decline in existing industries and occupations, as well as the desire of analysts and other users for increased detail in presentation of the data. Probably the greatest cause of incomparability is the movement of a segment of a category to a different category in the next census. Such movements are necessitated by changes in functions and respondent terminology, and refinement of category composition.

In the 1980 census, the industry classification underwent limited change to reflect changes to the SIC. The occupation classification, however, was substantially revised because of the adoption of the Standard Occupational Classification by Federal agencies. During this entire period, from 1940 to 1980, the number of categories in the industry classification system increased from 132 to 231, and in the occupation system from 224 to 503.

Other factors that affect data comparability include the universe to which the data refer (in 1970, the age cutoff for labor force was changed from 14 years to 16 years); how the industry and occupation questions are worded on the questionnaire (for example, important changes were made in 1970); improvement in the coding procedures (the Company Name List technique was introduced in 1980); and how the “not reported” cases were handled. Prior to 1970, the not reporteds were placed in residual “Industry not reported” and “Occupation not reported” categories. In 1970, an allocation process was introduced through which these cases were assigned to major groups. In 1980, the “not reported” cases were assigned to individual categories. Therefore, the 1980 data for individual categories included some numbers of persons who would have been tabulated in a “not reported” category in previous censuses.

Comparability with Other Data

Comparability between statistics presented here and statistics from other sources is affected by many of the factors described in the section of “Labor force status”. These factors are primarily geographic differences between residence and place of work, different dates of reference, and differences in counts because of dual job holding. Industry data from population censuses cover all industries and all kinds of workers, government workers, and the self-employed. Also, the replies from household respondents may differ in detail and nature from those obtained from establishments.

Occupation data form the census and data from government licensing agencies, professional associations, trade unions, etc., may not be as comparable as expected. Organizational listings often include persons not in the labor force or persons devoting all or most of their time to another occupation; or the same person may be included in two or more different listings. In addition, relatively few organizations, except those requiring licensing, attain complete coverage of membership in a particular occupation field.

INDUSTRY CHARACTERISTICS

In all, there were 32,692 employed persons 16 years and over in 1980. The largest industry category in 1980 was retail trade, which was a shift from 1970, when the largest industry category was public administration (Table 11.1 and Figure 11.1). The second largest category was professional and related services which increased from 17 percent of employed adults in 1970 to 20 percent in 1980. Public administration was the third largest category in 1980 with 18 percent, moving down from being the largest in 1970. The percentage of employed adults in construction decreased rather significantly from 17 percent in 1970 to 9 percent in 1980.

The impact from the development of tourism was evident in two categories: retail trade and personal, entertainment, and recreational services. The percentage of the population involved in personal, entertainment, and recreational services increased between 1970 and 1980, from 4 percent to 6 percent.

Table 11.1 Industry: 1950 to 1980
Industry	1980	1970	1960	1950
Employed 16 yrs and over	32,692	22,112	17,208	18,671
Percent	99.9	100.2	99.8	99.8
Agriculture, fishing, mining	0.9	0.8	2.6	6.6
Construction	9.3	16.6	30.5	33.6
Manufacturing	4.9	6.2	2.9	2.1
Nondurable goods	2.5	1.8	1.7	1.3
Durable goods	2.4	4.5	1.2	0.8
Transportation	5.8	5.1	6.0	13.4
Communications	4.4	3.7	0.9	1.3
Wholesale trade	2.3	1.5	1.6	1.3
Retail trade	20.0	15.2	11.8	8.5
Finance, insurance and real estate	4.8	2.5	0.9	0.5
Business and repair	3.6	6.6	1.2	1.9
Personal, entertainment & recreation	6.4	3.9	5.2	5.7
Professional and related	19.6	17.1	9.7	5.1
Health	4.1	3.9	2.9	1.9
Education	12.0	10.3	5.7	2.4
Other professional	3.5	2.9	1.1	0.7
Public administration	17.9	20.9	25.9	19.0
Subsistence and not stated	0.0	0.0	0.6	0.9
Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

/Figure 11.1/

The 18,994 employed males 16 years and over in 1980 made up 58 percent of the total work force. Of these, the largest proportion was in public administration at 21 percent (Table 11.2). That is, approximately 1 in every 5 employed males in 1980 was in the public sector. Although still a large proportion, the percentage of males employed in public administration steadily decreased, from 28 percent in 1960 to 21 percent in 1980. The second largest industry category for males was in retail trade, which employed 15 percent of the males in 1980, an increase from the 11 percent in this category in 1970. Construction followed closely as the third largest employer, accounting for 15 percent in 1980, However, unlike retail trade, this figure decreased significantly from 23 percent in 1970. Finance, insurance, and real estate more than doubled from 1.5 percent in 1970 to 3.2 percent in 1980, as did personal, entertainment, and recreational services, which increased from 2.4 to 5.2 percent during the decade.

Table 11.2 Industry, Males: 1950 to 1980
Industry	1980	1970	1960	1950
Employed males16 yrs and over	18,994	15,245	13,680	15,584
Percent	100.0	100.0	100.0	100.0
Agriculture, fishing, mining	1.3	1.0	2.9	7.4
Construction	14.8	23.1	38.2	39.4
Manufacturing	6.9	7.5	3.1	2.1
Nondurable goods	3.0	2.0	1.7	1.3
Durable goods	3.9	5.5	1.4	0.8
Transportation	8.0	6.5	7.3	16.0
Communications	6.1	4.6	0.9	1.4
Wholesale trade	2.9	1.8	1.8	1.3
Retail trade	15.0	11.2	7.8	5.5
Finance, insurance and real estate	3.2	1.5	0.5	0.3
Business and repair	4.8	9.0	1.4	2.2
Personal, entertainment & recreation	5.2	2.4	3.0	3.4
Professional and related	11.0	8.9	4.9	2.5
Health	2.0	2.0	1.8	1.0
Education	6.0	4.6	2.3	0.9
Other professional	3.0	2.3	0.7	0.6
Public administration	20.7	22.5	27.7	17.5
Subsistence and not stated	0.1	0.0	0.6	1.0
Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

One of the more significant findings of the 1980 census was the large increase in the female labor force (as noted in Chapter 10). Again, the number of employed females more than doubled during the previous decade, from 6,967 in 1970 to 13,698 in 1980 (Table 11.3). The largest industry category for females remained professional and related services at 32 percent. The second largest industry was retail trade which accounted for 27 percent. Other categories remained basically the same from 1970 with only minor fluctuations.

The male-female differences can be seen even more starkly in Table 11.4, which shows the percent female for each of the categories included. Also, Table 11.5 clarifies the sexual differences further by providing industry data by sex.

The percentage of employed females by industry in 1980 increased to 42 percent from 31 percent in 1970 (Table 11.4). The so-called “traditional” industries for women – health and educational services – remained fairly high with 72 percent and 71 percent, respectively. In other words, about 7 out of every 10 workers in these subcategories were females. On the other hand, proportions of women in non-traditional industries for women such as business and repair services increased significantly from 6 percent in 1970 to 22 percent in 1980. Also, most of the other industries accounted for a higher percentage of women, which is indicative of women’s increasing participation in Guam’s economy.

Table 11.3 Industry, Females: 1950 to 1980
Industry	1980	1970	1960	1950
Employed females16 yrs and over	13,698	6,867	3,528	3,087
Percent	99.8	100.0	99.9	100.0
Agriculture, fishing, mining	0.4	0.3	1.8	2.5
Construction	1.6	1.9	0.8	4.0
Manufacturing	2.2	3.3	2.1	2.5
Nondurable goods	1.7	1.2	1.6	1.4
Durable goods	0.4	2.1	0.4	1.0
Transportation	2.7	2.0	1.2	0.6
Communications	2.1	1.8	1.0	0.8
Wholesale trade	1.5	1.0	1.2	1.4
Retail trade	27.0	24.1	27.4	23.7
Finance, insurance and real estate	7.0	4.6	2.4	1.2
Business and repair	1.9	1.3	0.3	0.4
Personal, entertainment & recreation	8.1	7.1	13.7	17.4
Professional and related	31.5	35.3	28.5	18.1
Health	6.9	8.2	6.9	6.7
Education	20.3	23.0	18.9	10.2
Other professional	4.3	4.1	2.7	1.3
Public administration	13.9	17.3	18.8	26.8
Subsistence and not stated	0.0	0.0	0.8	0.6
Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

Without crossing the industry data with occupational data, it is difficult to really assess the vertical mobility females were achieving in the economy (Table 11.5). For example, although 62 percent of the category of finance, insurance, and real estate were women, many of these could have been bank clerks rather than in management positions. Besides the professional and related services, retail trade and personal, entertainment, and recreational; services both accounted for higher female employment percentages with 56 percent and 53 percent, respectively.

Table 11.4 Percentage of Employed Females by Industry: 1950 to 1980
Industry	1980	1970	1960	1950
Employed females16 yrs and over	13,698	6,867	3,528	3,087
Percent	41.9	31.1	20.5	16.5
Agriculture, fishing, mining	17.6	11.2	13.9	6.4
Construction	7.1	3.6	0.5	2.0
Manufacturing	18.5	16.3	14.5	19.0
Nondurable goods	29.4	20.5	20.1	17.5
Durable goods	7.3	14.6	7.0	20.1
Transportation	19.6	12.4	4.2	0.7
Communications	20.0	14.8	21.4	10.5
Wholesale trade	26.9	20.8	15.2	17.6
Retail trade	56.5	49.2	47.5	45.9
Finance, insurance and real estate	61.5	58.6	55.6	43.5
Business and repair	22.5	6.2	5.8	3.6
Personal, entertainment & recreation	52.8	57.0	54.3	50.3
Professional and related	67.4	64.0	60.2	59.4
Health	71.5	65.4	49.2	57.7
Education	70.8	69.1	67.6	70.2
Other professional	51.1	44.0	49.7	28.5
Public administration	32.6	25.7	14.9	23.3
Subsistence and not stated	14.3	NA	27.6	10.9
Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

Table 11.6 (and Figure 11.2) presents employment figures for the Guam-born labor force and for those not born on Guam, by industry, as well as percentages of Guam-born employees in each of the categories. The industry that had the highest percentage of Guam-born was communications, with 65 percent being born on Guam. Public administration had the second largest percentage of Guam-born as its labor force. Public administration was also the largest employer of Guam-born with 28 percent of Guam-born labor force being employed in this category. In other words, more than 1 out of every 4 Guam-born workers held a job in public administration. On the other hand, only about 1 out of every 20 Guam-born held a job in construction, and only 22 percent of the construction labor force was Guam-born, indicating the increasing H-2 foreign labor force penetrating into Guam’s construction industry.

Table 11.5 Industry by Sex: 1980
	Numbers			Percent			Percent
Industry	Total	Male	Fmle	Total	Male	Fmle	Female
Employed 16 yrs and over	32,692	18,994	13,698	100.0	100.0	100.0	41.9
Agriculture, fishing, mining	306	252	54	0.9	1.3	0.4	17.6
Construction	3,025	2,810	215	9.3	14.8	1.6	7.1
Manufacturing	1,606	1,309	297	4.9	6.9	2.2	18.5
Nondurable goods	813	574	239	2.5	3.0	1.7	29.4
Durable goods	793	735	58	2.4	3.9	0.4	7.3
Transportation	1,884	1,515	369	5.8	8.0	2.7	19.6
Communications	1,449	1,159	290	4.4	6.1	2.1	20.0
Wholesale trade	754	551	203	2.3	2.9	1.5	26.9
Retail trade	6,545	2,844	3,701	20.0	15.0	27.0	56.5
Finance, insurance and real estate	1,565	602	963	4.8	3.2	7.0	61.5
Business and repair	1,185	918	267	3.6	4.8	1.9	22.5
Personal, entertainment & recreation	2,106	995	1,111	6.4	5.2	8.1	52.8
Professional and related	6,403	2,087	4,316	19.6	11.0	31.5	67.4
Health	1,332	380	952	4.1	2.0	6.9	71.5
Education	3,919	1,144	2,775	12.0	6.0	20.3	70.8
Other professional	1,152	563	589	3.5	3.0	4.3	51.1
Public administration	5,850	3,940	1,910	17.9	20.7	13.9	32.6
Subsistence and not stated	14	12	2	0.0	0.1	0.0	14.3
Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census 1980 PC80-1-C/D54, Table 23

/Figure 11.2/

Table 11.6 Industry by Birthplace: 1980
	Birthplace			Percent			Percent
Industry	Total	Guam	Not Guam	Total	Guam	Not Guam	Guam born
Employed 16 yrs and over	32,682	13,001	19,681	100.0	100.0	100.0	60.2
Agriculture, fishing, mining	306	96	210	0.9	0.7	1.1	68.6
Construction	3,025	678	2,347	9.3	5.2	11.9	77.6
Manufacturing	1,606	534	1,072	4.9	4.1	5.4	66.7
Nondurable goods	813	206	607	2.5	1.6	3.1	74.7
Durable goods	793	328	465	2.4	2.5	2.4	58.6
Transportation	1,884	965	919	5.8	7.4	4.7	48.8
Communications	1,449	944	505	4.4	7.3	2.6	34.9
Wholesale trade	754	217	537	2.3	1.7	2.7	71.2
Retail trade	6,545	1,674	4,871	20.0	12.9	24.7	74.4
Finance, insurance and real estate	1,565	608	957	4.8	4.7	4.9	61.2
Business and repair	1,185	385	800	3.6	3.0	4.1	67.5
Personal, entertainment & recreation	2,106	386	1,720	6.4	3.0	8.7	81.7
Professional and related	6,403	2,891	3,512	19.6	22.2	17.8	54.8
Health	1,332	556	776	4.1	4.3	3.9	58.3
Education	3,919	1,967	1,952	12.0	15.1	9.9	49.8
Other professional	1,152	368	784	3.5	2.8	4.0	68.1
Public administration	5,840	3,613	2,227	17.9	27.8	11.3	38.1
Subsistence and not stated	14	10	4	0.0	0.1	0.0	28.6
Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census 1980 PC80-1-C/D54, Table 28

The data presented in Table 11.7 show the distribution of industry for Chamorros and Filipinos, expanding somewhat on data shown in Chapter 8 on ethnicity. In obtaining these data, persons who responded as Chamorro only or Filipino only were combined with those responding “Chamorro and other group” or “Filipino and other group”. Persons who indicated they were Chamorro-Filipino were therefore counted as both Chamorro and Filipino.

There were 13,498 Chamorro workers and 9.506 Filipino workers in 1980. Chamorros made up 41 percent of all workers on Guam. The largest percentage of Chamorros were in public administration (27 percent) and in professional and related services (22 percent). Fully 14 percent of the Chamorros were in communications and transportation, and 13 percent were in retail trade. Only 5 percent were in construction.

On the other hand, more than half of all Filipino workers were in just three categories – 1 out of 4 in retail trade, 1 out of 6 in construction, and 1 out of 9 in professional services. Another one-fourth of the Filipinos were in three categories – personal, entertainment, and recreational services (10 percent), public administration (also 10 percent), and manufacturing (7 percent).

The last column in Table 11.7 shows the proportion of workers in each industry that were Chamorro in 1980. Although slightly more than 40 percent of all workers were Chamorro, 63 percent of all persons in public administration were Chamorro, as were 59 percent in communications and transportation, and 46 percent of persons in professional services. At the opposite end, only 19 percent of employed persons in personal, entertainment, and recreation, and 24 percent of those in construction were Chamorro.

Table 11.7 Industry by Ethnicity: 1980
	Ethnicity			Percent			Percent
Industry	Total	Cham.	Filip.	Total	Cham.	Filip.	Cham
Employed 16 yrs and over	32,692	13,498	9,506	100.0	100.0	100.0	41.3
Agriculture, fishing, mining	281	99	105	0.9	0.7	1.1	35.2
Construction	3,050	726	1,535	9.3	5.4	16.1	23.8
Manufacturing	1,606	558	639	4.9	4.1	6.7	34.7
Transportation, communications	3,333	1,962	581	10.2	14.5	6.1	58.9
Wholesale trade	754	237	233	2.3	1.8	2.5	31.4
Retail trade	6,545	1,802	2,505	20.0	13.4	26.4	27.5
Finance, insurance and real estate	1,565	654	444	4.8	4.8	4.7	41.8
Business and repair services	1,185	425	359	3.6	3.1	3.8	35.9
Personal, entertainment & recreation	2,106	398	1,002	6.4	2.9	10.5	18.9
Professional and related	6,403	2,944	1,127	19.6	21.8	11.9	46.0
Public administration	5,850	3,682	975	17.9	27.3	10.3	62.9
Subsistence and not stated	14	11	1	0.0	0.1	0.0	78.6
Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census 1980 PC80-1-C/D54, Table 43

Table 11.8 distinguishes full Chamorros from part-Chamorros. The total number of full Chamorro employees was 95 percent of the total Chamorro labor force. The largest percentage of full Chamorros was in public administration (28 percent). The second largest percentage of full Chamorros was in professional and related services with 22 percent of the total full Chamorros working in this category. On the other hand, the largest percentage of the total part-Chamorro employees was in retail trade (22 percent). The second largest percentage was in public administration. The last column in the table shows the percentage of each category that was full Chamorro. For example, 98 percent of agriculture, fishing, and forestry workers were full Chamorros. Both professional and related services, and public administration had 97 percent of the Chamorros claiming only that ethnicity.

There was also a relationship between education and industry (Table 11.9, Figure 11.3). Altogether, 72 percent of employed persons 25 years and over were high school graduates, as were 68 percent of males and 77 percent of the females. Since large-scale female labor force participation is a recent phenomenon. The percentage for females was higher because they were probably younger, and therefore more likely to have graduated from high school.

Table 11.8 Industry of Full and Part-Chamorros: 1980
	Chamorros			Percent			Percent
Industry	Total	Full	Part	Total	Full	Part	Full
Employed 16 yrs and over	13,498	12,878	620	100.0	100.0	100.0	95.4
Agriculture, fishing, mining	99	97	2	0.7	0.8	0.3	98.0
Construction	726	695	31	5.4	5.4	5.0	95.7
Manufacturing	558	532	26	4.1	4.1	4.2	95.3
Transportation, communications	1,962	1,894	68	14.5	14.7	11.0	96.5
Wholesale trade	237	216	21	1.8	1.7	3.4	91.1
Retail trade	1,802	1,665	137	13.4	12.9	22.1	92.4
Finance, insurance and real estate	654	610	44	4.8	4.7	7.1	93.3
Business and repair services	425	399	26	3.1	3.1	4.2	93.9
Personal, entertainment & recreation	398	360	38	2.9	2.8	6.1	90.5
Professional and related	2,944	2,843	101	21.8	22.1	16.3	96.6
Public administration	3,682	3,556	126	27.3	27.6	20.3	96.6
Subsistence and not stated	11	11	0	0.1	0.1	0.0	100.0
Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census 1980 PC80-1-C/D54, Table 43

About 9 out of every 10 persons employed in finance, insurance, and real estate, and professional and related services were high school graduates (Table 11.9). Also, 82 percent of those in wholesale trade and 72 percent of public administrators were high school graduates. Conversely, only about half of those employed in agriculture, fishing, and forestry, about 3 in every 5 construction workers were high school graduates.

There were differences in educational attainment by sex. Fully 87 percent of the males working in finance, insurance, and real estate, compared to 92 percent of the females, were high school graduates. Generally, with a few exceptions in personal, entertainment, and recreation, and retail trade, females were more highly educated than males.

Table 11.9 Industry by Percent High School Graduates by Sex: 1980
	Numbers			Percent
Industry	Total	Male	Female	Total	Male	Female
Employed 25 yrs and over	26,347	15,835	10,512	71.5	67.6	77.3
Agriculture, fishing, mining	225	188	37	53.8	51.1	67.6
Construction	2,694	2,537	157	57.6	56.1	82.2
Manufacturing	1,343	1,124	219	69.5	67.2	81.3
Transportation, communications	2,802	2,310	492	67.3	62.9	87.6
Wholesale trade	581	441	140	82.1	80.7	86.4
Retail trade	4,711	2,040	2,671	67.0	68.3	66.0
Finance, insurance and real estate	1,188	517	671	90.2	87.3	92.4
Business and repair services	891	714	177	70.5	68.2	79.7
Personal, entertainment & recreation	1,547	701	846	60.1	68.0	53.4
Professional and related	5,450	1,786	3,664	83.3	81.6	84.1
Public administration	4,906	3,470	1,436	72.1	67.9	82.3
Subsistence and not stated	9	7	2	33.3	28.6	50.0
Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census 1980 PC80-1-C/D54, Table 44

/Figure 11.3/

In 1980, among the 32,175 employed persons 16 to 64 years of age, 8,488 had vocational training (about 1 out of every 4)(Table 11.10 and Figure 11.4). About 34 percent of public administrators had had this training, but only 18percent of those in personal, entertainment, and recreation, and 19 percent of those in retail trade.

Of all the persons who were trained in some kind of vocational education program, 20 percent were in retail trade in 1980, and another 20 percent were in professional and related services.

Table 11.10 Industry by Persons Completing Vocational Training: 1980
		With Vo-	Percent	Percent
		cational	of all	of this
Industry	Total	Training	training	Industry
Employed 16 to 64 years	32,175	8,448	100.0	26.3
Agriculture, fishing, mining	273	60	0.7	22.0
Construction	3,006	887	10.5	29.5
Manufacturing	1,587	530	6.3	33.4
Transportation, communications	3,298	1,012	12.0	30.7
Wholesale trade	748	163	1.9	21.8
Retail trade	6,436	1,236	14.6	19.2
Finance, insurance and real estate	1,543	439	5.2	28.5
Business and repair services	1,165	360	4.3	30.9
Personal, entertainment & recreation	2,046	359	4.2	17.5
Professional and related	6,318	1,432	17.0	22.7
Public administration	5,746	1,968	23.3	34.2
Subsistence and not stated	9	2	0.0	22.2
Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census 1980 PC80-1-C/D54, Table 44

/Figure 11.4/

Table 11.11 shows the employment figures by industry and region. Out of the total labor force 16 years and over, 15,747 workers came from the Northern region, 10,851 from the Central region, and 6,094 from the Southern region. The three largest industry categories for the North were retail trade (23 percent of the employed workers living there), professional and related services (16 percent), and public administration (13 percent). The three largest for Central were in professional and related services (22 percent), public administration (21 percent), and retail trade (18 percent). The largest categories for Southern region workers were public administration (24 percent), professional and related services (24 percent), and retail trade (16 percent).

Table 11.11 Industry by Region: 1980
Industry	Total	North	Central	South
Employed 16 yrs and over	32,692	15,747	10,851	6,094
Percent	99.9	100.1	99.9	100.0
Agriculture, fishing, mining	0.9	0.8	1.0	1.2
Construction	9.3	11.1	8.4	5.8
Manufacturing	4.9	4.6	4.7	5.9
Nondurable goods	2.5	2.7	2.5	1.8
Durable goods	2.4	1.9	2.2	4.1
Transportation	5.8	5.6	5.2	7.4
Communications	4.4	3.8	4.9	5.1
Wholesale trade	2.3	2.8	2.2	1.3
Retail trade	20.0	23.3	17.5	16.1
Finance, insurance and real estate	4.8	5.0	5.4	3.3
Business and repair	3.6	4.0	3.6	2.6
Personal, entertainment & recreation	6.4	9.5	4.1	2.9
Professional and related	19.6	16.5	21.7	23.8
Health	4.1	4.1	4.3	3.6
Education	12.0	9.2	13.5	16.6
Other professional	3.5	3.2	3.9	3.7
Public administration	17.9	13.1	21.1	24.5
Subsistence and not stated	0.0	0.0	0.1	0.0
Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census 1980 Sumamry Tape File 3A, Table 65

Table 11.12 provides percentage breakdowns of the total workers in each industry category into the three regions. On average, the Northern region held roughly half the workers in each category in 1980. The region that held the second largest proportion of the jobs was the Central area. The Southern region provided less than 1 out of 5 workers on Guam. This labor contribution order in all categories was fairly consistent, with exceptions in the educational services category and public administration, where Central region was the largest contributor of workers in these categories.

Table 11.12. Industry by Percent Region: 1980

Industry Total North Central South

Employed 16 yrs and over..... 100.0 48.2 33.2 18.6

Agriculture, fishing, mining...... 100.0 39.9 35.3 24.8

Construction...................... 100.0 58.0 30.3 11.7

Manufacturing..................... 100.0 45.6 31.9 22.5

Nondurable goods................ 100.0 53.0 33.3 13.7

Durable goods................... 100.0 38.0 30.5 31.5

Transportation.................... 100.0 46.4 29.8 23.8

Communications.................... 100.0 41.5 37.1 21.5

Wholesale trade................... 100.0 57.8 31.8 10.3

Retail trade...................... 100.0 56.0 29.1 15.0

Finance, insurance & real estate... 100.0 49.8 37.3 12.9

Business and repair............... 100.0 53.1 33.3 13.6

Personal entertainment and

recreation services............. 100.0 70.7 20.9 8.4

Professional and related services. 100.0 40.6 36.8 22.7

Health.......................... 100.0 48.6 35.1 16.4

Educational services............ 100.0 36.8 37.5 25.7

Other professional services..... 100.0 44.2 36.3 19.5

Public Administration............. 100.0 35.3 39.2 25.5

Subsistence....................... 100.0 21.4 57.1 21.4

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census 1980 Summary Tape File 3A, Table 65

OCCUPATION CHARACTERISTICS

Of the total number of employed persons 16 years and over, the occupation category that had the highest percentage was technical, sales, and administrative support, with 31 percent. The second largest category was the managerial and professional occupations with 25 percent of the labor force working in this category (Table 11.13 and Figure 11.5). When we calculate the percentages for males and females separately, the figures change significantly. For males, the two largest occupation categories were precision production, craft and repair services (25 percent) and professional services (24 percent). For female workers, the two highest percentages of workers were in technical, sales, and administrative support (48 percent) and managerial and professional services (24 percent). The last column in Table 11.13 shows the percentages of females for each occupation category. The categories that had the highest percentages of female workers were private household (92 percent), administrative support (71 percent), and professional services (58 percent). As expected, categories such as protective services and precision craft production, craft and repair services, and transportation and material movers had the lowest percentages of females.

Table 11.13. Occupation by Sex: 1980

Numbers Percent Per‑

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ cent

Fe‑ Fe‑ Fe‑

Occupation Total Males males Total Males mles mles

Employed 16 yrs and over....32692 18994 13698 100.0 100.0 100 41.9

Managerial and profess special. 8146 4570 3576 24.9 24.1 26.1 43.9

Executive, administrative.... 3939 2807 1132 12.0 14.8 8.3 28.7

Professional................. 4207 1763 2444 12.9 9.3 17.8 58.1

Tech,sales and admin. support..10200 3597 6603 31.2 18.9 48.2 64.7

Technicians.................. 1099 807 292 3.4 4.2 2.1 26.6

Sales........................ 3299 1099 2200 10.1 5.8 16.1 66.7

Administrative support....... 5802 1691 4111 17.7 8.9 30.0 70.9

Service........................ 5476 2556 2920 16.8 13.5 21.3 53.3

Private household............ 61 5 56 .2 .0 .4 91.8

Protective service........... 938 855 83 2.9 4.5 .6 8.8

Other service................ 4477 1696 2781 13.7 8.9 20.3 62.1

Farming, forestry and fishing.. 381 335 46 1.2 1.8 .3 12.1

Precisn product. craft & repair 5030 4812 218 15.4 25.3 1.6 4.3

Oper., fabricators, and laborer 3445 3112 333 10.5 16.4 2.4 9.7

Machine operator, assembler.. 712 585 127 2.2 3.1 .9 17.8

Transport and material move.. 1377 1339 38 4.2 7.0 .3 2.8

Handlrs, equip cleaners, labr 1356 1188 168 4.1 6.3 1.2 12.4

Subsistence activity........... 14 12 2 .0 .1 .0 14.3

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census 1980 PC80‑1‑C/D54, Table 23

Figure 11.5 Females by Occupation: 1980

(Percent)

Altogether 40 percent of all employed persons were born on Guam. Of those born on Guam, 33 percent were working in technical, sales, and administrative support positions, and 20 percent were in managerial and professional positions (Table 11.14 and Figure 11.6). Of the "foreign born" workers, those not born on Guam, 30 percent were working in technical, sales, administrative support positions, and 28 percent in managerial and professional positions. There was not much difference in the percentages and the types of occupations between Guam‑born and foreign born. Almost 7 out of 10 protective service workers were Guam‑born, but only 16 percent of private household service workers were Guam‑born.

Figure 11.6 Occupation by Birthplace: 1980

(Percent Born in Guam)

Table 11.14. Occupation by Birthplace: 1980

Numbers Percent Per‑

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ cent

Not Not Guam

Occupation Total Guam Guam Total Guam Guam Born

Emplyd 16 yrs and over.. 32,692 13,001 19,691 100.0 100.0 100.0 39.8

Managerial and profess.... 8,146 2,605 5,541 24.9 20.0 28.1 32.0

Exec, administrative.... 3,939 1,461 2,478 12.0 11.2 12.6 37.1

Professional............ 4,207 1,144 3,063 12.9 8.8 15.6 27.2

Tech, sales, admin. supprt 10,200 4,293 5,907 31.2 33.0 30.0 42.1

Technicians............. 1,099 365 734 3.4 2.8 3.7 33.2

Sales................... 3,299 868 2,431 10.1 6.7 12.3 26.3

Administrative support.. 5,802 3,060 2,742 17.7 23.5 13.9 52.7

Service................... 5,476 2,371 3,105 16.8 18.2 15.8 43.3

Private household....... 61 10 51 .2 .1 .3 16.4

Protective service...... 938 640 298 2.9 4.9 1.5 68.2

Other service........... 4,477 1,721 2,756 13.7 13.2 14.0 38.4

Farming, frstry and fishing. 381 205 176 1.2 1.6 .9 53.8

Precision production craft. 5,030 1,754 3,276 15.4 13.5 16.6 34.9

Opratrs, fabricators, lbrs. 3,445 1,763 1,682 10.5 13.6 8.5 51.2

Machine optr, assembler.. 712 276 436 2.2 2.1 2.2 38.8

Transport, material move. 1,377 798 579 4.2 6.1 2.9 58.0

Handlrs, equip cleaners,. 1,356 689 667 4.1 5.3 3.4 50.8

Subsistence activity....... 14 10 4 .0 .1 .0 71.4

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census 1980 PC80‑1‑C/D54, Table 28

Table 11.15 shows the employment figures by occupation and region on Guam. The three largest distributions of Northern region workers were in technical, sales, and administrative support positions (31 percent), managerial and professional positions (24 percent), and services positions (18 percent). The largest categories of Central region workers were in technical, sales, and administrative support (32 percent), managerial and professional (27 percent), and services and precision production, craft and repair positions (both 15 percent). Lastly, the Southern region workers were largely distributed in technical, sales, and administrative support (31 percent), managerial and professional (23 percent), and services (16 percent). In general, significantly large discrepancies did not exist between the regions in 1980.

Table 11.15. Occupation by Region: 1980

Occupation Total North Central South

Employed 16 yrs and over..... 32,692 15,747 10,851 6,094

Percent.................. 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Managerial and profess special.... 24.9 24.3 26.9 22.9

Executive, administrative....... 12.0 12.1 13.5 9.2

Professional.................... 12.9 12.2 13.4 13.7

Technical, sales and admin. support 31.2 30.6 32.0 31.3

Technicians..................... 3.4 3.2 3.7 3.2

Sales........................... 10.1 11.9 8.8 7.8

Administrative support.......... 17.7 15.6 19.4 20.3

Service........................... 16.8 18.1 15.0 16.3

Private household............... .2 .2 .2 .1

Protective service.............. 2.9 2.3 2.8 4.4

Other service................... 13.7 15.5 12.1 11.9

Farming, forestry and fishing..... 1.2 .9 1.2 1.8

Precision production craft & repair 15.4 16.2 15.0 13.9

Operators, fabricators, and laborer. 10.5 9.8 9.8 13.8

Machine operator, assembler..... 2.2 2.2 1.9 2.4

Transportation and material move.. 4.2 3.7 3.9 6.2

Handlers, equip cleaners, laborer. 4.1 3.9 4.0 5.1

Subsistence activity................ .0 .0 .1 .0

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census 1980 Summary Tape File 3A, Table 66

Table 11.16 provides percentage breakdowns of the total workers in each occupation category for the three regions. Again, on average, the Northern region workers held about half of all occupations on Guam. The Central region remained second. With exception of subsistence activity, where the Central region had the highest percent, the order of labor contribution size was consistent throughout each category.

Table 11.16. Occupation by Percent Region: 1980

Occupation Total North Central South

Employed 16 yrs and over....... 100.0 48.2 33.2 18.6

Managerial and professional special. 100.0 47.0 35.9 17.1

Executive, administrative......... 100.0 48.5 37.3 14.2

Professional...................... 100.0 45.6 34.5 19.9

Technical, sales and admin. support. 100.0 47.3 34.0 18.7

Technicians....................... 100.0 45.3 36.9 17.7

Sales............................. 100.0 56.7 28.9 14.4

Administrative support............ 100.0 42.3 36.4 21.3

Service............................. 100.0 52.0 29.8 18.2

Private household................. 100.0 57.4 34.4 8.2

Protective service................ 100.0 39.3 32.3 28.4

Other service..................... 100.0 54.6 29.2 16.1

Farming, forestry and fishing....... 100.0 37.5 33.3 29.1

Precision production craft & repair. 100.0 50.8 32.4 16.8

Operators, fabricators, and laborer. 100.0 44.8 30.8 24.3

Machine operator, assembler....... 100.0 49.4 29.6 20.9

Transportation and material move.. 100.0 42.2 30.5 27.3

Handlers, equip cleaners, laborer. 100.0 45.1 31.8 23.1

Subsistence activity................ 100.0 21.4 57.1 21.4

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census 1980 Summary Tape File 3A, Table 66

SUMMARY

The employment by industry/occupation data in the preceding tables show significant increases in the private sector employment. Of the increases, retail and wholesale categories experienced the most pronounced growth. Although construction employment figures showed a significant decrease since 1970, there were many major construction projects planned for the 1980's (especially in hotel construction), and thus the construction figure has increased.

Female employment has steadily increased in the past 30 years. In almost all the industry categories, female employment figures show steady increases. Although it is certain that the female labor force is holding a larger portion of the Guam job market, when looking at the occupation by sex, the numbers still suggest that the quality of the jobs held by the increasing numbers of women workers may be lower than jobs held by their male counterparts. The percentage of the labor force employed in public administration has steadily decreased over the years.

Retail trade and wholesale trade have shown steady increases, and should keep the same trends in the years to come. Guam's transition to a commercial economy (compared to a public sector economy) is evident in the figures obtained in the 1980 census. Also, Guam's economy is steadily increasing its service‑oriented industry base, and should be tailoring its education/training programs to prepare the labor force for such jobs. Furthermore, females on Guam have good potential to share an equal footing in Guam's employment opportunities. Although women still tend to lag in vertical mobility in certain industries, with careful encouragement this too should change in the future.

CLASS OF WORKER CHARACTERISTICS

Class of worker data since 1950 show a shift in employment from private to government employment, then back to private (Table 11.17). In 1950, 55 percent of all those 16 years and older who were employed were private wage and salary earners, 36 percent were in government, and 8 percent were self‑employed. By 1970, private employment had fallen to 46 percent of workers and government employment rose to 52 percent. Those who were self‑employed were only 2 percent of workers. By 1980, however, private employment and self‑employment had increased while the proportion of those in government work had fallen.

Table 11.17. Class of Worker: 1950 to 1980

Class of Worker 1980 1970 1960 1950

Employed, 16+ yrs..... 32,692 22,112 17,208 18,671

Percent............ 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Private wage and salary. 50.7 45.8 52.4 55.1

Government.............. 46.1 52.0 42.4 35.8

Federal government.... 18.4 27.8 (NA) (NA)

Local government...... 27.7 24.3 (NA) (NA)

Self‑employed........... 3.1 1.9 4.6 7.8

Unpaid family worker.... .1 .2 .5 1.3

Subsistence............. .0 0.0 0.0 0.0

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

In 1950, 58 percent of employed males over the age of 16 worked for private companies, 8 percent were self‑employed, and 33 percent were government workers (Table 11.18). In 1970, government employment reached its peak of 49 percent of male workers while private employment and self‑employment were at their lowest levels. By 1980, the proportion of those self‑employed had nearly doubled, private employment increased, and government employment decreased.

Table 11.18 Class of Male Worker: 1950 to 1980

Class of Worker 1980 1970 1960 1950

Employed males, 16+... 18,994 15,245 13,680 15,584

Percent............ 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Private wage and salary. 50.6 48.5 54.5 58.3

Government.............. 45.7 49.4 40.9 32.6

Federal government.... 21.5 29.8 0.0 0.0

Local government...... 24.3 19.6 0.0 0.0

Self‑employed........... 3.6 2.0 4.3 8.0

Unpaid family worker.... .0 .1 .3 1.1

Subsistence............. .1 0.0 0.0 0.0

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

Females were employed mainly as government workers in 1950 (52 percent), followed by private companies (39 percent) and self‑employment (7 percent) (Table 11.19). Their pattern of decreasing private employment and increasing government work until 1970, followed by a reverse in 1980, closely matched that of male workers.

Table 11.19 Class of Female Worker: 1950 to 1980

Class of Worker 1980 1970 1960 1950

Employed females, 16+. 13,698 6,867 3,528 3,087

Percent............ 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Private wage and salary. 50.9 39.9 44.4 38.8

Government.............. 46.5 57.9 48.3 52.4

Federal government.... 14.1 23.2 (NA) (NA)

Local government...... 32.5 34.7 (NA) (NA)

Self‑employed........... 2.5 1.9 5.8 6.9

Unpaid family worker.... .1 .4 1.4 1.8

Subsistence............. .0 0.0 0.0 0.0

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Decennial Reports

Tables 11.20 through 11.22 highlight the reversal in type of employment mentioned earlier. There was a 48 percent increase between 1970 and 1980 in numbers of those 16 years and older and employed (Table 11.20 and Figure 11.7). By class, the number of private workers had increased by 64 percent, local government workers by 69 percent, and self‑employed workers by 137 percent. The number of those working for the Federal government decreased by 2 percent. Unpaid family workers showed the largest drop, with a 35 percent decrease.

Table 11.20. Change in Class of Worker: 1970 and 1980

Percent

Number Change Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ 1970 to‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Class of Worker 1980 1970 1980 1980 1970

Employed, 16+ yrs..... 32692 22112 47.8 100.0 100.0

Private wage and salary. 16575 10135 63.5 50.7 45.8

Federal government...... 6001 6141 ‑2.3 18.4 27.8

Local government........ 9056 5365 68.8 27.7 24.3

Self‑employed........... 1020 431 136.6 3.1 1.9

Unpaid family worker.... 26 40 ‑35.0 .1 .2

Subsistence............. 14 (NA) (NA) .0 (NA)

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980 Table 23;

PC(1)‑B54 1970 Table 15

Figure 11.7 Class of Worker: 1970 and 1980

(Percent)

The number of employed males increased by 25 percent between 1970 and 1980, with the largest gains in the areas of self‑employment and local government (Table 11.21). The greatest decreases were in unpaid family workers and Federal government employees.

Table 11.21. Change in Class of Male Worker: 1970 and 1980

Percent

Number Change Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ 1970 to‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Class of Worker 1980 1970 1980 1980 1970

Employed males, 16+... 18994 15245 24.6 100.0 100.0

Private wage and salary. 9605 7397 29.8 50.6 48.5

Federal government...... 4075 4548 ‑10.4 21.5 29.8

Local government........ 4609 2984 54.4 24.3 19.6

Self‑employed........... 684 302 126.5 3.6 2.0

Unpaid family worker.... 9 14 ‑35.7 .0 .1

Subsistence............. 12 (NA) (NA) .1 (NA)

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Census Bureau PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980 Table 23; PC(1)‑B54 1970

Table 15

There was a nearly 100 percent increase in the number of females in the labor force between 1970 and 1980, with the highest gains being in the areas of self and private employment (Table 11.22). The only category to shrink was that of unpaid family workers, which decreased by 35 percent.

Table 11.22. Change in Class of Female Worker: 1970 and 1980

Percent

Number Change Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ 1970 to‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Class of Worker 1980 1970 1980 1980 1970

Employed females, 16+. 13698 6867 99.5 100.0 100.0

Private wage and salary. 6970 2738 154.6 50.9 39.9

Federal government...... 1926 1593 20.9 14.1 23.2

Local government........ 4447 2381 86.8 32.5 34.7

Self‑employed........... 336 129 160.5 2.5 1.9

Unpaid family worker.... 17 26 ‑34.6 .1 .4

Subsistence............. 2 (NA) (NA) .0 (NA)

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980 Table 23;

PC(1)‑B54 1970 Table 15

In 1980, 45 percent of workers who were born on Guam were employed by the local government; the private sector was the second largest category of employment, with 32 percent of Guam‑born employees (Table 11.23 and Figure 11.8). For all other employees, the private sector was the largest source of employment, with proportions ranging from 75 percent of "other"‑born employees, to 48 percent of those born in the U.S. Workers born in the Philippines had Federal government as the second most common category of employment; for persons born in the U.S. and other areas, local government was second.

Table 11.23. Class of Worker by Birthplace: 1980

Numbers | Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Phil‑ Ot‑| Phil‑ Ot‑

Class of Worker Guam ppns USA her| Total Guam ppns USA her

Emplyd, 16+ yrs..13001 9188 5636 4867| 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Prvt wage and sal.. 4092 6100 2713 3670| 50.7 31.5 66.4 48.1 75.4

Federal government. 2751 1686 1231 333| 18.4 21.2 18.4 21.8 6.8

Local government... 5847 1151 1427 631| 27.7 45.0 12.5 25.3 13.0

Self‑employed...... 289 244 261 226| 3.1 2.2 2.7 4.6 4.6

Unpaid family...... 12 7 4 3| .1 .1 .1 .1 .1

Subsistence........ 10 0 0 4| .0 .1 0.0 0.0 .1

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980 Table 28

Figure 11.8 Class of Worker by Birthplace: 1980

(Percent)

Employed males followed the pattern set by all workers, except for the U.S. born (Table 11.24). Their second largest source of jobs was the Federal government, as opposed to the local government, which was the second most common source of employment of all U.S. born employees. Considering that most U.S. born males were presumed to be in the military, this finding is not surprising.

Table 11.24. Class of Male Worker by Birthplace: 1980

Numbers | Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Phil‑ Ot‑| Phil‑ Ot‑

Class of Worker Guam ppns USA her| Total Guam ppns USA her

Emplyd males, 16+. 7400 5832 2954 2808| 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Prvt wage and sal.. 2215 3843 1428 2119| 50.6 29.9 65.9 48.3 75.5

Federal government. 1876 1319 687 193| 21.5 25.4 22.6 23.3 6.9

Local government... 3118 494 657 340| 24.3 42.1 8.5 22.2 12.1

Self‑employed...... 180 174 180 150| 3.6 2.4 3.0 6.1 5.3

Unpaid family...... 3 2 2 2| .0 .0 .0 .1 .1

Subsistence........ 8 0 0 4| .1 .1 0.0 0.0 .1

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980 Table 28

Except for Guam‑born employed females, private companies employed the greatest proportions of females (Table 11.25). The local government was where most Guam‑born women were employed.

Table 11.25. Class of Female Worker by Birthplace: 1980

Numbers | Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Phil‑ Ot‑| Phil‑ Ot‑

Class of Worker Guam ppns USA her| Total Guam ppns USA her

Emplyd fmles,16+ 5601 3356 2682 2059| 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Prvt wage and sal. 1877 2257 1285 1551| 50.9 33.5 67.3 47.9 75.3

Federal government. 875 367 544 140| 14.1 15.6 10.9 20.3 6.8

Local government... 2729 657 770 291| 32.5 48.7 19.6 28.7 14.1

Self‑employed...... 109 70 81 76| 2.5 1.9 2.1 3.0 3.7

Unpaid family...... 9 5 2 1| .1 .2 .1 .1 .0

Subsistence........ 2 0 0 0| .0 .0 0.0 0.0 0.0

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54 1980 Table 28

Of the 32,692 employed persons 16 years and over, most (51 percent) were private wage and salary workers (See Tables 11.26 and 11.27), followed by local government employees. The Northern region had the highest proportion of its residents being private employees (61 percent), followed by the Central region (46 percent) and the South (32 percent). Tamuning was the election district with the greatest percentage of private employees (72 percent); Umatac had the least (18 percent).

The South had 29 percent of its residents employed by the Federal government, with Santa Rita the village with the highest percentage. Only 15 percent of those residing in the North were working for the Federal government. Most (37 percent) of Southern residents worked for the local government, the single greatest employer of those in the South. Fully 57 percent of those living in Inarajan were local government employees.

Table 11.26. Class of Worker by Election District: 1980

Federal Local Self Unpaid

Private Govern‑ Govern‑ Em‑ Family/

Election District Total Wage ment met ployed Subsis

Guam............. 32692 16575 6001 9056 1020 40

Northern.............. 15747 9640 2320 3246 525 16

Dededo.............. 7530 4297 1336 1697 194 6

Tamuning............ 5975 4310 446 949 262 8

Yigo................ 2242 1033 538 600 69 2

Central............... 10851 5012 1900 3546 374 19

Agana............... 419 230 45 104 35 5

Agana Heights....... 1127 472 201 424 28 2

Asan................ 688 302 171 185 30 0

Barrigada........... 2331 1095 436 722 76 2

Chalan Pago/Ordot... 961 340 155 428 36 2

Mangilao............ 2165 1016 352 753 41 3

Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite. 1721 947 272 425 76 1

Piti................ 561 272 101 156 29 3

Sinajana............ 878 338 167 349 23 1

Southern.............. 6094 1923 1781 2264 121 5

Agat................ 1213 344 444 403 21 1

Inarajan............ 589 156 85 336 12 0

Merizo.............. 469 128 110 214 17 0

Santa Rita.......... 1727 616 729 348 34 0

Talofofo............ 583 192 99 278 13 1

Umatac.............. 192 34 66 89 2 1

Yona................ 1321 453 248 596 22 2

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census 1980 Summary Tape File 3A, Table 67

The region with the highest proportion of its residents who were self‑employed was the Central region (3 percent), with Agana (8 percent) the village with the largest percentage (Table 11.27). Agana was also the village with the greatest proportion of unpaid family and subsistence workers, with over 1 percent of its workers.

Table 11.27. Percent Class of Worker by Election District: 1980

Federal Local Self Unpaid

Private Govern‑ Govern‑ Em‑ Family/

Election District Total Wage ment met ployed Subsis

Guam............. 100.0 50.7 18.4 27.7 3.1 0.1

Northern.............. 100.0 61.2 14.7 20.6 3.3 0.1

Dededo.............. 100.0 57.1 17.7 22.5 2.6 0.1

Tamuning............ 100.0 72.1 7.5 15.9 4.4 0.1

Yigo................ 100.0 46.1 24.0 26.8 3.1 0.1

Central............... 100.0 46.2 17.5 32.7 3.4 0.2

Agana............... 100.0 54.9 10.7 24.8 8.4 1.2

Agana Heights....... 100.0 41.9 17.8 37.6 2.5 0.2

Asan................ 100.0 43.9 24.9 26.9 4.4 0.0

Barrigada........... 100.0 47.0 18.7 31.0 3.3 0.1

Chalan Pago/Ordot... 100.0 35.4 16.1 44.5 3.7 0.2

Mangilao............ 100.0 46.9 16.3 34.8 1.9 0.1

Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite. 100.0 55.0 15.8 24.7 4.4 0.1

Piti................ 100.0 48.5 18.0 27.8 5.2 0.5

Sinajana............ 100.0 38.5 19.0 39.7 2.6 0.1

Southern.............. 100.0 31.6 29.2 37.2 2.0 0.1

Agat................ 100.0 28.4 36.6 33.2 1.7 0.1

Inarajan............ 100.0 26.5 14.4 57.0 2.0 0.0

Merizo.............. 100.0 27.3 23.5 45.6 3.6 0.0

Santa Rita.......... 100.0 35.7 42.2 20.2 2.0 0.0

Talofofo............ 100.0 32.9 17.0 47.7 2.2 0.2

Umatac.............. 100.0 17.7 34.4 46.4 1.0 0.5

Yona................ 100.0 34.3 18.8 45.1 1.7 0.2

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census 1980 Summary Tape File 3A, Table 67

ECONOMIC CENSUS DATA

In addition to collecting information on employment in certain industries in the Census of Population, the Census Bureau has taken Economic Censuses of Guam approximately every 5 years beginning in 1958. The kinds of data gathered include numbers and kinds of businesses (e.g., construction, manufacturing, retail trade, etc.), their location, number of employees, and the legal organization of the industry.

The following conventions are used:

Establishments: An establishment is a single physical location at which business is conducted. It is not necessarily identical with its parent company or enterprise, which may consist of one establishment or more. The published census figures represent a summary of reports for individual establishments rather than companies. The establishment count represents those establishments in business at the end of the reference year.

When two activities or more were carried on at a single location under a single ownership, they generally were grouped together as a single establishment and the entire establishment classified on the basis of its major activity, with all its data included in that classification. However, when distinct and separate economic activities (with different industry classification codes) were conducted under the same ownership at a single location, and when conditions prescribed by the SIC Manual for recognizing the existence of more than one establishment were met, separate establishment reports for each of the different activities were obtained in the census.

Paid Employees for the Reference Week: Paid employees, including salaried officers and executives of corporations, were those full‑ and part‑time employees who were on the payroll during the reference week used in the census. Included were employees on paid sick leave, paid holidays, and paid vacations. Proprietors and partners of unincorporated businesses were not included.

Table 11.28 shows the number and percent of establishments by industry that were in business at the end of the reference year. In each census, retail trade was by far the largest single category of industry, though the proportion declined in each survey. The next largest industry, in terms of number of establishments, was selected services. In 1958, selected services businesses were only 19 percent of establishments.

Table 11.28. Establishments by Industry: 1958 to 1982

Industry 1982 1977 1972 1967 1963 1958

Total...... 1377 900 710 553 443 457

Percent.. 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Construction.... 4.4 8.2 9.9 (NA) (NA) (NA)

Manufacturing... 1.6 2.2 4.1 4.2 2.7 2.0

Wholesale trade. 6.5 5.7 8.5 6.9 7.4 4.4

Retail trade.... 58.2 59.0 58.6 70.0 70.0 74.6

Selected Services. 29.3 24.9 19.0 19.0 19.9 19.0

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census OAC82‑6 1982, Table 1

Notes: Starting in 1977, selected services also included travel

agencies, dental laboratories, and legal and engineering, architectural, and surveying services.

The smallest industry on island both in number and proportion of establishments was manufacturing. In 1958 only 9 places had manufacturing as major industry; this increased to a peak of only 29 establishments in 1972. The highest proportion that manufacturing ever had of all industry establishments was only 4.2 percent in 1967, which was a 92 percent increase from the previous census.

The wholesale trade industry has shown the greatest change in the number of establishments counted in each survey (Table 11.29). Between 1958 to 1963, the number of wholesale trade establishments grew by 65 percent, but increased by only 15 percent between 1963 and 1967. From 1967 to 1972, it grew by 58 percent, then decreased by 15 percent between 1972 and 1977. In 1982, the industry had increased by 75 percent over 1977 levels. Selected services remained at about 19 percent of all establishments until 1977, when they experienced a 31 percent increase, then grew even more (80 percent) by 1982.

Table 11.29. Change in Number of Establishments by Industry:

1958 to 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

1977 to 1972 to 1967 to 1963 to 1958 to

Industry 1982 1977 1972 1967 1963

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Total.......... 53.0 26.8 28.4 24.8 ‑3.1

Construction........ ‑17.6 5.7 (NA) (NA) (NA)

Manufacturing....... 10.0 ‑31.0 26.1 91.7 33.3

Wholesale trade..... 74.5 ‑15.0 57.9 15.2 65.0

Retail trade........ 51.0 27.6 7.5 24.8 ‑9.1

Selected Services... 79.9 65.9 28.6 19.3 1.1

_________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census OAC82‑6 1982, Table 1

Notes: See Table 11.28

Although there were only 2,670 paid employees listed for the various industries in 1958, by 1982 11,871 persons were included, the highest ever recorded. The greatest number of employees were in the retail trade industry, followed by selected services, except for 1972, when construction had the second highest number of employees (Table 11.30).

Table 11.30. Paid Employees for Reference Week: 1958 to 1982

Industry 1982 1977 1972 1967 1963 1958

Total....... 11,871 10,405 11,128 4,403 2,814 2,670

Percent... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Construction..... 11.7 24.3 26.7 (NA) (NA) (NA)

Manufacturing.... 5.4 6.6 10.8 18.5 12.7 6.6

Wholesale trade.. 8.3 5.2 8.5 9.7 13.6 9.2

Retail trade.... 45.5 39.1 34.8 60.0 63.0 73.2

Selected Services 29.2 24.7 19.2 11.7 10.7 11.0

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census OAC82‑6 1982, Table 1

Notes: See Table 11.28.

In 1972, construction followed retail trade as the industry with the most paid employees, reflecting a boom period in building on the island. After 1972, however, the percentage of paid employees in the construction industry decreased, until in 1982 they were only 12 percent of total paid employees.

Between 1967 and 1972, the total number of paid employees jumped by 153 percent, most of which was accounted for by the selected services field, which increased by 315 percent (Table 11.31). None of the industries decreased during this period, but between 1972 and 1977, 3 of the 5 industries did so: construction by 15 percent, manufacturing by 43 percent and wholesale trade by 42 percent. Numbers of paid employees in retail trade increased only modestly (5 percent), while selected services grew by 20 percent. During the next 5 year period, only construction and manufacturing decreased (by 45 and 7 percent, respectively), but the other industries showed increases in their numbers of paid employees.

Table 11.31. Change in Number of Paid Employees: 1958 to 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

1977 to 1972 to 1967 to 1963 to 1958 to

Industry 1982 1977 1972 1967 1963

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Total.......... 14.1 ‑6.5 152.7 56.5 5.4

Construction........ ‑45.4 ‑14.8 (NA) (NA) (NA)

Manufacturing....... ‑7.0 ‑42.9 47.2 127.9 103.4

Wholesale trade..... 79.7 ‑42.2 120.8 12.0 55.9

Retail trade........ 32.7 5.2 46.3 49.1 ‑9.3

Selected Services... 35.0 20.0 314.9 71.4 2.4

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census OAC82‑6 1982, Table 1

Notes: See Table 11.28

Retail trade businesses had the highest proportions in every category of form of organization in 1982, with selected services in second place (Table 11.32). Of the 571 individual proprietorships, 67 percent were retail trade establishments, as were 65 percent of partnerships and 51 percent of corporations. There were no partnerships in the wholesale trade industry, and only 1 each in construction and manufacturing.

Table 11.32. Legal Form of Organization by Industry: 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Indi‑

vidual

Proprie‑ Partner‑ Corpor‑

Industry Total torship ships ations

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Total.......... 1,377 571 68 738

Percent...... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Construction........ 4.4 1.4 1.5 7.0

Manufacturing....... 1.6 .5 1.5 2.4

Wholesale trade..... 6.5 2.8 0.0 9.9

Retail trade........ 58.2 67.1 64.7 50.8

Selected Services... 29.3 28.2 32.4 29.8

_______________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census OAC82‑6 1982, Table 2

Notes: See Table 11.28

Corporations held the highest percentages of every industry except for retail trade, where they were a close second place. Individual proprietorships were the next most common form of organization.

Table 11.33. Legal Form of Organization by Percent Industry: 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Indi‑

vidual

Proprie‑ Partner‑ Corpor‑

Industry Total torship ships ations

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Total.......... 100.0 41.5 4.9 53.6

Construction........ 100.0 13.1 1.6 85.2

Manufacturing....... 100.0 13.6 4.5 81.8

Wholesale trade..... 100.0 18.0 0.0 82.0

Retail trade........ 100.0 47.8 5.5 46.8

Selected Services... 100.0 40.0 5.5 54.6

________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census OAC82‑6 1982, Table 2

Notes: See Table 11.28

Of the 11,871 paid employees in 1982, 10,697 worked for corporations, 1,103 for individual proprietorships, and only 71 for partnerships (Table 11.34). All of those working for partnerships did so in the area of retail trade.

Table 11.34. Legal Form of Organization by Paid Employees: 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Indi‑

vidual

Proprie‑ Partner‑ Corpor‑

Industry Total torship ships ations

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Total.......... 11,871 1,103 71 10,697

Percent...... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Construction........ 11.7 5.1 0.0 12.4

Manufacturing....... 5.4 3.1 0.0 5.6

Wholesale trade..... 8.3 5.7 0.0 8.6

Retail trade........ 45.5 58.7 100.0 43.8

Selected Services... 29.2 27.4 0.0 29.6

_______________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census OAC82‑6 1982, Table 2

For the 10,697 paid employees who worked for corporations, 44 percent were in the area of retail trade, 30 percent in selected services, and 12 percent in construction. Nearly 59 percent of employees of individual proprietorships were in retail trade, and all of partnership employees.

As can be seen in Table 11.35, corporations had the greatest proportions of employees, followed by individual proprietorships. Fully 96 percent of construction employees were working for corporations, with the remainder in individual proprietorships. Retail trade had the only paid employees working for partnerships.

Table 11.35. Percent Legal Form of Organization by Paid

Employees: 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Indi‑

vidual

Proprie‑ Partner‑ Corpor‑

Industry Total torship ships ations

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Total.......... 100.0 9.3 .6 90.1

Construction........ 100.0 4.0 0.0 96.0

Manufacturing....... 100.0 5.3 0.0 94.7

Wholesale trade..... 100.0 6.4 0.0 93.6

Retail trade........ 100.0 12.0 1.3 86.7

Selected Services... 100.0 8.7 0.0 91.3

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census OAC82‑6 1982, Table 2

The data from the Economic Censuses show that several industries had a pattern of continued growth, such as retail trade and selected services, and can be expected to grow in the future. Some industries, such as construction and manufacturing, are cyclical and were in a stage of either slow growth or actively decreasing in 1982, but are expected to show an upswing of activity in the 1987 Economic Census. With an increase in activity will come an associated increase in the number of paid employees in each industry.

AGRICULTURE CENSUS

The first agriculture census of Guam was taken in 1920 as part of the decennial census, a practice that continued through 1960. The 1964 Census of Agriculture was the first quinquennial (5‑year) census to be taken in Guam. In 1976, Congress authorized the census of agriculture to be taken for 1978 and 1982 to adjust the data reference year to coincide with the 1982 Economic Census. After 1982, the agriculture reverted to a 5‑year cycle, to cover years ending in "2" and "7".

For the agriculture data presented here, the following conventions are used:

Farm was defined as a place on which any crop, vegetable, or fruit was harvested or gathered during the reference year, or on which there was any livestock or 15 or more poultry at the time of enumeration.

Land in Farms was determined from the answers to questions 1 through 7 in section 2 of the report form. The amounts of land reported as owned, rented from others, used under permit, occupied without permit, or furnished by the government were added together, and the amount of land reported as rented to others was subtracted from that sum. The result represented "land in farms".

Land owned included all land held by the operator or his/her spouse under title, purchase contract, homestead law, or as heir or trustee of an undivided estate at the time of enumeration. However, land used by the military services was excluded even though owned by the operator.

Land rented to others included all land the operator rented or leased to others and all land assigned to others on shares or rent free during the reference year. The tenant is considered to be the operator of land leased, rented, or worked on shares, even though the landlord may supervise the operations. The landlord is considered to be the operator of only that portion of the land not assigned to tenants.

Land rented from others included not only land that the operator rented or leased from others, but also land worked on shares for others and land occupied rent free.

Land occupied by permit included all land for which the operator had a Government of Guam permit. Rights to use land owned or controlled by the Government of Guam were in the form of permits rather than lease or rental arrangements.

Land occupied without permit included all land occupied by the operator as a "Borrower" or "nonpermittee" without ownership rights to the land, or without any kind of permit, lease, or rental agreement.

Land furnished by the Government included all land that the Government of Guam furnished to the operator in connection with his/her living quarters.

Land use in farms was categorized according to the way it was being used on enumeration day. The land uses described in the following paragraphs are mutually exclusive in that each acre of land was counted only once, even though it may have had more than one use during the year.

Cropland used for crops included all land planted in crops at the time of enumeration. Land was to be reported only once, even if two or more crops were planted on it. Land in crops included (1) land in bearing and nonbearing fruit and nut trees or plants or any other tree crops, (2) land that had partial but not total crop failure, and (3) land in home gardens.

Cropland used for pasture included all cropland on the place that was used only for pasture. Land planted in crops, even though the crops were not to be harvested, was not to be included here.

Cropland not used for crops or pasture included cropland on the place that was not used for crops or pasture. It did not include land so hilly, rocky, or wet that the cost of improving it for cultivation would be more than the operator could pay. Nor did it include land in roads, streams or swamps. It did include land on which there was total crop failure due to flood, drought, insects, fire, or other causes; cropland lying idle; and cropland planted with soil‑improvement grasses, or other cover crops planted for the purpose of improvement.

Pastureland used for pasture or grazing included land used for grazing livestock at the time of enumeration. It did not include cropland, even though cattle or other livestock may have been grazed on it.

Pastureland not used for pasture or grazing referred to all land suitable for pasture or grazing that was not being used for grazing livestock at the time of enumeration. It included land that, in the opinion of the operator, could have supported enough plant growth, either native or planted for grazing, provided the clearing and grazing of the land would not seriously damage it.

All other land included all land not qualifying as either cropland or pastureland as defined previously. It included land in house lots, barn lots, ponds, ditches, swamps, steep slopes, roads, brushland, wasteland, and forest areas.

Operator characteristics: Data were obtained to classify the operators according to selected characteristics, two of which (age and main occupation) are shown here.

Age of operator: Operators were classified by age into six groups. The average age was obtained by dividing the sum of the ages of all operators by the number reported.

Main occupation: This question was asked to determine whether the principal occupation of the operator was agricultural or nonagricultural. If the operator devoted 50 percent or more of his/her work time to agricultural activities, his/her main occupation was considered to be agriculture.

AGRICULTURE CHARACTERISTICS

Between 1960 and 1982, the total amount of land in farms decreased from 32,109 acres to 26,662 acres (Table 11.36). By region, the South had the largest amount of land in farms in all years, except for 1975, when the Central region had the highest amount.

Between 1960 and 1964, the amount of land in farms in the South decreased, reducing the average size of farms there from 24.8 acres to 7.5 acres per farm (Table 11.36). The North also decreased in land for farms, but the Central region doubled in the amount of farmland recorded. Between 1964 and 1970, farmland decreased by almost one‑half in the Central area, but grew slightly in the South. This pattern of leaps and drops stopped in 1975: the land in farms increased or decreased in smaller amounts after that time, as did the average size of farms.

Table 11.36 Land and Average Size of Farms: 1960 to 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Land (in acres) Average Size (acres)

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Year Total North Cntrl South Total North Cntrl South

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

1982..... 26662 2052 12087 12523 13.0 3.2 18.1 17.2

1978..... 28619 1688 12381 14548 14.3 3.5 19.4 16.5

1975..... 29766 2305 13947 13514 18.9 5.4 27.2 21.3

1970..... 26158 2444 6749 8907 23.3 8.2 16.6 25.7

1964..... 30100 4383 18476 7236 11.9 10.1 16.4 7.5

1960..... 32109 5557 9087 17462 15.8 13.0 10.1 24.8

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census AC82‑A‑53 1982 Table 10; AC78‑A‑53

1978 Table 10; Census of Agriculture Vol 1, Part 53 Table 10;

Census of Agriculture 1964 Vol. 1, Part 51, Table 6.

Table 11.37 shows the number of farms from 1960 to 1982, and the percentage change in number of farms between censuses. In 1960, there were 2,028 farms on the island. The number peaked at 2,529 farms in 1964, dropped by 56 percent by 1970, then increased to 2,044 in 1982. The sharp drop in the number of farms between 1964 and 1970 was evident in all 3 regions, with the North losing the most farms (723) and the South losing the highest proportion (64.1 percent of 1964 farms). By 1982, all regions except the South were growing in the number of farms.

Between 1978 and 1982, the South lost 155 farms, 18 percent of the 1978 total. This may have been due to reporting problems.

Table 11.37. Number of Farms and Percent Change: 1960 to 1982

Number of Farms Percent Change

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

1978‑ 1975‑ 1970‑ 1964‑ 1960‑

Region 1982 1978 1975 1970 1964 1960 1982 1978 1975 1970 1964

Guam 2044 1999 1576 1121 2529 2028 2.3 26.8 40.6 ‑55.7 24.7

North.. 648 476 430 298 435 429 36.1 10.7 44.3 ‑31.5 1.4

Central 667 639 512 406 1129 896 4.4 24.8 26.1 ‑64.0 26.0

South.. 729 884 634 346 965 703 ‑17.5 39.4 83.2 ‑64.1 37.3

____________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census AC82‑A‑53 1982 Table 10; AC78‑A‑53

1978 Table 10; Census of Agriculture Vol. 1 Part 53 1974 Table

10; Census of Agriculture Vol. 1 Part 51 1964 Table 6.

Of the 32,109 acres of land in farms in 1960, 28 percent was cropland used for pasture, 23 percent was pastureland used for pasture or grazing, and only 10 percent was cropland used for crops (Table 11.38). In 1964, the proportion of cropland actually used for crops increased by 17 percent, from 3,243 acres to 3,793 acres. The percentage of pastureland used for pasture or grazing nearly doubled, from 23 percent to 42 percent. In the succeeding censuses, the amount of land in farms decreased, as did the proportion of cropland used for crops. By 1975, cropland not used for either crops or pasture jumped to 39 percent of the total land in farms, while land used for crops was only 8 percent of the total. In 1982, the category "All other land" comprised the greatest amount of land in farms, while cropland used for crops was only 7 percent.

Table 11.38. Land in Farms by Land Use: 1960 to 1982

Cropland Pastureland

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Land in Not used Used for Not used All

Farms Used for crops/ pasture/ pasture/ other

Year (acres) Total Crops Pasture pasture grazing grazing land

1982.. 26662 100.0 6.6 2.5 8.7 13.4 21.0 47.8

1978.. 28619 100.0 5.0 2.6 41.9 39.0 2.2 9.3

1975.. 29766 100.0 7.8 4.3 38.7 42.0 .4 6.8

1970.. 26158 100.0 8.5 25.3 7.2 36.2 5.3 17.5

1964.. 30100 100.0 12.6 22.4 9.7 41.8 2.8 10.6

1960.. 32109 100.0 10.1 27.7 15.1 23.2 3.2 20.6

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census AC82‑A‑53 1982 Table 1; Census of

Agriculture 1975 Vol. 1, Part 53 Table 1; Census of

Agriculture 1964 Vol. 1, Part 51 Table 8.

In 1960, 62 percent of farm operators were full owners of their farms, 18 percent were nonpermittees, 16 percent held permits to work the farmland, and 4 percent were tenants (Table 11.39). The proportion of full owners rose to a peak of 81 percent in 1970, fell to its lowest point (77 percent) in 1975, then rose and fell again in 1978 and 1982. All categories of tenure exhibited this roller‑coaster trend except that of tenants: after peaking at 8 percent in 1964 and dropping by 49 percent to 4.2 percent in 1970, the proportion of tenant farmers steadily rose to 6.8 percent in 1982.

Table 11.39. Farms by Tenure: 1960 to 1982

Number of Farms Percent

Tenure 1982 1978 1975 1970 1964 1960 1982 1978 1975 1970 1964 1960

All opr..2044 1999 1576 1121 2529 2028 100 100 100 100 100 100

Full ownr..1595 1609 1208 913 1985 1253 78.0 80.5 76.6 81.4 78.5 61.8

Part ownr.. 27 31 45 4 60 14 1.3 1.6 2.9 .4 2.4 .7

Tenants.... 138 116 81 47 211 72 6.8 5.8 5.1 4.2 8.3 3.6

Permittees. 237 93 216 114 224 316 11.6 4.7 13.7 10.2 8.9 15.6

Nonprmtee.. 23 116 16 37 31 355 1.1 5.8 1.0 3.3 1.2 17.5

Others..... 24 34 10 6 18 18 1.2 1.7 .6 .5 .7 .9

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census AC82‑A‑53 1982 Table 3; AC78‑A‑53

1978 Table 3; Census of Agriculture Vol. 1, Part 53 1974 Table

3; Census of Agriculture Vol. 1, Part 51 1964 Table 5.

As can be seen in Table 11.40, most farm operators were 35 years old and over in all 4 census years from 1970 to 1982. The average age was either 50 years (1970 to 1978) or 51 years (1982). Most farmers reported that their main occupation was non‑agricultural: this ranged from 66 percent in 1970 to 91 percent of all farmers in 1982.

Table 11.40. Operators by Age and Main Occupation: 1970 to 1982

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Age/Occupation 1982 1978 1975 1970 1982 1978 1975 1970

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

All operators... 2044 1999 1572 876 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Less than 25...... 31 20 28 10 1.5 1.0 1.8 .9

25 to 34.......... 244 221 172 83 11.9 11.1 10.9 7.4

35 to 44.......... 403 423 344 225 19.7 21.2 21.8 20.1

45 to 54.......... 606 725 511 258 29.6 36.3 32.4 23.0

55 to 64.......... 508 414 333 188 24.8 20.7 21.1 16.8

65 and over....... 252 196 184 112 12.3 9.8 11.7 10.0

Not Reported...... 0 0 4 245 0.0 0.0 .3 21.9

Mean age.......... 51 50 50 50 ... ... ... ...

Agricultural...... 192 326 266 168 9.4 16.3 16.9 15.0

Nonagricultural... 1852 1671 1304 745 90.6 83.6 82.7 66.4

Not Reported...... 0 2 6 208 0.0 .1 .4 18.6

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census AC82‑A‑53 1982 Table 3; AC78‑A‑53

1975 Table 20.

In 1986, the College of Agriculture and Life Sciences of the University of Guam conducted a survey of commercial farmers on Guam. While these data are not comparable to census data, they do reflect changes in the approach to farming on Guam.

Table 11.41 Farmers, Farmland, and

Production: 1986

(Acres are rounded to nearest ten.)

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Category Number Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Farmers.................. 137 100.0

In cooperatives............ 85 62.0

Free agents................ 52 38.0

Farmland (in acres)...... 9180 100.0

Very suitable for crops.... 4600 50.1

Moderately suitable........ 2200 24.0

Suitable for forest/pasture 380 4.1

Acres in crop production... 560 6.1

Acres not in production.... 8620 93.9

____________________________________________

Source: College of Agriculture and Life

Sciences, University of Guam.

In 1986, there were 137 commercial farmers on Guam (Table 11.41). Of these commercial farmers, 85 (62 percent) were members of farm cooperatives, while 52 were free agents. There were 5 farming cooperatives in operation at that time; one had failed during the previous year. The survey also looked at farmland: there were 9,180 acres of land identified and designated as potential areas for agriculture; 4,600 acres (50 percent) were deemed very suitable for crop production. Another 2,200 acres (24 percent) were moderately suitable for modern farming if the farmers were given some knowledge of farm management techniques, and 380 acres (4 percent) were suitable for forest or pasture.

Crop production took up 560 acres. This left 8,620 acres of potential farmland, of differing quality, not listed as being used for crops.

SUMMARY

The information presented in this chapter has shown trends in the areas of industry, occupation, class of worker, and agriculture. Private sector employment is increasing; public sector (government) employment is slowly decreasing. In the private sector, retail and wholesale trade categories experienced the greatest growth. Construction, though decreasing from 1970 to 1980, is expected to show some growth by 1990. Agriculture is still a small industry, and is not likely to grow by 1990. Selected services, however, is expected to continue to increase as an industry category.

Female employment has risen, though the occupations that females hold have not significantly changed. The proportion of high school graduates who are employed is expected to remain at about the same levels; the percentage of certain ethnic groups in selected industries is not expected to change.

CHAPTER 12

INCOME

Income data help various levels of local government assess community socioeconomic statuses and needs and help determine potential programs to alleviate poverty; the business community to gauge changes in consumer buying practices and inflationary trends that reflect consumers' spending ability and their affluence; and the U.S. Federal government to assess comparisons with Stateside income data.

The data on income in 1979 were derived from answers to questions 30 and 31. Information on money income received in the calendar year 1979 was requested from persons 15 years old and over. "Total" income is the algebraic sum of the amounts reported separately for wage and salary income; nonfarm net self‑employment income; farm net self‑employment income; interest, dividend, net royalty or rental income; Social Security or Retirement income; public assistance or welfare income; and, all other income (including remittances). "Earnings" is defined as the algebraic sum of wage or salary income and net income from farm and nonfarm self‑employment. The earnings figures represent the amount of income received regularly before deductions for personal income taxes, Social Security, bond purchases, union dues, medicare deductions, etc.

Receipts from the following sources were not included as income: money received from the sale of property (unless the recipient was engaged in the business of selling such property); the value of income "in kind" from food stamps, public housing subsidies, medical care, employer contributions for pensions, etc.; withdrawal of bank deposits; money borrowed; tax refunds; exchange of money between relatives in the same household; gifts and lump‑sum inheritances, insurance payments, and other types of lump‑sum receipts.

TYPES OF INCOME

The seven types of income reported in the census were defined as follows:

Wage or Salary Income was total money earnings for work performed as an employee during the calendar year 1979. It included wages, salary, U.S. Armed Forces pay, commissions, tips, piece‑rate payments, and cash bonuses earned, before deductions were made for taxes, bonds, pensions, union dues, etc.

Nonfarm Self‑Employment Income was net money income (gross receipts minus expenses) from one's own business, professional enterprise, or partnership. Gross receipts included the value of all goods sold and services rendered. Expenses included costs of goods purchased, rent, light, power, depreciation charges, wages and salaries paid, business taxes (not personal income taxes), etc.

Farm Self‑Employment Income was net money income (gross receipts minus operating expenses) from a farm or fishing operation by a person on his or her own account, as an owner, renter, or sharecropper. Gross receipts included the value of all products sold, government farm programs, money received from the rental of farm equipment to others, and incidental receipts from the sale of wood, sand,

gravel, etc. Operating expenses included cost of feed, fertilizer, seed, and other farming supplies, cash wages paid to farm‑hands, depreciation charges, cash rent, interest on farm mortgages, farm building repairs, farm taxes (not personal income taxes), etc. The value of fuel, food, or other farm products used for family living was not included as part of net income.

Interest, Dividend, or Net Rental Income included interest on savings or bonds, dividends from stockholdings or membership in associations, net royalties, and net income from rental of property to others and receipts from boarders or lodgers.

Social Security Income included Social Security pensions and survivors benefits and permanent disability insurance payments made by the Social Security Administration, prior to deductions for medical insurance, and railroad retirement insurance checks from the U.S. Government. "Medicare" reimbursements are not included.

Public Assistance Income included (1) supplementary security income payments made by Federal or territorial welfare agencies to low income persons who were aged (65 years or older), blind, or disabled; (2) aid to families with dependent children; (3) general assistance. Separate payments received for hospital or other medical care (vendor payments) were included in this item.

All Other Income included unemployment compensation, veteran's payments, public or private pensions, alimony or child support, worker's compensation, periodic payments from estates and trust funds, periodic receipts from annuities or insurance, contributions received periodically from persons not living in the household, military family allotments, net gambling winnings, and other kinds of periodic income other than earnings.

Median income is the amount which divides the distribution into two equal groups, one having incomes above the median, and the other having incomes below the median. The median for persons in all areas was based on persons with income. The median income value for persons were computed on the basis of more detailed income intervals than shown in this report. Median income figures were calculated using linear interpolation.

Mean income is the amount obtained by dividing the total income of a particular statistical universe by the number of units in that universe. Thus, mean income is obtained by dividing the total income for persons by the total number of persons with income.

Care should be exercised in using and interpreting mean income values for small subgroups for the population. Since the mean is strongly influenced by extreme values in the distribution, it is especially susceptible to effects of sampling variability, misreporting, and processing errors. The median, which is not affected by extreme values, is, therefore, a better measure than the mean when the population base is small. The mean, nevertheless, is shown here for most small subgroups because, when weighted according to the number of cases, the means can be added to obtain summary measures for areas and groups other than those shown here.

Limitations of the data. Since questionnaire entries for income were frequently based on memory and not on records, many persons tended to forget minor or irregular sources of income, and therefore, underreported their income. Underreporting tended to be more pronounced for income sources that were not derived from earnings, such as Social Security, public assistance, or net income from interest, dividends, and rentals. In addition, there were errors of reporting due to misunderstanding of the income questions. One such error was the reporting of gross rather than net dollar amounts for the two questions on net self‑employment income, which resulted in an overstatement of these items. Another common error was the reporting of identical dollar amounts in two of the 7 types of income items where a respondent with only one source of income assumed that the second amount should be entered to represent total income. Such instances of over‑reporting would have an impact on the level of mean nonfarm or farm self‑employment income and mean total income published for the various geographical subdivisions on Guam.

Extensive review procedures were instituted in the coding operation to reduce some of these reporting errors and to improve the accuracy of the income data. Moreover, many reporting errors were rectified through the coding and the computer editing procedures, with the result that consistency of reported income items with work experience, occupation, and class of worker information was improved. For example, if a person reported he or she was self‑employed on his/her own farm, not incorporated, but had reported wage and salary earnings only, the latter amount was shifted to net farm self‑employment income. Also, if a person reported total income only, the amount was generally assigned to one of the types of income items according to responses to the work experience and class of worker questions. Another type of problem involved the non‑reporting of income data. Where income information was not reported, computer allocation procedures were devised to impute appropriate values (either no income or positive or negative dollar amounts) for the missing entries.

Comparability

Data from earlier censuses. The income data collected in the 1960 and 1970 censuses were basically similar to the 1980 census data, but there were variations in the detail of the questions. In 1970, each person was required to report (a) wage or salary income, (b) net non‑farm self‑employment, (c) net farm self‑employment, (d) social security or railroad retirement, (e) public assistance or welfare payments, and (f) income from all other sources in 1969. Between the 1970 and 1980 censuses, there were also some changes in the processing of the data. In the 1970 census, all missing values were imputed either as "None" or as a dollar amount. If a person reported a dollar amount in (a) wage or salary income, (b) net non‑farm self‑employment income, or (c) net farm self‑employment income, the person was considered as unallocated only if no further dollar amounts were imputed for any additional missing entries. In the 1980 census, all persons with missing values in one or more of the seven types of income items and total income were designated as allocated. If total income was reported and one or more of the types of income filled was not answered, then the entry in total income was generally assigned to one of the income types according to socioeconomic characteristics of the income recipient. This person was designated as unallocated. Moreover, there was a difference in the methods of computer

derivation of aggregate income from individual amounts that were coded in tens, hundreds, and thousands of dollars in the coding operation. In the 1970 census processing, $50 and $5,000, respectively, were added to each amount coded in the hundreds of dollars (under $100,000) and tens of thousands ($100,000 or more). Entries of $990,000 or more were treated as $995,000 and losses of $9,900 or more were treated as minus $9,950. In the 1980 census, income amounts less than $100,000 were coded in the tens of dollars, the amounts of $100,000 or more were coded in thousands of dollars; $5 was added to each amount coded in tens of dollars and $500 was added to each amount coded in thousands of dollars. Entries of $999,000 or more were treated as $999,500 and losses of $9,990 or more were treated as $9,995 in all of the computer derivations of income aggregates. The coding schemes used in both the 1970 and 1980 census were developed to accommodate space limitations on the questionnaires.

In both the 1970 and 1980 censuses, all nonrespondents on income (whether heads of families or other persons) were assigned the reported income of persons with similar characteristics.

In 1960, data on income were obtained from all persons 14 years old and over. Each person was requested to report (a) wage and salary income, (b) net self‑employment income, and (c) income other than earnings received in 1959. An assumption was made in the editing process that no other type of income was received by a person who reported the receipt of either wage or salary income or self‑employment but had failed to report the receipt of other money income.

INCOME CHARACTERISTICS

The median household income for Guam in 1979 was $15,752 (Table 12.1). The median family income was $16,203 and median income of unrelated individuals was $6,713. The median income, again, is the measure of central tendency, dividing the number of income observations in half, and is useful for comparing the 3 regions. Of the three regions, the Northern and Central household income medians were slightly higher than the overall median; these regions included 11 villages above the median. The median household income for the Southern region was $15,357. Dededo had the highest median income of the Northern villages at $16,873. In the Central region, Piti had the highest median income at $19,194 and Agana the lowest at $12,794. The villages of Talofofo and Yona in the Southern region had the highest household medians of $17,329 and $18,858 respectively. Santa Rita was the lowest at $13,614.

Table 12.1. Median Household, Family, and "Unrelateds" Income by

Election District: 1980

Median Median Median Income

Household Family of Unrelated

Election District Income Income Individuals

Guam................. $15,752 $16,203 $6,713

Northern.................. $16,209 $16,557 $7,012

Dededo.................. $16,873 $17,131 $7,212

Tamuning................ $15,091 $15,615 $8,624

Yigo.................... $14,525 $14,644 $6,365

Central................... $16,786 $17,579 $6,560

Agana................... $12,794 $15,000 $7,531

Agana Heights........... $16,728 $17,868 $6,735

Asan.................... $18,321 $18,976 $7,600

Barrigada............... $15,916 $16,391 $6,136

Chalan Pago/Ordot....... $16,517 $16,974 $6,125

Mangilao................ $16,062 $16,734 $7,567

Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite..... $14,874 $15,826 $7,603

Piti.................... $19,194 $20,475 $6,516

Sinajana................ $16,418 $17,938 $5,500

Southern.................. $15,357 $15,738 $6,422

Agat.................... $15,495 $15,907 $6,333

Inarajan................ $15,455 $15,951 $2,250

Merizo.................. $15,659 $16,786 $7,000

Santa Rita.............. $13,614 $13,705 $6,394

Talofofo................ $17,329 $17,608 $8,000

Umatac.................. $15,686 $16,055 $3,000

Yona.................... $18,858 $19,720 $7,792

_____________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A, Tables 69, 74

and 82

Median and mean comparisons show that the median household income for Guam in 1979 ($15,752) was somewhat lower than the mean household income of $21,595 (Table 12.2). The Central region which had a higher mean household income than the Northern and Southern regions, was also higher than the overall mean household income for Guam. Villages having the highest mean household income were Tamuning in the North, with a high of $24,662, Agana in Central ($29,688) and Yona in the Southern region ($23,302). A majority of the election districts were

higher than the overall mean household income of $21,595 (Table 12.2). Umatac had the lowest mean household income at $17,877.

Mean family income ($17,089) and mean income of unrelated individuals ($8,461) did not vary as much over the regions and remained close to the overall mean for Guam (Table 12.2). The village of Yona had a much higher mean family income at $20,071 compared to the Southern region average of $17,171. For income of unrelated individuals, the highest mean was for the village of Barrigada at $10,638. The mean income is the value obtained by adding total income reported and dividing by the number of observations. As always, in comparing the income distributions, the mean value is more affected by the addition of extreme cases than the median, so the median is the standard measure.

Table 12.2. Mean Household, Family, and "Unrelateds" income by

Election District: 1980

Mean Mean Mean Income

Household Family of Unrelated

Election District Income Income Individuals

Guam.................. $21,595 $17,089 $8,461

Northern.................. $21,533 $16,733 $9,050

Dededo.................. $20,664 $18,445 $8,079

Tamuning................ $24,662 $14,697 $10,310

Yigo.................... $19,120 $16,544 $7,814

Central................... $23,214 $17,547 $8,194

Agana................... $29,688 $15,122 $9,215

Agana Heights........... $24,056 $17,170 $9,163

Asan.................... $25,593 $19,239 $10,638

Barrigada............... $22,267 $19,260 $6,489

Chalan Pago/Ordot....... $20,917 $17,977 $7,391

Mangilao................ $22,302 $16,456 $8,618

Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite..... $23,447 $16,198 $9,041

Piti.................... $26,934 $19,342 $8,297

Sinajana................ $22,688 $17,089 $7,625

Southern.................. $19,424 $17,171 $7,574

Agat.................... $19,121 $16,275 $6,729

Inarajan................ $18,585 $16,375 $6,418

Merizo.................. $19,839 $16,515 $8,319

Santa Rita.............. $17,942 $16,594 $7,417

Talofofo................ $20,477 $17,055 $8,484

Umatac.................. $17,877 $16,646 $6,593

Yona.................... $23,302 $20,071 $9,421

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A, Tables 9, 10,

70, 77, 82, and 83

TYPES OF INCOME

Table 12.3 shows comparable data on type of family income by region for the year before the census for the 1970 and 1980 decennial censuses. The dollar amounts are in 1979 dollars, that is, the 1969 amounts have been adjusted for inflation.

Between 1969 and 1979 the amount of money income earned from wages and salaries on Guam increased by a very small amount, from $17,900 to $18,200. Central region experienced the biggest increase in real income, from $17,500 in 1969 (less than the mean for Guam as a whole) to $18,900 in 1979). Southern region also experienced a real gain in income, from $16,800 in 1969 to $17,400 in 1979, an amount that was still about $800 less than the mean for all of Guam. Families in the Northern region, on the other hand, had a decrease of about $1000, from $19,000 to $18,000 during the decade.

Non‑farm income was about the same in 1969 as in 1979, although both Northern and Southern regions saw substantial decreases in mean non‑farm income, while Central region had an even larger increase in this type of income, averaging almost $5,000 for those families receiving this type of income. On the other hand, for all of Guam, farm income decreased precipitously. While the average farm family in 1969 received about $5,200 for farm products, by 1979 this amount had decreased to only 2,000, more than a 50 percent decrease in 1979 dollars. Data by region were not available since there were too few farmers in the election districts (there were 93 families with farm income in 1969).

The amount of social security income increased for Guam, and for each of the regions between 1969 and 1979, while public assistance income decreased for Guam, and Central region. Families in Central region in 1979 receiving public assistance received about $1000 less than those receiving assistance in 1969, although the number and composition of the families changed during the decade. Finally, the amount of "other" income increased for Guam and for the regions between 1969 and 1979.

Table 12.3. Mean Income by Type of Income in 1969: 1970

(Values in 1979 dollars)

Election Wage & Non‑ Social Public All

District Salary farm Farm Security Assist. Other

1969

Guam.................$17,927 $12,225 $5,154 $3,087 $2,639 $4,075

Northern.................$18,960 $13,582 (NA) $3,141 $2,055 $3,918

Central..................$17,509 $10,014 (NA) $3,251 $3,207 $4,432

Southern.................$16,824 $8,953 (NA) $2,862 $2,623 $3,685

1979

Guam.................$18,195 $12,556 $2,049 $3,342 $2,344 $5,758

Northern.................$18,023 $12,526 $2,367 $3,210 $2,247 $6,223

Central..................$18,945 $14,827 $2,444 $3,488 $2,221 $5,692

Southern.................$17,442 $7,743 $1,353 $3,321 $2,612 $5,116

_________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census, PC(1)‑B54, 1970, Table 16, and

Summary Tape File 3, Tables 71 and 72

The wage and salary category had the highest mean incomes reported, showing Guam's strong private sector and government sector during 1979 (Table 12.4). The mean income from wages and salary was $18,195. The highest mean occurred in the Central region at $18,945, with Piti being the village having the highest mean at $22,318. While the Southern region mean for wage and salary was $17,442, the village of Yona was the highest at $20,802.

Non‑farm income was second to wages and salary with a mean income of $12,556. Nonfarm self‑employment income includes net income less expenses derived from a business enterprise or business activity. The majority of business activities fall in the retail, professional and related services and public administration area. Central region had the highest mean non‑farm income at $14,827 compared to the overall average of $12,556. The village of Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite had the highest non‑farm income at $21,845. (The key business categories in this particular region were in the professional and related services, public administration and, particularly, retail trade, all of which produce relatively high incomes). Southern villages had a mean of $7,743. The majority of income earnings fell in the public administration category, professional and related services and retail trade. A total of 14 of the 19

villages fell below the overall non‑farm average.

Table 12.4. Mean Income by Type of Income in 1979: 1980

Election Wage & Non‑ Inter‑ Social Publ. All

District Salary farm Farm est Sec. Asst. Other

Guam..... $18,195 $12,556 $2,049 $2,235 $3,342 $2,344 $5,758

Northern......$18,023 $12,526 $2,367 $1,955 $3,210 $2,247 $6,223

Dededo......$18,605 $9,484 $1,841 $1,590 $3,259 $2,442 $6,292

Tamuning....$17,946 $15,523 $2,798 $2,884 $2,920 $1,975 $6,276

Yigo........$16,945 $10,136 $2,442 $1,398 $3,732 $2,017 $5,897

Central.......$18,945 $14,827 $2,444 $2,893 $3,488 $2,221 $5,692

Agana.......$19,742 $11,726 $498 $7,190 $3,163 $1,137 $6,104

Agana Hts...$18,450 $7,484 $15,589 $3,103 $3,774 $2,033 $6,364

Asan........$21,207 $9,185 $2,192 $2,341 $2,940 $2,534 $6,213

Barrigada...$19,472 $16,811 $711 $2,428 $3,504 $2,202 $4,942

Chalan Pago/

Ordot.......$18,797 $16,902 $517 $2,805 $3,975 $2,672 $5,984

Mangilao....$18,161 $14,875 $1,465 $2,382 $3,506 $2,736 $5,085

Mong‑Toto‑

Maite.......$17,726 $21,845 $985 $3,426 $3,381 $1,830 $6,072

Piti........$22,318 $16,524 $2,905 $1,696 $3,135 $1,650 $6,978

Sinajana....$18,383 $10,801 $822 $3,936 $3,303 $1,831 $5,006

Southern......$17,442 $7,743 $1,353 $1,886 $3,321 $2,612 $5,116

Agat........$17,424 $8,976 $923 $2,581 $3,533 $2,412 $5,523

Inarajan....$16,305 $10,330 $859 $897 $3,197 $2,534 $5,029

Merizo......$16,186 $7,155 $1,400 $1,062 $3,063 $2,555 $5,688

Santa Rita..$16,493 $6,203 $752 $1,228 $3,153 $2,513 $4,739

Talofofo....$17,885 $10,477 $3,694 $2,503 $3,663 $2,882 $6,169

Umatac......$15,544 $5,165 $318 $2,692 $3,880 $2,231 $6,360

Yona........$20,802 $8,069 $1,505 $4,887 $3,126 $2,834 $4,427

_____________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A, Tables 71

and 72

The mean income for farming activities in 1979 was $2,049. Farming practices have shown some erratic patterns in the past which to some extent continue today (See the discussion of Agricultural censuses in Chapter 11). Table 12.4 shows Agana Heights having the highest mean income at $15,589, which is 661 percent higher than the overall mean farm income. Several conclusions can be drawn as to how this income reporting can occur. Since place of residence and actual farm sites are not distinguished by census reports, although the South would be expected to have the majority of farms, since persons are reported where they live rather than where they farm, this assumption may not hold true in the case of farm self‑employment income. Agana had the lowest mean farm income at $498. The village of Talofofo was second with a mean income of $3,694 and Tamuning third at $2,798. It is true, however, that the Southern district seems to be experiencing a resurgence in farming activities which may eventually be reflected in the net money income earnings and farm size. Some changes in farming practices have been seen in farm management, particularly in partnership arrangements which allow farmers and part‑time farmers an opportunity to expand and share common resources and interest.

Mean interest income in 1979 was $2,235, with Agana having the highest village mean ($7,190) and Yona being second ($4,887). No comparative data for 1969 were available; presumably interest income was included in the "other" category, which would indicate that the increase in the combination of interest and "other" income is even more than that shown in Table 12.4. As financial services and private investments improve, interest earnings may continue to show some dramatic shifts in the regions. With the advent of foreign capital, manifested in real estate acquisition, local land owners who sell property at increased values, to an extent, place themselves in a higher level of disposable income. Thus, investment interests in financial services increase and investment brokers accommodate the trends in capital earned through investment, both local and foreign. Net income from rental of property also continues to increase due to the competitiveness of Guam's real estate market. However, real estate is finite and restricted to available land and infrastructure resources; interest earnings become subjected to changes in the economy and may or may not be a major factor in the types of income reported.

The mean social security income reported in 1979 was $3,342. As noted earlier, this figure was about 10 percent more than the 1969 figure; because Guam has a relatively young population, the full impact of social security income has yet to be felt. With an aging population, however, the elderly will become more dependent on pension and survivor benefit earnings. Chamorros currently represent the bulk of potential recipients of Guam's welfare assistance programs. Although the traditional way of accommodating Guam's elderly within the extended family structure remains, planning for future elderly accommodations and services must exist concurrently. Although only 3 percent of the population was 65 years or older in 1980, the proportion is likely to increase as the population ages. Also, the Micronesians whose political status allows them to migrate, will be eligible for Guam's programs. These factors may become concerns as the various sub‑populations move into the labor force, work, and then retire.

While social security earnings had a higher mean of $3,342 for Guam, recipients in 1979 for public assistance earned a mean of $2,344. Public Assistance expenditures totalled $4,919,283 in 1979. Steady support of Guam's senior citizens will continue in the years ahead particularly in services targeted to the elderly with the greatest economic needs. A variety of services will be offered to cater specifically to this group. Health care and welfare recipients will continue to see public assistance programs and services increase.

All other income had a mean of $5,758 in 1980, with the Northern region having a slightly higher mean of $6,223. The village with the highest "all other income" mean was Piti, with $6,978; the lowest mean was in Yona, at $4,427. All other income is a "catch‑all" category, encompassing income from veteran's payments, public or private pensions, alimony, child support, periodic receipts from annuities or trust funds, and other periodic income other than earnings; the recipients of such earnings are not easily stratified by demographic factors such as age and sex. That is, there is no one group that would be more likely to receive such income than another group, as would be the case of social security income or farm income.

INCOME FOR WORKERS PER FAMILY

Although the mean family income in 1979 was almost $18,000, there were large differences, depending on the number of workers per family (Table 12.5). There was a direct correlation between the number of workers per family and mean family income. The mean income for families with no workers was $5,732, and for one worker was $13,940. However, the mean was $21,935 for two worker families, $29,699 for three worker families, and $37,235 for families with 4 or more workers.

Except for families with no workers, families in the Central region earned more money than those in the North or the South. In two worker families the Central region families earned more than $2000 more, more than $3000 more in three worker families, and more than $5000 more in families with 4 or more workers.

Table 12.5. Mean Income of Workers in Families in 1979: 1980

No 1 2 3 4

Election District Workers Worker Workers Workers Workers

Guam............. $5,732 $13,940 $21,935 $29,699 $37,235

Northern.............. $6,490 $13,911 $21,158 $28,873 $35,266

Central............... $5,546 $14,527 $23,530 $31,912 $40,749

Southern.............. $4,812 $13,240 $21,369 $28,244 $35,645

NUMBER OF FAMILIES

Guam............. 1243 7871 9821 1834 1011

Northern.............. 470 3593 4722 878 446

Central............... 484 2405 3034 577 348

Southern.............. 289 1873 2065 379 217

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A, Tables 79

and 80

There were also differences in family income by workers in families for the election districts. Agana had the highest income for 2 worker families, Asan for 3 worker families, and Barrigada for 4 worker families (Table 12.6).

Table 12.6. Mean Income of Workers in Families in 1979: 1980

No 1 2 3 4 or more

Election District Workers Worker Workers Workers Workers

Guam.............. $5,732 $13,940 $21,935 $29,699 $37,235

Northern............... $6,490 $13,911 $21,158 $28,873 $35,266

Dededo............... $7,439 $14,035 $20,972 $28,369 $34,759

Tamuning............. $5,470 $14,422 $22,686 $29,981 $36,081

Yigo................. $5,748 $12,923 $19,836 $28,596 $36,291

Central................ $5,546 $14,527 $23,530 $31,912 $40,749

Agana................ $5,990 $14,478 $31,130 $28,930 $43,734

Agana Heights........ $8,286 $15,824 $22,607 $31,899 $36,029

Asan................. $6,772 $17,231 $23,697 $36,584 $38,771

Barrigada............ $4,534 $13,929 $22,977 $31,649 $49,551

Chalan Pago/Ordot.... $5,963 $14,337 $23,430 $32,112 $37,063

Mangilao............. $5,920 $13,801 $22,499 $29,974 $36,115

Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite.. $3,796 $14,125 $23,220 $36,072 $42,601

Piti................. $4,407 $17,798 $29,741 $27,509 $35,171

Sinajana............. $5,949 $13,255 $23,551 $29,179 $35,825

Southern............... $4,812 $13,240 $21,369 $28,244 $35,645

Agat................. $4,444 $13,893 $22,294 $25,333 $33,773

Inarajan............. $4,305 $12,007 $20,044 $25,878 $31,453

Merizo............... $6,476 $13,381 $22,254 $26,672 $36,090

Santa Rita........... $4,535 $12,688 $19,194 $30,156 $38,101

Talofofo............. $4,654 $14,132 $22,102 $29,509 $29,833

Umatac............... $6,652 $13,279 $19,566 $21,965 $27,894

Yona................. $4,893 $14,272 $26,349 $31,801 $41,269

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A, Tables 79

and 80

PER CAPITA INCOME

Per capita income is the measure of the average income per person in an area or population and is derived by determining the income of all persons from all sources and dividing by the total number of persons in the area or population. The per capita income on Guam in 1979 as determined by the 1980 census was $4793 (Table 12.7). The per capita income in the United States for 1979 was $7,298, so Guam's per capita income was only 66 percent of that for the U.S. In 1969, the per capita income for Guam was $2008 ($3,936 in 1979 dollars). Per capita income in the United States for 1969 was $3,119 ($ 6,176 in 1979 dollars). The change in per capita income between 1969 and 1979 was 22 percent.

Table 12.7. Per Capita Income in 1969 and 1979: 1970 and 1980

(Values in 1979 dollars)

1979 1969

Election ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

District Persons Income Persons Income

Guam................. 105,979 $4,793 84,996 $3,976

Northern................. 47,583 $4,871 32,540 $4,490

Dededo................. 23,644 $4,297 10,780 $4,166

Tamuning............... 13,580 $5,898 10,218 $4,960

Yigo................... 10,359 $4,834 11,542 $4,378

Central.................. 34,526 $5,095 31,266 $3,830

Agana.................. 896 $6,565 2,119 $5,007

Agana Heights.......... 3,284 $5,312 3,156 $4,493

Asan................... 2,034 $5,791 2,629 $4,112

Barrigada.............. 7,756 $5,046 6,356 $3,162

Chalan Pago/Ordot...... 3,120 $4,044 2,931 $2,772

Mangilao............... 6,840 $4,808 3,228 $3,716

Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite.... 5,245 $4,788 6,057 $4,768

Piti................... 2,866 $7,029 1,284 $2,822

Sinajana............... 2,485 $4,382 3,506 $3,257

Southern................. 23,870 $4,200 21,190 $3,404

Agat................... 3,999 $3,737 4,308 $3,180

Inarajan............... 2,059 $3,295 1,897 $2,154

Merizo................. 1,663 $3,796 1,529 $2,433

Santa Rita............. 9,183 $4,672 8,109 $4,453

Talofofo............... 2,006 $3,747 1,935 $2,820

Umatac................. 732 $3,028 813 $2,303

Yona................... 4,228 $4,631 2,599 $2,764

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census, STF3A, 1980, Table 85, and

PC(1)‑B54, 1970, Table 16

Northern region had the highest per capita income in 1969 at $4,500, about $500 more than for Guam as a whole. While Central region's per capita was close to the Guam average, the Southern region average was about $500 less than the Guam average. The $500 discrepancy for Southern region continued in 1979, but Central region at $5,100 surpassed Northern region (at $4,900).

In 1969, Agana and Tamuning had the highest per capita incomes ($5,000). Mongmong‑Toto‑Maite was third highest at $4,800. In 1979, Piti had the highest per capita income at $7,000, almost three times its 1969 value. Since Piti's dependency ratio (the ratio of dependents to workers) was only 30, compared to about 60 for the territory as a whole, this high value is not too surprising. The large number of military personnel probably contributed to the higher value. Agana continued to have the second highest per capita rate ($6,565), and Tamuning was third ($5,900).

PERSONAL INCOME

Tables on income of persons by sex show some differences in income received by males and females. Of the 36,408 males 15 years and over, 31,486 (86 percent) had income in 1979 (Table 12.8). For females, only 19,481 of the 32,599 (60 percent) had income. The median for all individuals in 1979 was $8392: $9,926 for males and $6,133 for females.

The mean income data were similar, but were slightly higher for males. The mean income for all individuals for 1979 was $9,965, $11,835 for males and $6,942 for females. Of the total females with income, 16 percent fell within the $7,000 to $9,999 category compared to 19 percent for the males. The largest category for males (23 percent) was the $10,000 to $14,999 category.

Table 12.8. Income of Persons in 1979 by Sex: 1980

Numbers Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Income Total Males Females Total Males Females

Total...... 69,007 36,408 32,599 ... ... ...

With income. 50,967 31,486 19,481 100.0 100.0 100.0

$1 to $499/loss. 1,691 617 1,074 3.3 2.0 5.5

$500 to $999.... 2,162 801 1,361 4.2 2.5 7.0

$1000 to $1999.. 2,842 1,076 1,766 5.6 3.4 9.1

$2000 to $2999.. 2,320 857 1,463 4.6 2.7 7.5

$3000 to $4999.. 4,460 1,892 2,568 8.8 6.0 13.2

$5000 to $6999.. 7,453 4,574 2,879 14.6 14.5 14.8

$7000 to $9999.. 9,690 6,075 3,615 19.0 19.3 18.6

$10000 to $14999 10,188 7,237 2,951 20.0 23.0 15.1

$15000 to $24999 7,680 6,115 1,565 15.1 19.4 8.0

$25000 or more.. 2,481 2,242 239 4.9 7.1 1.2

Median.......... $8,392 $9,926 $6,133 ... ... ...

Mean............ $9,965 $11,835 $6,942 ... ... ...

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54, Table 46

Table 12.9 shows median and mean income by birthplace. About 64 percent of those earning income in 1979 were not born on Guam, reflecting certain programs such as the construction industry's use of contract workers having H‑2 status. These same workers increased the mean income for non‑Guam born workers to $10,219 compared to the $9,504 for workers with income who were born on Guam. Other influences on these figures include the military as well as firms having expatriates to run corporate subsidiary operations.

Table 12.9. Income of Persons in 1979 by Birthplace: 1980

Birthplace Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Income Total Guam Not‑Guam Total Guam Not‑Guam

Total...... 69,007 26,944 42,063 ... ... ...

With income..... 50,967 18,085 32,882 100.0 100.0 100.0

$1 to $499/loss. 1,691 787 904 3.3 4.4 2.7

$500 to $999.... 2,162 1,161 1,001 4.2 6.4 3.0

$1000 to $1999.. 2,842 1,308 1,534 5.6 7.2 4.7

$2000 to $2999.. 2,320 934 1,386 4.6 5.2 4.2

$3000 to $4999.. 4,460 1,649 2,811 8.8 9.1 8.5

$5000 to $6999.. 7,453 1,685 5,768 14.6 9.3 17.5

$7000 to $9999.. 9,690 3,181 6,509 19.0 17.6 19.8

$10000 to $14999 10,188 3,823 6,365 20.0 21.1 19.4

$15000 to $24999 7,680 2,927 4,753 15.1 16.2 14.5

$25000 or more.. 2,481 630 1,851 4.9 3.5 5.6

Median.......... $8,392 $8,510 (NA) ... ... ...

Mean............ $9,965 $9,504 $10,219 ... ... ...

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D57A, Table 47

About 7 in every 10 persons 25 years and over and receiving income in 1979 were high school graduates (Table 12.10). The percentage for males and females was the same. Except for the very low income levels (which may have been affected by low numbers), there was a direct correlation between income level and percent high school graduate. These trends held for both males and females.

Table 12.10. Income of Persons in 1979 by Percent High School Graduates:1980

Numbers Percent High School Grads

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Income Total Males Females Total Males Females

Total, 25+ yr 46,906 24,540 22,366 65.6 69.2 61.6

With income..... 37,618 23,474 14,144 69.9 70.3 69.2

$1 to $499/loss. 717 153 564 56.8 49.8 58.7

$500 to $999.... 1,038 271 767 41.4 36.9 43.0

$1000 to $1999.. 1,478 1,336 142 47.0 46.9 48.3

$2000 to $2999.. 1,351 445 906 51.4 48.5 52.8

$3000 to $4999.. 2,764 1,025 1,739 53.5 48.1 56.7

$5000 to $6999.. 3,649 1,744 1,905 61.4 58.9 63.7

$7000 to $9999.. 7,350 4,535 2,815 70.9 69.8 72.7

$10000 to $14999 9,352 6,700 2,652 75.4 70.9 86.7

$15000 to $24999 7,479 5,949 1,530 78.9 75.3 92.9

$25000 or more.. 2,440 2,216 224 89.1 90.0 80.4

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54, Table 49

In 1979, Chamorro speakers had the highest median income, followed by those who spoke a Philippine language (Table 12.11). English speakers had the lowest median income, but the highest mean income. This was more than likely caused by over 7 percent of those who spoke English being in the income category of $25,000 or more, compared to only 4 percent of Chamorro speakers and 2 percent of Philippine language speakers.

Table 12.11. Income of Persons in 1979 by Language Spoken at Home: 1980

Language Percent

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Eng‑ Cham‑ Phil. Eng‑ Cham‑ Phil.

Income Total lish orro lang. Total lish orro lang.

Total........ 69,007 20,222 24,610 13,804 ... ... ... ...

With income...... 50,967 15,866 17,001 10,202 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

$1 to $499/loss.. 1,691 567 673 227 3.3 3.6 4.0 2.2

$500 to $999..... 2,162 594 997 323 4.2 3.7 5.9 3.2

$1000 to $1999... 2,842 761 1,173 477 5.6 4.8 6.9 4.7

$2000 to $2999... 2,320 634 852 465 4.6 4.0 5.0 4.6

$3000 to $4999... 4,460 1,202 1,563 958 8.8 7.6 9.2 9.4

$5000 to $6999... 7,453 2,692 1,615 1,432 14.6 17.0 9.5 14.0

$7000 to $9999... 9,690 3,025 3,016 2,182 19.0 19.1 17.7 21.4

$10000 to $14999. 10,188 2,937 3,690 2,227 20.0 18.5 21.7 21.8

$15000 to $24999. 7,680 2,292 2,819 1,652 15.1 14.4 16.6 16.2

$25000 or more... 2,481 1,162 603 259 4.9 7.3 3.5 2.5

Median........... $8,392 $8,369 $8,703 $8,560 ... ... ... ...

Mean............. $9,965 $10,579 $9,676 $9,575 ... ... ... ...

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54, Table 48

POVERTY

Families and individuals are classified as being above or below the poverty level using the poverty definition developed at the Social Security Administration in 1964 and revised in 1969 and 1980. The poverty index was based solely on money income and did not reflect the fact that many low‑income persons received non‑cash benefits such as food stamps, medicaid and public housing. The weighted average poverty level based on money income used for 1980 is shown in Table 12.12.

Table 12.12 Weighted Average Poverty Levels Based on Money Income for

Families and Individuals: 1980

Size of Unit

1 2

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑ ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Total <65 65+ Total <65 65+ 3 4 5 6 7+

Income............ 4190 4290 3949 5363 5537 4983 6565 8414 9966 11269 13995

___________________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census, Statistical Abstract of the United

States: 1984 (104th edition).

In 1979, there were 101,539 persons on Guam for whom poverty status was determined (all persons who were not in group quarters) (Table 12.13). Of this number, 16 percent were below poverty level; 11 percent of whom were in "extreme poverty", below 75 percent of poverty level. Nearly 50 percent of those in the poverty universe were below 200 percent of poverty level.

Table 12.13. Poverty Status in 1979: 1980

Poverty Status Number Percent

Total in Poverty Universe.......... 101,539 100.0

Below 75 Percent of Poverty Level.... 10,667 10.5

Below Poverty Level.................. 16,571 16.3

Below 125 Percent of Poverty Level... 25,338 25.0

Below 150 Percent of Poverty Level... 34,313 33.8

Below 200 Percent of Poverty Level... 50,698 49.9

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A, Table 95.

There were 21,780 families for whom poverty status was determined in 1979; 86 percent were above poverty level, the remainder below (Table 12.14). Of those above poverty level, 76 percent had related children in the family; for those below poverty level, 88 percent of families had related children. Fully 7 percent of families above poverty level were headed by a female householder with no husband present; this figure was over 35 percent for those families below poverty level. Female householders below poverty level had related children in the family in 92 out of 100 homes.

Table 12.14. Percent Families by Type by Poverty Status in 1979

by Children: 1980

Female Householder,

Total No Husband Present

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Income Income Income Income

Above Below Above Below

Families Poverty Poverty Poverty Poverty

Total......... 18770 3010 1352 1063

Percent......... 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

With related children 75.8 87.8 77.0 91.1

Under 6 yrs and 6‑17 yrs 23.7 35.4 19.9 33.6

Under 6 years...... 21.1 24.2 15.2 22.9

6 to 17 years only. 31.0 28.2 41.9 34.6

Without related children... 24.2 12.2 23.0 8.9

_____________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A, Table 86

For families with related children (Table 12.15), and above poverty level, regardless of whether the householder was male or female with no husband present, the majority (41 and 54 percent, respectively), had children who were between 6 to 17 years old. Of all families with income below poverty, the majority (40 percent) had children who were either under 6 years, or 6 to 17 years old; female householders below poverty were nearly equally split between having children under 6 years old or 6 to 17 years (37 percent), or only between 6 to 17 years old (38 percent).

Table 12.15. Families by Type by Poverty Status in 1979 by Children: 1980

Female Householder,

Total No Husband Present

‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Income Income Income Income

Above Below Above Below

Families Poverty Poverty Poverty Poverty

Total............ ... ... ... ...

With related children. 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Under 6 yrs and 6‑17 yrs. 31.2 40.4 25.8 36.9

Under 6 years............ 27.9 27.5 19.8 25.1

6 to 17 years only....... 40.9 32.1 54.4 38.0

Without related children... ... ... ... ...

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A, Table 86

SUMMARY

Median income of unrelated individuals in 1979 was shown to be lower than median income of both households and families; mean income of households was higher than either family or individuals. Wage and salary income was the highest mean income type; farm income was the lowest. The Central region had the highest mean income for all types except for Public Assistance (Southern region was highest) and All Other income (Northern region ranked first). Each increase in the number of workers in families by 1 increased the income by between 6 to 8 thousand dollars.

Per capita income for the island was $4,793 in 1979, compared to $7,298 for the U.S. Per capita income on Guam increased by 22 percent between 1969 and 1979 when adjusted for inflation. While 20 percent of all persons with income and 23 percent of males with income earned between $10,000 and $14,999 in 1979, only 15 percent of females with income did so; their most frequently earned income was between $7,000 and $9,999. Over 7 percent of males and 5 percent of all persons earned $25,000 or more in 1979; only 1 percent of females did so. Guam born persons had a mean income of $9,504, lower than either all persons ($9,965) or the non‑Guam born ($10,219). High school graduates and English speakers were more frequently represented in the higher income brackets than non‑graduates and speakers of other languages.

Fully 16 percent of Guam's population were considered as being below poverty level in 1979, while nearly 50 percent were below 200 percent of poverty status. The majority of these families had children, most of whom were under 6 to 17 years of age.

CHAPTER 13

ESTIMATES AND PROJECTIONS

Population and housing censuses, the crucial source of data on the size, structure and distribution of population and housing, are taken at regular intervals. They involve a great deal of planning, enumeration, compilation, analysis, publication, and require tremendous expenditures of money and human energy. They also require considerable time to make available the details of information collected at a certain point in time. Since the Government of Guam needs the most up‑to‑date information about the size and structure of the population in order to make reasonable plans for development, estimates of the population between censuses are needed. Data from Censuses, surveys, and other statistical data can be used to make estimates in between complete population counts. Projections are also made based on these data to help understand future needs. The government uses estimates and projections for its planning, but is not the only user of population estimates and projections, since social service organizations, university and social research centers, market research centers, and business organizations often also need estimates and projections for their own purposes.

Estimates for current populations and projections for the future help planners by providing them with likely consequences of current trends.

In this chapter we discuss post‑censal estimates and projections for the years following the 1980 census. Estimates and projections are based on factual information as well as assumptions. The accuracy of the estimates, therefore, depends on the accuracy of the available data and assumptions. Furthermore, when projections of a population are made for some future date, they are based on certain assumptions as to the likely course of vital events. The components of population ‑ fertility, mortality, and migration ‑ are likely to follow certain courses. The initial data used as the base to make the projections must be error‑free. Also, we know that if the period of population projection is long, there is a greater likelihood of error in the projections because the assumptions may not hold for long periods.

The accuracy of the population estimates or projections depends on the extent to which the assumptions prove correct and not on the level of sophistication of the method of calculating the projections. Better techniques are being developed as time goes by. (Before undertaking population estimates or projections, it is important that the data be evaluated and adjusted for errors, incompleteness, and other inconsistencies).

ESTIMATES

The Population Estimates Branch staff, Population Division, Bureau of the Census used the 1980 census as base year to make annual estimates after 1980. The balancing equation, with births, deaths and net migration was used to estimate the population.

The estimates of the population of Guam were developed by adding the components of change to the relevant population base. The July 1, 1980, through 1986 estimates were derived using a base composed of the 1980 census count less the estimated population on April 1, 1980, who were born in the United States,

with the April 1, 1980 American population on Guam being estimated based on data furnished by the Guam Department of Commerce and the U.S. Department of Defense. The population base is restricted because of the large and relatively transient Federally affiliate population for which migration is substantial and difficult to estimate. Rather than estimate migration for this population group, administrative records were used to determine the number of Federally affiliated persons on each estimate date. The following were added to the relevant population base:

1. Natural increase. The excess of births over deaths to the population is based on reported birth and death statistics. Births and deaths occurring in the U.S. Naval Hospital are excluded.

2. Change in alien contract workers. This category is primarily composed of contract workers brought in from the Philippines by the Department of Defense. The estimates are based on information provided by the Guam Department of Commerce.

3. Net alien immigration. These are persons accepted for permanent residence in the United States. The estimate is based on Immigration and Naturalization Service (INS) figures on immigrants who reported on their visa applications that they intended to live on Guam. It is assumed that 40 percent of the immigrants each year either leave Guam or inaccurately reported their intention of living on Guam. This assumption is based on an analysis of expected versus actual change in the alien population between 1970 and 1980. Expected change was derived from INS records on immigrants and naturalizations plus the change in alien contract workers (recorded in item 2 above). Actual change was based on the net change in the annual alien registration data collected by INS until 1982.

4. Federally affiliated population. The number of Armed Forces stationed on Guam was obtained from the U.S. Department of Defense. The Guam Department of Commerce provided data on the numbers of Federal civilian employees and dependents of both Federal civilian employees and the military.

5. Guamanian inductions less discharges. The number of persons in the Armed Forces in the United States who lived on Guam before joining the military is available from the Department of Defense. One half the change in pre‑service residence on Guam was used to approximate inductions less discharges on Guam.

No data are available on the movement of the nonfederally affiliated population who are not covered above, but this component of net migration is assumed not to be large.

Limitations of the Estimates. The estimates are based on the special estimating method described above which yields point estimates of the various subcategories of the population. The test of this method for the 1960‑1970 period showed an overestimate of about 10 percent. This level and direction of error still existed in the estimates in 1980, when the actual 1980 census count of 105,979, was 10,272 (9.7 percent) less than the estimate. Likely explanations for this difference include the lack of accurate migration data as well as conflicting information on persons who were born in the 50 States and on the special populations employed in the current methodology.

Table 13.1. Estimates of the Population of Guam: 4/1/80 to 7/1/86

Population From: 4/1/80 7/1/80 7/1/81 7/1/82 7/1/83 7/1/84 7/1/85

Group To: 7/1/80 7/1/81 7/1/82 7/1/83 7/1/84 7/1/85 7/1/86

Base population.... 85,603 86,323 89,682 92,946 95,886 98,928 102,063

Births............. 458 2,137 2,136 2,100 2,205 2,303 2,300

Deaths............. 97 369 360 390 405 375 400

Change alien works. 0 1 114 0 0 0 0

Inductions less

discharges Guam.. 29 270 54 ‑30 ‑46 96 ‑38

Alien immigrants... 550 2,200 2,200 2,100 2,147 1,851 2,065

Alien emigrants.... 220 880 880 840 859 740 826

Federal population:

Cvln emply dpnts. 1,327 1,213 860 785 811 700 603

Armed Forces..... 9,420 8,493 8,070 7,994 7,649 9,556 9,301

AF dependents.... 9,799 10,472 8,653 11,311 12,463 11,550 11,701

End: Resident pop..106,869 109,860 110,529 115,976 119,851 123,869 126,769

Civilian pop.. 97,449 101,367 102,459 107,982 112,202 114,313 117,468

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Unpublished Worksheets

Figure 13.1 Estimates of the Civilian and Resident Populations:

Guam, 1980 to 1986

PROJECTIONS

The U.S. Bureau of the Census's Center for International Research has developed a program called RUP (Rural‑Urban Projection) to do component projections for various country and sub‑country populations. The projections are done by single years of age and for single years of time. The program is calendar‑year oriented, meaning that vital rates and events are those occurring during the calendar year (January 1 to December 31) while the populations always refer to midyear (approximately July 1).

The series of projections presented here run from 1980 through 2030. Age specific fertility information was obtained from the 1980 census. The 1980 own children information discussed in Chapter 5 was used for the entire period, the assumption being that since fertility is already very low for Guam, it is unlikely to go much lower. Although it is likely that continued immigration will bring females with higher‑than‑average fertility, this is offset by the fertility of Chamorro and Filipino women born on Guam decreasing to become more like that of all women on Guam.

The Coale‑Demeny Model Life Table obtained from the children ever born and children surviving in the 1980 census using the Brass procedure provided life expectancies and mortality schedules used for these runs. Since mortality was already very low in 1980 (and life expectancy high), changing mortality was not incorporated into the model.

Table 13.2 shows the age specific projections for females when migration is ignored. The number of females on Guam will approximately double to about 100,000 about 2015.

Table 13.2. Projections Without Migration for Females: 1980 to 2030

Age 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 2005 2010 2015 2020 2025 2030

Tot 50658 56849 63343 70065 77000 84187 91623 99302 107189 115238 123451

0‑ 4 6382 6946 7432 7902 8408 9000 9648 10319 11017 11757 12560

5‑ 9 6174 6370 6931 7417 7887 8392 8982 9629 10299 10993 11734

10‑14 5503 6167 6364 6922 7408 7879 8383 8973 9618 10289 10981

15‑19 5144 5496 6159 6357 6913 7398 7870 8370 8961 9606 10275

20‑24 5089 5133 5486 6148 6346 6899 7383 7854 8354 8944 9588

25‑29 5130 5075 5118 5470 6131 6328 6880 7364 7833 8331 8919

30‑34 4435 5113 5058 5101 5451 6110 6306 6857 7339 7805 8302

35‑39 2860 4414 5088 5032 5077 5426 6080 6277 6823 7304 7769

40‑44 2399 2841 4385 5053 4996 5042 5389 6037 6236 6777 7253

45‑49 2018 2372 2808 4337 4996 4939 4986 5328 5967 6165 6701

50‑54 1745 1981 2330 2757 4259 4906 4849 4896 5231 5859 6054

55‑59 1280 1695 1924 2265 2680 4139 4765 4709 4758 5081 5691

60‑64 919 1223 1619 1835 2162 2557 3953 4546 4491 4542 4849

65‑69 689 848 1129 1493 1693 1996 2359 3651 4192 4141 4190

70‑74 417 598 736 980 1293 1467 1730 2044 3167 3628 3586

75‑79 271 324 465 573 763 1002 1139 1345 1588 2463 2807

80 + 203 253 311 423 537 707 921 1103 1315 1553 2192

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Unpublished Tabulations

Figure 13.2 Projections Without Migration by Sex: 1980 to 2030

Because of the presence of the military on Guam, there will continue to be more males than females into the future (Table 13.3). Again, by 2015, there will be more than 100,000 males on the island.

Table 13.3. Projections Without Migration for Males: 1980 to 2030

Age 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 2005 2010 2015 2020 2025 2030

Tot 55321 61581 68058 74676 81438 88380 95528 102913 110492 118224 126179

0‑ 4 6620 7248 7754 8244 8772 9389 10065 10766 11493 12266 13104

5‑ 9 6458 6599 7226 7729 8218 8746 9360 10034 10733 11456 12227

10‑14 5835 6445 6585 7212 7713 8202 8729 9342 10014 10712 11433

15‑19 5849 5820 6427 6569 7194 7692 8180 8703 9316 9987 10685

20‑24 6019 5825 5796 6399 6541 7165 7659 8147 8668 9278 9945

25‑29 5194 5989 5797 5766 6369 6507 7131 7622 8107 8626 9232

30‑34 4854 5167 5959 5769 5736 6337 6474 7095 7583 8065 8582

35‑39 3386 4823 5135 5920 5733 5700 6296 6433 7051 7536 8014

40‑44 2650 3356 4779 5090 5866 5681 5649 6237 6374 6987 7468

45‑49 2171 2611 3307 4707 5012 5779 5594 5565 6142 6278 6880

50‑54 2238 2114 2542 3222 4588 4882 5632 5449 5422 5982 6119

55‑59 1634 2140 2022 2433 3083 4390 4669 5387 5208 5186 5719

60‑64 1008 1519 1986 1876 2260 2864 4079 4336 5005 4832 4815

65‑69 729 895 1349 1759 1662 2005 2538 3620 3844 4440 4278

70‑74 392 598 736 1109 1440 1363 1649 2084 2978 3154 3650

75‑79 185 287 436 538 809 1041 988 1199 1512 2170 2288

80 + 99 145 222 334 442 637 836 894 1042 1269 1740

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Unpublished Tabulations

A second series of projections was run, but with migration included. Migration data were obtained by intercensal demographic analysis for the 1970 to 1980 period. After accounting for births and deaths to the population, residential estimates of net migration were obtained. Since there had been a large military build‑up during the Vietnam War, and fewer military were living on Guam in 1980, the population had experienced net out‑migration during the period. Altogether, there was a net annual outflow of 412 males and net inflow of 15 females (Table 13.4). The annual rate was ‑8 males per 1000 and less than 1 female per 1000.

Table 13.4. Average Annual Net Migration and Rate by Age: 1970 to 1980

Average Annual Net Migration Annual Migration Rate

Age ‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑

Group Total Males Females Total Males Females

Total ‑397 ‑412 15 ‑7.68 ‑8.05 .37

0‑ 4 ‑104 ‑56 ‑48 ‑16.71 ‑8.82 ‑7.89

5‑ 9 ‑172 ‑83 ‑89 ‑28.16 ‑13.19 ‑14.97

10‑ 14 38 36 2 6.67 6.38 .29

15‑ 19 87 51 36 18.28 10.29 7.99

20‑ 24 ‑7 ‑43 36 1.56 ‑6.87 8.43

25‑ 29 130 54 76 32.35 12.51 19.84

30‑ 34 ‑77 ‑122 45 ‑16.34 ‑29.30 12.96

35‑ 39 ‑48 ‑52 4 ‑14.00 ‑15.59 1.59

40‑ 44 ‑79 ‑69 ‑10 ‑28.86 ‑24.18 ‑4.68

45‑ 49 ‑73 ‑65 ‑8 ‑34.24 ‑29.71 ‑4.53

50‑ 54 ‑36 ‑36 0 ‑20.47 ‑20.47 0.00

55‑ 59 ‑24 ‑21 ‑3 ‑18.82 ‑15.85 ‑2.97

60‑ 64 ‑9 ‑6 ‑3 ‑12.01 ‑8.19 ‑3.82

65‑ 69 ‑3 ‑1 ‑2 ‑6.96 ‑2.61 ‑4.35

70‑ 74 ‑4 0 ‑4 ‑14.26 ‑.97 ‑13.29

75+ ‑16 1 ‑17 ‑44.38 3.93 ‑48.31

Source: Office of Vital Statistics, Department of Public Health and

Social Service, Guam

Since females experience net in‑migration their projected totals are greater than without migration (Table 13.5). By 2015, there would be about 5,000 more females when migration is included in the package than when it is excluded.

Table 13.5. Projections with Migration for Females for Age: 1980 to 2030

Age 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 2005 2010 2015 2020 2025 2030

Tot 50658 57413 64850 72670 80661 88791 97177 105954 115104 124435 133837

0‑ 4 6382 7007 7834 8493 8981 9474 10120 10918 11782 12636 13494

5‑ 9 6174 6020 6610 7388 8007 8469 8933 9543 10296 11112 11914

10‑14 5503 5945 5789 6358 7109 7704 8151 8596 9182 9906 10691

15‑19 5144 5611 6062 5900 6479 7247 7855 8311 8762 9360 10100

20‑24 5089 5350 5834 6303 6137 6736 7534 8166 8642 9111 9732

25‑29 5130 5450 5722 6245 6749 6568 7207 8063 8740 9250 9752

30‑34 4435 5547 5892 6193 6755 7297 7107 7799 8724 9453 10007

35‑39 2860 4584 5727 6078 6399 6972 7528 7340 8053 9008 9756

40‑44 2399 2821 4522 5644 5987 6311 6872 7416 7235 7938 8881

45‑49 2018 2318 2725 4371 5454 5785 6100 6639 7166 6990 7670

50‑54 1745 1958 2247 2642 4237 5291 5611 5916 6441 6951 6778

55‑59 1280 1681 1887 2166 2546 4084 5099 5405 5700 6208 6699

60‑64 919 1203 1577 1769 2034 2389 3835 4784 5070 5350 5821

65‑69 689 829 1089 1427 1599 1842 2159 3471 4324 4580 4841

70‑74 417 574 690 906 1186 1326 1532 1792 2890 3587 3796

75‑79 271 281 389 466 611 796 889 1034 1204 1956 2405

80 + 203 234 254 321 391 500 645 761 893 1039 1500

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Unpublished Tabulations

Since males experience net out‑migration during the projection period, their projected populations are lower than when migration is excluded (Table 13.6). The 1970 to 1980 period may turn out to be unusual, particularly if military are moved from the Philippines to Guam at some point in the future.

Table 13.6. Projections with Migration for Males by Age: 1980 to 2030

Age 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 2005 2010 2015 2020 2025 2030

Tot 55321 59622 64389 69232 74186 79191 84534 90433 96863 103730 110985

0‑ 4 6620 7297 8156 8841 9348 9863 10535 11364 12264 13155 14045

5‑ 9 6458 6246 6886 7698 8342 8822 9308 9943 10723 11573 12415

10‑14 5835 6341 6121 6748 7548 8179 8650 9127 9749 10512 11346

15‑19 5849 6066 6596 6363 7016 7848 8504 8994 9492 10139 10929

20‑24 6019 5870 6094 6622 6395 7052 7888 8545 9034 9535 10190

25‑29 5194 6061 5932 6146 6688 6448 7111 7956 8621 9114 9620

30‑34 4854 4970 5815 5655 5877 6378 6171 6804 7608 8243 8709

35‑39 3386 4303 4409 5154 5022 5213 5663 5474 6035 6749 7314

40‑44 2650 3039 3866 3958 4630 4506 4679 5080 4916 5419 6059

45‑49 2171 2284 2615 3331 3411 3991 3880 4031 4374 4235 4669

50‑54 2238 1868 1962 2247 2859 2928 3424 3334 3460 3757 3635

55‑59 1634 1952 1631 1713 1962 2497 2557 2988 2912 3021 3280

60‑64 1008 1427 1705 1426 1496 1714 2181 2236 2611 2544 2640

65‑69 729 872 1231 1469 1229 1291 1479 1880 1928 2254 2193

70‑74 392 593 712 1002 1192 997 1052 1204 1532 1568 1835

75‑79 185 287 433 521 734 868 725 767 877 1119 1146

80 + 99 146 225 338 437 596 727 706 727 793 960

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Unpublished Tabulations

Table 13.7 shows the projected proportion of the population which will be elderly over the next half‑century. Although less than 3 percent of Guam's population was 65 years and over in 1980, the proportion will double in 25 years to 6 percent in 1005, and will be as much as 10 percent in 2030. Because fertility is low, and life expectancy is high, the proportion of the population being elderly is certain to increase substantially.

Table 13.7. Projections Without Migration for Persons 65 Years and

Over: 1980 to 2030

Sex 1980 1985 1990 1995 2000 2005 2010 2015 2020 2025 2030

Tot 2985 3948 5384 7209 8639 10218 12160 15940 19638 22818 24734

% 2.8 3.3 4.1 5.0 5.5 5.9 6.5 7.9 9.0 9.8 9.9

Males 1405 1925 2743 3740 4353 5046 6011 7797 9376 11033 11959

Fmles 1580 2023 2641 3469 4286 5172 6149 8143 10262 11785 12775

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Unpublished Tabulations

CONCLUSIONS

As was seen in Chapter 1, Guam's population has been extremely volatile both in its count, and in its characteristics. Even populations experiencing massive migration of one sort or another, rarely see the roller coaster type changes in male‑female ratios and age patterns. Since Guam has been especially influenced by

the fluctuations of the military and a great deal of Asian migration in recent years, the projections presented here have to seen as very tentative. It is very likely that the number of military will continue to ebb and flow, that Asian migration will continue, and that new migration will come from the Micronesian areas. Since the amount and characteristics of this migration is not yet known, it is not possible to account for them in the projections.

É[1]„!B„!ÉË

Ë‚À
J
EÀÀ
E
JÀÀ
JJÀÀJLÀÎÎÐBZÐË
ËÀLDÀÃ%‑Ã CHAPTER 14œƒ
Ã%ÃHOUSING CHARACTERISTICSœƒ
Ë
Chapter 14

Housing

ËÀD [À
The 1980 Census of Guam was conducted through direct enumeration.

Census takers canvassed each street or road and listed each occupied and

vacant housing unit. The Census takers were instructed to read the questions

directly from the questionnaire in their personal interviews. One

questionnaire was used per unit. The following definitions and explanations

for each subject were drawn largely from various technical and procedural

materials used in the collection of the data.

LIVING QUARTERSœ

Living quarters were classified in the census as either housing units or

group quarters. Usually, living quarters were in structures intended for

residential use (e.g., a one family home, apartment house, hotel or motel,

boarding house, mobile home or trailer). However, living quarters may also

have been in structures intended for nonresidential use (e.g., rooms in a

warehouse where a night guard lives), as well as in boats, tents, vans, etc.

”Housing units.• A housing unit was a house, an apartment, a group of

rooms, or a single room occupied as a separate living quarters or, if vacant,

intended for occupancy as a separate living quarters. Separate living

quarters were those in which the occupants lived and ate separately from any

other persons in the building and which had direct access from the outside of

the building or through a common hall. The occupants may be a single family,

one person living alone, two or more families living together, or any other

group of related or unrelated persons who shared living arrangements (except

as described in the next section on group quarters). For vacant units, the

criteria of separateness and direct access were applied to the intended

occupants whenever possible. If that information could not be obtained, the

criteria were applied to the previous occupants. Both occupied and vacant

housing units were included in the housing unit inventory except that boats,

tents, vans, caves, and the like were included only if they were occupied as

someone's usual place of residence. Vacant mobile homes were included,

provided they were intended for occupancy on the site where they stood.

”Comparability with 1970 Census housing unit data.• Although the 1980

census data were generally comparable with 1970 census data, certain changes

were introduced for 1980. The part of the 1970 housing unit definition that

required a unit to have either (1) direct access or (2) cooking facilities

for exclusive use was modified. For 1980, the cooking facilities for

exclusive use alternative was dropped, and direct access was required of all

housing units. In 1970, vacant mobile homes were not counted as housing

units. For 1980, they were included in the housing inventory, provided they

were intended for occupancy on the site where they stood.

”Group Quarters.• Group quarters were any living quarters which were

not classified as housing units. There were two types of group quarters: (1)

institutional group quarters and (2) noninstitutional group quarters.

Institutional group quarters were living quarters occupied by one or more

persons under care or custody, such as children in an orphanage, persons in a

nursing home, and prisoners in a penitentiary. Noninstitutional group

quarters included living quarters such as college-owned dormitories,

fraternities, or sorority houses, nurses dormitories, and boarding houses.

In addition, noninstitutional group quarters included any living quarters

(other than those classified as institutional group quarters) which were

occupied by 9 or more persons unrelated to the person listed in column 1 of

the census questionnaire, or by 10 or more unrelated persons. Information on

the housing characteristics of group quarters was not collected in the

census.

Ñÿÿ [ [1]
ÿÑ ”Comparability with 1970 Group Quarters Data.• In 1970, a unit was

classified as group quarters if it was shared by the person in charge and 5

or more persons unrelated to him or her or if there was no person in charge,

by 6 or more unrelated persons. For 1980, that requirement was raised to 9

or more persons unrelated to the person listed in column 1 of the census

questionnaire or 10 or more persons unrelated to each other.

”Rules for Hotels, Rooming Houses, Etc.• Occupied rooms or suites of

rooms in hotels, motels, and similar places were classified as housing units

only when occupied by permanent residents; i.e., persons who considered the

hotel as their usual place of residence or had no usual place of residence

elsewhere. Vacant rooms or suites of rooms were classified as housing rooms

only in those hotels in which 75 percent or more of the accommodations were

occupied by permanent residents. If any of the occupants in a rooming or

boarding house lived and ate separately from everyone else in the building

and had direct access, their quarters were classified as separate housing

units. The remaining quarters were combined. If the combined quarters

contained 8 or fewer roomers unrelated to the householder, they were

classified as one housing unit. If the combined quarters contained 9 or more

roomers unrelated to the householder or person in charge, they were

classified as group quarters.

”Staff living quarters.• The living quarters occupied by staff

personnel within any group quarters were separate housing units if they

satisfied the housing unit criteria of separateness and direct access;

otherwise, they were considered as group quarters.

”Year-round housing units.• Data on housing characteristics in the 1980

census reports were limited to year-round housing units; i.e., all occupied

units plus vacant units available or intended for year-round use. Vacant

units intended for seasonal occupancy were excluded because of the difficulty

of obtaining reliable data on their characteristics. Counts of the total

housing inventory, however, were given for each area presented in the

reports.

OCCUPANCY AND VACANCYœ

”Occupied housing units.• A housing unit was classified as occupied if

it was the usual place of residence of the person or group of persons living

in it at the time of enumeration, or if the occupants were only temporarily

absent; e.g., away on vacation. If all the persons staying in the unit at

the time of the census have their usual place of residence elsewhere, the

unit was classified as vacant. A household included all the persons who

occupied a housing unit as their usual place of residence. By definition the

count of occupied housing units was the same as the count of households in

the 1980 census of population reports.

”Householder.• One person in household was distinguished as the

"householder". In most cases, this was the person, or one of the persons, in

whose name the home was owned or rented and who was listed in column 1 of the

census questionnaire. If there was no such person in the household, any

adult household member could be distinguished as the "householder".

”Persons in occupied housing units.• Persons in occupied housing units

was the total population less those persons living in group quarters. Persons

per occupied housing unit was computed by dividing the population living in

housing units by the number of occupied housing units. Data are also

presented separately for the population in owner-occupied and in

renter-occupied housing units.

”Vacant housing units.• A housing unit was vacant if no one was living

in it at the time of enumeration, unless its occupants were only temporarily

absent. Units temporarily occupied at the time of enumeration entirely by

persons who had a usual residence elsewhere were also classified vacant.

New units not yet occupied were classified as vacant housing units if

construction had reached a point where all external windows and doors were

installed and final usable floors were in place. Vacant units were excluded

if they were open to the elements; i.e., the roof, walls, windows, and/or

doors no longer protect the interior from the elements, or if there was

positive evidence (such as a sign on the house or in the block) that the unit

was to be demolished or was condemned. Also, excluded were quarters being

used entirely for nonresidential purposes, such as a store or an office, or

quarters used for the storage of business supplies or inventory, machinery,

or agricultural products.

”Tenure.• The data on tenure were derived from the answers to question

H26. A housing unit was "owner-occupied" if the owner or co-owner lived in

the unit, even if it was mortgaged or not fully paid for. All other occupied

units were classified "renter-occupied", including units rented for cash rent

and those occupied without payment of cash rent.

”Off-Base Military Housing•

Off-base housing that was rented to members of the Armed Forces had to

pass acceptability criteria. While an installation commander could declare a

unit as substandard at any time, most followed these general guidelines:

À    [
[ÀÀ
[
VÀ‚     a. The unit was within a one-hour commute by a privately-owned
        vehicle during rush hour or not further than 30 miles from
        the installation, or within other limits the installation
        commander set based on military necessity.
     b. It was structurally sound and did not pose a health or safety
        hazard.
     c. It had hot and cold running water, a shower or bath, and at
        least one flushable toilet.
     d. It had a heating system or air conditioning where the climate
        required one.
     e. It had electrical service.
     f. It had the minimum number of bedrooms to assure no more that
        two dependents shared a bedroom.
     g. It met such additional acceptability criteria as may have
        been determined by the installation commander.
     h. The maximum acceptable housing cost was the total of Basic
        Allowance for Quarters plus Variable Housing Allowance or
        other housing allowances plus the Maximum Monthly Housing
        Costs Above Allowances. Military members who had to pay
        more than this total were considered not acceptably housed.
     i. Minimum square footage for housing units: 1 bedroom, 550
        sq. ft., 2 bedrooms: 750 sq. ft., 3 bedrooms: 960 sq. ft.,
        and 4 bedrooms: 1,190 sq. ft.
À
V     VÀÀ      V      [À
UTILIZATIONœ

     ”Persons.• All persons occupying the housing unit were included. These

persons included not only occupants related to the householder but also any

lodger, roomers, boarders, roommates, wards, foster children, and resident

employees who shared the living quarters of the householder. The data on

"persons in units" show the number of housing units occupied by the specified

number of persons.

”Rooms.• The data on rooms were derived from the answers to question

H10. The statistics on "rooms" were in terms of the numbers of housing units

with a specified number of rooms. The intent of this question was to count

the number of whole rooms used for living purposes. For each unit they

included living rooms, dining rooms, kitchen, bedrooms, finished recreation

rooms, enclosed porches suitable for year-round use, and larger rooms.

Excluded were strip or pullman kitchens, bathrooms, open porches, balconies,

halls, utility rooms, or other unfinished space used for storage. A

partially divided room was a separate only if there was a partition from

floor to ceiling.

”Persons per room.• "Persons per room" was a derived measure obtained

by dividing the number of persons in each occupied housing unit by the number

of rooms in the unit. The figures shown refer, therefore, to the number of

occupied housing units having the specified ratio of persons per room.

PLUMBINGœ

”Plumbing Facilities.• Data on plumbing facilities were derived from

questions H13, H14, and H15. The category "Complete plumbing in this

building" consisted of units which had piped water (either hot and cold or

only cold), a flush toilet, and a bathtub or shower located inside the same

building as the living quarters being enumerated. "Lacking complete plumbing

in this building" included those conditions when: (1) all three specified

plumbing facilities were present, but the equipment was located in a

different building from the living quarters even though the equipment may be

on the property; (2) some but not all the facilities were present; or (3)

none of the three specified plumbing facilities was present.

Data were presented separately for water supply, bathtub or shower, and

toilet facilities. For units with hot and cold piped water, data were

provided for the type of energy used to heat the piped water. The categories

for type used were: (1) electricity; (2) gas, including underground piped

gas, bottled, or tank; (3) solar energy, if the primary type of energy was a

system which used the energy available in sunlight to gain and store heat; or

(4) other fuels such as fuel oil, etc.

”Comparability with 1970 Census Plumbing Facilities Data.• In the 1970

census, only units with hot and cold or only cold piped water, a bathtub or

shower, and a flush toilet inside the structure for the exclusive use of the

occupants of the housing unit were classified as having complete plumbing

facilities. In the 1980 census, "exclusive use" was not determined. In

addition for 1980, if the unit did not have a flush toilet, the respondents

were asked to identify their toilet facilities as follows: "outhouse or

privy," or "other or none."

”Source of Water.• Data for source of water were derived from the

answers to question H12. Housing units could receive their water supply from

a number of sources. A common source supplying water to six or more units

was classified as a "public system." The water could be supplied by a

municipal water system, water district, water company, etc., or it could be

obtained from a well which supplied water to six or more housing units. If

the water was supplied from a well on the property or on a neighboring

property serving five or fewer housing units, the units were classified as

having water supplied by an "individual well." Included in this category was

well water that was drawn by hand, wind drawn, or engine drawn; piped or not

piped; stored in tanks or used directly from the well. A source of water

could be "Catchment, tanks, or drums" in which rainwater was collected. A

"public standpipe or street hydrant" was an elevated tank or a vertical

storage cylinder or a street hydrant which was connected to a public system

from which nearby residents drew water. The category "some other source"

included water obtained privately from springs, creeks, rivers, irrigation

canals, lakes, etc.

”Sewage Disposal.• The data on sewage disposal were derived from the

answers to question H16. Housing units were either connected to a public

sewer, to a septic tank or cesspool, or sewage was disposed in some other

way. A public sewer could be operated by a government body or by a private

organization. Small sewage treatment plants, which in some localities were

called neighborhood septic tanks, were also classified as public sewers. A

housing unit was considered to be connected to a septic tank or cesspool when

the unit was provided with an underground pit or tank for sewage disposal.

The category "other means" included housing units which disposed of sewage in

some other way.

ÜÜ
STRUCTUREœ

”Year Structure Built.• The data for year structure built were derived

from question H9. "Year structure built" referred to when the building was

first constructed, not when it was remodeled, added to, or converted. For a

houseboat or mobile home or trailer, the manufacturer's model year was

assumed to be the year built. The figures shown here relate to the number of

units in structures built during specified periods and in existence at the

time of enumeration.

”Units in Structure.• The data on units in structure were derived from

question H6. A structure was a separate building that either had open space

on all sides or was separated from other structures by dividing walls that

extended from ground to roof. In the determination of the number of units in

a structure, all housing units, both occupied and vacant, were counted. The

statistics were presented for the number of housing units in structures of

specified type and size, not for the number of residential buildings.

Structures containing only one housing unit were further classified as

detached or attached. A mobile home or trailer was classified as a

one-family house detached from any other house if one or more rooms had been

added or built on to it. If, however, only a porch or shed had been added,

it was still classified as a mobile home or trailer. Included in the count

of "Mobile homes or trailers, etc.," were units classified as tents, vans,

and any other living quarters occupied as a regular place of residence that

could not be classified into any of the listed categories. Boats were also

included in the count of mobile homes or trailers, etc., unless they were

shown as a separate category.

”Type of Material Used for Outside Walls.• Data for type of materials

used for outside walls were derived from question H7. The enumerator

obtained data on this item based on his or her observation of the outside of

the structure, and on answers provided by the respondent. Units were

classified according to the main type of material used in the construction of

the outside walls of the structure. The categories for types of material

used were: (1) "Poured concrete;" (2) "Concrete blocks," which may or may not

have been covered with plaster cement; (3) " Metal," including zinc, steel,

tin, etc.; (4) "Wood," including woodboard, plywood, etc.; (5) "Thatch,"

including palm or pandanus thatch, palm leaves, straw, etc.; and (6) "Other,"

for all types of construction which could not be described by any of the

other specific categories.

”Type of Material Used for Roof.• Data for type of material used for

roof were derived from the answers to question H8. Data for this item were

also based on the enumerator's observation of the structure and on answers

provided by the respondent. The classification identified the type of

material used for the major portion of the roof covering the structure.

Categories used were similar to those used in the identification of the type

of material used for outside walls.

EQUIPMENTœ

”Electric Power.• The data for electric power were derived from the

answers to question H19. The category "With electric power" included living

quarters equipped with electric lighting even though the current may have

been shut off because the unit was vacant or because the electric bills had

not been paid. If the electricity was supplied by a company operated by a

government body or a private organization the unit was classified as

receiving power from a "public utility". When electricity was supplied by a

generator owned by the household or someone else, the unit was classified as

receiving power from a "private generator". A private generator may have

been operated by means of diesel oil, solar or other sources of energy.

”Cooking Facilities.• The data for cooking facilities were derived from

the answers to question H17. This item presented the number of housing units

with main cooking facilities classified by location (inside or outside the

building) and type of stove. Main cooking facilities were the ones that were

used most often for the preparation of meals. Units with the main cooking

facilities inside or outside the building were further classified as "With

electric stove," "With kerosene stove," "With gas stove," or "Other,"

depending on the type of stove used for cooking. The category "Other"

included hotplate, fireplace, or any other type of cooking facilities

available either inside or outside the building.

”Comparability with 1970 Census Cooking Facilities Data.• The 1970

Census cooking facilities question determined if the cooking facilities were

for the exclusive use of the occupants or if they were shared by another

household. For the 1980 census, the concept of "exclusive use" was dropped.

”Refrigerator.• The data for refrigerator were derived from the answers

to question H18. The category "Mechanical" included housing units having any

type of refrigerator that was operated by electricity, gas, or kerosene. The

category "Ice" referred to housing units having an icebox or ice chest. The

refrigerator could be located elsewhere on the property. The category "No

refrigerator" consisted of units using any other type of cooling mechanism,

such as a window box, a root cellar, or an open spring.

”Air-Conditioning.• The data on air-conditioning were derived from the

answers to question H24. "Air-conditioning" was defined as the cooling of

air by a refrigeration unit. Air-conditioning did not include evaporative

coolers, fans, or blowers which were not connected to a refrigeration unit;

however, it did included heat pumps. A "central system" was an installation

which air-conditioned a number of rooms. In an apartment building, such a

system might cool all apartments in the building, each apartment may have had

its own central system, or there may have been several systems, each

providing central air-conditioning for a group of apartments. A system with

individual room controls was a central system. A "room unit" was an

individual air-conditioner which was installed in a window or an outside wall

and was generally intended to cool one room, although it could sometimes be

used to cool more than one room.

”Vehicles Available.• The data for vehicles available were derived from

the answers to question H25. Data for this item referred to the number of

households with vehicles available at home for the use of the members of the

household. Included in this item were passenger cars, pickup trucks, small

panel trucks of 1-ton capacity or less, as well as station wagons, company

cars, and taxicabs kept at home for use of household members. Cars rented or

leased for 1 month or more; police and government cars kept at home; and

company vans and trucks of 1-ton capacity or less were also included if kept

at home and used for nonbusiness purposes. Dismantled cars, immobile cars

used as a source of power for some piece of machinery, and vans and trucks

kept at home but used only for business purposes were excluded. The

statistics did not reflect the number of vehicles privately owned or the

number of households owning vehicles.

”Telephone in Housing Unit.• The data for telephone were derived from

the answers to question H21. A unit was classified as having a telephone if

there was a telephone in the living quarters. Units where the respondent

used a telephone located inside the building but not in the respondent's

living quarters were classified as having no telephone.

”Radio.• The data for radio were derived from answers to question H22.

Data for this item indicated the number of households having a radio set in

working order or being repaired. Included as radios were all types of sets

whether floor, table, or portable. Also included were individual units and

units combined with televisions, phonographs, clocks, etc. Car radios,

transistor sets and radios which could be operated on both battery or

electric current were also included. If the household reported only having

sending-receiving or crystal radio sets, the household was classified as

having "No radio".

”Television.• The data for television were derived from the answers to

question H23. This item showed the number of households having a television

set in the living quarters, regardless of ownership. Only sets in working

order or being repaired were considered. Included were television sets such

as floor, table, built-in or portable models, or combinations with radio or

record players, whether "black and white" or "color". If the household had

no television set or only had television sets kept elsewhere other than the

living quarters, it was classified as having "No television".

FINANCIALœ

”Value.• The data on value were derived from question H29b. Value was

the respondent's estimate of how much the property (house and lot) or

condominium unit would sell for, if it were for sale. For vacant units,

value was the price asked for the property.

Value and price asked were tabulated separately for certain kinds of

housing units. Value statistics were presented for "specified

owner-occupied" housing units and "specified vacant for sale only" housing

units. These "specified" housing units included only one-family houses

without a commercial establishment or medical office on the property. Mobile

homes, trailers, boats, tents or vans occupied as a usual residence, and

owner-occupied noncondominium units in multi-family buildings were also

excluded from the value tabulations.

”Rent.• Data on rent were collected from all renter-occupied housing

units. Respondents were asked to report rent only for the housing unit

enumerated and to exclude any rent paid for additional units or for business

purposes.

”Contract Rent.• Data on contract rent were derived from question H27.

Contract rent was the monthly rent agreed to, or contracted for, regardless

of any furnishings, utilities, or services that may have been included. For

vacant units, it was the rent asked for the unit at the time of enumeration.

Respondents were asked to report rent only for the housing unit enumerated

and to exclude any rent paid for additional units or for business premises.

Renter units occupied without payment of cash rent were shown separately as

"No cash rent" in the rent tabulations.

”Gross Rent.• Data on gross rent were derived from the answers to

question H20. The computed rent termed "Gross rent" was the contract rent

plus the estimated average monthly cost of utilities and fuels, (electricity,

water, oil, gas, kerosene, wood, etc.) if these were paid for by the renter

(or paid for the renter by someone else) in addition to rent. "Gross rent"

was intended to eliminate differentials which resulted from varying practices

with respect to the inclusion of utilities and fuels as part of the rental

payment. The estimated cost of fuels was reported on a yearly basis but was

converted to monthly figures in the computation process. Renter units

occupied without payment of cash rent were shown separately as "No cash rent"

in the tabulations.

”Mortgage Status and Selected Monthly Owner Costs.• The data for

mortgage status and selected monthly owner costs were derived from the

answers to questions H20, H30, H31, and H33. The data were presented for

"Specified owner-occupied" housing units. These "specified" housing units

included only one-family houses with no commercial establishment or medical

office of the property. The data excluded owner-occupied condominium housing

units, mobile homes, trailers, boats, tents, or vans occupied as a usual

residence, as well as owner-occupied noncondominium units in multi-family

buildings. Separate distributions were shown for units "With a mortgage" and

for units "Not mortgaged." Selected monthly owner costs was the sum of

payments for mortgages, or similar debts on the property; real estate taxes;

fire and hazard insurance on the property; and utilities and fuels

(electricity, water, oil, gas, kerosene, wood, etc.).

OCCUPANCY AND VACANCY CHARACTERISTICSœ

À [ 2À The geographic distribution of houses

on Guam has changed markedly in the last

20 years (Table 14.1). In 1960, the

Central region accounted for 41 percent of

the houses on the island, the South held

26 percent, and the North had 33 percent

of all houses. In 1970, the North was the

only region that recorded a growth in the

proportion of houses located there; both

the Central and Southern regions, while

increasing in the number of houses,

decreased in the percent located there.

The situation remained the same in 1980:

the proportion of homes in the North grew

by 19 percent over 1970 levels, while the

Central and Southern regions decreased by

11 and 15 percent, respectively.
À   2      [À

À      [
[ÀTable 14.1 Housing Distribution By Region and Election District:
                              1960 to 1980
--------------------------------------------------------------------
                        Numbers           Percent     Percent Change
                  --------------------------------------------------
                                                        1970- 1960-
Geographic Area     1980 1970 1960 1980 1970 1960   1980   1970
--------------------------------------------------------------------

         Total.... 28249 16680 12373 100.0 100.0 100.0   69.4   34.8
North............. 13244 6559 4105 46.9 39.3 33.2 101.9   59.8
Dededo.......... 5558 2295 1176 19.7 13.8   9.5 142.2   95.2
Tamuning........ 4788 2208 1390 16.9 13.2 11.2 116.8   58.8
Yigo............ 2898 2056 1539 10.3 12.3 12.4   41.0   33.6

Central........... 9291 6153 5029 32.9 36.9 40.6   51.0   22.4
Agana...........   384   515   331   1.4   3.1   2.7 -25.4   55.6
Agana Hts.......   971   669   689   3.4   4.0   5.6   45.1   -2.9
Asan............   589   581   602   2.1   3.5   4.9    1.4   -3.5
Barrigada....... 1930 1307 1110   6.8   7.8   9.0   47.7   17.7
Chalan Pago-
    Ordot.........   738   526   304   2.6   3.2   2.5   40.3   73.0
Mangilao........ 2067   740   355   7.3   4.4   2.9 179.3 108.5
Mongmong-Toto-
    Maite......... 1490   896   667   5.3   5.4   5.4   66.3   34.3
Piti............   503   239   275   1.8   1.4   2.2 110.5 -13.1
Sinajana........   619   680   696   2.2 4.1   5.6   -9.0   -2.3

South............. 5714 3968 3239 20.2 23.8 26.2   44.0   22.5
Agat............   990   819   587   3.5   4.9   4.7   20.9   39.5
Inarajan........   455   321   269   1.6   1.9   2.2   41.7   19.3
Merizo..........   398   271   234   1.4   1.6   1.9   46.9   15.8
Santa Rita...... 2253 1610 1356   8.0   9.7 11.0   39.9   18.7
Talofofo........   445   350   208   1.6   2.1   1.7   27.1   68.3
Umatac..........   147   130   110    .5    .8    .9   13.1   18.2
Yona............ 1026   467   475   3.6   2.8   3.8 119.7   -1.7
____________________________________________________________________
SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census 1960 Census of Housing Volume 1
         Part 9 Table 1; HC(1)-A54 1970 Table 1; HC80-1-A54 1980
         Table 1.
À
[     [À
     The total number of persons in occupied housing units grew from 55,140

in 1960 to 75,233 in 1970 to 101,000 in 1980 (83 percent increase in 20

years) (Table 14.2). The Northern region grew the most: 81 percent between

1960 and 1970, and 66 percent between 1970 and 1980. The Central region grew

the least: 18 percent between 1960 and 1970, and 14 percent between 1970 and

1980. The change in the distribution of persons in occupied housing units

follows that of the distribution of housing units shown in Table 14.1: growth

in the North, decline on the Central and Southern regions.

À [

[ÀTable 14.2 Distribution of Persons in Occupied Housing Units by
            Region and Election District: 1960 to 1980
----------------------------------------------------------------------
                                  Numbers              Percent
                           -------------------------------------------
Geographic Area               1980   1970   1960   1980   1970   1960
----------------------------------------------------------------------

    Persons in occpd units. 101000 75233 55140 100.0 100.0 100.0
North...................... 45930 27728 15311   45.5   36.9   27.8
Dededo................... 23318   9941   4634   23.1   13.2    8.4
Tamuning................. 13225   9062   5443   13.1   12.0    9.9
Yigo.....................   9387   8725   5234    9.3   11.6    9.5

Central.................... 32154 28253 23926   31.8   37.6   43.4
Agana....................    885   1809   1433     .9    2.4    2.6
Agana Hts................   3148   2889   3003    3.1    3.8    5.4
Asan.....................   1999   2604   2593    2.0    3.5    4.7
Barrigada................   7169   6224   5422    7.1    8.3    9.8
Chalan Pago-Ordot........   3107   2885   1735    3.1    3.8    3.1
Mangilao.................   6622   3095   1532    6.6    4.1    2.8
Mongmong-Toto-Maite......   5215   4005   2929    5.2    5.3    5.3
Piti.....................   1524   1247   1417    1.5    1.7    2.6
Sinajana.................   2485   3495   3862    2.5    4.6    7.0

South...................... 22916 19252 15903   22.7   25.6   28.8
Agat.....................   3978   4200   3097    3.9    5.6    5.6
Inarajan.................   2043   1879   1730    2.0    2.5    3.1
Merizo...................   1651   1518   1389    1.6    2.0    2.5
Santa Rita...............   8311   6386   5277    8.2    8.5    9.6
Talofofo.................   1980   1884   1352    2.0    2.5    2.5
Umatac...................    732    813    744     .7    1.1    1.3
Yona.....................   4221   2572   2314    4.2    3.4    4.2
______________________________________________________________________
SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census General Population Characteristics
         1960 Table 26; HC(1)-A54 1970 Table 1; HC80-1-A54 1980 Table 2.
À

[ [À
There were 4.83 persons per occupied unit in 1970, compared to 4.07

persons in 1980, a 16 percent decrease (Table 14.3). Nearly 88 percent of

the total population were in occupied units in 1970; 12 percent were in group

quarters. Only 5 percent were in group quarters in 1980, a decrease of 49

percent. The proportion of persons in occupied units grew by 34 percent

between 1970 and 1980.

À [

[ÀTable 14.3 Occupancy Characteristics: 1970 and 1980
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                    Number           Percent
                               ---------------   --------------
Occupancy Characteristics       1980     1970     1980     1970   Change
------------------------------------------------------------------------

     Total persons.........   105979    84996    100.0    100.0     24.7
Persons in occupied units..   101000    75233     95.3     88.5     34.2
    Per occupied unit......     4.07     4.83      ...      ...    -15.7
Group quarters.............     4979     9763      4.7     11.5    -49.0
________________________________________________________________________
SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census HC(1)-A54 1970 Table 1; HC80-1-A54
         1980 Table 2; HC80-1-B54 1980 Table 15.
À

[ [À
Off-base housing made up 83 percent of all occupied housing units in

1980 (Table 14.4). Both off- and on-base housing was primarily rented: 54

percent of off-base and 98 percent of on-base units were renter-occupied.

There were 3.51 persons per occupied housing unit in on-base housing and 4.19

per off-base unit. There were more persons per unit in owner-occupied units

for off-base houses (4.87) than for on-base (2.58), but for renter-occupied

houses the reverse was true: on-base rental units had 3.51 persons per unit

to 3.32 persons for off-base homes.

À      [[ÀTable 14.4 Occupancy Characteristics and Tenure By Persons Living
            In On-base and Off-base Housing: 1980
-----------------------------------------------------------------
                                    Number            Percent
                            ------------------ -----------------
                                  Offbse Onbse      Offbse Onbse
Occupancy                    Total Hsing Hsing Total Hsing Hsing
----------------------------------------------------------------

    Occupied housing units. 24834 20478 4356 100.0 100.0 100.0
Owner occupied units....... 11469 11457    12 46.2 55.9    .3
Renter occupied units...... 13365 9021 4344 53.8 44.1 99.7

   Persons in occpd units.. 101000 85713 15287 100.0 100.0 100.0
Owner occupied unit........ 55811 55780    31 55.3 65.1    .2
Renter occupied unit....... 45189 29933 15256 44.7 34.9 99.8

   Persons per occpd unit..   4.07 4.19 3.51 (X)    (X)   (X)
Owner occupied.............   4.87 4.87 2.58 (X)    (X)   (X)
Renter occupied............   3.38 3.32 3.51 (X)    (X)   (X)
__________________________________________________________________
SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census HC-80-1-A54 1980 Tables 2 and 5.
À[      [À
     Slightly over 91 percent of housing on military bases was occupied in

1980, most (over 99 percent) was rented (Table 14.5). The highest rate of

occupancy was at Agana Station at 99 percent; the lowest was at Marbo Annex

(80 percent). Nearly all of the units that were rented were done so for no

cash rent.

À [

[ÀTable 14.5 Housing on Military Base Areas: 1980
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                          No cash rent
                                                      ------------------
Military Base Areas          Total    Occupied Rented   Number Percent
------------------------------------------------------------------------

    On-base housing units..     4771     4356     4344     4236     97.2
Agana Hts. Naval Hospital..       71       68       68       66     97.1
Agana Station..............      487      483      483      465     96.3
Andersen Air Force Base....     1396     1135     1131     1126     99.2
Apra Harbor................     1432     1381     1374     1332     96.5
Finegayan..................      874      857      856      852     99.4
Marbo Annex................      363      292      292      271     92.8
Nimitz Hill Annex..........      148      140      140      124     88.6
________________________________________________________________________
SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census HC80-1-A54 1980 Table 5.
À

[ [À
Of all occupied housing units in 1970, 54 percent were occupied by

renters; nearly 7 percent for no cash rent (Table 14.6). In both 1970 and

1980, 9 percent of occupied housing units were vacant for sale only. Those

units vacant for rent only in 1970 made up 38 percent of all vacant housing

units, in 1980 this rose to 41 percent. Units vacant for other reasons made

up 53 percent of all vacant housing units in 1970, but only 32 percent of

units in 1980.

À      [
[ÀTable 14.6     Tenure: 1970 and 1980
------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                             Number           Percent
                                        ---------------   --------------
Tenure                                   1980     1970     1980     1970
------------------------------------------------------------------------

     Occupied housing units.........    24834    15569    100.0    100.0
Owner occupied housing..............    11469     7165     46.2     46.0
Percent of occupied housing.......     46.2     46.0      ...      ...
Renter occupied housing.............    13365     8404     53.8     54.0
No cash rent......................     5704     1070     23.0      6.9

     Vacant housing units...........     3257     1107    100.0    100.0
Vacant for sale only................      276      100      8.5      9.0
Homeowner vacancy rate............      2.3      1.4      ...      ...
    Vacant for sale 6 or more mos...       65      ...      2.0      ...
With complete plumbing............      253      ...      7.8      ...
Vacant for rent.....................     1347      421     41.4     38.0
Rental vacancy rate...............      9.2      4.8      ...      ...
    Vacant for rent 2 or more mos...      616      ...     18.9      ...
With complete plumbing............     1328      ...     40.8     ...
Held for occasional use.............      198      ...      6.1      ...
Rented or sold awaiting occupant....      404      ...     12.4      ...
Other vacant........................     1032      586     31.7     52.9
Boarded up........................       85      ...      2.6      ...
________________________________________________________________________
SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census HC(1)-A54 1970 Table 1; HC80-1-A54
         1980 Table 2; Summary Tape File 1A 1980 Tables 53 and 54.
À
[     [À

É[1]„!B„!ÉË

Ë‚À

EÀÀ

JÀÀ

JJÀÀJLÀÎÎÐBZÐË

ËÀL [À Of those units that were vacant for sale only in 1980, over 23 percent

had been vacant for 6 or more months. The rate was nearly twice as high for

units that were vacant for rent only for 2 or more months. Those units that

were vacant for sale only had complete plumbing in 92 out of 100 homes; those

vacant for rent only had complete plumbing in nearly 99 of 100 homes.

UTILIZATION CHARACTERISTICSœ

In 1980, 55 percent of all occupied housing units were owner-occupied;

the remaining 45 percent were rental units (Table 14.7). Of all rental

units, 67 percent were single-family homes, 8 percent were duplexes, less

than 1 percent were mobile homes or trailers. Structures with 3 or more

units comprised the final 25 percent of rental units. Owner-occupied homes

were mainly single-family homes (95 percent) or duplexes (3 percent), with

just over 2 percent being structures with 3 or more units.

À [[ÀTable 14.7. Persons in Occupied Housing Units by Owner/Renter

Status by Units in Structure:1980

-------------------------------------------------------------

Units in Percent

Structure 1980 of Total Prcnt

-------------------------------------------------------------

Total persons in housing... 101000 100.0 ...

1, detached......................... 68439 67.8 ...

1, attached......................... 14439 14.3 ...

2................................... 4935 4.9 ...

3 or 4.............................. 3496 3.5 ...

5 or more........................... 8951 8.9 ...

Mobile home or trailer.............. 715 .7 ...

Boat................................ 25 0.0 ...

Persons in rental units.... 45189 44.7 100.0

1, detached......................... 17187 17.0 38.0

1, attached......................... 12928 12.8 28.6

2................................... 3565 3.5 7.9

3 or 4.............................. 2817 2.8 6.2

5 or more........................... 8309 8.2 18.4

Mobile home or trailer.............. 378 .4 .8

Boat................................ 5 0.0 0.0

Persons in owner occ units. 55811 55.3 100.0

1, detached......................... 51252 50.7 91.8

1, attached......................... 1511 1.5 2.7

2................................... 1370 1.4 2.5

3 or 4.............................. 679 .7 1.2

5 or more........................... 642 .6 1.2

Mobile home or trailer.............. 337 .3 .6

Boat................................ 20 0.0 0.0

_____________________________________________________________

SOURCE: Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A Table 104.

À[ [À

In 1970, the category of number of persons in housing units that had the

highest frequency was that of 4 persons per unit, followed by 8 or more

persons per unit (Table 14.8). By 1980, this had changed only somewhat: 4

persons per room still had the highest percentage, but the second most

frequent number of persons per unit was shared with 2 and 3 persons. The

category of 1 person per unit showed the greatest change between 1970 and

1980: it increased by 119 percent. The number of houses with 8 or more

persons per unit had the greatest decline: this category went from 17 percent

of housing units in 1970 to only 7 percent in 1980.

À [[ÀTable 14.8. Persons in Units: 1970 and 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------

Change

Number From Percent

------------------ 1970 to------------------

Persons in Units 1980 1970 1980 1980 1970

---------------------------------------------------------------

Total.... 24834 15569 59.5 100.0 100.0

1 person.......... 2226 1015 119.3 9.0 6.5

2 persons......... 4503 2375 89.6 18.1 15.3

3 persons......... 4499 2264 98.7 18.1 14.5

4 persons......... 4866 2661 82.9 19.6 17.1

5 persons......... 3263 2093 55.9 13.1 13.4

6 persons......... 2156 1493 44.4 8.7 9.6

7 persons......... 1474 1033 42.7 5.9 6.6

8 or more persons. 1847 2635 -29.9 7.4 16.9

Median............ 3.7 4.6 ... ... ...

----------------------------------------------------------------------

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census HC80-1-A54, 1980 Table 3;

HC(1)-A54, 1970, Table 1.

À[ [À

Most housing structures had between 4 and 5 rooms in both 1970 and 1980

(Table 14.9). Fully 31 percent of structures had 5 rooms in 1970; this

decreased to 29 percent in 1980. Over 24 percent of houses had 4 rooms in

1970, rising to 36 percent in 1980, an increase of over 83 percent in the

number of homes with 4 rooms. The categories that showed the greatest

increases between 1970 and 1980 were those of 7 and 8 or more rooms: the

number of units with 7 rooms increased by 120 percent; those with 8 or more

rooms grew by 113 percent. No categories decreased during this time.

À [[ÀTable 14.9. Rooms in Structure: 1970 and 1980

--------------------------------------------------------------

Change

Number From Percent

------------------ 1970 to------------------

Rooms 1980 1970 1980 1980 1970

---------------------------------------------------------------

Total.... 28091 16676 68.5 100.0 100.0

1 room............ 512 386 32.6 1.8 2.3

2 rooms........... 1264 1141 10.8 4.5 6.8

3 rooms........... 3195 2181 46.5 11.4 13.1

4 rooms........... 7437 4055 83.4 26.5 24.3

5 rooms........... 8000 5162 55.0 28.5 31.0

6 rooms........... 5251 2635 99.3 18.7 15.8

7 rooms........... 1662 755 120.1 5.9 4.5

8 or more rooms... 770 361 113.3 2.7 2.2

Median............ 4.7 4.6 2.2 ... ...

---------------------------------------------------------------

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census HC80-1-A54, Table 3;

HC(1)-A54, 1970, Table 2.

À[ [À

Along with the change in the number of persons per unit, the number of

persons per room also changed (Table 14.10). In 1960, the category of

persons per room with the highest percentage was that of "0.75 persons or

less per room". In 1970, this had changed to "0.76 to 1.00 persons per

room". However, there were additional categories of smaller numbers of

persons per room at this time. The total two lower categories equal to "0.75

persons per room or less", compared to that category for 1960, would be

greater than 35 percent and higher than that of 1960, showing an increase in

that category over the intervening 10 years.

By 1980, the highest single category of persons per room was that

of "0.50 or less". Again, when categories are combined to make "0.75 or

less", the percentage rose to 51, an increase of 15 percentage points over 10

years.

Owner-occupied units had more persons per room in all 3 Census years

than did renter-occupied units. In 1960, the greatest frequency for

owner-occupied units was "1.51 or more" persons per room; for renters it was

"0.51 to 0.75" persons per room. In 1970, the category for the owners had

not changed, but renters had shifted to "0.76 to 1.00" persons per room. In

1980, owners had moved to the category of "0.76 to 1.00" but renters had

moved down to "0.5 or less" persons per room.

À [
[ÀTable 14.10. Persons per Room: 1960 to 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------

Number Percent

------------------- -------------------

Persons per Room 1980 1970 1960 1980 1970 1960

---------------------------------------------------------------------

Year-round units......... 24834 15569 10830 100.0 100.0 100.0

0.50 or less............... 6678 2884 (X) 26.9 18.5 ...

0.51 to 0.75............... 5882 2634 3631 23.7 16.9 33.5

0.76 to 1.00............... 6218 4101 2959 25.0 26.3 27.3

1.01 to 1.50............... 3732 2644 1894 15.0 17.0 17.5

1.51 or more............... 2324 3306 2270 9.4 21.2 21.0

Not reported............... ... ... 76 ... ... .7

Owner-occupied units..... 11469 7165 5028 100.0 100.0 100.0

0.50 or less............... 2431 991 (X) 21.2 13.8 ...

0.51 to 0.75............... 2020 786 1089 17.6 11.0 21.7

0.76 to 1.00............... 3060 1402 876 26.7 19.6 17.4

1.01 to 1.50............... 2427 1549 1177 21.2 21.6 23.4

1.51 or more............... 1531 2437 1855 13.3 34.0 36.9

Not reported............... ... ... 31 ... ... .6

Renter-occupied units.... 13365 8404 5802 100.0 100.0 100.0

0.50 or less............... 4247 1893 (X) 31.8 22.5 ...

0.51 to 0.75............... 3862 1848 2542 28.9 22.0 43.8

0.76 to 1.00............... 3158 2699 2083 23.6 32.1 35.9

1.01 to 1.50............... 1305 1095 717 9.8 13.0 12.4

1.51 or more............... 793 869 415 5.9 10.3 7.2

Not reported............... ... ... 45 ... ... .7

_____________________________________________________________________

Note: (X) indicates persons per room is 0.75 or less in 1960.

SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census HC-1-A54 1980 Table 3; HC(1)-A54

1970 Table 2; Census of Housing Part 9 Chapter 54 1960 Table 1.

À
[ [À

PLUMBING CHARACTERISTICSœ

The plumbing and sewage facilities available to island residents are not

only important for those concerned with housing, but to Public Health

officials as well. Lack of clean, uncontaminated water, and improper

disposal of sewage can lead to epidemics of such diseases as Salmonella and

Shigella. Guam has recorded several deaths from these diseases in the past.

Fortunately, the majority of housing units in both 1970 and 1980 had complete

plumbing facilities: 81 percent in 1970, and 96 percent in 1980 (Table

14.11). In 1970, 64 percent of units had complete plumbing with both hot and

cold piped water, as did to 84 percent in 1980, a 31 percent increase in the

proportion of units with complete plumbing. Only 17 percent of year-round

units had incomplete plumbing in 1970; this further decreased to 4 percent in

1980. Renter-occupied units had higher proportions of homes with complete

plumbing than did owner-occupied units in both 1970 and 1980.

À [[ÀTable 14.11. Plumbing Facilities: 1970 and 1980

----------------------------------------------------------------

Number Percent

------------- ------------

Plumbing Facilities 1980 1970 1980 1970

----------------------------------------------------------------

Total year-round units..... 28091 16676 100.0 100.0

Complete plumbing................... 26919 13530 95.8 81.1

With hot and cold piped water..... 23689 10729 84.3 64.3

With only cold piped water........ 3230 2801 11.5 16.8

Lacking complete plumbing........... 1172 3146 4.2 18.9

Owner occupied units....... 11469 7165 100.0 100.0

Complete plumbing................... 10902 4950 95.1 69.1

With hot and cold piped water..... 9083 3216 79.2 44.9

With only cold piped water........ 1819 1734 15.9 24.2

Lacking complete plumbing........... 567 2215 4.9 30.9

Renter occupied units...... 13365 8404 100.0 100.0

Complete plumbing................... 13052 7647 97.7 91.0

With hot and cold piped water..... 12098 6716 90.5 79.9

With only cold piped water........ 954 931 7.1 11.1

Lacking complete plumbing........... 313 757 2.3 9.0

________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census HC(1)-A54 1970 Table 3;

HC80-1-A54 1980 Table 2.

À[ [À

Water supply is also an important health concern (Table 14.12). In

1960, nearly 55 percent of all year-round units had both hot and cold piped

water. This proportion rose to over 65 percent in 1970, and nearly 85

percent in 1980. An additional 36 percent of units had only cold piped water

in 1960, and 9 percent had no piped water at all. This last category had

fallen to only one-half of one percent by 1980. Renter-occupied units had

higher proportions with both hot and cold piped water in all 3 Census years.

It should be remembered that most on-base housing was renter-occupied, and

that such housing was constructed to different standards than local housing:

those living on-base demanded amenities.

ÎÎÐBdÐÀ [

[ÀTable 14.12. Water Supply: 1960 to 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------

Number Percent

-------------------- -------------------

Water Supply 1980 1970 1960 1980 1970 1960

---------------------------------------------------------------------

Year-round units......... 28091 16676 12373 100.0 100.0 100.0

Hot and cold piped water... 23808 10966 6770 84.8 65.8 54.7

Only cold piped water...... 4141 5440 4474 14.7 32.6 36.2

No piped water............. 142 270 1129 .5 1.6 9.1

Owner-occupied units..... 11469 7165 5028 100.0 100.0 100.0

Hot and cold piped water... 9138 3357 1027 79.7 46.9 20.4

Only cold piped water...... 2307 3654 3378 20.1 51.0 67.2

No piped water............. 24 154 623 .2 2.1 9.1

Renter-occupied units.... 13365 8404 5802 100.0 100.0 100.0

Hot and cold piped water... 12140 6802 4771 90.8 80.9 82.2

Only cold piped water...... 1196 1551 856 8.9 18.5 14.8

No piped water............. 29 51 175 .2 .6 3.0

_____________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census, Census of Housing Part 9 Chapter

54 1960 Table 3; HC(1)-A54 1970 Table 3; HC80-1-A54 1980 Table 2.

[ [À Toilet facilities are another important health-related amenity (Table

14.13). Flush toilets were present in over 69 percent of year-round units in

1960, and by 1980, in nearly 98 percent of units. The majority were inside

the building. Outhouses or privies were present in 30 percent of housing

units in 1960, but only 2 percent by 1980. Very few units had no facilities

in 1960, but 3 percent in 1970 had facilities, then decreased to less than 1

percent in 1980. As with water supply, renter-occupied units had higher

rates of toilet facilities than did owner-occupied units in all 3 Censuses.

À [

[À

Table 14.13. Toilet Facilities: 1960 to 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------

Number Percent

-------------------- -------------------

Toilet Facilities 1980 1970 1960 1980 1970 1960

---------------------------------------------------------------------

Year-round units....... 28091 16676 12373 100.0 100.0 100.0

Flush toilet............... 27377 14043 8577 97.5 84.2 69.3

Inside this building..... 27120 13851 8390 96.5 83.1 67.8

Outside this building.... 257 192 187 .9 1.2 1.5

Outhouse or privy.......... 545 2076 3773 1.9 12.4 30.5

Other or none.............. 169 557 23 .6 3.3 .2

Owner-occupied units... 11469 7165 5028 100.0 100.0 100.0

Flush toilet............... 11154 5277 2301 97.3 73.6 45.8

Inside this building..... 11002 5143 2163 95.9 71.8 43.0

Outside this building.... 152 134 138 1.3 1.9 2.7

Outhouse or privy.......... 287 1534 2713 2.5 21.4 54.0

Other or none.............. 28 354 14 .2 4.9 .3

Renter-occupied units.. 13365 8404 5802 100.0 100.0 100.0

Flush toilet............... 13185 7812 5183 98.7 93.0 89.3

Inside this building..... 13110 7759 5141 98.1 92.3 88.6

Outside this building.... 75 53 42 .6 .6 .7

Outhouse or privy.......... 131 468 610 1.0 5.6 10.5

Other or none.............. 49 124 9 .4 1.5 .2

_____________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census, Census of Housing Part 9 Chapter

54 1960 Table 3; HC(1)-A54 1970 Table 3; HC80-1-A54 1980 Table 2.

[ [ÀÜÜ
ÎÎÐBZÐ

Tank-type water heaters were present in nearly 85 percent of all housing

units in 1980, and in nearly 86 percent of occupied units (Table 14.14).

Owner-occupied housing units had the lowest percentage of tank-type water

heaters at 80 percent. Electricity was the fuel most commonly used to

operate these heaters, followed by gas. Very few water heaters were powered

by solar energy, and the majority of these were in owner-occupied units.

À [
[ÀTable 14.14. Energy Used by Tank-type Water Heaters by Region: 1980

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Number Percent

------------------------ -----------------------

Energy Type Total North Cntrl South Total North Cntrl South

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Total Units......... 28091 13175 9247 5669 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Electricity............. 22745 11009 7484 4252 81.0 83.6 80.9 75.0

Gas..................... 1008 775 178 55 3.6 5.9 1.9 1.0

Solar energy............ 50 12 17 21 .2 .1 .2 .4

Other fuels............. 5 3 2 0 0.0 .0 .0 0.0

No tank-type wtr heater. 4283 1376 1566 1341 15.2 10.4 16.9 23.7

Total occpd units... 24834 11595 8070 5169 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Electricity............. 20296 9723 6610 3963 81.7 83.9 81.9 76.7

Gas..................... 927 716 158 53 3.7 6.2 2.0 1.0

Solar energy............ 50 12 17 21 .2 .1 .2 .4

Other fuels ........ 5 3 2 0 0.0 .0 .0 0.0

No tank-type wtr heater. 3556 1141 1283 1132 14.3 9.8 15.9 21.9

Renter-occpd units.. 13365 6651 4089 2625 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Electricity............. 11832 6025 3572 2235 88.5 90.6 87.4 85.1

Gas..................... 294 247 31 16 2.2 3.7 .8 .6

Solar energy............ 11 1 9 1 .1 .0 .2 .0

Other fuels............. 3 2 1 0 0.0 .0 .0 0.0

No tank-type wtr heater. 1225 376 476 373 9.2 5.7 11.6 14.2

Owner-occpd units... 11469 4944 3981 2544 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Electricity............. 8464 3698 3038 1728 73.8 74.8 76.3 67.9

Gas..................... 633 469 127 37 5.5 9.5 3.2 1.5

Solar energy............ 39 11 8 20 .3 .2 .2 .8

Other fuels............. 2 1 1 0 0.0 .0 .0 0.0

No tank-type wtr heater. 2331 765 807 759 20.3 15.5 20.3 29.8

________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A Table 114.

À
[ [À

In 1970, 98 percent of year-round units used the public system as their

source of water, as did over 99 percent in 1980 (Table 14.15). Less than 1

percent in both years got their water from catchments, tanks or drums, or

from public standpipes or hydrants. The proportion of year-round units which

relied on some other source for water fell from over 1 percent in 1970 to

well below 1 percent in 1980.

À [[ÀTable 14.15. Source of Water: 1970 and 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------

Number Percent

--------------- ---------------

Source of Water 1980 1970 1980 1970

---------------------------------------------------------------

Year-round units....... 28091 16676 100.0 100.0

Public system.............. 27972 16292 99.6 97.7

Individual well............ 9 2 0.0 0.0

Catchment, tanks, drums.... 34 75 .1 .4

Public standpipe, hydrant.. 9 60 0.0 .4

Some other source.......... 67 247 .2 1.5

_______________________________________________________________

SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census HC80-1-B54 1980 Table 10;

HC(1)-B54 1970 Table 4.

À[ [À

À [ 2À Disposal of sewage is also a Public

Health concern, as mentioned earlier

(Table 14.16). In 1980, 72 percent of all

year-round units used a public sewer, 25

percent used a septic tank, and the

remaining 3 percent used other means. The

North had the highest proportion of units

using a public sewer (84 percent),

followed by the Central region at 62

percent, and the South, with 58 percent.

In the North, 14 percent of units used a

septic tank, and 2 percent used other

means. In the South, 35 percent of units

used septic tanks and over 7 percent used

other means. The Central region had the

greatest proportion of units using septic

tanks, 35 percent, with the other 3

percent using other means.

À 2 [À

Dededo was the village with the highest proportion of year-round units

using public sewers; Merizo and Umatac the lowest. Barrigada had the

greatest percentage of units using septic tanks; Agana the smallest. For

those villages using other means, Dededo had the highest proportion, Agana

the lowest.

À [

[ÀTable 14.16. Sewage Disposal By Election District: 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

Number Percent

------------------------ -----------------------

Total Septic Other Total Septic Other

Sewage Disposal Units Sewer Tank Means Units Sewer Tank Means

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

Total year-round units. 28091 20116 7124 851 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

North...................... 13175 11061 1913 201 46.9 55.0 26.9 23.6

Dededo................... 5495 4610 754 131 19.6 22.9 10.6 15.4

Tamuning................. 4784 4336 423 25 17.0 21.6 5.9 2.9

Yigo..................... 2896 2115 736 45 10.3 10.5 10.3 5.3

Central.................... 9247 5751 3252 244 32.9 28.6 45.6 28.7

Agana.................... 383 348 31 4 1.4 1.7 .4 .5

Agana Heights............ 971 818 144 9 3.5 4.1 2.0 1.1

Asan..................... 587 393 179 15 2.1 2.0 2.5 1.8

Barrigada................ 1909 861 988 60 6.8 4.3 13.9 7.1

Chalan Pago-Ordot........ 734 111 560 63 2.6 .6 7.9 7.4

Mangilao................. 2054 1190 821 43 7.3 5.9 11.5 5.1

Mongmong-Toto-Maite...... 1490 1092 380 18 5.3 5.4 5.3 2.1

Piti..................... 501 409 69 23 1.8 2.0 1.0 2.7

Sinajana................. 618 529 80 9 2.2 2.6 1.1 1.1

South...................... 5669 3304 1959 406 20.2 16.4 27.5 47.7

Agat..................... 979 727 182 70 3.5 3.6 2.6 8.2

Inarajan................. 452 17 340 95 1.6 .1 4.8 11.2

Merizo................... 395 2 322 71 1.4 0.0 4.5 8.3

Santa Rita............... 2246 1936 264 46 8.0 9.6 3.7 5.4

Talofofo................. 444 12 380 52 1.6 .1 5.3 6.1

Umatac................... 147 8 114 25 .5 0.0 1.6 2.9

Yona..................... 1006 602 357 47 3.6 3.0 5.0 5.5

___________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census HC-1-B54 Table 10.

[ [À

STRUCTURAL CHARACTERISTICSœ

In 1970, 52 percent of all year-round units had been built in the decade

1960 to 1969, and 48 percent prior to 1960 (Table 14.17). In 1980, 70

percent of these units remained, but they accounted for only 41 percent of

all year-round housing units; 59 percent had been built between 1970 and

March 1980. As both periods had seen Guam ravaged by major typhoons (Karen

in 1962 and Pamela in 1976), some of the units constructed after 1960 and

after 1970 were built to replace those lost to storms. The majority,

however, were constructed to accommodate the growing population.

À [
[ÀTable 14.17. Year Structure Built: 1970 and 1980

--------------------------------------------------------------------

Number Percent

--------------- ---------------

Year Structure Built 1980 1970 1980 1970

--------------------------------------------------------------------

All year-round units.... 28091 16676 100.0 100.0

1979 to March 1980......... 1007 ... 3.6 ...

1975 to 1978............... 5036 ... 17.9 ...

1970 to 1974............... 10458 ... 37.2 ...

1960 to 1969............... 7566 8666 26.9 52.0

1950 to 1959............... 3268 5537 11.6 33.2

1940 to 1949............... 672 2251 2.4 13.5

1939 or earlier............ 84 222 .3 1.3

____________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census HC(1)A54 1970 Table 1; HC80-1-B54

1980 Table 9.

À
[ [ÀÀ [ 2À

In the Northern region, the largest

proportion - 41 percent - of all

year-round units had been built between

1970 and 1974, followed by those built

between 1960 to 1969 (Table 14.18). This

was true for all regions except the South:

the second most common period that houses

were built in was from 1950 to 1959.

À 2 [À

À [
[ÀTable 14.18. Year Structure Built By Region: 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------

Number Percent

------------------------ -----------------------

Year Built Total North Cntrl South Total North Cntrl South

---------------------------------------------------------------------

Year-round units. 28091 13175 9247 5669 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

1979 to March 1980 1007 518 330 159 3.6 3.9 3.6 2.8

1975 to 1978...... 5036 1926 1960 1150 17.9 14.6 21.2 20.3

1970 to 1974...... 10458 5401 3191 1866 37.2 41.0 34.5 32.9

1960 to 1969...... 7566 4127 2296 1143 26.9 31.3 24.8 20.2

1950 to 1959...... 3268 894 1198 1176 11.6 6.8 13.0 20.7

1940 to 1949...... 672 298 237 137 2.4 2.3 2.6 2.4

1939 or earlier... 84 11 35 38 .3 .1 .4 .7

_____________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A Table 109.

À
[ [À

Single-family houses, both attached and detached, made up the majority

of housing units in both 1970 and 1980 (74 percent), though there was a

slight decrease in the proportion of single-family units in 1980 (Table

14.19). The percentage of double-family units ("duplexes") decreased sharply

between 1970 and 1980, from 19 percent to 5 percent, a 73 percent decrease.

This decrease was balanced by an increase in the proportion of

multiple-family housing units: in 1970, structures with 3 or more family

units accounted for 7 percent of all year-round units, and by 1980, had grown

to 20 percent. Structures with 10 or more units made up 62 percent of this

subgroup in 1980, but only 29 percent of it in 1970. Buildings with 50 or

more units ("condominiums") were not even in evidence in 1970, but accounted

for 4 percent of year-round housing units in 1980.

É[1]„!B„!ÉË

Ë‚À

EÀÀ

JÀÀ

JJÀÀJLÀÎÎÐBZÐË

ËÀL [ÀÀ [

[ÀTable 14.19. Units in Structure: 1970 and 1980

-------------------------------------------------------------------------

Change

Number From Percent

--------------- 1970 to----------------------

Units in Structure 1980 1970 1980 1980 1970

-------------------------------------------------------------------------

Units in Structure.. 28091 16676 68.5 100.0 100.0

1, detached.............. 16300 11321 44.0 58.0 67.9

1, attached.............. 4493 1072 319.1 16.0 6.4

2........................ 1445 3140 -54.0 5.1 18.8

3 and 4.................. 1205 482 150.0 4.3 2.9

5 or more................ 4377 611 616.4 15.6 3.7

Boat..................... 13 (NA) (NA) .0 0.0

Mobile home or trailer... 258 50 416.0 .9 .3

-------------------------------------------------------------------------

Source: U.S Bureau of the Census HC80-1-B54, Table 9, and HC(1)-B54, 1970

Table 1

[ [À

In 1980, 82 percent of year-round housing units were constructed with

concrete outside walls; 74 percent had concrete roofs (Table 14.20). Of the

remaining units, 9 percent had metal walls, 9 percent had wooden walls, and

less than 1 percent had walls constructed of some other material. Metal

roofing material was to be found on 21 percent of houses, wood on 2 percent

and some other material on the remaining 2 percent of housing units.

À [[ÀTable 14.20. Material of Construction: 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------

Number Percent

------------------- ---------------

Material Used Walls Roof Walls Roof

---------------------------------------------------------------

Year-round housing units. 28091 28091 100.0 100.0

Concrete................... 22982 20874 81.8 74.3

Metal...................... 2420 5988 8.6 21.3

Wood....................... 2470 553 8.8 2.0

Other...................... 219 676 .8 2.4

_______________________________________________________________

SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census HC80-1-B54 1980 Table 9.

À[ [ÀÀ [ 2À

Table 14.21 shows housing by wall

material by region in 1980. The most

common type of wall material was concrete

block, followed by poured concrete. For

the Northern region, poured concrete was

the most common wall material, with

concrete block second. Metal, wood and

other substances made up only 18 percent

overall of materials used for walls, but

over 25 percent of walls in the South were

made of these materials.

À 2 [ÀÀ [
[ÀTable 14.21. Year-Round Housing by Type of Material Used For Outside

Walls: 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------

Numbers Percents

------------------------ -----------------------

Material for walls Total North Cntrl South Total North Cntrl South

---------------------------------------------------------------------

Total Units.. 28091 13175 9247 5669 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Poured Concrete... 9172 6217 1745 1210 32.6 47.2 18.9 21.3

Concrete Block.... 13810 5151 5640 3019 49.2 39.1 61.0 53.2

Metal............. 2420 802 722 896 8.6 6.1 7.8 15.8

Wood.............. 2470 938 1045 487 8.8 7.1 11.3 8.6

Other............. 219 67 95 59 .8 .5 1.0 1.0

_____________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A Table 171.

À
[ [ÀÀ [2[À

By far, the most common roofing

material in all regions was poured

concrete (Table 14.22). Those roofs made

from materials other than concrete were

those most commonly lost in storms. The

only region with a significant proportion

of roofs made of metal was the South:

their percentage was 46 percent higher

than that of the next highest region, the

Central, while the Central region had the

highest percentage of roofs made from

other materials.

À2[ [À

À [
[ÀTable 14.22. Year-Round Housing by Type of Material Used For Roof by

Region: 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------

Number Percent

------------------------ -----------------------

Material for walls Total North Cntrl South Total North Cntrl South

---------------------------------------------------------------------

Total Units.. 28091 13175 9247 5669 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Poured Concrete... 20874 10657 6554 3663 74.3 80.9 70.9 64.6

Metal............. 5988 2202 1994 1792 21.3 16.7 21.6 31.6

Wood.............. 553 212 252 89 2.0 1.6 2.7 1.6

Other............. 676 104 447 125 2.4 .8 4.8 2.2

_____________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A Table 172.

À
[ [À

EQUIPMENT CHARACTERISTICSœ

In 1970, nearly 98 percent of year-round housing units had electric

power, about the same as in 1980 (Table 14.23). In both years, roughly 2

percent of year-round units had no electric power. Of those with power in

1980, over 99 percent relied on the public utility; very few had private

generators.

À [[ÀTable 14.23. Source of Electric Power: 1970 and 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------

Number Percent

--------------- --------------

1980 1970 1980 1970

---------------------------------------------------------------

Year-round units...... 28091 16676 100.0 100.0

With electric power........ 27553 16298 98.1 97.7

No electric power.......... 538 378 1.9 2.3

_______________________________________________________________

SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census HC(1)-A54 1970 Table 4;

HC80-1-B54 1980 Table 10.

À[ [À

In 1970, nearly 98 percent of year-round units had cooking facilities

for their own use, less than 1 percent shared cooking facilities, and almost

2 percent had no cooking facilities (Table 14.24). In 1980, these

proportions had not changed significantly. For occupied housing units,

nearly 99 percent had their own cooking facilities, and just over 1 percent

either shared cooking facilities or had none. By 1980, over 99 percent had

cooking facilities in occupied units. Of these facilities, 98 percent were

inside the building in both 1970 and 1980. Electric stoves were used in over

77 percent of occupied housing units, and gas stoves in just over 19 percent.

Kerosene stoves and other cooking devices were used in the remaining

structures.

À [

[ÀTable 14.24. Cooking Facilities: 1970 and 1980

----------------------------------------------------------------------

Number Percent

-------------- --------------

Cooking Facilities 1980 1970 1980 1970

----------------------------------------------------------------------

Total year-round units......... 28091 16676 100.0 100.0

For own use......................... 27587 16326 98.2 97.9

Inside this unit.................. 27000 16035 96.1 96.2

Outside this unit................. 587 291 2.1 1.7

Also used by another household...... ... 41 ... .2

No cooking facilities............... 504 309 1.8 1.9

Occupied housing units......... 24834 15569 100.0 100.0

For own use......................... 24731 15389 99.6 98.8

Inside this building.............. 24260 15138 97.7 97.2

Outside this building............. 471 251 1.9 1.6

Also used by another household...... ... 39 ... .3

No cooking facilities............... 103 141 .4 .9

______________________________________________________________________

Note: Data on shared cooking facilities not collected in 1980.

SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census HC(1)A54 1970 Table 4; HC-1-B54

1980 Table 10.

[ [À

In 1960, 91 percent of occupied units had mechanical refrigerators and 9

percent had no refrigerator (Table 14.25). In 1970, only 88 percent had

mechanical refrigerators, 9 percent had ice boxes, and nearly 3 percent had

no refrigerators. By 1980, the percentage with mechanical refrigerators had

risen to 98 percent, ice boxes had decreased to just over 1 percent, and

another 1 percent of units had no refrigerators. This trend was followed in

units that were both owner- and renter-occupied, though renter-occupied units

had higher rates of having mechanical refrigerators than did owner-occupied

units in all 3 Census years. The lower proportions having mechanical

refrigerators in 1970 may be explained by a change in definition.

À [[ÀTable 14.25. Refrigerator in Housing Units: 1960 to 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------

Number Percents

Type of ------------------ ----------------

Refrigerator 1980 1970 1960 1980 1970 1960

---------------------------------------------------------------

Occupied units......... 24834 15569 10830 100.0 100.0 100.0

Mechanical................. 24241 13720 9852 97.6 88.1 91.0

Ice........................ 321 1450 ... 1.3 9.3 ...

No refrigerator............ 272 399 978 1.1 2.6 9.0

Owner-occupied units... 11469 7165 5028 100.0 100.0 100.0

Mechanical................. 11188 6013 4384 97.5 83.9 87.2

Ice........................ 155 890 ... 1.4 12.4 ...

No refrigerator............ 126 262 644 1.1 3.7 12.8

Renter-occupied units.. 13365 8404 5802 100.0 100.0 100.0

Mechanical................. 13053 7707 5468 97.7 91.7 94.2

Ice........................ 166 560 ... 1.2 6.7 ...

No refrigerator............ 146 137 334 1.2 1.6 5.8

_______________________________________________________________

Note: 1960 has data on electric refrigerators only.

No refrigerator includes not reported.

SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census HC80-1-B54 1980 Table 10;

HC(1)-A54 1970 Table 4; Census of Housing Part 9

Chapter 54 1960 Table 2.

À[ [ÀÀ [ 2À

Of 28,091 year-round housing units

identified in 1980, over 59 percent had

air conditioners (Table 14.26). Of those

with air conditioners, 33 percent had

central air conditioning, 32 percent had 1

individual room unit, and 35 percent had 2

or more room units. By region, the

Central area had the most air conditioning

units, followed by the North. Most of the

housing units had 2 or more individual

room units in the North and South; those

in the Central area had only 1 room unit.

À 2 [À

À [[ÀTable 14.26. Air Conditioning in Unit By Region: 1980

------------------------------------------------------------------

Number Percent

------------------- -----------------

Type Total North Cntrl South North Cntrl South

------------------------------------------------------------------

Year-round units. 28091 13175 9247 5669 100.0 100.0 100.0

None................ 11301 4852 3833 2616 40.2 36.8 41.5

Central............. 5567 3455 1308 804 19.8 26.2 14.1

1 ind. room unit.. 5366 2529 1961 876 19.1 19.2 21.2

2 or more room units 5857 2339 2145 1373 20.9 17.8 23.2

__________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A Table 120.

À[2[À

In 1980, only 7 percent of all

occupied housing units had no vehicle

available to them (Table 14.27). In 45

percent of the occupied households there

was 1 vehicle for use; 2 vehicles were

available in 35 percent of households, and

13 percent of homes had 3 or more vehicles

that could be used. Those residing in the

Southern region had the greatest

proportion of single-vehicle available

households; the North had the highest

percentage of households with 2 vehicles

for use, and the Central region had the

greatest proportion of homes with 3 or

more vehicles available for use.

À2[ [À

Table 14.27. Vehicles Available in Household: 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

Number Percent

------------------------ -----------------------

Vehicles Available Total North Cntrl South Total North Cntrl South

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

Occupied units.... 24834 11595 8070 5169 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

None....................... 1622 643 605 374 6.5 5.5 7.5 7.2

1 vehicle.................. 11193 5296 3523 2374 45.1 45.7 43.7 45.9

2 vehicles................. 8716 4165 2764 1787 35.1 35.9 34.3 34.6

3 or more vehicles......... 3303 1491 1178 634 13.3 12.8 14.6 12.3

___________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census HC80-1-B54 1980 Table 10.

À [ [ÀÀ [ 2À

In 1980, 31 percent of all occupied

housing units had no telephone, 4 percent

had no radio, and 7 percent had no

television (Table 14.28). The Central

region had the highest proportions of

having none of these characteristics.

From a Civil Defense standpoint, if

information had to be disseminated to the

public, it would reach the largest

audience if it were relayed over the

radio.

À 2 [À

À [

[ÀTable 14.28. Selected Characteristics by Region: 1980

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

Number Percent

----------------------- -----------------------

Selected Characteristics Total North Cntrl South Total North Cntrl South

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

Occupied units........... 24834 11595 8070 5169 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

No telephone............... 7793 3638 2735 1420 31.4 31.4 33.9 27.5

No radio................... 1023 443 358 222 4.1 3.8 4.4 4.3

No television.............. 1751 736 624 391 7.1 6.3 7.7 7.6

___________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census HC80-1-B54 1980 Table 10.

[ [À

There were telephones in nearly 69 percent of occupied units in 1980

(though they did not necessarily work) (Table 14.29). When reviewed by the

age of householder, the age group with the highest percentage of phones were

those who were 60 to 64 years of age, followed by those under 60. The

elderly (65 and older) had the lowest rate of units with telephones.

À [

[À

Table 14.29. Telephone in Unit by Age of Householder: 1980

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Age of Householder

---------------------------------------------

Under 60 to 65 years

Telephone in unit Total 60 years 64 years and over

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Total occupied units.... 24834 22419 1035 1380

With telephone............. 17041 15415 742 884

Percent with phone...... 68.6 68.8 71.7 64.1

________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A 1980 Table 119.

[ [À

Owner-occupied units had higher percentages of telephones in their units

than did all renter-occupied units (78 percent to 60 percent), but those

units that were occupied with no cash rent had the highest rates of all: 84

percent of those units had phones (Table 14.30). This was true for each

region as well as the island as a whole.

À [

[ÀTable 14.30. Telephone in Unit by Tenure and Region: 1980

----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Number Percent

------------------------- --------------------

Telephone in Unit Total North Cntrl South Total North Cntrl South

----------------------------------------------------------------------------

Total occupied units... 24834 11595 8070 5169 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

With telephone........... 17041 7957 5335 3749 68.6 68.6 66.1 72.5

Renter occupied units.. 13365 6651 4089 2625 ... ... ... ...

With cash rent........ 7661 4121 2625 915 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

With telephone........... 3268 1679 1162 427 42.7 40.7 44.3 46.7

No cash rent.......... 5704 2530 1464 1710 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

With telephone........... 4784 2228 1083 1473 83.9 88.1 74.0 86.1

Owner occupied units... 11469 4944 3981 2544 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

With telephone........... 8989 4050 3090 1849 78.4 81.9 77.6 72.7

____________________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A 1980 Table 118.

[ [À

FINANCIAL CHARACTERISTICSœ

The value of a housing unit was the respondent's estimate of how much

the property (house and lot) or condominium unit would sell for, if it were

for sale. For vacant units, value was the price asked for the property.

À [ 2À

Table 14.31 shows the value of

housing units by region. The responses

reflect subjective rather than totally

objective views of the value of the unit.

Those residing in the South and Central

regions stated most frequently that their

homes were worth between $60,000 and

$79,999, and those in the North felt their

units were worth between $50,000 and

$59,999. The median amounts of value

listed ranged from $55,200 in the North to

$66,400 in the Central area.

À 2 [À

À [[ÀTable 14.31. Value of Housing Units by Region: 1980

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Number Percent

----------------------- ------------------------

Value Total North Cntrl South Total North Cntrl South

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Specified owner-

occupied units.... 10489 4412 3706 2371 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Less than $10,000. 395 166 89 140 3.8 3.8 2.4 5.9

$10,000-14,999.... 298 102 82 114 2.8 2.3 2.2 4.8

$15,000-19,999.... 274 88 90 96 2.6 2.0 2.4 4.0

$20,000-24,999.... 332 88 119 125 3.2 2.0 3.2 5.3

$25,000-29,999.... 393 197 104 92 3.7 4.5 2.8 3.9

$30,000-34,999.... 440 202 139 99 4.2 4.6 3.8 4.2

$35,000-39,999.... 397 183 117 97 3.8 4.1 3.2 4.1

$40,000-49,999.... 1272 665 363 244 12.1 15.1 9.8 10.3

$50,000-59,999.... 1770 994 443 333 16.9 22.5 12.0 14.0

$60,000-79,999.... 2660 1091 959 610 25.4 24.7 25.9 25.7

$80,000-99,999.... 1022 292 551 179 9.7 6.6 14.9 7.5

$100,000-149,999.. 745 178 428 139 7.1 4.0 11.5 5.9

$150,000-199,999.. 240 67 119 54 2.3 1.5 3.2 2.3

$200,000 or more.. 251 99 103 49 2.4 2.2 2.8 2.1

Median............$57600 55200 66400 55400 ... ... ... ...

___________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census HC80-1-A54 1980 Table 4.

À[ [ÀÀ [2[À

The price asked for vacant for-sale

housing units was similar for all 3

regions on island in 1980: between $60,000

to $79,999 per unit, though those in the

North were slightly lower at $50,000 to

$59,999 (Table 14.32). The median prices

asked per region were slightly lower than

the median values per region, except for

the North, where the median price was

nearly 5 percent higher than the median

value given for housing units. The other

regions had median prices asked that

ranged from 9 percent lower in the Central

area to 27 percent lower in the South.

À2[ [ÀÜÜ
ÎÎÐBbÐÀ [[ÀTable 14.32. Price Asked for Vacant For Sale Units by Region: 1980

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Number Percent

----------------------- ------------------------

Price Asked Total North Cntrl South Total North Cntrl South

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Specified vacant

for sale units.... 193 96 71 26 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Less than $10,000. 18 9 6 3 9.3 9.4 8.5 11.5

$10,000-14,999.... 6 4 1 1 3.1 4.2 1.4 3.8

$15,000-19,999.... 5 3 2 0 2.6 3.1 2.8 0.0

$20,000-24,999.... 6 2 2 2 3.1 2.1 2.8 7.7

$25,000-29,999.... 9 4 3 2 4.7 4.2 4.2 7.7

$30,000-34,999.... 11 9 1 1 5.7 9.4 1.4 3.8

$35,000-39,999.... 11 6 2 3 5.7 6.2 2.8 11.5

$40,000-49,999.... 18 5 10 3 9.3 5.2 14.1 11.5

$50,000-59,999.... 30 22 8 0 15.5 22.9 11.3 0.0

$60,000-79,999.... 41 16 18 7 21.2 16.7 25.4 26.9

$80,000-99,999.... 17 6 10 1 8.8 6.2 14.1 3.8

$100,000-149,999.. 16 9 5 2 8.3 9.4 7.0 7.7

$150,000-199,999.. 2 0 1 1 1.0 0.0 1.4 3.8

$200,000 or more.. 3 1 2 0 1.6 1.0 2.8 0.0

Median............$55400 52700 61100 43500 ... ... ... ...

___________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census HC80-1-A54 1980 Table 4.

À[ [ÀÀ [ 2À

The most frequent amounts asked for

rent for vacant for-rent units was between

$200 to $249 (Table 14.33). By region,

this varied only slightly, with the

Central and Southern areas asking $170 to

$199 and $150 to $169, respectively. The

median rent asked for the island's vacant

units was $205. The Northern area median

was 18 percent higher at $242; the South

20 percent lower at $163. The North,

however, had nearly 4 times as many vacant

for-rent units than did the South.

À 2 [À

À [[ÀTable 14.33. Rent Asked for Vacant for Rent Housing Units: 1980

------------------------------------------------------------------

Number Percent

----------------------- -----------------------

Rent Asked Total North Cntrl South Total North Cntrl South

------------------------------------------------------------------

Vacant for rent

Housing units..... 1347 676 525 146 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Less than $50..... 34 16 10 8 2.5 2.4 1.9 5.5

$50 to $59........ 23 12 7 4 1.7 1.8 1.3 2.7

$60 to $79........ 27 12 9 6 2.0 1.8 1.7 4.1

$80 to $99........ 35 27 6 2 2.6 4.0 1.1 1.4

$100 to $119...... 74 33 24 17 5.5 4.9 4.6 11.6

$120 to $149...... 81 25 41 15 6.0 3.7 7.8 10.3

$150 to $169...... 174 65 77 32 12.9 9.6 14.7 21.9

$170 to $199...... 193 80 108 5 14.3 11.8 20.6 3.4

$200 to $249...... 226 121 82 23 16.8 17.9 15.6 15.8

$250 to $299...... 171 92 61 18 12.7 13.6 11.6 12.3

$300 to $349...... 140 78 51 11 10.4 11.5 9.7 7.5

$350 to $399...... 74 48 22 4 5.5 7.1 4.2 2.7

$400 to $499...... 44 28 15 1 3.3 4.1 2.9 .7

$500 or more...... 51 39 12 0 3.8 5.8 2.3 0.0

Median............ $205 242 195 163 ... ... ... ...

__________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census HC80-1-A54 1980 Table 4.

À[ [ÀÜÜ
ÎÎÐBZÐÀ [2[À

Contract rent was the monthly rent

agreed to, or contracted for, regardless

of any furnishings, utilities or services

that may have been included (Table 14.34).

The majority of all renter-occupied units

paid no cash rent in 1980. Of those that

did, the most frequent category of

contract rent paid was that of $200 to

$249, followed by $250 to $299. This was

slightly higher in the Central region,

where the most common amount paid was

between $250 to $299, and lower in the

South, where amounts between $150 to $169

were most often paid.

À2[ [À

À [[ÀTable 14.34. Contract Rent of Housing Units by Region: 1980

------------------------------------------------------------------

Number Percent

----------------------- -----------------------

Contract Rent Total North Cntrl South Total North Cntrl South

------------------------------------------------------------------

Renter-occupied

Housing units..... 13365 6651 4089 2625 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

No cash rent...... 5704 2530 1464 1710 42.7 38.0 35.8 65.1

Less than $50..... 386 154 156 76 2.9 2.3 3.8 2.9

$50 to $59........ 185 73 71 41 1.4 1.1 1.7 1.6

$60 to $79........ 305 79 152 74 2.3 1.2 3.7 2.8

$80 to $99........ 167 71 61 35 1.2 1.1 1.5 1.3

$100 to $119...... 501 224 183 94 3.7 3.4 4.5 3.6

$120 to $149...... 548 272 175 101 4.1 4.1 4.3 3.8

$150 to $169...... 927 442 351 134 6.9 6.6 8.6 5.1

$170 to $199...... 919 516 350 53 6.9 7.8 8.6 2.0

$200 to $249...... 1132 687 344 101 8.5 10.3 8.4 3.8

$250 to $299...... 1102 646 366 90 8.2 9.7 9.0 3.4

$300 to $349...... 676 430 181 65 5.1 6.5 4.4 2.5

$350 to $399...... 351 214 107 30 2.6 3.2 2.6 1.1

$400 to $499...... 280 187 77 16 2.1 2.8 1.9 .6

$500 or more...... 182 126 51 5 1.4 1.9 1.2 .2

Median............ $193 217 184 155 ... ... ... ...

__________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census HC80-1-A54 1980 Table 4.

À[ [ÀÀ [ 2À

Gross rent differs from contract rent

by the addition of the estimated average

monthly cost of utilities and fuels, if

these were paid for by the renter in

addition to rent (Table 14.35). Overall,

for those who paid cash rent, the gross

amount was most commonly in the range of

$200 to $249 per month, followed by $400

or more. Only the Southern region varied

from this pattern: their most frequent

rent category was that of $400 or more,

followed by $200 to $249. The South also

had the highest frequency of those paying

no cash rent, at 69 percent of

renter-occupied units.

À 2 [À

À [[ÀTable 14.35. Gross Rent by Region: 1980

------------------------------------------------------------------

Number Percent

----------------------- -----------------------

Gross Rent Total North Cntrl South Total North Cntrl South

------------------------------------------------------------------

Renter-occupied

Housing Units..... 13365 6651 4089 2625 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Less than $50..... 58 41 13 4 .4 .6 .3 .2

$50 to $59........ 52 33 12 7 .4 .5 .3 .3

$60 to $79........ 108 54 39 15 .8 .8 1.0 .6

$80 to $99........ 179 58 77 44 1.3 .9 1.9 1.7

$100 to $124...... 345 134 145 66 2.6 2.0 3.5 2.5

$125 to $149...... 406 172 161 73 3.0 2.6 3.9 2.8

$150 to $174...... 525 206 205 114 3.9 3.1 5.0 4.3

$175 to $199...... 651 305 244 102 4.9 4.6 6.0 3.9

$200 to $249...... 1489 801 539 149 11.1 12.0 13.2 5.7

$250 to $299...... 1039 614 316 109 7.8 9.2 7.7 4.2

$300 to $399...... 1670 1037 515 118 12.5 15.6 12.6 4.5

$400 or more...... 1139 666 359 114 8.5 10.0 8.8 4.3

No cash rent...... 5704 2530 1464 1710 42.7 38.0 35.8 65.1

Median...........$ 251 271 239 211 ... ... ... ...

______________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A, 1980 Table 124

À[ [ÀÀ [2[À

Units with mortgages made up the

majority of all owner-occupied housing

units, ranging from a high of 82 percent

in the Central region, to a low of 65

percent in the South (Table 14.36). For

mortgaged units, the monthly owner costs

were usually $400 or more a month, for all

regions. The second most common amount of

monthly owner costs varied by region, with

the South area having the highest ($350 to

$399) and the North the lowest ($250 to

$299).

À2[ [À

For unmortgaged units, monthly costs were much lower: from $50 to $74

per month in the South to $75 to $99 in both the North and Central regions.

The inclusion of a mortgage significantly affected the amount of costs paid

by owners every month.

À [
[ÀTable 14.36. Mortgage Status and Selected Monthly Owner Costs: 1980

------------------------------------------------------------------

Number Percent

Monthly ----------------------- -----------------------

Owner Costs Total North Cntrl South Total North Cntrl South

------------------------------------------------------------------

Owner-occupied

Housing units..... 10489 4412 3706 2371 ... ... ... ...

With mortgage... 6802 3104 2368 1330 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Less than $50..... 8 3 4 1 .1 .1 .2 .1

$50 to $59........ 2 0 1 1 .0 0.0 .0 .1

$60 to $79........ 16 7 5 4 .2 .2 .2 .3

$80 to $99........ 33 11 15 7 .5 .4 .6 .5

$100 to $149...... 102 39 43 20 1.5 1.3 1.8 1.5

$150 to $199...... 329 182 96 51 4.8 5.9 4.1 3.8

$200 to $249...... 755 484 172 99 11.1 15.6 7.3 7.4

$250 to $299...... 928 530 255 143 13.6 17.1 10.8 10.8

$300 to $349...... 953 497 261 195 14.0 16.0 11.0 14.7

$350 to $399...... 846 384 267 195 12.4 12.4 11.3 14.7

$400 or more...... 2830 967 1249 614 41.6 31.2 52.7 46.2

Median............ $366 329 415 387

No mortgage..... 3687 1308 1338 1041 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0

Less than $30..... 157 48 47 62 4.3 3.7 3.5 6.0

$30 to $49........ 419 131 132 156 11.4 10.0 9.9 15.0

$50 to $74........ 797 278 274 245 21.6 21.3 20.5 23.5

$75 to $99........ 799 306 276 217 21.7 23.4 20.6 20.8

$100 to $124...... 587 232 212 143 15.9 17.7 15.8 13.7

$125 to $149...... 357 130 140 87 9.7 9.9 10.5 8.4

$150 or more...... 571 183 257 131 15.5 14.0 19.2 12.6

Median............ $90 91 94 82

__________________________________________________________________

Source: U.S. Bureau of the Census Summary Tape File 3A, Table 133.

À
[ [À

SUMMARYœ

The final table (Table 14.37) in this chapter shows a summary of

pertinent housing data from 1960 to 1980. The most appropriate term to use

for the changes occurring on Guam for the last 20 years is "growth", growth

in all aspects of housing, from the numbers of units available to the

addition of amenities in those units. A significant shift to the Northern

region is also apparent. With more units being located there, the impact on

the infrastructure of the region is becoming more obvious, as is the need for

its improvement. Water, power, sewage and telephone services are probably

being strained to their limits, and may continue to be as more housing

complexes and hotels are added.

ÜÜ
À [
[ÀÎÎÐBdÐTable 14.37. Summary of Housing Characteristics: 1960 to 1980

----------------------------------------------------------------------

Characteristic 1980 1970 1960

----------------------------------------------------------------------

Total persons......................... 105979 84996 67044

Total housing units................... 28249 16680 12373

Year-round housing units:

Total........................ 28091 16676 12373

Median rooms.......................... 4.7 4.6 4.7

Percent:

One unit in structure................. 74.0 74.3 91.6

5 or more units in structure.......... 15.6 3.7 ...

Lacking complete plumbing in building. 4.2 18.9 ...

Structure 10 yrs old or less.......... 58.7 52.0 ...

Structure built before 1940........... .3 1.3 ...

Source of water public system......... 99.6 97.7 ...

Electric power........................ 98.1 97.7 ...

Occupied..................... 24834 15569 10830

Owner occupied........................ 11469 7165 5028

Median rooms.......................... 4.8 4.6 4.6

Median number of persons.............. 3.7 ... 4.5

Percent:

1.01 or more persons per room......... 24.4 38.2 38.4

1 unit in structure................... 75.9 74.8 92.5

Specified owner:

Median value ($).................... 57600 13500 4200

Renter occupied:

Median contract rent ($)............ 193 114 76

Median gross rent ($)............... 251 ... 80

Vacancy rate:

Homeowner........................... 2.3 1.4 ...

Rental.............................. 9.2 4.8 ...

______________________________________________________________________

SOURCE: U.S. Bureau of the Census HC80-1-A54 1980 Table 1; Summary

Tape File 3A 1980 Table 120; HC80-1-B54 1980 Tables 9, 10, 11;

HC(1)-A54 1970 Tables 1,2,3,4,5; Census of Housing 1960 Tables

1,4 and 5.

À
[ [À

The cost of obtaining and maintaining housing has also risen in the last

2 decades. As demand grows and space considerations limit the number of

units available, the costs will probably continue to rise. Though the

vacancy rates shown in Table 14.38 are lower for 1980 than 1970, it should be

remembered that 1980 was a period of lower military activity than 1970, so

there were fewer military families looking for off-base housing. This

situation is expected to change by 1990, since there were several military

ships homeported on Guam in the meantime.

As data from the 1990 Census of Housing become available, it will be

crucial to compare them to data from previous censuses to chart the changes

in growth and distribution of housing on Guam, and assess the further impact

on Guam's utilities.

CHAPTER 15

SUMMARY

The past 14 chapters have presented a wealth of data about Guam's past; noticeable trends have been pointed out as being likely to continue to 1990. A short summary of each chapter is presented below.

In the first chapter, a short history of the island was presented and it was shown that a shift in geographic distribution of the population from the central to the northern region had occurred in the last 20 years.

Chapter 2, on age and sex distribution of the island's population, demonstrated that the population distribution of the island was not "normal" due to the military presence and immigration here. While Guam's median age was less than that of the U.S., the population was still aging. The median age of the civilian females was higher than civilian males; the opposite was true of the military, and the military median age was higher than the civilian. The proportion of Guam's population that was under 5 years old was about 12 percent; the proportion of elderly was 3 percent.

From 1930 onwards, the sex ratio of the population was greater than 103; it was 109 in 1980. The sex ratio was higher for the military than for the civilian population. The dependency ratio was 60.5 in 1980. The military dominated in the populations less than 5 years old and from 20 to 34, while civilians were predominant at all other ages. Special retabulations done to separate the military and civilian populations did not have accurate methods to disaggregate dependent spouses whose husbands were not in the home, thus causing surpluses of civilian females in some age groups.

The average household size decreased from over 5 persons per household to just over 4 in 1980, as shown in Chapter 3. The distribution of households mirrored that of persons, moving from the central region to the north. The south had the largest household sizes for many census periods, but the percentage of households located there has steadily decreased since 1960. The proportion of households headed by females with children under 18 years of age has increased, married couple families with children less than 18 has decreased. The elderly were living in family households in 1980, either their own or a relative's; few were institutionalized. With the opening of the first senior day care center in 1987, this figure may increase by 1990.

Both marriage and divorce were increasing (Chapter 4); between 1970 and 1980 the number of divorced males grew by 16 percent and divorced females by 78 percent. The number of separated males increased by 41 percent and separated females by 50 percent. The age at first marriage of females increased by 8 percent, showing that females were delaying first marriage, most likely in favor of finishing school and starting careers. By geographic region, the north had the highest proportion of married persons and the central area the greatest number of those single, widowed, or divorced. Between 1980 and 1984, the Japanese contributed the greatest number of grooms, with Chamorros second; this was true for brides for most of that period as well. White males were most likely to get divorced during this period; for females, Chamorros were most likely. For both sexes, Chinese were least likely to get a divorce. Chamorros and those of "Other" races were most likely to be in same‑race marriages, while Whites were most likely to be in mixed‑race marriages. For all five years, Caucasians had higher rates of both same‑race and mixed‑race divorces than any other ethnic group.

Both census and vital statistics data show fertility is still high, compared to U.S. figures, though it is slowly decreasing, as was shown in Chapter 5. The average number of children has dropped from 3.20 in 1980 to 3.15 in 1985. The mean age of mother has also decreased slightly, from 26.54 to 26.50 in the same five year period. The mean length of a generation, the time it takes for a woman to have a female child to replace herself, fell from 27.22 years in 1980 to 26.44 years in 1985.

Mortality is also decreasing, mostly due to improved living conditions. Guam is experiencing an epidemiological transition, where the cause of death has changed from communicable diseases to chronic diseases. Recent death data presented in Chapter 6 show that both males and females die most often between 45 to 64 years of age, but more males do so than females. Chamorros, Filipinos, and Caucasians die proportionate to their presence in the overall population. Life table analysis has shown that life expectancy at birth has increased for both sexes between 1971 and 1981, but more so for males than for females, though females have a higher life expectancy than males.

In Chapter 7, Migration, it was shown that 51 percent of Guam's population in 1980 were migrants. When the military was removed, only 40 percent were migrants. The United States and Asia were the greatest source of migrants to Guam. The most common period of migration to Guam was between 1979 and early 1980, except for those from the Philippines, who came most often between 1960 and 1969. The majority of migrants were between 20 and 64 years of age, in the labor force here, and were born in the same location as their fathers had been. Many persons who had lived away from Guam between 1970 and 1980 came back in the period 1979 and 1980. Most had been away for over 6 years; the main reason for their absence was either service in the Armed Forces, or attendance at school.

Chamorros continue to be the largest single ethnic group on Guam (Chapter 8), though at the lowest levels recorded in any census this century. Whites were second in numbers here, Filipinos third. The proportions of Whites and Filipinos here is increasing, that of Chamorros is decreasing. Fully 78 percent of full Chamorros were born on Guam, as were 61 percent of part Chamorros. The median age of Chamorros was the lowest of any ethnic group, Filipino's was highest. Almost 60 percent of part Chamorros were less than 15 years of age, as were 40 percent of full Chamorros. Whites were primarily 20 to 44 years of age, Filipinos were 35 to 44 years. About 2 out of 3 of those 16 years and older were in the labor force; only 55 percent of Chamorros were in labor force, compared to 70 percent of Filipinos and 80 percent of Whites. This was partly due to small numbers of Chamorros in the Armed Forces or working only part time. Those in the "Other" ethnic groups represented only 9 percent of the population but 63 percent were in the labor force. By industry, Chamorros were mostly in the fields of public administration or professional and related services, Filipinos in retail trade or construction and mining, Whites were in professional and related services or retail trade, and others were in retail trade or construction and mining. Of the population 5 years and older, 36 percent spoke only English at home; except for Whites, no other group spoke only English in more than half of the homes. Less than 1 percent spoke no English at all. Older persons were less likely than younger ones to speak English at home.

Chapter 9 dealt with education on Guam. Both school enrollment and educational attainment have increased since 1940, but the magnitude of the increase was somewhat moderated by the presence of the military. The proportion of the population who had completed 4 years of high school increased from 5 percent in 1940 to 66 percent in 1980, while the proportion completing 4 years of college increased from 10 percent in 1940 to 11 percent in 1980. The proportion of college graduates increased for males (8 percent in 1940 to 11 percent in 1980) and decreased for females (12 percent in 1940 to 11 percent in 1980). It was found that a child's home language affected his high school completion rate: those speaking only English at home had non‑completion rates of 6 percent, while those who spoke another language at home had rates that ranged from 13 percent overall to 18 percent for those who spoke their other home language more frequently than they did English.

In the Labor Force chapter it was shown that female participation in the labor force doubled between 1970 and 1980, especially for those with children under 18 years of age. Persons born in the United States (80.6 percent) and Asia (69.4 percent) were more likely to be in the labor force than those born in other places, most notably the former Trust Territory (53.1 percent) or the Commonwealth of the Northern Marianas (49.7 percent). Persons from the latter locations most often come to Guam to pursue a higher education. Those with higher levels of educational attainment were more likely to be employed.

Private sector employment has increased since 1970, with retail and wholesale trade showing growth (Chapter 11). Though construction did not show growth, it is expected to do so after 1980. Agriculture, small industry and selected services are expected to show large amounts of growth by 1990. Female employment has steadily increased in the past 30 years. In almost all industry categories, female employment figures show steady increases. Although it is certain that the female labor force is holding a larger portion of the Guam job market, the data still suggest that the quality of jobs held by the increasing numbers of women workers is lower than jobs held by their male counterparts.

The percentage of labor force employed in public administration has steadily decreased over the years, a trend which is expected to continue. This trend is probably beneficial to Guam's economy as the additional percentage of the labor force will be available to fuel the private sector further, which tends to be more efficient compared to the government sector. Retail and wholesale trade has shown a steady increase, and is expected to keep the same trend in the years to come. Guam's transition to a commercial economy (compared to a public sector economy) is evident in the figures obtained in the 1980 census. Also, Guam's economy is steadily increasing its service‑oriented industry base, and should tailor its education/training programs to prepare the labor force for such jobs. Furthermore, females on Guam have good potential to share an equal footing in Guam's employment opportunities. Although women still tend to lag in vertical mobility in certain industries, with careful encouragement this too should change in the future.

The median household income for Guam in 1979 was $15,752, the median family income was $16,203, and the median income of unrelated individuals was $6,713 (Chapter 12). The Central region of Guam had the highest median incomes; the Southern region had the lowest. The mean incomes of households, families, and unrelated individuals were $21,595, $17,089, and $8,461, respectively. The Central and Southern regions again had the highest and lowest incomes, respectively. Wage and salary incomes were the highest of any type of income earned, and farm income was the lowest. Per capita income increased by 96 percent between 1969 and 1979, from $3,936 in 1969 (in 1979 dollars) to $4,793 in 1979. The per capita income of the U.S. for 1979 was $7,298, a figure that is 52 percent higher than Guam's per capita income for the same period.

The number of housing units increased by 69 percent between 1970 and 1980, with most of this increase occurring in the North. The median number of rooms per housing unit has remained at about 5 for the past 3 censuses. There was an increase in the number of buildings that had 5 or more units, from 4 percent in 1970 to 16 percent in 1980, showing the increase in building of apartments. Most (over 99 percent) housing units were connected to the public water, sewer, and power systems; nearly 70 percent of homes had telephones in 1980. The median value of owner occupied homes increased from $4,200 in 1960 to $58,000 in 1980. The median contract rent asked for renter occupied units increased from $76 in 1960 to $196 in 1980.

While the Monograph encompasses a large body of material, there are two populations on Guam whose characteristics are not explored in detail, the elderly and the military. The following sections present profiles of these two important subgroups.

PROFILE OF THE ELDERLY

The elderly are of special concern to demographers these days because of an anticipated large increase in their numbers and proportion of the population. Those who were elderly (65 years and over) in 1980 were born in 1915 or earlier, a time when sanitation and other public health measures had not yet taken a strong grip on Guam. They made up only 2.8 percent of Guam's total population in the 1980 census. By 1990, when the ranks of the elderly will include all those born in 1925 or earlier, their proportion of the population should not rise any higher than 3.3 percent, a very small gain. It will not be until the year 2010 that the impact of the post‑World War II 'baby boom' and the changes in nutrition and sanitation promoted by the Naval (and later, civilian) government will be felt. It is important, however, that baseline data on the elderly be collected and analyzed so that any changes in their characteristics can be documented.

Because the elderly on Guam are primarily civilian (96 percent), this analysis will be restricted to civilians. The civilian population in our retabulations of the 1980 census data is that population which was left after active‑duty military and their dependents were subtracted from the total population. If an active‑duty military person was resident in a household, that household was deemed 'military' and subtracted. If an elderly person was a dependent of an active‑duty person, he or she was considered military and removed. The data presented here were derived from Tables 19‑22, 24, 29, 35, 36 and 47 of the U.S. Bureau of the Census PC80‑1‑C/D54, Detailed Social and Economic Characteristics, Special Retabulations.

There were 2870 civilian elderly in 1980, 3.4 percent of the civilian population of 83,226. Slightly over 47 percent were males; the 53 percent if females in the elderly population supports the fact that women generally outlive men. Nearly all (99.5 percent) were in households rather than any form of group quarters. Those that were in some form of group quarters were more than likely confined in the Intermediate Care Facility of the Guam Memorial Hospital. Over half (53 percent) were either the head or spouse of the head of a family household, 36 percent were in a family household with relatives, and only 11 percent were with nonrelatives or in nonfamily households.

Nearly 56 percent were married, 35 percent were widowed, and 6 percent had never married. Most (66 percent) of the never married were females. Nearly 55 percent of those divorced or separated were males while 77 percent of those widowed were females.

There were 8795 children ever born during the reproductive lifetime of civilian elderly women, and 7325 children still alive. Per woman, this was 5.8 children ever born and 4.8 children still alive in 1980. Some of these children would have died young, occasioning replacement childbearing, but, due to the age of these women, some would have been lost at later ages in life.

Just over 57 percent of elderly were born on Guam, 29 percent in the Philippines, 5 percent in the United States, 2 percent in the Northern Marianas, and the remainder elsewhere. Fully 58 percent were Chamorro, 28 percent Filipino, 5 percent White, the remaining 8 percent were of other races. Barely 8 percent spoke English at home; the majority spoke Chamorro (58 percent), with another 30 percent speaking a Philippine language at home.

The elderly were not very mobile; 63 percent lived in the same house as they had in 1975. An additional 13 percent lived in the same district, and 9 percent in another district on Guam. Of those who had not lived on Guam in 1975, 65 percent had lived in the Philippines and 21 percent in the United States. Of the 42 percent of civilians who were not born on Guam, 17 percent migrated here before 1950, the period with the highest proportion of migrants. The second most popular period was from 1975 to 1978, when 16 percent of migrants came to Guam, then 1971 to 1974, with 14 percent. Fully 58 percent of these migrants were permanent residency aliens in 1980, and 38 were naturalized citizens, with the remainder having some other form of citizenship status.

More due to cultural demands than for any other reason, the elderly were not as formally educated as younger age groups. Most (64 percent) had some elementary school (up to 8th grade), and some (14 percent) had some high school, but only 18 percent were high school graduates, and only 6 percent had a 4 year college degree or more.

By age 65, most persons had retired, leaving only 491 persons (17 percent) in the labor force, over 98 percent of whom were employed in 1980. Of those employed, 43 percent were private wage and salary workers, 29 percent worked for the local government, and 19 percent for the federal government. Only 8 percent were self‑employed, and just over 1 percent were either unpaid family workers or subsistence workers. Fully 30 percent of employed persons were in service occupations, 23 percent in managerial and professional specialties, 15 percent in precision production, craft and repair, and 13 percent were operators, fabricators, and laborers (mostly in transportation and material moving occupations). The industry with the highest representation among the elderly was that of public administration (21 percent), followed by retail trade (17 percent) and professional and related services (also 17 percent). Over 97 percent of those in the labor force in 1979 worked in 1979; 73 percent worked for 50 to 52 weeks; 76 percent worked 35 or more hours per week.

Nearly 75 percent of the elderly had an income in 1980, but about 1 of 3 earned less than $2,000. The median income was about $3,976 and the mean income about $5,124. With poverty level incomes for the elderly set between $4,000 and $5,000, 58 percent of elderly with income would be at poverty level.

In short, the elderly on Guam in 1980 were most likely to be civilian, female, living in a household as a head of household or spouse of head, married, born on Guam, and Chamorro. If female, she would have had 5.8 children, with 4.8 of them still alive. They would be most likely to speak Chamorro at home, not have much

formal education, and be living in the same house as they had in 1975. Most would not be in the labor force, but they would have an income; for most, however, that income would at about poverty level.

With this baseline data from 1980, comparisons can be made with data from the 1990 census to document changes in the characteristics of the elderly on Guam.

PROFILE OF THE MILITARY

The effect of the Armed Forces on the sex distribution is more clearly seen in Table 2.2 (and Figure 2.2). In most populations there are more females than males. In fact, on Guam in 1920, there were 295 more females than males, but that was the last census to show a surplus of females. The sex distributions in 1930 and 1940 were not abnormal, but by 1950, a change had occurred. In 1950 there were 21,500 more males than females, and the number of males per 100 females doubled, from 103 in 1940 to 213 in 1950. In 1950, there were more than 2 males for every female on the island. With decreased military activity, the number of males per 100 females decreased, until it reached 109 in 1980, more than any State except Alaska, which had a surplus of males for other reasons.

The dependency ratios in 1960, 1970, and 1980, continued to show the influence of the military. After a jump in 1960 because of proportionally fewer military on island however, the ratio continued to decrease to 60 in 1980. The decrease in the 20 years before the 1980 census was due both to increased immigration of aliens in the middle years (as well as Statesiders), and decreased fertility (which was far greater than the slight increase in the elderly population.)

MILITARY AND CIVILIAN POPULATIONS

The special tabulations developed to disaggregate military households from civilian households provide data on age and sex of the civilian population, as well as those households having one or more military personnel. Altogether, there were 83,226 persons (78 percent) living in households or group quarters which only contained civilians. Of these, 42,056 (51 percent) were males, compared to 58 percent of males in military households or in group quarters.

The median ages for the two populations did not differ significantly, but the distributions were significantly different. Although the median for the whole population was 22.3 years, the median for civilians was slightly less (21.8 years) and the median for the military was slightly more (22.9 years). The median for males in the military was about a year older than for females, while the median for female civilians was about a half year older than for males.

Once the military are disaggregated from the rest of the population, the civilian age and sex distribution looks much more "normal." Military personnel seem to have higher fertility than civilians, since 14 percent were children less than 5 years old in military households, compared to 12 percent in civilian households. On the other hand, because they are in the military, more than 1 in 5 of all military persons were 20 to 24 compared to only 8 percent of the civilians. The percentage of military in the 25 to 29 year age group was double that of the civilians. More than 12 percent of the military population was 30 to 34 years old compared to only 8 percent of the civilian population.

On the other hand, slightly larger proportions of persons in the 35 to 44 year old age group were civilian than were military, partially because of large numbers of immigrants in this age group (see Chapters 7 and 8). And, larger proportions of persons older than 44 were civilian than were military. More than 9 percent of the civilian population was 45 to 54 years old, compared to less than 2 percent of the military population. And only about 1 percent of the military population was 55 years old and over, compared to more than 9 percent of the civilian population.

The percentage distribution by age group also shows differences. Altogether females were 48 percent of the population on Guam in 1980; while females constituted almost half of the civilian population, they were only about 4 in every 10 of the military population (and, of course, many of these were dependents). Among the civilians, in the young ages females were just slightly less than half of all persons and were more than half of those 20 to 35 years old. For ages 35 to 64, however, there were more males than females in the civilian population, probably because of the selective nature of international migration, with larger numbers of male immigrants than females. For the elderly, females were a larger percentage of the civilian population than were males.

The military population showed a very different pattern. More than 2 of every 3 military persons between 15 and 24 were male, and while the proportions decreased to below 6 in 10 for persons 25 to 34, more than 6 in 10 of those 35 to 44 were males. More than half of the persons 55 years and over in military households, however, were female.

There is some evidence from these data that there is a discrepancy between the military and civilian data for persons 20 to 29 which show surpluses of civilian females. MIlitary males who were on ships and left their families behind would have been recorded as civilian since no one in the household would have been identified as military; hence, this surplus of civilian females in the age group was probably at least partially explained by the fact that many of these women were married to military personnel who were on ships and left their families behind. (Their children are less easily disaggregated from all children.)

There were 10,125 persons (10 percent of Guam's total population) in the military in 1980, including 9,224 males and 901 females. The median age of these persons was 26.5 years, more than 4 years more than for the rest of the military households (because so many of the other people in military households were children), and about 4 years more than for the general population of Guam.

Military persons constituted more than half of all persons 20 to 24 years old (67 percent of the males and 33 percent of the females in that age group), and were 49 percent of the persons 25 to 29 years old. Of course, for planning and other policy purposes, military households and families, and not only the military persons must be considered, so the analysis in this report for military‑civilian differences focuses on the whole household, and not merely the military person himself or herself.

There were more than 10 military males for every military female in 1980. None of the age groups showed anything like equal proportions. Although there were fewer than 10 males per female for persons less than 29 and more than 55, there were 25 males for every female 30 to 34, and 51 for those 35 to 44 years old.

For all military households, there were more females than males under 15 and over 55, but males predominated in the middle years, with more than 2 males per female 15 to 24 years old. The problem with the ratio of males to females 20 to 29 in the civilian population is also seen here, since there is a great surplus of females here, once again indicating that some of these females should more properly have been placed in the military category.

The civilian community of Guam in 1980 had a larger average household size than did the military, 4.25 persons and 3.41 persons, respectively.

REFERENCES

Bowe, Frank

1983 Disabled Adults in America. (Washington: President's Committee on Employment of the Handicapped).

Bureau of the Census

1992 1990 Census of Population and Housing: Social, Economic, and Housing Characteristics, 1990 CPH-6-G. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Department of Commerce.

Department of Vocational Rehabilitation

1992 Annual Report Fiscal Year 1990. Agana, GU: Government of Guam.

Fitzgerald, M. H. and J. Armstrong

1992 Culture and Disability In the Pacific, a paper session organized for the annual ASAO meetings, New Orleans, LA., February.

Gartner, A. and T. Joe (eds.)

1987 Images of the disabled, disabling images. New York, NY: Praeger.

Murphey, R. F.

1987 The Body Silent. New York, NY: W.W. Norton.

Rengiil, Y. K. and J. E. Jarrow

1992 Culture and Disability In Palau, Paper presentation at Fitzgerald and Armstrong (organizers) session on Culture and Disability In The Pacific.

Shryock, H.S., J.S. Siegel, and Associates

1976 The Methods and Materials of Demography. New York, NY: Academic Press.

World Health Organization (WHO)

1980 International Classification of Impairments, Disabilities, and Handicaps. Geneva: WHO.

Brass, William

1975 Methods for Estimating Fertility and Mortality from Limited and Defective Data. Chapel Hill: International Program of Laboratories for Population Statistics, University of North Carolina.

Coale, Ansley J. and Paul Demeny

1966 Regional Model Life Tables and Stable Populations. Princeton: Princeton University Press.

Coale, Ansley J. and T. James Trussel

1974 Model Fertility Schedules: Variations in the age structure of childbearing in human populations. Population Index 40:185‑258.

1975 Erratum. Population Index 41:572.

1978 Technical Note: Finding the two parameters that specify a model schedule of marital fertility.Population Index 44:203‑13.

Cho, Lee‑Jay

1973 The own‑children approach to fertility estimation: An elaboration. In International Population Conference, Liege, 1973, Vol. 2:263‑78. Liege: International Union for the Scientific Study of Population.

Cho, Lee‑Jay, Robert Retherford, and Minja Kim Choe

1986 The Own‑Children Method of Fertility Estimation. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press.

Guam Health Planning and Development Agency

1985 Guam Health Plan: 1985‑1990.

1987 Long‑Term Care on Guam, Technical Report 87‑001.

Haddock, Robert L.

1973 A History of Health on Guam. Cruz Publications, Agana, Guam.

Hajnal, John

1953 "Age at Marriage and Proportions Marrying." Population Studies (London) 7(2):111‑136, November.

Henry, Louis

1961 Some data on natural fertility. Eugenics Quarterly 8:81‑91.

Jongstra, Eduard

1985 Demography on Guam: From Data to Information. Unpublished Master's Thesis, State University of Groningen, The Netherlands.

Levin, Michael J. and Robert D. Retherford

1986 Recent Fertility Trends in the South Pacific. Honolulu: East‑West Population Institute, East‑West Center. No. 101, (August).

Midkiff, Ann A. and Minja Kim Choe

1978 OWCH3: A Program to Compute Estimates of Age‑Specific Birth Rates in the Recent Past from Own‑Children Tables. Honolulu: East‑West Population Institute, East‑West Center. Photocopy.